Chapter 51

@A318/A319/A320/A321
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
CHAPTER 51 - STANDARDS PRACTICES AND STRUCTURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
CHAPTER 51
51-00-00 STANDARDS PRACTICES AND STRUCTURES - GENERAL
51-00-00 Descriptions
51-00-00-001-A General
51-00-00-002-A Nondestructive Testing Methods
51-00-00-003-A Qualifications of Operators
51-00-00-004-A Safety Precautions
51-00-00-009-A
51-00-00-013-A Aircraft Data and Breakdown
51-00-00-014-A Station Reference Data
51-00-00-015-A Zonings
51-00-00-017-A Abbreviations
51-10-00 COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT - GENERAL

51-10-00-001-A General
51-10-00-002-A Preferred Inspection
51-10-00-01 Procedures
51-10-00-250-801-A-01 Coating Thickness Measurement
51-10-01 ROTATING PROBE TESTING - GENERAL
51-10-01-001-A General
51-10-01-250-801-A-01 Rotating Probe Testing - General - PROCEDURE A
51-10-01-250-802-A-01 Rotating Probe Testing - General - PROCEDURE B
51-10-02 INSPECTION TO VERIFY THE REMOVAL OF CORROSION
51-10-02-001-A General
51-10-02-250-801-A-01 Inspection to Verify the Complete Removal of Corrosion from Aluminum Alloy
Materials
51-10-02-220-801-A-01 Inspection to Verify the Complete Removal of Corrosion from all Metallic
Materials
51-10-03 INSPECTION OF CFRP AND GFRP COMPOSITE COMPONENTS -
HONEYCOMB SANDWICH PARTS - GENERAL
51-10-03-001-A General
T.O.C. Page 1
Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-10-03-003-A Alternative Inspection
51-10-03-280-801-A-01 Inspection of CFRP and GFRP Composite Components - Honeycomb
Sandwich Parts - General
51-10-04 MEASUREMENT OF REMAINING STRUCTURE THICKNESS - GENERAL
51-10-04-001-A General
51-10-04-270-801-A-01 Measurement of Remaining Thickness in Large Blended Out Areas
51-10-04-220-801-A-01 Measurement of Remaining Thickness in Small Blended Out Areas
51-10-06 ACCIDENTAL DAMAGE - GENERAL NDT PROCEDURE FOR THE
INSPECTION OF CARBON FIBER MONOLITHIC STRUCTURE
51-10-06-001-A General
51-10-06-270-801-A-01 Accidental Damage - General NDT Procedure for the Inspection of Carbon
Fiber Monolithic Structure
51-10-07 EVALUATION OF CRACK LENGTH
51-10-07-001-A General
51-10-07-270-801-A-01 Ultrasonic Evaluation of Crack Length
51-10-07-250-801-A-01 Eddy Current Evaluation of Surface Breaking Cracks
51-10-08 HFEC INSPECTION FOR SURFACE BREACKING CRACKS IN ALUMINUM OR
TITANIUM ALLOY MATERIALS
51-10-08-003-A General
51-10-08-250-802-A-01 HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Aluminum or Titanium Alloy
Materials (Using Meter Needle Instrument) - Procedure A
51-10-08-250-803-A-01 HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Aluminum Alloy Materials
(Using Impedance Plane Instruments) - Procedure B
51-10-09 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR DETAILED VISUAL INSPECTION FOR
CARBON FIBRE STRUCTURES
51-10-09-001-A General
51-10-09-220-801-A-01 General Procedure for Detailed Visual Inspection for Carbon Fibre Structures
51-10-10 X-RAY INSPECTION TO DETECT WATER IN HONEYCOMB SANDWICH
PARTS
T.O.C. Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-10-10-001-A General
51-10-10-260-801-A-01 X-RAY Inspection to detect Water in Honeycomb Sandwich Parts
51-10-11 INSPECTION FOR CRACKS IN MULTI- LAYERED JOINT AL-ALLOY
STRUCTURES
51-10-11-001-A General
51-10-11-250-801-A-01 Inspection for Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Al-Alloy Structures
51-10-12 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR THE DETECTION OF HEAT DAMAGE USING
EDDY CURRENT CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT ON AL
51-10-12-001-A General
51-10-12-250-801-A-01 Procedure for the Detection of Heat Damage using Eddy Current
Conductivity Measurement on Aluminum Alloys
51-10-13 INSPECTION FOR CRACKS IN MULTI- LAYERED JOINT STRUCTURES
51-10-13-001-A General
51-10-13-270-801-A-01 Inspection for Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Structures
51-10-14 INSPECTION OF AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE MADE OF NON-POROUS
MATERIALS
51-10-14-001-A General
51-10-14-230-801-A-01 Inspection of Aircraft Structure made of Non-Porous Materials
51-10-15 INSPECTION FOR SHALLOW CRACKS IN MULTI-LAYERED JOINT
STRUCTURES
51-10-15-001-A General
51-10-15-270-801-A-01 Inspection for Shallow Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Structures
51-10-16 INSPECTION FOR SUB-SURFACE CRACKS IN AL-ALLOY STRUCTURE
51-10-16-001-A General
51-10-16-250-801-A-01 Inspection for Sub-Surface Cracks in Al-Alloy Structure - Procedure A
T.O.C. Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-10-16-250-802-A-01 Inspection for Sub-Surface Cracks in Al-Alloy Structure - PROCEDURE B
51-10-17 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR THE ASSESMENT OF HEAT TREATMENT
USING EDDY CURRENT CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT ON
51-10-17-001-A General
51-10-17-250-801-A-01 Procedure for Assessment Heat Treatment using Eddy Current Conductivity
Measurement on Aluminum Alloys
51-10-18 ROTATING PROBE TESTING OF FLAT BOTTOM HOLES IN ALUMINUM
ALLOYS MATERIALS
51-10-18-001-A General
51-10-18-250-801-A-01 Rotating Probe Testing of Flat Bottom Holes in Aluminum Alloys Materials
51-10-19 INSPECTION OF FRP COMPOSITE COMPONENTS HONEYCOMB
SANDWICH PARTSWITH THE WOODPECKER WP632
51-10-19-001-A General
51-10-19-280-801-A-01 Inspection of FRP Composite Components Honeycomb Sandwich Parts with
the WOODPECKER WP632
51-10-20 HFEC INSPECTION FOR SURFACE BREAKING CRACKS IN NON PLATED
FERROMAGNETIC STEEL ALLOY MATERIALS
51-10-20-001-A General
51-10-20-250-801-A-01 HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Non Plated Ferromagnetic
Steel Alloy Materials (Impedance Plane Display)
51-10-21 HFEC INSPECTION FOR SURFACE BREAKING CRACKS IN CADMIUM
PLATED FERROMAGNETIC STEEL ALLOY MATERIALS
51-10-21-001-A General
51-10-21-250-801-A-01 HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Cadmium Plated
Ferromagnetic Steel Alloy Materials (Impedance Plane Display)
51-10-24 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES WITH
PARALLEL FRP SURFACES
51-10-24-001-A General
T.O.C. Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-10-24-270-801-A-01 General Procedure for Ultrasonic Inspection of Honeycomb Structures with
Parallel FRP Surfaces
51-10-25 THERMOGRAPHY INSPECTION TO DETECT TRAPPED WATER IN
HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES MOUNTED VERTICALLY
51-10-25-001-A General
51-10-25-290-801-A-01 General Procedure for Thermography Inspection to detect Trapped Water in
Honeycomb Structures mounted Vertically for Ambient Temperatures > 35˚
C (95˚ F) - Procedure A
51-10-25-290-802-A-01 General Procedure for Thermography Inspection to detect Trapped Water in
Honeycomb Structures mounted Vertically for Ambient Temperatures between
10˚ C and 35˚ C (50˚ F and 95˚ F) - Procedure B
51-10-26 INSPECTION OF HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES (MOSTLY WITH PARALLEL
SKINS OF LIMITED THICKNESS) WITH ELCH
51-10-26-001-A General
51-10-26-220-801-A-01 Inspection of Honeycomb Structures (Mostly with Parallel Skins of Limited
Thickness) with the ELCH
51-10-27 VISUAL ENDOSCOPE INSPECTION FOR INTERNAL HONEYCOMB CORE
SANDWICH STRUCTURES
51-10-27-001-A General
51-10-27-220-801-A-01 Visual Endoscope Inspection for internal Honeycomb Core Sandwich
Structures
51-10-28 GENERAL PROCEDURE TO DETECT DAMAGE IN HONEYCOMB CORE
SANDWICH STRUCTURES BY APPLYING VACUUM
51-10-28-001-A General
51-10-28-220-801-A-01 General Procedure to detect Damage in Honeycomb Core Sandwich
Structures by Applying Vacuum
51-10-90 THERMOGRAPHY - GENERAL
51-10-90-001-A Description
51-10-90-002-A Principles of the Thermography
51-10-90-003-A Thermal Classification
T.O.C. Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-10-90-004-A Thermal Excitation Methods
51-10-90-005-A Sensitivity of the Technique
51-10-90-006-A Thermographic Camera Systems
51-10-90-007-A Thermographic Camera
51-10-90-008-A Reference Block
51-10-90-009-A Testing Procedures
51-10-90-010-A Thermographic Application
51-20-00 X-RAY RADIOGRAPHY - GENERAL

51-20-00-001-A General
51-20-00-002-A Principle of X-Rays
51-20-00-003-A Generation of X-Rays
51-20-00-004-A Properties of X-Rays
51-20-00-005-A Film Comparison
51-20-00-006-A X-Ray Procedure
51-20-00-007-A Processing of X-Ray Films
51-20-00-008-A Viewing and Interpretation of Radiographs
51-21-00 X-RAY EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-21-00-001-A X-Ray Equipment Specifications
51-21-01 X-RAY EQUIPMENT
51-21-01-001-A X-Ray Equipment
51-40-00 ULTRASONIC TESTING - GENERAL

51-40-00-001-A General
51-40-00-002-A Principle of Operation
51-40-00-003-A System Function
51-40-00-004-A Ultrasonic Recordings
51-40-00-005-A Modes of Vibration
51-40-00-006-A Reflection and Transmission Energy at Interfaces
51-40-00-007-A Refraction and Mode Conversion
51-40-00-008-A Detection Sensitivity of the Technique
51-40-00-009-A Reference Blocks (Calibration Blocks)
51-40-00-010-A Testing Procedures
51-40-00-011-A Testing Methods
51-41-00 ULTRASONIC - INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS

T.O.C. Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-41-00-001-A Ultrasonic - Instrument Specifications
51-41-01 ULTRASONIC - INSTRUMENTS
51-41-01-001-A Ultrasonic - Instruments
51-42-00 ULTRASONIC - SEARCH UNIT SPECIFICATION

51-42-00-001-A ULTRASONIC - SEARCH UNIT SPECIFICATION
51-42-01 ULTRASONIC - STANDARD SEARCH UNITS
51-42-01-001-A Ultrasonic - Standard Search Units
51-43-00 ULTRASONIC - CALIBRATION/REFERENCE BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS

51-43-00-001-A ULTRASONIC - CALIBRATION/REFERENCE BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS
51-50-00 RESONANCE FREQUENCY - GENERAL

51-50-00-001-A Resonance Frequency Testing - General
51-50-01 RESONANCE FREQUENCY - GENERAL WOODPECKER WP632 -
SPECIFICATION
51-50-01-001-A General
51-50-01-002-A Basic Specification
51-50-01-003-A The Woodpecker WP632
51-50-01-004-A Operating Principle
51-50-01-005-A Operating and Handling
51-50-01-006-A Inspection
51-60-00 EDDY CURRENT TESTING - GENERAL

51-60-00-001-A General
51-60-00-002-A Basic Principles
51-60-00-003-A Production of Eddy Currents for Practical Applications
51-60-00-004-A Eddy Current Equipment
51-60-00-005-A Eddy Current Probes
51-60-00-006-A Calibration Block
51-60-00-007-A Applications of Eddy Current Equipment
51-61-00 EDDY CURRENT - INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-61-00-001-A Eddy Current - Instrument Specifications
T.O.C. Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-61-01 EDDY CURRENT - HIGH FREQUENCY INSTRUMENTS
51-61-01-001-A Eddy Current - High Frequency Instruments
51-61-02 EDDY CURRENT - LOW FREQUENCY INSTRUMENTS
51-61-02-001-A Eddy Current - Low Frequency Instruments
51-61-03 EDDY CURRENT - ROTATING PROBE INSTRUMENTS
51-61-03-001-A Eddy Current - Rotating Probe Instruments
51-61-04 EDDY CURRENT - COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT INSTRUMENTS
51-61-04-001-A Eddy Current - Coating Thickness Measurement Instruments
51-62-00 EDDY CURRENT - PROBE SPECIFICATION

51-62-00-001-A Eddy Current - Probe Specification
51-62-01 EDDY CURRENT - STANDARD HIGH FREQUENCY PROBES
51-62-01-001-A Eddy Current - Standard High Frequency Probes
51-62-02 EDDY CURRENT - STANDARD ROTATING PROBES FOR PARALLEL BORE
HOLE INSPECTION
51-62-02-001-A Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for Parallel Bore Hole Inspection
51-62-03 EDDY CURRENT - STANDARD ROTATING PROBES FOR THE INSPECTION
OF COUNTERSINKS
51-62-03-001-A Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for the Inspection of Countersinks
51-62-04 EDDY CURRENT - STANDARD ROTATING PROBES FOR FLAT BOTTOM
HOLE INSPECTION
51-62-04-001-A Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for Flat Bottom Hole Inspection
51-63-00 EDDY CURRENT - CALIBRATION/ REFERENCE BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS

INSPECTION
51-63-00-001-A Eddy Current - Calibration/Reference Block Specifications
51-63-01 CALIBRATION BLOCK
51-63-01-001-A Calibration Block
51-63-03 CALIBRATION BLOCK SET PN 99D57004000000
51-63-03-001-A Calibration Block Set PN 99D57004000000
51-63-04 CALIBRATION BLOCK PN 99A53003001000
T.O.C. Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-63-04-001-A Calibration Block PN 99A53003001000
51-63-05 CALIBRATION BLOCK PN 99A53003001001
51-63-05-001-A Calibration Block PN 99A53003001001
51-63-06 SPLITTED CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK
51-63-06-001-A Split Conical Calibration Block
51-70-00 MAGNETIC PARTICLE - GENERAL

51-70-00-001-A General
51-70-00-002-A Related Documents
51-70-00-003-A Basic Principles of Magnetic Particle Inspections
51-70-00-004-A Definitions
51-70-00-005-A Surface Preparation
51-70-00-006-A Recommended Magnetization Values
51-70-00-007-A Indicator Media (Magnetic Particles)
51-70-00-008-A Demagnetization
51-70-00-009-A Auxiliary Equipment
51-70-00-010-A Performances Checks
51-71-00 MAGNETIC PARTICLE - EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-71-00-001-A Magnetic Particle - Equipment Specifications
51-80-00 LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING - GENERAL

51-80-00-001-A General
51-80-00-002-A Related Documents
51-80-00-003-A Basic Principles of Penetrant Inspections
51-80-00-004-A Penetrant Systems
51-80-00-005-A Surfaces Preparation
51-80-00-006-A Penetrant Application
51-80-00-007-A Penetrant Excess Removal
51-80-00-008-A Developer Application
51-80-00-009-A Component Examination
51-80-00-010-A Discontinuity Interpretation
51-80-00-011-A Final NDT Requirement
51-81-00 LIQUID PENETRANT - SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

51-81-00-001-A Liquid Penetrant - System Specification
T.O.C. Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
REFERENCE C SUBJECT
51-90-00 VISUAL TESTING - GENERAL

51-90-00-001-A General
51-90-00-002-A Visual Procedures
51-90-00-003-A Visual Inspection Aids
T.O.C. Page 10
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
CHAPTER 51 - STANDARDS PRACTICES AND STRUCTURES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE CONTENT
REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE
CHAPTER 51 R Feb 01/09

51-00 Nov 01/08
51-00-00 Nov 01/08
51-00-00 R Feb 01/09
51-00-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-00-00-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 Nov 01/08
51-00-00-003-A Nov 01/08
51-00-00-004-A Nov 01/08
51-00-00-009-A D Feb 01/09
51-00-00-013-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-033-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-034-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-035-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-036-A Nov 01/08
51-00-00-014-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-037-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-00-00-991-038-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-039-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-040-A Nov 01/08
51-00-00-015-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-041-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-042-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-043-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-044-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-00-00-991-045-A Nov 01/08
51-00-00-017-A N Feb 01/09
51-10 R Feb 01/09

51-10-00 Nov 01/08
51-10-00 Nov 01/08
51-10-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-00-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-00-01 Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-00-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-00-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-00-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-00-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01 Nov 01/08

51-10-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-01-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-01-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-01-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-008-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-009-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-01-991-010-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-250-802-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-01-251-005-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-252-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-253-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-01-971-002-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-01-991-012-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02 Nov 01/08

51-10-02 Nov 01/08
51-10-02-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-02-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-02-251-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-220-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-02-221-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-222-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-02-971-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-03 Nov 01/08

51-10-03 Nov 01/08
51-10-03-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-03-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-03-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-03-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-03-280-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-03-281-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-03-283-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-03-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-03-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-03-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-03-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-03-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-03-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-03-991-006-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-03-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04 Nov 01/08

51-10-04 Nov 01/08
51-10-04-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-04-270-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-04-271-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-272-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-273-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-943-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-04-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-04-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-04-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-04-991-004-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-220-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-04-221-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-222-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-04-971-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-04-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-04-991-006-A Nov 01/08
51-10-06 Nov 01/08

51-10-06 Nov 01/08
51-10-06-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-06-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-06-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-06-270-801-A-01 R Feb 01/09
51-10-06-271-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-06-272-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-06-273-001-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-06-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-06-943-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-008-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-06-991-009-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07 Nov 01/08

51-10-07 Nov 01/08
51-10-07-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-07-270-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-07-271-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-272-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-273-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-943-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-07-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-07-991-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-250-801-A-01 R Feb 01/09
51-10-07-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-07-253-001-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-07-971-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-07-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-07-991-005-A Nov 01/08
51-10-08 Nov 01/08

51-10-08 Nov 01/08
51-10-08-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-08-004-A R Feb 01/09
51-10-08-01 R Feb 01/09
51-10-08-250-802-A-01 R Feb 01/09
51-10-08-251-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-08-252-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-08-253-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-08-971-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-08-991-022-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-022-A SHEET 01 N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-08-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-08-991-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-08-991-008-A Nov 01/08
51-10-08-250-803-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-08-251-003-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-08-252-003-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-08-253-003-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-08-971-003-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-009-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-010-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-011-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-012-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-08-991-013-A N Feb 01/09
L.E.C. Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-08-991-014-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-09 Nov 01/08

51-10-09 Nov 01/08
51-10-09-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-09-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-09-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-09-220-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-09-221-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-09-222-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-09-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-09-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-09-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-09-991-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10 Nov 01/08

51-10-10 Nov 01/08
51-10-10-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-10-260-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-10-261-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10-262-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10-263-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-10-943-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-10-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-10-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-10-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-10-991-004-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-11 Nov 01/08

51-10-11 Nov 01/08
51-10-11-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-11-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-11-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-11-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-11-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-11-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-11-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-11-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-008-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-009-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-010-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-011-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-11-991-012-A Nov 01/08
51-10-12 Nov 01/08

51-10-12 Nov 01/08
51-10-12-001-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-12-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-12-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-12-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-12-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-12-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-12-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-12-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-12-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13 Nov 01/08

51-10-13 Nov 01/08
51-10-13-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-13-270-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-13-271-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13-272-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13-273-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-13-943-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-13-991-008-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 10
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-14 Nov 01/08
51-10-14 Nov 01/08
51-10-14-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-14-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-14-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-14-230-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-14-231-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-14-232-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-14-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-14-943-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-14-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15 Nov 01/08

51-10-15 Nov 01/08
51-10-15-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-15-270-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-15-271-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15-272-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15-273-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-15-971-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-15-991-008-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-16 Nov 01/08
51-10-16 Nov 01/08
51-10-16-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-16-250-801-A-01 R Feb 01/09
51-10-16-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-252-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-253-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-002-A R Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-16-991-002-A SHEET 01 R Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-16-991-003-A R Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-16-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-250-802-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-16-251-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-252-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-253-004-A Nov 01/08
51-10-16-971-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-008-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-009-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-010-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-011-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-012-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-16-991-013-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-17 Nov 01/08
51-10-17 Nov 01/08
51-10-17-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-17-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-17-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-17-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-17-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-17-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-17-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-17-971-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-18 Nov 01/08

51-10-18 Nov 01/08
51-10-18-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-18-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-18-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-18-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-18-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-18-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-18-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-18-971-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-18-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-18-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-18-991-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19 Nov 01/08

51-10-19 Nov 01/08
51-10-19-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-19-280-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-19-281-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19-282-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19-283-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-19-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-19-991-001-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 13
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-19-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-19-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-19-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-19-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-19-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-19-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-10-20 Nov 01/08

51-10-20 Nov 01/08
51-10-20-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-20-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-20-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-20-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-20-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-20-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-20-253-001-A R Feb 01/09
51-10-20-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-20-991-001-A R Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-20-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-20-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-20-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-20-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-20-991-006-A Nov 01/08
51-10-21 Nov 01/08

51-10-21 Nov 01/08
51-10-21-001-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 14
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-10-21-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-21-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-21-250-801-A-01 Nov 01/08
51-10-21-251-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-21-252-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-21-253-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-21-971-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-21-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-21-991-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-21-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-21-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-21-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-21-991-006-A Nov 01/08
51-10-24 N Feb 01/09

51-10-24 N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-270-801-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-271-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-272-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-273-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-971-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-24-943-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-002-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-003-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-004-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-005-A N Feb 01/09
L.E.C. Page 15
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-24-991-006-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-007-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-008-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-009-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-010-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-011-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-012-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-013-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-015-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-24-991-016-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25 N Feb 01/09

51-10-25 N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-003-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-290-801-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-291-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-292-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-293-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-971-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-943-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-002-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-003-A N Feb 01/09
L.E.C. Page 16
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-25-991-004-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-005-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-006-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-290-802-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-291-003-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-292-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-293-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-971-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-25-943-002-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-007-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-008-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-009-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-010-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-011-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-012-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-25-991-013-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26 N Feb 01/09

51-10-26 N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-003-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-220-801-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-221-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-224-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-222-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-26-971-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-26-991-001-A N Feb 01/09
L.E.C. Page 17
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-26-991-002-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-26-991-003-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-26-991-004-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-26-991-005-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-26-991-006-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-27 N Feb 01/09

51-10-27 N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-220-801-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-221-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-222-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-27-971-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-27-991-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-27-991-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-28 N Feb 01/09

51-10-28 N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-002-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-220-801-A-01 N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-221-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-224-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-222-001-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-28-971-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-28-991-001-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-28-991-002-A N Feb 01/09
Figure 51-10-28-991-003-A N Feb 01/09
L.E.C. Page 18
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-10-28-991-004-A N Feb 01/09
51-10-90 Nov 01/08

51-10-90 Nov 01/08
51-10-90-001-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-90-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-90-991-002-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-003-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-004-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-90-991-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-90-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-90-991-005-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-006-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-10-90-991-006-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-008-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-009-A Nov 01/08
51-10-90-010-A Nov 01/08
51-20 Nov 01/08

51-20-00 Nov 01/08
51-20-00 Nov 01/08
51-20-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-20-00-002-A Nov 01/08
51-20-00-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-20-00-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-20-00-991-002-A Nov 01/08
51-20-00-004-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 19
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-20-00-005-A Nov 01/08
51-20-00-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-20-00-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-20-00-991-005-A Nov 01/08
51-20-00-007-A Nov 01/08
51-20-00-008-A Nov 01/08
51-21 Nov 01/08

51-21-00 Nov 01/08
51-21-00 Nov 01/08
51-21-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-21-01 Nov 01/08

51-21-01 Nov 01/08
51-21-01-001-A Nov 01/08
51-40 Nov 01/08

51-40-00 Nov 01/08
51-40-00 Nov 01/08
51-40-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-003-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-002-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-008-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 20
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-40-00-991-009-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-010-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-031-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-032-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-011-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-008-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-009-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-012-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-013-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-010-A Nov 01/08
51-40-00-011-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-014-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-015-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-016-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-017-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-018-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-019-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-020-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-021-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-022-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-023-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 21
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-40-00-991-024-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-025-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-027-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-028-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-029-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-030-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-033-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-40-00-991-034-A Nov 01/08
51-41 Nov 01/08

51-41-00 Nov 01/08
51-41-00 Nov 01/08
51-41-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-41-01 Nov 01/08

51-41-01 Nov 01/08
51-41-01-001-A Nov 01/08
51-42 Nov 01/08

51-42-00 Nov 01/08
51-42-00 Nov 01/08
51-42-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-42-01 Nov 01/08

51-42-01 Nov 01/08
51-42-01-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-42-01-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-43 Nov 01/08

51-43-00 Nov 01/08
51-43-00 Nov 01/08
51-43-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-44 D Feb 01/09
L.E.C. Page 22
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-50 Nov 01/08
51-50-00 Nov 01/08
51-50-00 Nov 01/08
51-50-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-50-01 Nov 01/08

51-50-01 Nov 01/08
51-50-01-001-A Nov 01/08
51-50-01-002-A Nov 01/08
51-50-01-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-50-01-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-50-01-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-50-01-004-A Nov 01/08
51-50-01-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-50-01-991-005-A Nov 01/08
51-50-01-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-50-01-991-006-A Nov 01/08
51-60 Nov 01/08

51-60-00 Nov 01/08
51-60-00 Nov 01/08
51-60-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-60-00-002-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-006-A Nov 01/08
51-60-00-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-60-00-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-008-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-009-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 23
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

Figure 51-60-00-991-010-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-011-A Nov 01/08
51-60-00-005-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-013-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-014-A Nov 01/08
51-60-00-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-015-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-016-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-017-A Nov 01/08
51-60-00-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-018-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-019-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-020-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-60-00-991-021-A Nov 01/08
51-61 Nov 01/08

51-61-00 Nov 01/08
51-61-00 Nov 01/08
51-61-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-61-01 Nov 01/08

51-61-01 Nov 01/08
51-61-01-001-A Nov 01/08
51-61-02 Nov 01/08

51-61-02 Nov 01/08
51-61-02-001-A Nov 01/08
51-61-03 Nov 01/08

51-61-03 Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 24
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-61-03-001-A Nov 01/08
51-61-04 Nov 01/08

51-61-04 Nov 01/08
51-61-04-001-A Nov 01/08
51-62 Nov 01/08

51-62-00 Nov 01/08
51-62-00 Nov 01/08
51-62-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-62-01 Nov 01/08

51-62-01 Nov 01/08
51-62-01-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-62-01-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-62-02 Nov 01/08

51-62-02 Nov 01/08
51-62-02-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-62-02-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-62-03 Nov 01/08

51-62-03 Nov 01/08
51-62-03-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-62-03-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-62-04 Nov 01/08

51-62-04 Nov 01/08
51-62-04-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-62-04-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-63 Nov 01/08

51-63-00 Nov 01/08
51-63-00 Nov 01/08
51-63-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-63-01 Nov 01/08

51-63-01 Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 25
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-63-01-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-63-01-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-63-03 Nov 01/08

51-63-03 Nov 01/08
51-63-03-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-63-03-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-63-04 Nov 01/08

51-63-04 Nov 01/08
51-63-04-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-63-04-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-63-05 Nov 01/08

51-63-05 Nov 01/08
51-63-05-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-63-05-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-63-05-991-002-A Nov 01/08
51-63-06 Nov 01/08

51-63-06 Nov 01/08
51-63-06-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-63-06-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-70 Nov 01/08

51-70-00 Nov 01/08
51-70-00 Nov 01/08
51-70-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-002-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-002-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 26
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-70-00-005-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-006-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-007-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-008-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-003-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-009-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-004-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-007-A Nov 01/08
51-70-00-010-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-006-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-70-00-991-009-A Nov 01/08
51-71 Nov 01/08

51-71-00 Nov 01/08
51-71-00 Nov 01/08
51-71-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-80 Nov 01/08

51-80-00 Nov 01/08
51-80-00 Nov 01/08
51-80-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-002-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-003-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-004-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-005-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-006-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-007-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-80-00-991-001-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-008-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-009-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-010-A Nov 01/08
51-80-00-011-A Nov 01/08
51-81 Nov 01/08

51-81-00 Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 27
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321

51-81-00 Nov 01/08
51-81-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-90 Nov 01/08

51-90-00 Nov 01/08
51-90-00 Nov 01/08
51-90-00-001-A Nov 01/08
51-90-00-002-A Nov 01/08
51-90-00-003-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-90-00-991-001-A Nov 01/08
Figure 51-90-00-991-002-A Nov 01/08
L.E.C. Page 28
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This section contains a summary concerning nondestructive testing methods, symbols of these methods,
auxiliary materials, metallic materials and stations, zonings, ribs and frame information for the entire airframe.
B. More detailed information and instructions concerning the various testing methods are given in the relevant
Tasks of Chapter 51 thru 57.
C. The structural repair manual for the aircraft being inspected should be used in conjunction with the
nondestructive testing manual for identification of materials and structural items.
Page 1
51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Nondestructive Testing Methods
A. Nondestructive testing methods, their application, advantages and disadvantages are noted in TABLE 1. The
symbols for these methods are given in FIGURE 51-00-00-991-001-A.
B. A more detailed explanation of each method is included in the following section:
(1) See 51-10-90 for THERMOGRAPHY
(2) See 51-20-00 for X-RAY
(3) See 51-40-00 for ULTRASONIC
(4) See for 51-50-00 RESONANCE FREQUENCY
(5) See for 51-60-00 EDDY CURRENT
(6) See for 51-70-00 MAGNETIC PARTICLE
(7) See for 51-80-00 LIQUID PENETRANT
(8) See 51-90-00 for VISUAL
C. The description of the individual methods are not difficult to understand, except for the abbreviations in the
table of X-RAY. The abbreviations under SETTINGS have the following meanings:
- kV is the X-Ray voltage in kilovolts
- mAs is the product obtained when the current in mA is multiplied together with the exposure duration in
seconds.
- SFD/cm means the source-to-film distance in centimeters.
Type of Method Employed Application Advantages Disadvantages

THERMOGRAPHY Detection of water in Imaging capabilities, non Needs loading with
honeycomb sandwich. contact, fast, good for e.g.hot air fan, heating
Detection of corrosion. detecting of water in blanket, flash lamps etc.
Detection of disbonding. sandwich. Surface protection
Detection of delamination scheme/paint can
influence the applicability.
Not completely repeatable
in short time (thermal
history). Limited
penetration depth. Partly
bulky heat loading
equipment (blanket, flash
system etc.)
X-RAY Detection of internal Eliminates many Radiation hazard. Trained
flows and discontinuities disassembly requirements. operators and film
such as cracks, corrosion, Has high sensitivity and processing equipment
inclusion and thickness provides a permanent required. Crack nearly
variations. record on film. parallel to X-ray beam to
be detected. Electrical
source required. Special
equipment required to
position X-ray tube and
film.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Type of Method Employed Application Advantages Disadvantages

ULTRASONIC Detection of surface and Fast, dependable, is easy Trained operator
sub-surface to operate. Results are required. Electrical source
discontinuities, cracks and immediately known. required. Crack plane
flaws in most metals by Highly accurate, high orientation must be
pulse echo techniques. sensitivity and portable. known to select wave
mode to be used.
Reference Blocks required
to establish instrument
sensitivity.
RESONANCE Detection of Can be accomplished Loses sensitivity with
FREQUENCY delamination, debonding, from one surface. Direct increasing material
voids and crushed core in reading. Does not require thickness. Electrical
composite and paint removal or special source required.
honeycomb materials. surface preparation.
EDDY CURRENT Detection of surface Useful for checking Sensitive to combinations
discontinuities in metallic attachment holes for and variations in material.
surfaces, crack, pits cracks not detectable by Special probes required
intergranular corrosion, visual or penetrant for each application.
and heat treat condition. methods. Fast, sensitive,
Conductivity portable.
measurement for
determining fire damaged
area.
MAGNETIC PARTICLE Detection of surface or Simple in principle, easy, Parts must be cleaned
near surface portable, fast. Method is before and demagnetized
discontinuities in positive. after check. Magnetic flux
ferromagnetic materials of must be normal to plane
any shape or heat treat of defect to yield
condition. indication.
LIQUID PENETRANT Detection of surface Simple to use, accurate,
cracks in all metals, fast. Easy to interpret.
castings, forgings and
machined parts.
VISUAL Detection of surface or Simple to use in areas Reliability depends upon
discontinuities or where other methods are the ability and experience
structural damage in all impractical, Optical aids of the user. Accessibility
materials. further enhance this required for direct
method. visibility or optical
equipment.
Nondestructive Testing Methods
c
TABLE 1
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
X−RAY RESONANCE
FREQUENCY
ULTRASONIC MAGNETIC
PARTICLE
EDDY VISUAL
CURRENT
PENETRANT THERMOGRAPHY
SEARCH UNIT
PROBE SCAN SCAN / SWIVEL
MOVEMENT MOVEMENT
L_NT_510000_1_0010101_01_01
Figure 51-00-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 - NDT Page 4

Method and Scan Symbols 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Qualifications of Operators
A. Interpretations of radiographs and the readout of other nondestructive testing equipment, such as ultrasonic
and eddy current, require much skill, and must be performed only by trained and experienced personnel. The
operator must have training in both the basic theory and theoretical application of the NDT methods he is
using and have a good working knowledge of aircraft structure. He also must have a good understanding of
the failure characteristics of the various metals and types of parts used in aircraft structure, and be aware of
limitations and capabilities of the nondestructive testing methods available to him.
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Safety Precautions
A. Before beginning a test which requires the use of electrically-powered test equipment, ensure that the test is
not carried out in the vicinity of combustible gases or fluids. An effective ground connection must be made
for test equipment which is powered by alternating current and has a separated ground connection.
B. The official protection and safety regulations must be observed when operating X-Ray equipment.
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
DELETED
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Aircraft Data and Breakdown
A. This section gives information about Aircraft data and Breakdown.
B. The information/diagrams in this section are divided as follows:
- Structure Breakdown (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-033-A)
- Major Aircraft Dimensions (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-034-A)
- Aircraft Section Numbers (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-035-A)
- Fuselage Reference Axis (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-036-A)
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CONE/REAR
FUSELAGE
RUDDER
VERTICAL
REAR
STABILIZER
FUSELAGE
CENTER
FUSELAGE
ELEVATOR
FR47/54
FR77
HORIZONTAL
FR70 STABILIZER
FR64
CENTER WING
FR24
FORWARD FR35
FUSELAGE PYLON OUTER WING
NACELLE
NOSE FORWARD
FUSELAGE
L_NT_510000_1_0330101_01_00
Figure 51-00-00-991-033-A SHEET 01 - Page 9

Structure Breakdown for A318 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CONE/REAR
FUSELAGE
RUDDER
REAR
FUSELAGE VERTICAL
STABILIZER
CENTER
ELEVATOR
FUSELAGE
FR47/51
FR77
HORIZONTAL
FR70 STABILIZER
FR64
CENTER WING
FR24
WING TIP
FR32 /35
FORWARD PYLON
FUSELAGE OUTER WING
NACELLE
NOSE FORWARD
FUSELAGE
L_NT_510000_1_0330102_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CONE/REAR
FUSELAGE
RUDDER
REAR VERTICAL
FUSELAGE STABILIZER
ELEVATOR
CENTER
FUSELAGE
FR47
FR77
HORIZONTAL
FR70 STABILIZER
FR64
CENTER WING
FORWARD WING TIP

FUSELAGE FR35
PYLON OUTER WING
FR24 NACELLE
NOSE FORWARD
FUSELAGE
L_NT_510000_1_0330103_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CONE/REAR
FUSELAGE
RUDDER
REAR VERTICAL
FUSELAGE STABILIZER
ELEVATOR
CENTER
FUSELAGE
FR76
FR47
HORIZONTAL
FR70 STABILIZER
FR64
CENTER WING
WING TIP
FR35.8
PYLON OUTER WING
FR24 NACELLE
FORWARD
FUSELAGE
NOSE FORWARD
FUSELAGE
L_NT_510000_1_0330104_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
30960 mm
(1218.90 in)
25463 mm
(1002.48 in)
DATUM LENGTH 24994 mm
(984.02 in)
12505 mm
(492.32 in)
10359 mm
(407.83 in)
FD
STA2753 / FR70
GROUND LINE
5073 mm 10252 mm
(199.72 in) (403.62 in)
31452 mm
(1238.27 in)
AD
33913 mm
(1335.16 in)
12450 mm
(490.16 in)
CFM65−5B 3582 mm
(141.02 in) 240 mm
(9.45 in)
PW 6000 3271 mm
(128.78 in) 6°
R 1975 mm
(77.76 in) 5°
FD
7590 mm R 1926 mm
(298.82 in) (75.83 in)
L_NT_510000_1_0340101_01_00
Figure 51-00-00-991-034-A SHEET 01 - Major Page 13

Aircraft Dimensions for A318 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
33109 mm
(1301.2 in)
27850.8 mm
(1096.49 in)
DATUM LENGTH 27381.2 mm

(1078 in)
11755 mm
11146.5 mm (462.79 in)
(438.84 in)
FD
STA2992 / FR70
GROUND LINE
11040 mm
(434.64 in)
5073 mm
(199.72 in)
33839 mm
(1232.24 in)
AD
33913 mm
(1335.16 in)
12450 mm
(490.16 in)
240 mm
CFM56−5A 2581 mm (9.45 in)
(101.43 in)
6°
R 1975 mm
(77.76 in) 5°
V2500−5A 4260 mm
(167.72 in)
FD
7590 mm R 1926 mm
(298.82 in) (75.83 in)
L_NT_510000_1_0340102_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
36843 mm
(1450.51 in)
31584 mm
(1243.46 in)
DATUM LENGTH 31115 mm
(1225 in)
11755 mm
(462.79 in)
12746.7 mm
(501.84 in) FD
STA3366 / FR70
GROUND LINE
12639.5 mm
(497.62 in)
5073 mm
(199.72 in)
37573.2 mm
(1479.26 in)
AD
33913 mm
01
(1335.16 in)
12450 mm
(490.16 in)
CFM56−5A 2581 mm 240 mm

(101.43 in) (9.45 in)
6°
CFM56−5B 3444 mm R 1975 mm
(77.76 in) 5°
(135.59 in)
FD
V2500−5A 4260 mm
(167.72 in)
01 AFTER MOD 20268 (FENCE − WING TIP)

7590 mm R 1926 mm
34087 mm (1342.01 in)
(298.82 in) (75.83 in)
L_NT_510000_1_0340103_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
43777.2 mm
(1723.5 in) VTXO
DATUM LENGTH 38049.2 mm
(1497.9 in)
1165 mm
(45.87 in)
1975 mm
(77.76 in)
VTZO
FD 11755 mm
(462.8 in)
STA4058 / FR70
GROUND LINE
5037 mm 16905.62 mm
(198.307 in) (665.6 in)
44507.4 mm
(1752.26 in)
17013.91mm
(669.8 in)
33913.16 mm
(1335.16 in)
AD 12450 mm
(490.16 in)
R1975 mm
6° (77.76 in)
240 mm 5°
CFM56−5B 3444 mm (9.45 in)
(135.59 in)
FD
V2500−5A 4260 mm
(167.72 in)
R1926 mm
(77.8 in)
38049.2 mm 7590 mm
(1497.9 in) (298.8 in)
L_NT_510000_1_0340104_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
32
31
SECTION ATA REFERENCE DESIGNATION

11/12 53−10−00 NOSE FORWARD FUSELAGE
19.1
13/14 53−20−00 FORWARD FUSELAGE
18 36 15 53−30−00 CENTER FUSELAGE
16−17 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE
18 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE
16/17
19 53−50−00 CONE/REAR FUSELAGE
19.1 53−50−00 CONE/REAR FUSELAGE
15
19 35 21 57−10−00 CENTER WINGS
22 57−20−00 OUTER WINGS
23 57−40−00 LEADING EDGES
24 57−40−00 LEADING EDGES
13/14 26
25 25 57−70−00 SPOILERS
26 57−52−00 INBOARD FLAP
11/12 27 27 57−53−00 OUTBOARD FLAP
28 57−60−00 AILERONS
29 57−30−00 WING TIP
28
31 55−30−00 VERTICAL STABILIZER
32 55−40−00 RUDDER
41 35 55−10−00 HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
36 55−20−00 ELEVATOR
42 41 54−50−00 PYLONS
23 22 29 42 54−10−00 NACELLE SECTION
24
52 51 32−20−00 NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
51
21 52 32−10−00 MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
L_NT_510000_1_0350101_01_00
Figure 51-00-00-991-035-A SHEET 01 - Aircraft Page 17

Section Numbers for A318 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
31 31
SECTION ATA REFERENCE DESIGNATION
19.1
15 53−30−00 CENTER FUSELAGE
18 35 16/17 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE
16/17 19 53−50−00 CONE/REAR FUSELAGE
21 57−10−00 CENTER WINGS
15
19 35 22 57−20−00 OUTER WINGS
23 57−40−00 LEADING EDGE
27
13/14 26 26 57−70−00 SPOILERS
11/12 27 27 57−53−00 OUTBOARD FLAP
29 57−30−00 WING TIP
28
31 55−40−00 RUDDER
41 35 55−10−00 HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
42 41 54−50−00 PYLONS
23 22 29 42 54−10−00 NACELLE SECTION
24
52 25 51 32−20−00 NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
51 52 32−10−00 MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
21
L_NT_510000_1_0350102_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
31 31
19.1
18 35
16/17
15 19 35 SECTION ATA REFERENCE DESIGNATION

15 53−30−00 CENTER FUSELAGE
27 16−17 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE

13/14 26 18 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE
27
11/12 19.1 53−50−00 CONE/REAR FUSELAGE
21 57−10−00 CENTER WINGS
28 22 57−20−00 OUTER WINGS
23/24/25 57−40−00 FIXED AND MOVING LEADING EDGES
21 26 57−70−00 SPOILERS
41
27 57−53−00 OUTBOARD FLAP
42
23 28 57−60−00 AILERONS
22 29
24 29 29 57−30−00 WING TIP
52 25
51 31 55−40−00 RUDDER
35 55−10−00 HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
41 54−50−00 PYLONS
42 54−10−00 NACELLE SECTION
51 32−20−00 NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
52 32−10−00 MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
L_NT_510000_1_0350103_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SECTION ATA REFERENCE DESIGNATION SECTION ATA REFERENCE DESIGNATION
11/12 53−10−00 NOSE FORWARD FUSELAGE 41 54−20−00 PYLONS
13/14 53−20−00 FORWARD FUSELAGE 42 54−10−00 NACELLE SECTION
14A 53−20−00 FORWARD FUSELAGE 51 32−20−00 NOSE GEAR AND DOORS
15 53−30−00 CENTER FUSELAGE 52 32−10−00 MAIN GEAR AND DOORS
16A 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE 31
31
16/17 53−40−00 REAR FUSELAGE
19.1
21 57−10−00 CENTER WINGS 18 35
22 57−20−00 OUTER WINGS
23 57−40−00 LEADING EDGE 16/17
26 57−70−00 SPOILERS 19 35
16A
15
27 57−53−00 OUTBOARD FLAP
29 57−30−00 WING TIP
31 55−40−00 RUDDER
14A
35 55−10−00 HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
13/14 27
26 27
11/12
28
29
41 22
23
21 24
25
42 52
51
L_NT_510000_1_0350104_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
STA2136 / FR47
+X
Y
+Z
−Y
Z
−X +Y
−Z A
+ Z3000
+ Z2000
R 1975 mm
+X AFT DISTANCE FROM STATION ’0’ + Z1000 (77.76 in)
−X FORE DISTANCE FROM STATION ’0’

0
+Y LATERAL DISTANCE FROM ’AD’ LEFT SIDE − Z240
−Y LATERAL DISTANCE FROM ’AD’ RIGHT SIDE − Z1000

R 1926 mm
+Z VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM ’FD’ UP (75.83 in)
− Z2000
−Z VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM ’FD’ DOWN
− Z3000
+ Y3000 + Y1000 − Y1000 − Y3000

+ Y2000 0 − Y2000
STA254
STA350 / FR1
A A
STA605 / FR12
TYPICAL FUSELAGE CONTOURS IN THE X,Y,Z
2540 mm COORDINATE SYSTEM AT FRAME 47.
(100 in)
NOTE:
ALL STATION DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN ’cm’.
THE DISTANCE BETWEEN POINT X0 AND THE FRONT OF

X0 THE AIRCRAFT CORRESPONDS TO A MARGIN ALLOWING
TO HAVE ALWAYS POSITIVE X VALUES, EVEN IF A
MODIFICATION COMES AND INCREASES THE LENGTH OF
THE AIRCRAFT.
L_NT_510000_1_0360101_01_00
Figure 51-00-00-991-036-A SHEET 01 - Fuselage Page 21

Reference Axis General for 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
A318/A319/A320/A321 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HTZ
FS
VTZ
CS
1165 mm
(45.87 in) RS
+Z RHL
HTY
X
0
−Z STA2753 / FR70 1975 mm

(77.76 in)
FS HT
HTX RS
−Y
EHL
X RS
0 0 AD
FS
+Y EHL
VTX
RS
FS
FS
RS
L_NT_510000_1_0360102_01_00

Reference Axis for A318 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
VTZ FS
CS
1165 mm
(45.87 in) RS
RHL
+Z
VTX
X
0
−Z
STA2992 / FR70 1975 mm
(77.76 in)
02 5682.66 mm
(223.72 in)
02 5641.07 mm
(222.1 in)
FS −Y
HT
5641.07 mm X
01 0 AD
(222.10 in)
RS
−Y +Y
EHL ON
X RS 0 HTX
0 AD OM
FS
+Y
ON VTY EHL
OM
RS 1° TO AD
FS 02 9175.14 mm
(361.226 in)
A
11557.91 mm
1° TO AD 02
(455.036 in)
01
9175.14 mm A
(361.226 in)
FS
HTZ RS
FUSELAGE
6° DATUM LINE
2.2° TO
FUSELAGE
DATUM NOTE:
HTY
OM PYLON AXIS
AIR APPLICABLE TO CFM 56
FDZ 665.0 mm = HHL ON NACELLE AXIS
FD INTAKE AND IAE V 2500 ENGINES
(26.18 in)
AXIS GROUND 02 CFM 56 ENGINE
LINE
FDZ 1060.2 mm = WD
A 02 IAE V2500 ENGINE
(41.74 in) L_NT_510000_1_0360103_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FS HTZ
VTZ CS
1165 mm RS
(45.87 in)
RHL FDZ 665.0 mm = HHL
(26.18 in)
VTX HTY
+Z 0
X
0 FD
−Z
1975 mm
(77.76 in) FDZ 1060.2 mm = WD
STA3366 / FR70 (41.74 in)
HT
FS
RS
−Y EHL
FUSELAGE
X RS HTX 6° V2500 DATUM LINE
0 AD
0 5°CFM56
FS
+Y 2.2° TO
5641.07 mm VTY FUSELAGE
(222.10 in) 1° TO AD DATUM
EHL
0 FS
RS AIR APPLICABLE TO CFM 56
INTAKE AND IAE V 2500 ENGINES
AXIS GROUND
LINE
10775.335 mm
(424.226 in) A RS A
FS
L_NT_510000_1_0360104_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
VTZ FS
CS
1165 mm
(45.87 in) RS
RHL
+Z
VTX
X
0
−Z
STA4058 / FR70 1975 mm
(77.76 in)
02 5682.66 mm
(223.72 in)
FS HT
02 5641.07 mm
(222.1 in)
RS
−Y −Y
EHL
X RS 0 HTX X
0 AD 0 AD
FS
+Y +Y
ON VTY EHL
ON
OM RS OM
FS
02 15042.535 mm
5641.07 mm 1° TO AD (592.225 in) 1° TO AD
01
(222.10 in)
02
17425.314 mm A
A (686.035 in)
15042.535 mm FS
01
(292.225 in)
RS
HTZ
FUSELAGE
6° DATUM LINE
2.2° TO
FUSELAGE NOTE:
HTY DATUM
OM PYLON AXIS
FDZ 665.0 mm = HHL ON NACELLE AXIS
FD AIR APPLICABLE TO CFM 56
(26.18 in) INTAKE AND IAE V 2500 ENGINES 02 CFM 56 ENGINE
AXIS GROUND
LINE 02 IAE V2500 ENGINE
FDZ 1060.2 mm = WD A
(41.74 in) L_NT_510000_1_0360105_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Station Reference Data
A. This section gives information about the Station Reference Data.
- Fuselage - Sections, Stations and Major Frames (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-037-A)
- Nacelle and Pylon Stations (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-038-A)
- Stabilizer - Stations and Ribs (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-039-A)
- Wing - Stations and Ribs (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-040-A)
Page 26
Revision n˚: 79
** On A/C ALL
STA3399 / FR87
11/12 13/14 15/21 16/17 18 19 19.1
- Sections, Stations and Major Frames for A318

Figure 51-00-00-991-037-A SHEET 01 - Fuselage
STA3042 / FR77
STA2753 / FR70
STA1298 / FR35 STA2431 / FR64
STA350 / FR1 STA950 / FR24 STA1897 / FR47 / 54

@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-00-00-PB1
NOTE:
FOR CONSTRUCTIONAL REASON FRAME NUMBERS
31, 32, 33, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52 AND 53 ARE NOT USED. L_NT_510000_1_0370101_01_00
Page 27
Revision n˚: 79
** On A/C ALL
STA3638 / FR87
11/12 13/14 15/21 16/17 18 19 19.1

STA3281 / FR77
STA2992 / FR70
STA1377 / FR35 STA2670 / FR64
STA350 / FR1 STA950 / FR24 STA1976 / FR47 / 51

@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-00-00-PB1
NOTE:
FOR CONSTRUCTIONAL REASON FRAME NUMBERS
31, 32, 33, 48, 49, 50 AND 51 ARE NOT USED. L_NT_510000_1_0370102_01_00
Page 28
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
L_NT_510000_1_0370103_01_00
FD
STA3655 / FR77
STA4011 / FR87
19.1
STA3366 / FR70
19
STA3043 / FR64
18
16/17
STA2136 / FR47
STA1537 / FR35
15

STA950 / FR24
13/14
STA350 / FR1
11/12
NOTE:

- Sections, Stations and Major Frames for A320 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
** On A/C ALL
STA4705 / FR87
16A 18 19 19.1
11/22 13/14 14A 15 16/17
FD

STA4348 / FR77
STA2830 / FR47.5 STA4059 / FR70

STA2563 / FR47 STA3736 / FR64
STA1963 / FR35.8
STA1537 / FR35
STA350 / FR1 STA950 / FR24
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-00-00-PB1
NOTE:
ALL STATION DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN ’cm’. L_NT_510000_1_0370104_01_00
Page 30
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
STA518 STA647
STA313
STA818
STA671 STA800
STA388 STA519
NOTE:
ALL STATION DIMENSIONS
ARE GIVEN IN ’cm’.
L_NT_510000_1_0380101_01_00
Figure 51-00-00-991-038-A SHEET 01 - Nacelle Page 31

and Pylon Stations CFM56 Engine for 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
A318/A319/A320/A321 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
STA297 STA518 STA684
STA800
STA369 STA513 STA719
NOTE:
L_NT_510000_1_0380102_01_00

and Pylon Stations IAE V2500 Engine for 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
A319/A320/A321 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
STA928 / RIB15
STA908 / RIB14
STA888 / RIB13
STA867 / RIB12
STA837 / RIB11
STA829 / RIB10
STA829 / RIB10A
STA806 / RIB9
STA783 / RIB8
STA761 / RIB7
STA761 / RIB7A
STA737 / RIB6
STA706 / RIB5
STA706 / RIB5A
STA679 / RIB4
STA648 / RIB09 STA647 / RIB3

STA617 / RIB2
STA608 / RIB08
STA593 / RIB1
STA537 / RIB07
STA518 / RIB06
STA495 / RIB05
STA469 / RIB04
STA451 / RIB03
STA430 / RIB02
STA409 / RIB01
STA390 / RIB00
NOTE:
L_NT_510000_1_0380103_01_00

and Pylon Stations for A318/A319/A320/A321 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
STA561 / RIB11
B
A STA487 / RIB10
STA413 / RIB9
B STA356 / RIB8
STA299 / RIB7
STA263 / RIB6
STA228 / RIB5
STA193 / RIB4
STA135 / RIB3
STA78 / RIB2
STA5 / RIB1
VTZ0
FWD A
STA0 / RIB1 VERTICAL STABILIZER
AD
STA69 / RIB2
STA82 / RIB3
STA131 / RIB4
STA181 / RIB5
STA227 / RIB6 UPPER SURFACE
STA271 / RIB7
STA297 / RIB8
STA342 / RIB9
STA404 / RIB10
FWD B STA466 / RIB11
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER STA527 / RIB12

LH SHOWN
RH SYMMETRICAL
NOTE: STA589 / RIB13
ALL STATION DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN ’cm’. STA601 / RIB14
L_NT_510000_1_0390101_01_00

Stabilizer - Stations and Ribs for 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
A318/A319/A320/A321 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1868 mm
(73.543 in)
AD
STA0 / RIB1
WY
STA70 / RIB2
STA141 / RIB3
STA196 / RIB4
STA251 / RIB5
STA306 / RIB6
STA360 / RIB6B STA376 / RIB7
STA407 / RIB8
STA486 / RIB9
STA551 / RIB10
STA613 / RIB11
STA670 / RIB12
STA732 / RIB13
STA779 / RIB14
STA827 / RIB15
STA874 / RIB16
STA924 / RIB17
STA970 / RIB18
STA1020 / RIB19
STA1073 / RIB20
STA1120 / RIB21
STA1166 / RIB22
STA1228 / RIB23
STA1287 / RIB24
STA1346 / RIB25
STA1406 / RIB26
STA1446 / RIB27
NOTE:
Figure 51-00-00-991-040-A SHEET 01 - Wing - Page 35

Stations and Ribs for A318/A319/A320 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1868 mm
(73.543 in)
AD
STA0 / RIB1
WY
STA70 / RIB2
STA141 / RIB3
STA196 / RIB4
STA251 / RIB5
STA306 / RIB6
STA360 / RIB6B STA376 / RIB7
STA407 / RIB8
STA486 / RIB9
STA551 / RIB10
STA613 / RIB11
STA670 / RIB12
STA732 / RIB13
STA779 / RIB14
STA827 / RIB15
STA874 / RIB16
STA924 / RIB17
STA970 / RIB18
STA1020 / RIB19
STA1073 / RIB20
STA1120 / RIB21
STA1166 / RIB22
STA1228 / RIB23
STA1287 / RIB24
STA1346 / RIB25
STA1406 / RIB26
STA1446 / RIB27
NOTE:
Figure 51-00-00-991-040-A SHEET 02 - Wing - Page 36

Stations and Ribs for A321 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
8. Zonings
A. This section gives information about the Zoning of the aircraft.
- Zoning - Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Fuselage, Vertical Stabilizer and Belly Fairing (See FIGURE
51-00-00-991-041-A)
- Zoning - Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Landing Gear (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-042-A)
- Zoning - Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Wings and Horizontal Stabilizer (See FIGURE
51-00-00-991-043-A)
- Zoning - Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Pylons and Nacelles (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-044-A)
- Zoning - Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Doors (See FIGURE 51-00-00-991-045-A)
Page 37
Revision n˚: 79
Z324
** On A/C ALL
Z141
Z223 (Z142) Z323
(Z224) Z231 Z241 Z251 Z322 Z325
(Z232) (Z242) (Z252)
Z233 Z243 Z263 Z321 Z326

Z211 Z221 Z145 Z253
(Z212) (Z222) (Z234) (Z244) (Z146) (Z254) (Z264)
A319
Z317
Z110
Z315
Z121 (Z316)
(Z122) Z313
Z161 Z261
Z125 Z151 (Z314)
Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Fuselage,

Z133 Z147 (Z162) (Z262)
(Z126) (Z152)
Figure 51-00-00-991-041-A SHEET 01 - Zoning -
Vertical Stabilizer and Belly Fairing for A318 and

(Z134) (Z148) Z311
Z171
Z123 Z131 Z195 Z153 Z163 (Z312)
(Z172)
(Z124) (Z132) (Z196) (Z154) (Z164)
Z129
Z137 Z191 Z197
Z127 (Z138) (Z192) (Z198)
(Z128)
FR45 FR46
FR28 FR40
FR47 FR57 FR34 FR41
FR34 FR40 FR41 FR48 Z196 FR42 FR48 FR57
FR28 FR36 FR42 FR54 Z192 Z148

Z744 Z198
Z193
(Z194)
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-00-00-PB1
Z191 Z197
(Z192) Z195 Z734 (Z198) Z197
(Z196) (Z744)
Z147 Z191 Z195 Z734 Z147
(Z148)
L_NT_510000_1_0410101_01_00
Page 38
Revision n˚: 79
Z324
** On A/C ALL
Z141
Z223 (Z142) Z323
(Z224) Z231 Z241 Z251 Z322 Z325
(Z232) (Z242) (Z252)
Z233 Z243 Z263 Z321 Z326

Z211 Z221 Z145 Z253
(Z212) (Z222) (Z234) (Z244) (Z146) (Z254) (Z264)
Z317
Z110
Z315
Z121 (Z316)
(Z122) Z313
Z161 Z261
Z125 Z151 (Z314)

(Z262)
Vertical Stabilizer and Belly Fairing for A320

Z133 Z147 (Z162)
(Z126) (Z152)

(Z134) (Z148) Z311
Z171
Z123 Z131 Z195 Z153 Z163 (Z172) (Z312)
(Z124) (Z132) (Z196) (Z154) (Z164)
Z129
Z137 Z191 Z197
Z127 (Z138) (Z192) (Z198)
(Z128)
FR45 FR46
FR31 FR40
FR47 FR34 FR41
FR34 FR40 FR41 FR48 Z196 FR42 FR47 FR51
FR36 FR42 FR50 Z192 Z148

STA1307 Z198
Z193 Z744
Z197
(Z194) (Z198)
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-00-00-PB1
Z191
(Z192)
Z195 Z734 Z197

STA1323 / FR31 (Z196) (Z744)
Z147 STA2456 / FR53 Z191 Z195 Z734 Z147
(Z148)
L_NT_510000_1_0410102_01_00
Page 39
Revision n˚: 79
Z324
** On A/C ALL
Z141
Z223 (Z142) Z323
(Z224) Z231 Z241 Z251 Z322 Z325
(Z232) (Z242) (Z252)
Z233 Z243 Z263 Z321 Z326

Z211 Z221 Z145 Z253
(Z212) (Z222) (Z234) (Z244) (Z146) (Z254) (Z264)
Z317
Z110
Z315
Z121 (Z316)
(Z122) Z313
Z161 Z261
Z125 Z151 (Z314)

(Z262)
Vertical Stabilizer and Belly Fairing for A321

Z133 Z147 (Z162)
(Z126) (Z152)

(Z134) (Z148) Z311
Z171
Z123 Z131 Z195 Z153 Z163 (Z172) (Z312)
Z129 (Z132) (Z196) (Z154) (Z164)
Z127 Z137 Z191 Z197
(Z128) (Z138) (Z192) (Z198)
FR45 FR46
FR35.4 FR40
FR47 FR35.7 FR41
FR35.7 FR40 FR41 FR47.1 Z196 FR42 FR47 FR48
FR36 FR42 FR47.3 Z192 Z148

Z744 Z198
Z193 Z197
Z191
(Z194) (Z198)
(Z192)
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-00-00-PB1
Z195 Z734 Z197
STA1750 / FR35.4 (Z196) (Z744)
Z147 STA2883 / FR48 Z191 Z195 Z734 Z147
(Z148)
L_NT_510000_1_0410103_01_00
Page 40
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z716 (Z715)
Z712
A
Z713 (Z714)
Z711
FWD
Z733
(Z743)
(Z742) Z732
(Z741) (Z744) Z734 Z731
L_NT_510000_1_0420101_01_00
Figure 51-00-00-991-042-A SHEET 01 - Zoning - Page 41

Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Landing Gear 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
for A318/A319/A320/A321 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z342
Z344
Z343
Z341
Z345
AD
Z535 Z334
(Z635) Z331
Z572
Z571 (Z672) Z335
(Z671) Z333
Z536
Z511 (Z636)
Z582 (Z611) Z573
(Z682) (Z673)
Z531 Z332
DRY BAY (Z631)
Z521 Z581
(Z621) (Z681) Z537
(Z637)
Z574
(Z674) Z587
Z522 (Z687)
(Z622) Z532
(Z632)
Z512 Z538
(Z612) (Z638) Z584
Z583 (Z684)
(Z683) Z585
(Z685)
Z540
(Z640) Z513 Z539
(Z613) (Z639)
Z514 Z533
(Z614) (Z633)
Z586
Z515 (Z686)
(Z615)
Z575
Z550 (Z675)
(Z650) Z590
Z560 (Z690)
(Z660)
Z534
(Z634)
L_NT_510000_1_0430101_01_00

Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Wings and 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Horizontal Stabilizer for A318 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
AD
B
Z334
Z331 (Z344)
(Z341)
Z572 Z335
Z571 (Z672) Z333 (Z345)
(Z671) (Z343)
Z511
(Z611) Z573
Z582 (Z673) Z332
(Z682) Z531 (Z342)
01 (Z631)
Z581
Z521 (Z681)
(Z621) (Z637)
Z574 Z587
(Z674) Z522 (Z687)
Z532
(Z622) (Z632)
Z512
(Z612) Z584
Z583 (Z684)
(Z683)
Z540 Z585
(Z640) Z513 (Z685)
(Z613)
Z514 Z533
(Z614) (Z633)
Z586
Z515 (Z686)
(Z615)
Z575
Z550 (Z675)
(Z650) Z590
Z511 (Z690)
(Z611) Z560
(Z660)
02 Z534
(Z634)
Z521
(Z621)
A 03
Z522
(Z622)
Z512
(Z612) A 03
B
NOTE:
01 MODIFICATION 20141 DRY BAY (LH ONLY).
02 MODIFICATION 20165 DRY BAY (LH AND RH SIDE).
03 MODIFICATION 20268 FENCE−WING TIP.
L_NT_510000_1_0430102_01_00

Horizontal Stabilizer for A319 and A320 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
AD
Z334
Z535 Z331 (Z344)
(Z635) (Z341)
Z572 Z335
Z571 (Z672) Z333 (Z345)
(Z671) (Z343)
Z536
Z511 (Z636)
Z582 (Z611) Z573
(Z682) (Z673)
Z332
DRY BAY Z531 (Z342)
(Z631)
LH AND RH
Z521 SIDE Z581
(Z681) Z537
(Z621) (Z637)
Z574 Z587
(Z674) Z522 (Z687)
(Z622) Z532
(Z632)
Z512 Z538
(Z612) (Z638) Z584
Z583 (Z684)
(Z683) Z585
(Z685)
Z540
(Z640) Z513 Z539
(Z613) (Z639)
Z514 Z533
(Z614) (Z633)
Z586
Z515 (Z686)
(Z615)
Z575
Z550 (Z675)
(Z650) Z590
Z560 (Z690)
(Z660)
Z534
(Z634)
L_NT_510000_1_0430103_01_00

Horizontal Stabilizer for A321 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z471, Z472 Z475, Z476 Z477
Z413, Z414 Z415

Z411
Z473
Z455
Z431 Z453, Z454
Z433, Z434
Z451, Z452
Z435, Z436
Z437, Z438
LH ENGINE
Z481, Z482 Z485, Z486 Z487
Z423, Z424 Z425

Z421
Z483
Z465
Z441 Z463, Z464
Z443, Z444
Z461, Z462
Z445, Z446
Z447, Z448
RH ENGINE
L_NT_510000_1_0440101_01_00

Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Pylons and 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Nacelles CFM56 Engine for Revision n˚: 79
A318/A319/A320/A321
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z471, Z472 Z475, Z476

Z477
Z413, Z414 Z415
Z411
Z473
Z455
Z431 Z453, Z454
Z433, Z434
Z435, Z436 Z451, Z452
Z437, Z438
LH ENGINE
Z481, Z482 Z485, Z486

Z487
Z425
Z423, Z424
Z421
Z483
Z465
Z441 Z463, Z464
Z443, Z444
Z461, Z462
Z445, Z446
Z447, Z448
RH ENGINE
L_NT_510000_1_0440102_01_00

Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Pylons and 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Nacelles IAE V2500 Engine for Revision n˚: 79
A319/A320/A321
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z831 Z834 Z832
Z842 Z844 Z841
Z826 Z825
L_NT_510000_1_0450101_01_00

Major Sub Zones and Sub Zones - Doors for 51-00-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
A318 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z831 Z834 Z832
Z811 Z812
Z842 Z844 Z841
Z826 Z825 Z824 Z822
L_NT_510000_1_0450102_01_00

@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z831 Z833 Z834 Z832
Z811 Z812 Z813
Z842 Z844 Z833 Z841
Z827 Z826 Z825 Z824 Z822
L_NT_510000_1_0450103_01_00

@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Z831 Z833 Z834 Z832
Z811 Z812 Z813
Z842 Z844 Z843 Z841
Z827 Z826 Z825 Z824 Z822
L_NT_510000_1_0450104_01_00

@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
9. Abbreviations
A. This section gives information about the main abbreviations which are used in the NTM (See TABLE 1).
Abbreviation Signification
AD Airplane Datum
AFRP Aramidfiber Reinforced Plastic
AR As Required
C Equal Margin
CFRP Carbonfiber Reinforced Plastic
CL Center Line
CONFIG Configuration
CS Center Spar
CSK Countersink
DBLR Doubler
DIA Diameter
DWG Drawing
ER Elevator Rib
EHL Elevator Hinge Line
FD Fuselage Datum
FIG Figure
FR Frame
FS Front Spar
FWD Forward
GFRP Glasfiber Reinforced Plastic
HD Head
HHL Horizontal Hinge Line
HT Horizontal Tail
INTMD Intermediate
L Left
LH Left-Hand (side)
LONGN Longeron
MAX Maximum
MID Middle
MIN Minimum
NO Number
OH Opposite Hand
OPTL Optional
OPT Optimum
R Right
RH Right-Hand (side)
REF Reference
RHL Rudder Hinge Line
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RR Rudder Rib
Page 51
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
RS Rear Spar
SERNO Serial Number
SPD BRK Speed Brake
SPLR Spoiler
STA Station
STD Standard
STGR Stringer
STIF Stiffener
t Rivet Spacing
T Thickness
THS Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer
TYP Typical
UNIV Universal
V Vertical parallel with fuselage axis
VERT Vertical
VT Vertical Tail
WD Wing Datum
WIA Wing Inner Aileron
WOR Wing Outer Rear
X Fore and aft distance from any point to STA O (See 51-00-00-013-A)
Y Lateral distance from any point to AD (See 51-00-00-013-A)
Z Vertical distance from any point to FD (See 51-00-00-013-A)
Abbreviations
c
TABLE 1
Page 52
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements to measure the thickness of nonconductive or slightly
conductive coating on nonmagnetic metallic structure and nonmagnetic coating on magnetic structure of the
aircraft.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Preferred Inspection
A. See TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-00-250-801-A-01
Coating Thickness Measurement
1. Task Supporting Data
A. Area of Applicability
Generally, for measurement of paint thickness on metallic parts but also for anodizing coatings on aluminum
alloy parts and chromium or cadmium coatings on steels.
- Non-conductive or slightly conductive coatings on nonmagnetic conductive metallic aircraft structure for
measuring the coating thickness.
- Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic aircraft structure for measuring the coating thickness.
B. Description of Possible Damage
None
C. Job Set-Up Information
(1) Tooling :
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
EGA1-3-150 PROBE
ETA3-3 PROBE
MP40 DUALSCOPE
(2) References :
51-61-04-001-A - Eddy Current - Coating Thickness Measurement Instruments
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-00-251-001-A
A. Preparation for Inspection
(1) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean and smooth.
(2) Make sure that the appropriate calibration sheet has been selected.
(3) Select from the foils set the calibration foils which bracket the thickness of the coating to be measured.
The foils should be as close as possible to the coating thickness to be measured. Avoid, when possible,
foil stacking.
(4) Make sure that the surfaces of the calibration sheet, foils and probe are free from foreign materials such
as dirt or grease, scratches, indentations or any other condition that may interfere with the calibration
and measurement process.
(5) Make sure that no residual magnetism exists within the area to be inspected and no strong magnetic
fields interfere with the measuring process.
Subtask 51-10-00-252-001-A
B. Instrument Adjustment
(1) General
(a) Select the appropriate instrument (magnetic or eddy current type) and probe combination related
to the base material and coating of the inspection area.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(b) Select a adjustment sheet of the same material specification and heat treatment as the inspection
area, without coating 30 mm x 30 mm (1.18 in x 1.18 in). Minimum size and thickness as
follows:
1 The adjustment sheet thickness shall be at least the effective penetration depth created by
the instrument in the material, when the thickness of the inspection area metallic base is:
- equal to that depth,
- greater than that depth,
- or less than that depth with the inspection area ’backed’ by placing a similar piece of
material on the back surface, such that the total thickness is in excess the effective
depth of penetration.
2 The adjustment shall be the same thickness as the metallic base of the area to be inspected
in the other areas.
NOTE : Effective depth of penetration can be determined by taking coating thickness

measurements with and without ’backing’ material. If there is no difference
between the readings, then the metallic base thickness is greater than the effective
depth of penetration.
(2) Adjustment with specific equipment
(a) Connect the PROBE (ETA3-3) for nonmagnetic metals or PROBE (EGA1-3-150) for ferrous
metals with the instrument DUALSCOPE (MP40) (see 51-61-04-001-A).
NOTE : Any comparable coating thickness measurement equipment, magnetic or eddy current
type depending on the materials of component to be inspected, may be used provided
that it satisfies the requirements of this procedure.
(b) Adjust the instrument in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(c) Ensure good contact between foils and adjustment sheet.
(d) It is recommended that the adjustment measurements are performed in the same attitude as that
which is necessary to carry out the inspection, i.e., if the component to be inspected is in the
vertical plane, then the adjustment should also be performed in the vertical plane.
Subtask 51-10-00-253-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Operate the instrument in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE : The adjustment and measuring processes should be conducted by the same operator and under
similar working conditions. Avoid variations in ambient temperature.
(2) Do not take readings below curvature or edge effect limitations indicated by the manufacturer, unless
the adjustment is conducted under the same conditions.
(3) Take the measurements at several points with the probe perpendicular to the surface of the inspection
area.
(4) Record the minimum and maximum coating thickness values.
(5) Calculate and record the average coating thickness readings within the area of inspection.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of the bores of parallel sided holes in
aluminum alloy materials.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. For the inspection of parallel sided holes in aluminum by HFEC rotating probe see PROCEDURE A TASK
51-10-01-250-801-A01
B. For the inspection of parallel and tapered holes in aluminum by HFEC manual hole probe see PROCEDURE
B TASK 51-10-01-250-802-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-01-250-801-A-01
Rotating Probe Testing - General - PROCEDURE A
Parallel sided holes in aluminum alloy material of conductivity 16.0 MS/m (27.6% IACS) to 28.0 MS/m
(48.3% IACS) with a minimum thickness of 1 mm (0.039 in) (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-001-A).
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE MEASURES ONLY THE CRACK DEPTH.
Fatigue cracks ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in), open to the surface, starting at the wall of parallel sided holes and
extending in radial (crack length) and axial (crack depth) direction (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-002-A).
(1) Tooling :
2-887-01-9313S SPLIT CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK
99A53003001101 CALIBRATION BLOCK (AL)
99D57004000000 CALIBRATION BLOCK SET
B588 EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT
MR3MF ROTOR UNIT - MINI
SR1MF ROTOR UNIT - STANDARD
(2) References :
51-61-03-001-A - Eddy Current - Rotating Probe Instruments
51-62-02-001-A - Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for Parallel Bore Hole Inspection
51-63-03-001-A - Calibration Block Set PN 99D57004000000
51-63-04-001-A - Calibration Block PN 99A53003001000
51-63-06-001-A - Split Conical Calibration Block
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-001-A - Example of Area to be Inspected
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-002-A - Possible Damage
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-003-A - Tolerance Range of Probes
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-004-A - Probe Position
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-005-A - Calibration Procedure
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-006-A - Evaluation of Indications
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-007-A - Example of Signals due to Discontinuities
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-008-A - Crack Depth Measurement in Fastener Holes
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-009-A - Determination of Crack Direction from Fastener Holes
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-010-A - Record Sheet
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-01-251-001-A
(1) Identify the fastener holes to be inspected. See the related NTM procedure or Service Bulletin, where
necessary.
(2) Make sure that the holes are clean and smooth.
(3) Do a visual check of the inspection area for any damage or discontinuities.
Subtask 51-10-01-252-001-A
NOTE : When this general procedure is called from a specific inspection Task the settings of this specific
inspection Task must be followed.
(1) Connect the probe (See 51-62-02-001-A) related to the inspection requirement with the EDDY
CURRENT EQUIPMENT (B588) (See 51-61-03-001-A).
NOTE : The probe diameter must be approximately 0.1 mm ± 0.05 mm (0.004 in ± 0.002 in) less than
the hole diameter to be inspected (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-003-A).
NOTE : Any rotating eddy current probe or instrument may be used provided that they meet the
requirements of this procedure.
(2) One of the following calibration blocks has to be used related to the inspection requirements:
- SPLIT CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-887-01-9313S) (See 51-63-06-001-A)
- CALIBRATION BLOCK (AL) (99A53003001101) (See 51-63-04-001-A)
- CALIBRATION BLOCK SET (99D57004000000) (See 51-63-03-001-A)
(3) Use ROTOR UNIT - STANDARD (SR1MF) or ROTOR UNIT - MINI (MR3MF) for the inspection if
mentioned in the specific inspection Task.
(4) Using the probe and the calibration block related to the inspection requirements, calibrate the
instrument in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(a) Set reject to ’OFF’.
(b) Set the instrument to X-Y mode (spot display).
(c) Slowly guide the probe into a calibration block.
(d) Make sure that the probe operates freely and does not jam (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-004-A).
NOTE : For the split conical calibration blocks the probe must be parallel to the internal surface
of the split area.
(5) Sensitivity and Phase Angle Calibration (X-Y mode) (See TABLE 1)
(a) Set the filters control to optimize signal shape.
(b) Set the gain to 100% FSH above the zero datum (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-005-A, Details (a)).
(c) Adjust the phase angle (See TABLE 1, column (b) and FIGURE 51-10-01-991-005-A, Details
(b)).
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(d) Adjust the sensitivity (See TABLE 1, column (c) and FIGURE 51-10-01-991-005-A, Details (c)).
(6) Final Setting (X-T mode)
(a) Set the instrument to X-T mode (line display) (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-005-A, Details (d)).
NOTE : The noise level must be less than 10% or 15% FSH if the probe diameter ≤ 4.5 mm
(0.177 in).
CAUTION : TABLE 1 PROVIDES SETTING VALUES FOR DIFFERENT CALIBRATION BLOCKS, IN ORDER
TO ACHIEVE COMMON DAMAGE DETECTION LEVEL.
(7) For sensitivity and phase values see TABLE 1
Calibration Block Settings Figure Reference

PN Gain (a) Phase Angle (b) Sensitivity (c)
2-887-01-93XXS 100% 20˚ to the right + 6 dB See FIGURE
(Split-Conical) 51-10-01-991-005-
A, Detail A
99A53003001101 100% on 0˚ + 6 dB See FIGURE
(Hole plate) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 51-10-01-991-005-
slots A, Detail B
99D57004000000 100% on 10˚ to the right - 6 dB See FIGURE
(Hole plate) 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 51-10-01-991-005-
slots A, Detail C
Sensitivity and Phase Values
c
TABLE 1
Subtask 51-10-01-253-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Identify the holes to be inspected, and make sure that the correct probe is selected in accordance with
51-62-02-001-A.
(2) Calibrate the instrument in accordance with SUBTASK 252-001-A.
(3) Pass the rotating probe slowly through each hole and make sure that the coil scans the whole of the
bore surface.
(4) If no indication exceeds 25% FSH when maximized, the inspection for that hole is finished.
(5) All indications with maximized amplitudes above 25% FSH must be evaluated in accordance with LIST
STRUCTURE.
(6) Evaluation of Indications
(a) Set the instrument to X-Y mode.
(b) All indications which are vertical or to the right of vertical and exceed 25% FSH (See FIGURE
51-10-01-991-006-A, Detail A) shall be marked as cracks.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) All indications which are located to the left of vertical and exceed 75% FSH (See FIGURE
51-10-01-991-006-A, Detail B) shall be marked as cracks or other damage.
NOTE : To define if the indication is a crack or a damage, identify the radial position using the
X-T mode in accordance with LIST STRUCTURE. Visually inspect that area of the bore
using available mirrors and magnifiers etc. Look for ovality or pilot hole (See FIGURE
51-10-01-991-007-A) and scores, burring, corrosion and other visible damage. When
possible, clean the hole to remove the damage and re-inspect the hole.
(7) Determination of the Depth of a Crack Indication (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-008-A)
(a) In case of crack indication slowly proceed to shift the rotating probe into the hole until the end of
the crack is displayed (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-008-A, Detail A and B).
(b) The end of the crack will be indicated when the signal is displayed ≤ 25% FSH. Mark the depth
of the crack finishing point on the probe shaft with a pencil (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-008-A,
Detail B).
(c) Slowly remove the rotating probe out of the hole until the crack signal displayed again ≤ 25%
FSH.
(d) Mark the crack starting point on the probe shaft with a pencil (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-008-A,
Detail C).
(e) Measure the total crack depth between the two pencil marks (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-008-A,
Detail C).
(8) Determination of the Direction of an indicated Crack relative to the Hole Circumference (See FIGURE
51-10-01-991-009-A)
(a) With the probe rotating in the hole, turn the rotor head until the crack signal is at the 180˚
position (Horizontal Center Line) on the instrument CRT screen.
(b) The crack direction is indicated by the position of the rotor head.
NOTE : Due to other rotating direction or another 0˚ position on the rotor, the crack direction
must be adapted.
Subtask 51-10-01-971-001-A
D. Acceptance Criteria
(1) All valid crack indication are to be classified as a crack and must be recorded (See FIGURE
51-10-01-991-010-A).
(2) Record the following data:
- Position of holes with cracks
- Radial position of the crack (use sketch stating view direction FWD-OB etc.)
- Depth to start of the crack
- Depth of the crack down the bore
- Amplitude height
- Phase angle of the crack indication (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-006-A)
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
>
− 0.6 mm
INSPECTION SIDE: (0.024 in)
THIS AREA MUST BE
INSTALLATIONS ACCESSIBLE FOR
(EXAMPLE) HANDLING AND
POSITIONING OF
THE EQUIPMENT
MINIMUM
DISTANCE
01
A
MINIMUM
THIS SHEET DISTANCE
MAY BE
MULTI−LAYER 02 NOTE:
A
MINIMUM SHEET THICKNESS 1 mm (0.039 in).
01 THESE DIMENSIONS WILL ALLOW ACCESS
FOR MOST STANDARD (200 mm (7.87 in))
AND MINI (90 mm (3.54 in)) ROTORS.
02 THESE DIMENSIONS WILL ALLOW ACCESS
FOR MOST STANDARD (25 mm (0.98 in))
AND MINI (12 mm (0.47 in)) ROTORS.
MIN 6 mm
(0.236 in) INSTALLATION AREA TO BE INSPECTED
(EXAMPLE)
L_NT_511001_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-10-01-991-001-A SHEET 01 - Example Page 5

of Area to be Inspected 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CRACK LENGTH >

− 1 mm
(0.039 in)
FATIGUE CRACK
CRACK DEPTH > − 1 mm

(0.039 in)
L_NT_511001_1_0020101_01_00
Figure 51-10-01-991-002-A SHEET 01 - Possible Page 6

Damage 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
NOTE: THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE

PROBE AND THE HOLE DIAMETER
D / HOLE TO BE INSPECTED MUST BE
0.1 mm (0.004 in) WITH A
TOLERANCE OF ± 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
D = D / HOLE − D / PROBE
AREA TO BE INSPECTED
D / PROBE
L_NT_511001_1_0030101_01_00

Tolerance Range of Probes 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SPLIT CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK
SPLIT−PLANE
ROTATING PROBE
PROBE
AXIS
SPLIT−PLANE INTERNAL SURFACE

OF THE SPLIT AREA
TURNING OF THE SPLIT−CONE

TO OPTIMIZE THE SIGNAL
CAUTION: POSITION OF PROBE AXIS MUST BE PARALLEL

TO THE INTERNAL SURFACE OF THE SPLIT AREA.
PARALLEL SIDED HOLES CALIBRATION BLOCK
L_NT_511001_1_0040101_01_00
Figure 51-10-01-991-004-A SHEET 01 - Probe Page 8

Position 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A PN 2−837−01−93XX S (SPLIT CONICAL)

PHASE: 20° RH
GAIN: 100% SENSITIVITY: + 6dB
SH SH SH SH
100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 75% 75% 75%
50% 50% 50% 50%
25% 25% 25% 25%
ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO
0% 0% 0% 0%
DATUM DATUM DATUM DATUM
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
(a) (b) (c) (d)
B PN 99A53003001101 (HOLE PLATE)

PHASE: 0°
GAIN: 100% SENSITIVITY: + 6dB
SH SH SH SH
100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 75% 75% 75%
50% 50% 50% 50%
25% 25% 25% 25%
ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO
0% DATUM 0% 0% 0%
DATUM DATUM DATUM
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
(a) (b) (c) (d)
C PN 99D57004000000
PHASE: 10°
GAIN: 100% SENSITIVITY: − 6dB
SH SH SH SH
100% 100% 100% 100%
75% 75% 75% 75%
50% 50% 50% 50%
25% 25% 25% 25%
ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO
0% 0% 0% 0%
DATUM DATUM DATUM DATUM
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
(a) (b) (c) (d)
X−Y MODE Y−T MODE

L_NT_511001_1_0050101_01_00

Calibration Procedure 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
0° 0°
RH X−Y MODE LH
SH SH
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
ZERO ZERO
0% 0%
DATUM DATUM
REPORTING
LEVEL
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
TYPICAL RIGHT OF TYPICAL LEFT OF

A VERTICAL SIGNAL B VERTICAL SIGNAL
L_NT_511001_1_0060101_01_00

Evaluation of Indications 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
** On A/C ALL
Y−T MODE X−Y MODE
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM

DISCONTINUITY
100% 100%
75% 75% OVAL
50% 50%
25% 25%
ZERO ZERO PROBE
0% 0%
DATUM DATUM
of Signals due to Discontinuities

0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
Figure 51-10-01-991-007-A SHEET 01 - Example

NOTE: PHASE ROTATION 180 DEGREE, COMPARE
TO CRACK INDICATION
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM

100% 100%
75% 75% PILOT−HOLE

50% 50%
25% 25%
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-10-01-PB6
ZERO ZERO
0% 0% PROBE
DATUM DATUM
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
L_NT_511001_1_0070101_01_00
Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM

CRACK INDICATION
100%
CRACK 75%
50%
CRACK LENGTH THRESHOLD FOR CRACK
25% DETERMINATION
CRACK DEPTH 0% ZERO DATUM
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
DEPTH OF CRACK
FINISH POINT
CRACK PENCIL VISIBLE COIL
1ST MARK MADE WITH PENCIL

CRACK DEPTH
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM
B
100%
75%
50%
THRESHOLD FOR CRACK
INDICATION 25% DEPTH DETERMINATION
FROM DETAIL B 0% ZERO DATUM
AND C
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
DEPTH OF CRACK
START POINT
CRACK CRACK DEPTH
PENCIL
VISIBLE COIL
CRACK DEPTH DEPTH OF CRACK
FINISH POINT
C 2ST MARK MADE WITH PENCIL

L_NT_511001_1_0080101_01_00
Figure 51-10-01-991-008-A SHEET 01 - Crack Page 12

Depth Measurement in Fastener Holes 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MINI ROTOR 0°
EXAMPLE OF DIRECTION OF SINGLE

CRACK FROM FASTENER HOLE 270° 90°
CRACK IN 180°
DIRECTION
SIGNAL OF
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM DIRECTION OF 180°
CRACK
ROTATION
100%
75%
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
DIRECTION OF
STANDARD ROTOR 0° ROTATION
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 270° 90°
CRACK IN 180°
DIRECTION
180°
MINI ROTOR 0°
270° 90°
EXAMPLE OF DIRECTION OF TWO OPPOSITE
CRACKS FROM FASTENER HOLE
CRACKS IN 0° AND
180° DIRECTION
DIRECTION OF 180°
SIGNAL OF
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM CRACKS ROTATION
100%
75%
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
0°
STANDARD ROTOR
DIRECTION OF CRACKS IN 0° AND
ROTATION 180° DIRECTION
270° 90°
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
180°
NOTE: OTHER EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE ANOTHER ALLOCATION OF THE

CRACK DIRECTION ON THE ROTOR AND ON THE CRT−SCREEN L_NT_511001_1_0090101_01_00

Determination of Crack Direction from Fastener 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Holes Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
ROTOTEST INSPECTION RECORD SHEET
FORWARD OR UP
12 O’ CLOCK POSITION
INSPECTION SURFACE
D2
CRACK AT
3 O’ CLOCK
D1 POSITIONS
CRACK
DEPTH OF CRACK = D1 − D2 VIEW OF INSPECTION SURFACE
A/C: FLIGHT CYCLES: INSPECTION DATE:

MSN: PLACE:
REG.NO.: INSPECTOR: RECORD SHEET NO.: OF

INSPECTION REFERENCE REMARKS:
INSPECTION EQUIPMENT:
PROBE:
CALIBRATION BLOCK:
CORRECTION VALUE:
HOLE AFFECTED:
LAYER AFFECTED:
CRACK POSITION:
CRACK DEPTH:
SIGNAL AMPLITUDE (% FSH):
THIS RECORD SHEET CAN BE SUPPORTED BY AN INSTRUMENT PRINT−OUT WHEN AVAILABLE

XY MODE SIGNAL DISPLAY ( SEE FIGURE 51−10−01−991−005 )
FSH FSH
0 0
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
ZERO ZERO
0% 0%
DATUM DATUM
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

CALIBRATION DEFECT
L_NT_511001_1_0100101_01_01
Figure 51-10-01-991-010-A SHEET 01 - Record Page 14

Sheet 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-01-250-802-A-01
Rotating Probe Testing - General - PROCEDURE B
Areas where fasteners have been removed to inspect the bore of parallel or tapered holes in aluminum alloy
structure.
Fatigue cracks ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) (depth and length) originating from the bore holes.
(1) Tooling :
TYPEUH EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT LOCATOR
(2) References :
51-62-01-001-A - Eddy Current - Standard High Frequency Probes
51-63-01-001-A - Calibration Block
FIGURE 51-10-01-991-012-A - Example of Crack and Reporting Requirements
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-01-251-005-A
(1) Make sure that the holes and the surrounding area is clean and free of swarf, sealant or other debris.
Subtask 51-10-01-252-002-A
(1) Connect the probe TYPE F, 500 KHz (See 51-62-01-001-A, Detail F) with the EDDY CURRENT
EQUIPMENT LOCATOR (TYPEUH)
NOTE : The probe diameter should correspond to the hole diameter to be inspected.
NOTE : For tapered hole inspection more than one diameter probe may be required to inspect the full
depth of the hole bore.
NOTE : Any high frequency eddy current probe or instrument with a frequency between 500 KHz and 2
MHz may be used provided that they meet the requirements of this procedure.
(2) Use theCALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-551) (See 51-63-01-001-A) to calibrate the instrument for lift
off and zero in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE : Any aluminum calibration block may be used provided that it meet the requirements of this
procedure.
(3) Adjust the instrument sensitivity so that a repeatable 100% full scale deflection is obtained when the
probe sensor is passed over the 0.5 mm (0.20 in) slot in the calibration block.
Page 15
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-01-253-002-A
C. Inspection
(1) Scan each hole to be inspected ensuring that:
(a) There is a good fit between the probe and bore.
(b) The probe is rotated through at least 360˚.
(c) The probe is indexed at not greater than 1 mm (0.039 in) increments.
(d) The complete bore is inspected.
NOTE : Interfaces will give different zero response, re-zero as necessary.

(2) Cracks from the bore of the hole will be represented by a sharp meter needle deflection to the right.
(3) If crack indications are detected:
(a) Identify the layer (eg. skin, doubler, strap, spar) where the indication maximizes.
(b) Measure the depth in the hole where the indication starts and ends (See FIGURE
51-10-01-991-012-A).
(c) Identify the radial position of the crack (See FIGURE 51-10-01-991-012-A).
Subtask 51-10-01-971-002-A
(1) Typically, cracks are indicated by a sharp up-scale meter deflection. All such clear indications that
cannot be attributed to other influences having a deflection equal to or greater than 50% full scale
must be considered as crack indications and recorded.
(2) Record the following information:
- Hole identification
- Layer cracked (skin, spar etc.)
- Depth of crack indication
- Radial position of crack indication
Page 16
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSPECTION SURFACE
D2
D1
CRACK
DEPTH OF CRACK = D1 − D2
FORWARD OR UP
12 O’ CLOCK POSITION
CRACK AT
3 O’ CLOCK
POSITIONS
VIEW ON INSPECTION SURFACE
L_NT_511001_1_0120101_01_00

of Crack and Reporting Requirements 51-10-01-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements to inspect areas where surface corrosion has been removed
by blending.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. For the complete removal of corrosion from aluminum alloy materials see TASK 51-10-02-250-801-A01
B. For the complete removal of corrosion from all metallic materials see TASK 51-10-02-220-801-A01
NOTE : Choose inspection with respect to:

- Configuration of component,
- Access to the inspection area,
- Type of corrosion removed.
NOTE : The Eddy Current inspection is preferred when the inspection is required for the complete removal of
exfoliation type corrosion, from unclad aluminum alloy materials.
NOTE : The Visual inspection is sufficient to inspect for complete removal of surface pitting type corrosion.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-02-250-801-A-01
Inspection to Verify the Complete Removal of Corrosion from Aluminum Alloy Materials
Any aluminum alloy parts of the aircraft structure where surface corrosion has been removed by blending.
Corrosion which has not be completely removed.
(1) Tooling :
106P4 PROBE
(2) References :
51-61-01-001-A - Eddy Current - High Frequency Instruments
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-02-251-002-A
(1) Check the inspection area for any visible signs of corrosion or damage.
Subtask 51-10-02-252-001-A
(1) Connect the PROBE (106P4) see 51-62-01-001-A, TYPE B with the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT
LOCATOR (TYPEUH) see 51-61-01-001-A.
NOTE : Any high frequency eddy current probe or instrument may be used provided that they meet the
(2) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-551) see 51-63-01-001-A to calibrate the equipment for lift off
and zero in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE : Any aluminum calibration block may be used provided that it meets the requirements of this
procedure.
(3) Place the probe coil directly over the 0.5 mm (0.02 in) slot of the calibration block.
(4) Adjust the instrument sensitivity control so that the meter needle reaches 100% of full scale.
(5) Place the probe coil directly over the 0.2 mm (0.008 in) slot of the calibration block.
(6) Make sure that the meter needle deflection is ≥ 30% of full scale.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-02-253-001-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : IF THIS PROCEDURE IS USED WHERE BLENDING HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT ON
ALUMINUM CLAD MATERIALS, THE INFLUENCE OF THE CLADDING AT THE PERIMETER
OF THE BLENDED AREA WILL AFFECT THE METER INDICATIONS.
(1) Check the zero adjustment in two, or more, positions in the inspection area.
(2) Scan the probe over the entire surface of the blended area, using a parallel scan of approximately 1 mm
(0.039 in) pitch.
(3) All meter needle deflections, to the right ≥ 30% of full scale, must be recorded.
Subtask 51-10-02-971-001-A
(1) There must be no indications of remaining corrosion.
(2) Record any indications of remaining corrosion on the appropriate documentation.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-02-220-801-A-01
Inspection to Verify the Complete Removal of Corrosion from all Metallic Materials
Any metallic part of the aircraft structure where surface corrosion has been removed by blending.
Corrosion which has not completely removed.
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-02-221-001-A
(1) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean.
Subtask 51-10-02-222-002-A
B. Inspection
(1) Use a magnifying glass x10 and inspect carefully the surface of the blended area, for any visible
evidence of remaining corrosion.
(a) The surface of the inspection area must be free from any visible evidence of:
- discoloration,
- pitting,
- cracks.
Subtask 51-10-02-971-002-A
C. Acceptance Criteria
(1) There must be no indications of remaining corrosion.
(2) Record any indications of remaining corrosion on the appropriate documentation.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the general requirements for tap test inspection of honeycomb sandwich construction
composite components.
B. Inspection following visible indications of impact damage or surface bulging. For possible affected structures,
refer to relevant part illustrations in the SRM.
NOTE : This general procedure does not apply to extensive damage caused by collisions with ground
equipment etc. Extensive damage will be dealt with on a case-by-case basis.
For the inspection of monolithic construction composite parts see TASK 51-10-06-270-801-A01.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Alternative Inspection
A. See TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-03-280-801-A-01
Inspection of CFRP and GFRP Composite Components - Honeycomb Sandwich Parts - General
CAUTION : FOR SANDWICH PARTS WITH SKIN THICKNESS ABOVE 2 MM (0.079 IN) AN ULTRASONIC
INSPECTION IS TO BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH , TO DETECT DELAMINATION OF
THE SKIN THIS ULTRASONIC PROCEDURE CANNOT BE USED TO DETECT DISBONDING
BETWEEN THE SKIN AND THE CORE.
NOTE : This procedure may be used by personnel, who are not qualified in NDT. It is recommended that the
personnel should be experienced in the use of the Tap Test tools shown in FIGURE 51-10-03-991-002-
A and FIGURE 51-10-03-991-003-A and observe the precautions stated in SUBTASK 283-001-A.
(1) Inspection Area
- The outer skin areas of honeycomb sandwich construction composite structures.
- Inspection of MPD/SSI areas at pre-determined inspection thresholds and intervals.
See FIGURE 51-10-03-991-001-A
(1) Type A
Delaminations parallel to the test surface with an minimum extent of ≥ 625 mm2 (0.968 in2) by a
minimum strip width of 20 mm (0.79 in) or a minimum diameter of 28 mm (1.10 in) between plies of
composite skin with a maximum monolithic laminate thickness of 2 mm (0.079 in).
(2) Type B
Disbondings parallel to the test surface with an extent of ≥ 625 mm2 (0.968 in2) by a minimum strip
width of 20 mm (0.79 in) or a minimum diameter of 28 mm (1.10 in) between laminated skin and
honeycomb core or another structure component with a maximum monolithic skin thickness of 2 mm
(0.079 in).
(3) Type C
Honeycomb core damages parallel to the test surface with an extent of ≥ 625 mm2 (0.968 in2) by a
minimum strip width of 20 mm (0.79 in) a minimum diameter of 28 mm (0.11 in) and in a maximum
of 25 mm + 5 mm (0.98 in + 0.063 in) depth depending of skin laminate thickness; skin laminate
thickness is 0.1 mm - 0.8 mm + 0.2 mm (0.004 in - 0.032 in. + 008 in).
(4) Type D
Delamination/disbondings may occur due to local impact damage (stone impact, dropped tools,
lightning strike, localised ground equipment impact, etc.). In these cases, the inspection is only required
following visible indications of damage on the surface of the part. For the maximum depth and
minimum size data see TASK SUPPORTING DATA, TASK SUPPORTING DATA and TASK
SUPPORTING DATA.
(1) Tooling :
98A57103013000 TAP TEST TOOL
99A55209001000 TAP TEST TOOL
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(2) References :
FIGURE 51-10-03-991-002-A - Tap Test Tool PN 98A57103013000
FIGURE 51-10-03-991-003-A - Tap Test Tool PN 99A55209001000
FIGURE 51-10-03-991-004-A - Marking of Minimum Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-03-991-005-A - Tap Test in Area Surrounding Visible Impact Damage
FIGURE 51-10-03-991-006-A - Tap Test Pattern in Example SSI Area
FIGURE 51-10-03-991-007-A - Inspection Outside of Minimum Inspection Area following
Delamination/Debonding Indications
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-03-281-001-A
WARNING : MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY DEVICES AND THE WARNING NOTICES ARE IN
POSITION BEFORE YOU START A TASK ON OR NEAR THE FLIGHT CONTROLS, THE
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES, THE LANDING GEAR AND RELATED DOORS AND
COMPONENTS THAT MOVE. MOVEMENT OF COMPONENTS CAN KILL OR CAUSE INJURY
TO PERSONS AND CAN CAUSE DAMAGE.
(1) For Accidental Damage Inspections

(a) Select the illustrations for the component to be inspected. See the relevant sections of the SRM.
(b) Locate the inspection area(s). See the visual inspection report.
(c) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean and smooth.
CAUTION : IT IS ESSENTIAL TO KNOW THE STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION BY REFERENCE TO

RELEVANT DRAWINGS.
(d) Mark the following on the surfaces of the component using a felt-tip pen (See FIGURE
51-10-03-991-004-A).
1 The minimum inspection area.
2 The position of internal structure elements.
(2) For MPD/SSI Related Inspections
(a) See the requirements in the relevant specific NTM inspection Tasks.
Subtask 51-10-03-283-001-A
B. Inspection
(1) General Procedure
CAUTION : DO NOT STRIKE THE SURFACE OF THE COMPONENT WITH TOO MUCH FORCE.
DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
(a) Using the TAP TEST TOOL (98A57103013000) (See FIGURE 51-10-03-991-002-A) or TAP
TEST TOOL (99A55209001000) (See FIGURE 51-10-03-991-003-A), tap the entire surface of
the inspection area in a grid pattern of approximately 10 mm (0.39 in) spacing (See FIGURE
51-10-03-991-005-A and FIGURE 51-10-03-991-006-A).
(b) The tapping action must be controlled so that the surface of the component is struck using a
light but firm action.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) Indications
CAUTION : CHANGES IN SKIN THICKNESS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE ELEMENTS WILL

PRODUCE DIFFERENT SOUND RESPONSES WHICH COULD BE CONFUSED
WITH DELAMINATION/DISBONDING INDICATIONS.
1 In areas where there is no disbonding, tapping the surface of the component will produce a
clear resonant sound.
2 In areas containing delamination/disbonding, tapping the surface will produce a dull sound.
(2) For the Inspection of Areas Surrounding Visible Impact Damage
(a) Inspect the entire surface of the minimum inspection area (See FIGURE 51-10-03-991-005-A).
(b) Using a felt-tip pen, mark the extent of any delamination/disbonding indications on the surface of
the component.
(c) If the delamination/disbonding indications extend to the edge of the minimum inspection area,
the inspection must be extended outside this area to determine the full extent of the
delamination/disbonding (See FIGURE 51-10-03-991-007-A).
(d) Record the position and area of all indicated delamination/disbonding.
(3) For the inspection of components in areas related to MPD, SSI requirements, see the relevant specific
NTM inspection Task, for:
- specific areas to be inspected,
- special inspection pattern requirements,
- special detection and acceptance requirements,
- any additional specific requirements.
Subtask 51-10-03-971-001-A
(1) All recorded delamination/disbonding areas must be assessed for acceptance or repair action, in
accordance with SRM requirements.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HONEYCOMB SANDWICH STRUCTURE MONOLITHIC STRUCTURE
TEST SURFACE
TYPE B TYPE D TYPE A
TYPE A
TYPE C TYPE A TYPE B TYPE B

02
01
HONEYCOMB
METALLIC
SUPPORT
OPPOSITE SKIN
OF TEST AREA
NOTE:
01 MAXIMUM DEPTH 25 mm (0.984 in) + 5 mm (0.197 in)
FOR DETECTION OF CORE DAMAGE
02 LIMITED FROM 0.1 mm (0.004 in) TO 0.8 mm (0.31 in) + 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
WELL BONDED AREA
EXTENTION OF FINDINGS:
2 2
MINIMUM 625 mm (0.969 in ) BY A MINIMUM STRIP WIDTH OF 20 mm (0.787 in) OR A
MINIMUM DIAMETER OF 28 mm (1.102 in).
L_NT_511003_1_0010101_01_01

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
80 mm
(3.15 in)
DIA 6 mm
(0.236 in)
20 mm
(0.787 in)
R 5 mm
(0.197 in)
MATERIAL: CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL, TEMPERED

(LN−1.4044; MIL−S−18732)
L_NT_511003_1_0020101_01_00
Figure 51-10-03-991-002-A SHEET 01 - Tap Page 5

Test Tool PN 98A57103013000 51-10-03-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
102 mm
1 (4.016 in) DIA 6.35 mm
1 (0.25 in)
12.7 mm
DIA 1.57 mm (0.5 in)
(0.062 in) 2
DIA 1.78 mm + 0.0 / − 0.05 mm

(0.07 in + 0.0 / − 0.002 in)
102 mm
ADHESIVE 08−017A (4.016 in)
A
DIA 12.7 mm
(0.5 in) 6.35 mm
(0.25 in)
R 1.5 mm
(0.059 in)
DIA 1.78 mm + 0.0 / − 0.05 mm

(0.07 in + 0.0 / − 0.002 in)
=
30.5 mm 12.7 mm
(1.18 in) (0.5 in)
=
10 mm R 2.3 mm
(0.394 in) (0.09 in)
R 6.35 mm
(0.25 in)
1 01
NOTE:
ITEM 1: MATERIAL 2024
ITEM 2: PIANO WIRE
01 PREFERRED TAPPING FACE
A
L_NT_511003_1_0030101_01_00

Test Tool PN 99A55209001000 51-10-03-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CL RIB X
MIN 100 mm
01
(3.94 in)
VISIBLE DAMAGE
AREA
MINIMUM
INSPECTION AREA PERIMETER
OF MINIMUM
INSPECTION AREA
INTERNAL STRUCTURE
ELEMENT
(RIB; SPAR; STGR)
NOTE:
01 MEASURED FROM LONGEST
AXIS OF VISIBLE DAMAGE AREA
L_NT_511003_1_0040101_01_00
Figure 51-10-03-991-004-A SHEET 01 - Marking Page 7

of Minimum Inspection Area 51-10-03-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MINIMUM PATH OF
INSPECTION AREA TAP TOOL
CENTER OF
TAPPING
AREA
VISIBLE DAMAGE
AREA
PERIMETER OF
MINIMUM
10 mm
INSPECTION AREA
(0.39 in)
10 mm
(0.39 in)
L_NT_511003_1_0050101_01_01

Test in Area Surrounding Visible Impact Damage 51-10-03-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TAPPING 10 mm
DIRECTION (0.394 in)
10 mm
(0.394 in)
10 mm
(0.394 in)
INSPECTION
AREA
L_NT_511003_1_0060101_01_00

Test Pattern in Example SSI Area 51-10-03-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MINIMUM CL RIB X
INSPECTION
AREA
VISIBLE DAMAGE EXTENDED INSPECTION

AREA TO DETERMINE FULL
EXTENT OF INDICATION
PERIMETER OF
MINIMUM INSPECTION
AREA
CL STGR Y
EXTENT OF
INDICATED
DELAMINATION
L_NT_511003_1_0070101_01_00

Inspection Outside of Minimum Inspection Area 51-10-03-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
following Delamination/Debonding Indications Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the measurement of the remaining structure thickness
in sheet and plate materials, after the removal of damage by blending .
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. For the measurement of the remaining thickness in large blended out areas see TASK 51-10-04-270-801-A01
B. For the measurement of the remaining thickness in small blended out areas see TASK 51-10-04-220-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-04-270-801-A-01
Measurement of Remaining Thickness in Large Blended Out Areas
WARNING : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE OILS AND GREASES. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL REGULATIONS. USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND
GLOVES. DO NOT GET OIL OR GREASE ON YOUR SKIN, IN YOUR EYES OR IN YOUR MOUTH. IF YOU
GET OIL OR GREASE ON YOUR SKIN, REMOVE IT WITH SOAP AND CLEAN WATER. IF YOU GET OIL
OR GREASE IN YOUR EYES OR IN YOUR MOUTH, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH CLEAN WATER. GET
MEDICAL AID. IN GENERAL, OILS AND GREASES ARE POISONOUS AND SKIN IRRITANTS.
Aircraft sheet and plate with thickness ≥ 0.6 mm (0.024 in) after the removal of damage by blending.
NOTE : In multi layer structures only the top sheet/plate can be measured from the blended side.
NOTE : In single layer structure, where access permits, measurement can be taken from both blended and non
blended sides.
Remaining material thickness which is not within the permissible limits.
(1) Material Reference :
TYPE REFERENCE DESIGNATION

Consumable 04-012 Pure Mineral Vaseline or Petro-Latum
(2) Tooling :
DA312 SEARCH UNIT
DA336 CABLE FOR DM3
DM3 ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASURING EQUIPMENT
(3) References :
TASK 51-10-04-220-801-A01 - Measurement of Remaining Thickness in Small Blended Out Areas
51-10-02-002-A - Preferred Inspection
FIGURE 51-10-04-991-001-A - Possible Calibration Block
FIGURE 51-10-04-991-002-A - Section of Noninspectable Structure
FIGURE 51-10-04-991-003-A - Search Unit Application in Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-04-991-004-A - Search Unit Application in Inspection Area
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-04-271-001-A
(1) Make sure that the corrosion has been completely removed (See 51-10-02-002-A ).
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(3) See the SRM to determine:
- configuration of the inspection area,
- nominal thickness of top element being inspected,
- permissible limits for remaining thickness.
NOTE : It is not possible to do the inspection if the inner face of the inspection area is wedge-shaped or
has changes of section (See FIGURE 51-10-04-991-001-A). In this case, mechanical
measurement must be used (See TASK 51-10-04-220-801-A01).
(4) For multi layer structure and single layer structure where access is not possible from the opposite side,
remove the paint from an adjacent area of nominal skin thickness to permit application of the search
unit.
Subtask 51-10-04-272-001-A
(1) Calibrate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) For a possible calibration block made of the same material as the inspection area see FIGURE
51-10-04-991-002-A .
CAUTION : WITH SOME EQUIPMENT, IN AREAS WHERE THERE IS A SECOND STRUCTURE LAYER,
WITH ADHESIVE BONDING OR SEALANT AT THE INTERFACE, INCORRECT READINGS
MAY BE OBTAINED.
(3) Connect the ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASURING EQUIPMENT (DM3) and the SEARCH UNIT
(DA312) with the CABLE FOR DM3 (DA336).
NOTE : Any ultrasonic thickness measurement equipment may be used provided that it fulfills the
(4) Use the calibration block related to the inspection area:
(a) Calibrate the instrument to the thickest step, representative of the inspection area.
(b) Check the calibration on the thinnest step, 0.6 mm (0.024 in) corresponding to the minimum
measurement limit.
Subtask 51-10-04-273-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) The reduction of the plate thickness is to be measured as a difference between non blended and blended
area.
(2) For multi layer and single layer where access is not possible from the opposite face, measure the
nominal thickness adjacent to the blended area (See FIGURE 51-10-04-991-003-A, Position A).
NOTE : If it is not possible to obtain a stable thickness reading, see the identification schemes of the
SRM for the nominal thickness value of the area.
(a) Measure the remaining thickness in blended area as shown in FIGURE 51-10-04-991-003-A,
Position B.
WARNING : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL NO. 04-012 PURE MINERAL
VASELINE OR PETRO-LATUM. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
1 Couple the search unit with Material No. Pure Mineral Vaseline or Petro-Latum(Material
No: 04-012 - basic) in two or more positions in the blended area and record the minimum
thickness indication.
NOTE : In large surface areas inspect as much of the blended area as possible using search
unit positions 10 mm (0.394 in) apart.
2 If it is not possible to obtain stable thickness readings in the blended area, use the
mechanical measurement (See TASK 51-10-04-220-801-A01).
(3) For single layer measurements where access is possible from the opposite face to the blended area,
measure the nominal thickness adjacent to the blended area (See FIGURE 51-10-04-991-004-A,
Position A).
(a) Measure the remaining thickness in blended area as shown in FIGURE 51-10-04-991-004-A,
Position B.
WARNING : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL NO. 04-012 PURE MINERAL
VASELINE OR PETRO-LATUM. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS.
1 Couple the search unit with Material No. Pure Mineral Vaseline or Petro-Latum(Material
No: 04-012 - basic) in two or more positions in the blended area and record the minimum
thickness indication.
NOTE : In large surface areas inspect as much of the blended area as possible using search
unit positions 10 mm (0.394 in) apart.
(4) Record the remaining sheet thickness values.
Subtask 51-10-04-971-001-A
(1) Record all measured values on the appropriate documentation.
Subtask 51-10-04-943-001-A
E. Final NDT Requirements
(1) Remove all ultrasonic couplant from the inspection area(s).
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TN = NOMINAL THICKNESS OF
TR
INSPECTION AREA
TN
TR = MINIMUM THICKNESS OF
INSPECTION AREA THAT
CAN BE MEASURED,
0.6 mm (0.024 in)
20 mm
(0.787 in) MATERIAL: SAME MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION AS
INSPECTION AREA
TOLERANCES FOR T AND T ± 0.05 mm (0.002 in)

N R
20 mm
(0.787 in)
40 mm
(1.575 in)
L_NT_511004_1_0010101_01_00

Calibration Block 51-10-04-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
AREA OF CORROSION REMOVAL
X X
A COMPONENT WITH WEDGE−SHAPED AREA
AREA OF CORROSION REMOVAL
X X X
SEALANT
B COMPONENT WITH ROUNDED AREA ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE
X: AREA WHICH CANNOT BE MEASURED L_NT_511004_1_0020101_01_00
Figure 51-10-04-991-002-A SHEET 01 - Section Page 5

of Noninspectable Structure 51-10-04-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A A
AREA OF PAINT REMOVAL
MEASUREMENT OF MEASUREMENT OF
NOMINAL THICKNESS REMAINING THICKNESS
POSITION A POSITION B
PAINT COAT
PAINT COAT TN
TR
MULTILAYER
STRUCTURE
SEALANT
10 mm
(0.394 in) PAINT COAT
A A
AREA OF PAINT REMOVAL; ADJACENT TO BLENDED AREA
AREA OF CORROSION REMOVAL; BLENDED AREA
PAINT COAT
TN = NOMINAL THICKNESS
TR = REMAINING SKIN THICKNESS

L_NT_511004_1_0030101_01_00
Figure 51-10-04-991-003-A SHEET 01 - Search Page 6

Unit Application in Inspection Area 51-10-04-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A A
PAINT COAT PAINT COAT
10 mm
(0.394 in)
SINGLE
LAYER
STRUCTURE
PAINT COAT
TR TN
MEASUREMENT OF MEASUREMENT OF
NOMINAL THICKNESS REMAINING THICKNESS
A A
AREA OF CORROSION REMOVAL; BLENDED AREA
PAINT COAT
TN : NOMINAL THICKNESS
TR : REMAINING SKIN THICKNESS

L_NT_511004_1_0040101_01_00

Unit Application in Inspection Area 51-10-04-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-04-220-801-A-01
Measurement of Remaining Thickness in Small Blended Out Areas
Aircraft structure after the removal of corrosion in small, local areas. For larger areas, use the ultrasonic
procedure (See TASK 51-10-04-270-801-A01) where possible.
(1) Type and Location of Damage
- In sheet and plate materials, remaining material which is not within the permissible limits.
- In any structural part, the depth of a blended out area, where corrosion has been removed.
(1) References :
TASK 51-10-04-270-801-A01 - Measurement of Remaining Thickness in Large Blended Out Areas
51-10-02-002-A - Preferred Inspection
SRM 51-74-00
FIGURE 51-10-04-991-005-A - Measurement using a Feeler Gauge
FIGURE 51-10-04-991-006-A - Measurement using a Dial Gauge
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-04-221-001-A
(1) Make sure that the corrosion has been completely removed (See SRM 51-74-00 and 51-10-02-002-A).
(2) Remove the paint, adjacent to the blended area, over an area large enough to permit the straight edge,
or dial gauge, to be positioned.
(3) Make sure that the inspection area is clean.
(4) See the SRM to determine:
- configuration of the inspection area,
- nominal thickness of top element being inspected,
- permissible limits for remaining thickness.
Subtask 51-10-04-222-001-A
B. Inspection
(1) Measurement using Feeler Gauges
(a) Use a Feeler Gauge Set with a measurement range between 0.05 mm and 1 mm (0.002 in and
0.039 in) in 0.05 mm (0.002 in) steps (See FIGURE 51-10-04-991-005-A).
(b) Position a straight edge over the blended area as shown in FIGURE 51-10-04-991-005-A.
(c) Measure the maximum gap between the straight edge and the deepest part of the blended area
(See FIGURE 51-10-04-991-005-A, Section A-A).
NOTE : If the area of blend is too small to allow the use of Feeler Gauges, use the Dial Gauge
method.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(2) Measurement using a Dial Gauge
(a) Use a Dial Gauge with a measurement range of 0 to 10 mm (0 to 0.394 in) and a measurement
accuracy of ± 0.05 mm (± 0.002 in) (See FIGURE 51-10-04-991-006-A).
(b) Position the Dial Gauge over the blended area as shown in FIGURE 51-10-04-991-006-A.
(c) Take measurements at several different points to determine the maximum depth of the blend.
(3) Determination of Remaining Sheet Thickness
(a) Determine the nominal thickness of the sheet:
- See TASK 51-10-04-270-801-A01.
or
- See the SRM for sheet thickness values.
(b) Calculate the remaining sheet thickness by subtracting the maximum depth of material removed
from the nominal sheet thickness.
Subtask 51-10-04-971-002-A
(1) Record all measured values on the appropriate documentation.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
C
AREA WHERE YOU MUST
REMOVE THE PAINT
C CORRECT USE OF THE FEELER GAUGE
SKIN
STRAIGHT EDGE STRAIGHT EDGE
FLAT ON SKIN FEELER GAUGE
A CORRECT POSITION C C
OF THE STRAIGHT EDGE
INCORRECT USE OF THE FEELER GAUGE
SKIN GAP
STRAIGHT EDGE
FEELER GAUGE
C C
STRAIGHT EDGE STRAIGHT EDGE NOT

FLAT ON SKIN
AREA IN WHICH
CORROSION IS
SKIN
REMOVED
INCORRECT POSITION
B OF THE STRAIGHT EDGE D D
L_NT_511004_1_0050101_01_00

Measurement using a Feeler Gauge 51-10-04-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
DIAL GAUGE
MAX 40 mm
(1.575 in) MEASURING
STAND
C
BASE FLAT
ON SKIN SKIN
AREA WHERE YOU MUST

A APPLY THE DIAL GAUGE IN THIS POSITION REMOVE THE PAINT
C C
DIAL GAUGE
MEASURING
STAND
D BASE NOT FLAT
ON SKIN
SKIN
B DO NOT APPLY THE DIAL GAUGE IN THIS POSITION D D

L_NT_511004_1_0060101_01_00

Measurement using a Dial Gauge 51-10-04-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the general requirements to inspect monolithic carbon fiber aircraft structures,
following visible indications of accidental damage.
B. The inspection is required to detect delamination, following visible indications of impact damage or surface
bulging. For possible affected structures, see the relevant component illustrations in the SRM.
NOTE : This general procedure does not apply to extensive damage caused by severe collisions etc. Extensive
damage will be dealt with on a case-by-case basis. For the inspection of honeycomb sandwich
composite parts, see 51-10-03-002-A or 51-10-03-003-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-06-270-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-06-270-801-A-01
Accidental Damage - General NDT Procedure for the Inspection of Carbon Fiber Monolithic Structure
This procedure provides the general requirements to inspect monolithic construction carbon fiber composite
structures, up to a maximum nominal skin thickness of 10 mm (0.394 in) for Tape material and up to 20 mm
(0.787 in) for Fabric material.
The inspection is confined to local areas surrounding visible accidental damage.
NOTE : This procedure is not intended for large area inspections. For such inspections, an Ultrasonic scanning
system is recommended (See 51-44-00-001 and 51-44-01).
See FIGURE 51-10-06-991-001-A
(1) Extend of Damage
Delamination damage ≥ 25 mm (1.0 in) diameter.
- Delamination or cracking may occur due to local impact damage (stone impact, dropped tools,
lightning strike, bird or hail strike, localized ground equipment impact). In these cases, inspection is
only required following visible indications of damage on the surface of the part.
(1) Tooling :
M206RBDLH2-20 SEARCH UNIT
PSR5-15R20 SEARCH UNIT
USD10 ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT
(2) References :
51-44-01
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-002-A - Calibration Block Set
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-003-A - Example of Marking Minimum Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-004-A - Calibration on TAPE Material Blocks PN 99D55109001000
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-005-A - Calibration on FABRIC Material for 0-10 mm Thickness Range using 1
mm, 5 mm and 9 mm Sheets from Calibration Block Set PN 99D51407291001
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-006-A - Calibration on FABRIC Material for 0-20 mm Thickness Range using
complete Calibration Block Set PN 99D51407291001
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-007-A - Scanning Pattern and CRT Screen Indications
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-008-A - CRT Screen Indications in Inspection Area with loss of BS Signal
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-009-A - Inspection of Outside of Minimum Inspection Area following
Delamination Indications
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-06-271-001-A
CAUTION : IT IS ESSENTIAL TO KNOW THE STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION BY REFERENCE TO THE

ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE COMPONENT IN THE STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL.
(1) Select the illustration for the component to be inspected. See the relevant sections of the SRM.
(2) Locate the inspection area(s). See the visual inspection report.
(3) Visually inspect the surface of the inspection area surrounding the visible damage, for any condition
that may prevent Ultrasonic inspection - SKYDROL contamination, burning, surface abrasions etc.
(4) Ensure that the surface of the inspection area is clean and smooth, remove any loose or flaking paint.
(5) Mark the following on the surface of the part, using a water soluble ink felt tip pen (See FIGURE
51-10-06-991-003-A and to the relevant component illustration):
- The minimum inspection area,
- The position of any internal structure elements,
- The nominal skin thickness in the inspection area.
Subtask 51-10-06-272-001-A
(1) Identify the inspection area, determine the type of material used (Tape or Fabric) and the nominal
thicknesses of the part, refer to relevant sections in the SRM.
NOTE : The instrument calibration is divided into three parts which are related to the type of material
and the nominal thicknesses in the inspection area:
LIST STRUCTURE: Tape material: 0-10 mm (0-0.394 in) thickness
LIST STRUCTURE: Fabric material: 0-10 mm (0-0.394 in) thickness
LIST STRUCTURE: Fabric material: 0-20 mm (0-0.787 in) thickness
(2) Operate the instrument in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Connect the SEARCH UNIT (M206RBDLH2-20) (5 MHz, DIA 12.7 mm (0.5 in), with 20 mm (0.79 in)
delay shoe) or the SEARCH UNIT (PSR5-15R20) (5 MHz, DIA 15 mm (0.59 in), with 20 mm (0.79 in)
delay shoe) with the ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (USD10)
NOTE : Any ultrasonic search unit and instrument may be used provided that they fulfill the
(4) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK SET (99D55109001000) (See FIGURE 51-10-06-991-002-A) for Tape
material up to 10 mm (0.394 in) thickness.
NOTE : Any calibration block may be used provided that it fulfill the requirements of this procedure.
(a) Select 10 mm (0.394 in) Test Range.
(b) Select 2 - 2.5 MHz operating frequency.
NOTE : For this inspection, the ultrasonic instrument must be set to an operating frequency of 2 -
2.5 MHz, to give optimum performance from the 5 MHz search unit.
(c) Couple the search unit in the center of the painted side of the 3 mm (0.118 in) nominal thickness
calibration block.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(d) Select the Rectified Mode which gives the best back surface signal response (See FIGURE
51-10-06-991-004-A). (Usually this will be the negative half wave display mode).
(e) Set the Delay and Range controls so that the signal from the end of the delay shoe is at 0 on the
instrument screen time base and the first back surface signal is at 3.0 (See FIGURE
51-10-06-991-004-A, Detail A).
(f) Adjust the Gain control to bring the amplitude of the first back surface signal to 60% Full Screen
Height (FSH).
(g) Couple the search unit on each of the remaining calibration blocks and ensure that the positions
of the first back surface signals correspond approximately to the calibration block thicknesses
(See FIGURE 51-10-06-991-004-A, Detail B).
(5) For Fabric material up to 10 mm (0.394 in) thickness, using Sheet thickness 1 mm (0.039 in), 5 mm
(0.197 in) and 9 mm (0.354 in) from the CALIBRATION BLOCK SET (99D51407291001) (See
FIGURE 51-10-06-991-002-A).
calibration block.
CRT screen time base and the first back surface signal is at 5.0 (See FIGURE 51-10-06-991-005-
A, Detail A).
Height (FSH).
(6) Use the complete CALIBRATION BLOCK SET (99D51407291001) (See FIGURE 51-10-06-991-002-A)
for Fabric material up to 20 mm (0.787 in.) thickness.
calibration block.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
instrument screen time base and the first back surface signal is at 4.5 (See FIGURE
51-10-06-991-006-A, Detail A).
Height (FSH).
NOTE : On the 1 mm (0.039 in) calibration block, the first back surface signal should be at 0.5
on the instrument screen time base, but may be obscured by the FS signal - in either
case, repeat signals, with reducing amplitudes, should be apparent at approximately 1 and
1.5.
Subtask 51-10-06-273-001-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : SIGNALS ON THE CRT SCREEN TIME BASE, CAUSED BY CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL
THICKNESS, COULD BE CONFUSED WITH DELAMINATION INDICATIONS. IT IS
ESSENTIAL TO KNOW THE NOMINAL THICKNESS CHANGES IN THE INSPECTION AREA
AND TO ANTICIPATE THE EXPECTED SIGNAL POSITIONS ON THE CRT SCREEN TIME
BASE.
(1) Couple the search unit to the outer surface of the component, on the perimeter of the minimum
inspection area, away from internal structures, in an area of known nominal skin thickness.
(2) Check that the first back surface signal appears on the instrument screen time base at a position that
corresponds approximately to the nominal thickness of the part.
(3) Adjust the Gain control, if necessary, to bring the signal amplitude to 80% FSH.
(4) Scan the inspection area in the region of skin section changes and internal structure, to confirm their
positions accurately, relative to the previously marked positions on the surface of the component.
(5) Scan the entire surface of the minimum inspection area, scanning the search unit from the perimeter
inwards, towards the visible damage.
NOTE : It may be necessary to adjust the signal amplitude during scanning, to ensure that a clear
signal of at least 60% FSH (with a signal-to-noise ratio greater than 3:1) is maintained when
moving from one nominal thickness area to an area of different thickness.
(6) Signal Interpretation (See FIGURE 51-10-06-991-007-A and FIGURE 51-10-06-991-008-A)
(a) Delamination will be indicated by a clear signal on the instrument screen time base, between the
FS signal and the BS signal for the thickness of the part (See the example in FIGURE
51-10-06-991-007-A, Detail C).
NOTE : There will be a change over effect when scanning from a good area onto a delaminated
area, the back signal will reduce in amplitude and will disappear completely as the
delamination signal rises (See the example in FIGURE 51-10-06-991-007-A, Detail B).
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(b) If the BS signal disappears completely, and there are no intermediate signals on the instrument
screen time base , or there are signals close to FS signal, this can be due to:
1 Scanning the search unit onto an area of increased thickness, outside the calibration range
(Rib, Stringer etc.). Check the illustration for the part to re-confirm the structure layout
(See the example in FIGURE 51-10-06-991-008-A, Detail A).
2 Delamination near to the outer surface of the component. Check the FS signal for a change
of shape, an increase of signal width and, possible repeat signals with decreasing amplitudes
between the FS signal and approximately 2 on the instrument screen time base (See the
example in FIGURE 51-10-06-991-008-A, Detail B).
3 In some cases delaminated areas can give multiple intermediate signals between the FS and
BS signal positions, this should be interpreted as multiple delamination within the thickness
of the part (See the example in FIGURE 51-10-06-991-008-A, Detail C).
NOTE : When calibrated for inspection of Fabric parts with a thickness range of 0-20 mm
(0-0.787 in), if you have signals near to the FS signal, it may be necessary to re-
calibrate to 10 mm (0.394 in) range to evaluate the near surface area accurately.
(c) When scanning the search unit from a skin area to a position over an area of increased thickness
caused by internal structure (e.g. Rib or Stringer Flange), the BS signal should move further
along the time base due to the increase in thickness or, may disappear as it may be outside the
calibrated thickness range.
1 If the BS signal remains in a similar position on the instrument screen time base, to the
nominal thickness of the adjacent skin area, this indicates that the internal flange of the
Rib or Stringer has separated from the skin - this condition must be reported.
(7) Assessment of Area of Delamination
(a) Mark the central position of the search unit, on the surface of the component, at all points where
change over signals occur, as shown in the example instrument screen display (See FIGURE
51-10-06-991-007-A, Detail B).
NOTE : The position of the search unit should be marked at the point where the delamination
signal first appears on the instrument screen when scanning from an area of nominal
thickness onto a delaminated area.
(b) Connect the markings to define the shape and area of the delamination.
(8) If the delamination indications extend up to the perimeter of the minimum inspection area, the
inspection must be extended outside the area to determine the full shape and extent (See the example
shown in FIGURE 51-10-06-991-009-A).
Subtask 51-10-06-971-001-A
(1) The shape and area of all delamination indications must be recorded on the appropriate documentation.
(2) All recorded delamination indications must be assessed for acceptance or repair action, in accordance
with SRM requirements.
Subtask 51-10-06-943-001-A
(1) Remove the couplant from the surface of the component.
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
DELAMINATION
NEAR BACK MID NEAR FRONT

T1 SURFACE SECTION SURFACE T2
PAINT LAYER
BASIC BASIC
SKIN SKIN
STIFFENER DELAMINATION AT INTERFACE

BETWEEN SKIN AND
INTERNAL STRUCTURE
SPAR
A POSSIBLE DAMAGE LOCATION
VISIBLE IMPACT DAMAGE PAINT LAYER

DELAMINATION
CFRP
CRACK PLIES
FIR TREE−DELAMINATION
POSSIBLE RUPTURE WITH INTER PLY CRACKS
OF INNER SURFACE
B EFFECT OF IMPACT DAMAGE
L_NT_511006_1_0010101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FINISH: PAINTED ON ONE SIDE TO

AIRBUS SPECIFICATION
01 ADJUSTMENT CIRCLE
65 mm
80 mm (2.56 in)
(3.15 in) 01
30 mm
(1.18 in)
NOMINAL THICKNESS
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
SHEET THICKNESS
PAINTED
SURFACE
99D51407291001
MULTIDIRECTIONAL FABRIC
BLOCK NOMINAL THICKNESS
99D55109001000
NO. mm in
MULTIDIRECTIONAL TAPE
01 1 0.039
BLOCK NOMINAL THICKNESS
NO. mm in 02 3 0.118
01 1 0.039 03 5 0.197
02 3 0.118 04 9 0.354
03 5 0.197 05 15 0.591
04 7 0.276 06 19 0.748
NOTE: CALIBRATION BLOCK SET

99D51407291000 CAN ALSO BE
USED, IF AVAILABLE
L_NT_511006_1_0020101_01_01

Calibration Block Set 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CL RIB X
100 mm MIN
01
(3.94 in)
VISIBLE DAMAGE
AREA
MINIMUM
3.0 mm
INSPECTION AREA
PERIMETER
OF MINIMUM
INSPECTION AREA
2.3 mm
CL STGR Y
NOTE:
MEASURED EACH SIDE OF LONG 2.6 mm
01
AXIS OF VISIBLE DAMAGE AREA
X.X mm NOMINAL SHEET THICKNESS L_NT_511006_1_0030101_01_00

of Marking Minimum Inspection Area 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CALIBRATION ON 3 mm BLOCK
FS
− 60%
BS 3 mm SCREEN
HEIGHT
(AMPLITUDE)
FS = FRONT SURFACE
BS = BACK SURFACE
R = REPEAT SIGNAL R
0 2 4 6 8 10 CRT SCREEN TIME

BASE SCALE
3 CALIBRATION BLOCK
THICKNESS (mm)
A
CHECK CALIBRATION ON 1, 5 AND 7 mm

BLOCK
FS
BS 1 mm
BS 3 mm
BS 5 mm
R R BS 7 mm
1 mm 3 mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 CALIBRATION BLOCK
THICKNESS (mm)
L_NT_511006_1_0040101_01_00

Calibration on TAPE Material Blocks PN 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
99D55109001000 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FS
− 60%
BS 5 mm SCREEN
HEIGHT
(AMPLITUDE)
FS = FRONT SURFACE
BS = BACK SURFACE
R = REPEAT SIGNAL

BASE SCALE
5 CALIBRATION BLOCK
THICKNESS (mm)
A
CHECK CALIBRATION ON 1 AND 9 mm
BLOCK
FS BS 1 mm
BS 5 mm
R 1 mm
BS 9 mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
1 5 9 CALIBRATION BLOCK
THICKNESS (mm)
L_NT_511006_1_0050101_01_00

Calibration on FABRIC Material for 0-10 mm 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Thickness Range using 1 mm, 5 mm and 9 mm Revision n˚: 79
Sheets from Calibration Block Set PN
99D51407291001
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FS
− 60%
BS 9 mm SCREEN
HEIGHT
(AMPLITUDE)
FS = FRONT SURFACE
BS = BACK SURFACE
R = REPEAT SIGNAL

BASE SCALE
9 CALIBRATION BLOCK
THICKNESS (mm)
A
CHECK CALIBRATION ON 1, 5, 15 AND 19 mm

BLOCK
FS BS 1 mm
BS 5 mm
BS 9 mm
R BS 15 mm
1 mm
BS 19 mm
0 2 4 6 8 10
1 5 9 15 19 CALIBRATION BLOCK
THICKNESS (mm)
L_NT_511006_1_0060101_01_00

Calibration on FABRIC Material for 0-20 mm 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Thickness Range using complete Calibration Revision n˚: 79
Block Set PN 99D51407291001
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PERIMETER OF SEARCH UNIT
MINIMUM INSPECTION 5 mm
AREA FS (0.196 in)
15 mm
(0.59 in)
SCANNING A B
PITCH BS
C FS
− 80%
BS
DELAMINATION
FS=FRONT SURFACE 0 2 4 6 8 10
BS=BACK SURFACE
DS=DELAMINATION SIGNAL SEARCH UNIT POSITION−
R =REPEAT SIGNAL A NO DELAMINATION
SEARCH UNIT SCAN DIRECTION VISIBLE
SEARCH UNIT DAMAGE SEARCH UNIT
3 mm
FS (0.118 in) FS
BS BS
FS
DS
FS DS BS
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
SEARCH UNIT POSITION SEARCH UNIT POSITION
B AT EDGE OF DELAMINATION C ON DELAMINATION
L_NT_511006_1_0070101_01_00

Scanning Pattern and CRT Screen Indications 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SEARCH UNIT
12 mm
FS (0.472 in) FS
NO INTERMEDIATE SIGNALS
BS (12 mm)
SIGNAL
BS OFF SCREEN
SECTION TOO THICK
BS DISAPPEARED
A FOR CALIBRATION
RANGE
0 2 4 6 8 10
FS (MODIFIED DUE TO NEAR SURFACE DELAMINATION)

SEARCH UNIT
5 mm
FS (0.197 in)
REPEAT SIGNALS
FROM DELAMINATION
BS
NEAR SURFACE BS DISAPPEARED

B DELAMINATION
0 2 4 6 8 10
SEARCH UNIT MULTIPLE INTERMEDIATE SIGNALS

FS
5 mm
FS (0.197 in)
BS
BS DISAPPEARED
C MULTIPLE DELAMINATION
0 2 4 6 8 10
NOTE: THICKNESS UP TO 10 mm (0.394 in)
SHOWN RESPONSE IS SIMILAR FOR
UP TO 20 mm (0.787 in)
L_NT_511006_1_0080101_01_00
Figure 51-10-06-991-008-A SHEET 01 - CRT Page 13

Screen Indications in Inspection Area with loss of 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
BS Signal Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MINIMUM CL RIB X
INSPECTION
AREA
VISIBLE DAMAGE EXTENDED INSPECTION

AREA TO DETERMINE FULL
EXTENT OF INDICATION
PERIMETER OF
MINIMUM INSPECTION
AREA
CL STGR Y
EXTENT OF
INDICATED
DELAMINATION
L_NT_511006_1_0090101_01_00

Inspection of Outside of Minimum Inspection 51-10-06-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Area following Delamination Indications Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provide the standard requirements to evaluate the length of cracks/surface breaking cracks.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. For ultrasonic evaluation of crack length see TASK 51-10-07-270-801-A01.
NOTE : The method used is the 6 dB drop-half-value method.

B. For eddy current evaluation of surface breaking cracks see TASK 51-10-07-250-801-A01.
NOTE : The method used is a high-frequency eddy current method.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-07-270-801-A-01
Ultrasonic Evaluation of Crack Length
These procedures provide the standard requirements to evaluate the length of cracks/surface breaking cracks.
None
(1) References :
FIGURE 51-10-07-991-001-A - Evaluation Principle
FIGURE 51-10-07-991-003-A - Evaluation Principle
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-07-271-001-A
(1) See related specific Task.
Subtask 51-10-07-272-001-A
Subtask 51-10-07-273-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) To evaluate the length of crack indications extending from fastener holes, apertures etc.
(a) Direct the beam axis towards the center line of the hole, optimize the echo from the front edge of
the hole and note the position of the echo on the time base of the instrument screen (See
FIGURE 51-10-07-991-001-A, View A).
(b) Slide the search unit to the left and/or right of the hole (in the direction of the indicated crack)
and observe the changeover signal from the hole to the crack (See FIGURE 51-10-07-991-001-A,
View B and the first of below NOTES).
(c) Adjust the search unit position forward to obtain the maximum crack echo amplitude. If
necessary, adjust the gain to bring the crack echo to 80% full screen height (FSH) (See FIGURE
51-10-07-991-001-A, View C).
(d) Continue to slide the search unit (in the direction of the crack) until the echo from the crack
reduces to 40% FSH (6 dB drop) -- 50% of original value. Mark the position of the search unit
center line (CL) on the surface of the inspection area (See FIGURE 51-10-07-991-001-A, View
D). The distance (L) from the edge of the hole to surface mark is to be recorded as the crack
length (See the second NOTE).
NOTE : It is essential to keep the search unit movement parallel to the crack orientation and to
keep the distance between the search unit and the crack as constant as possible.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
NOTE : For the evaluation of crack length, where a crack extends from each side of a fastener
hole or from different points around the circumference of a fastener hole, the length and
direction of each crack must be assessed (See FIGURE 51-10-07-991-003-A, View A).
(2) To evaluate the length of an indicated crack in an area not related to a fastener hole, proceed as
follows:
(a) Direct the beam axis towards the indicated crack. Slide the search unit to the left and right until
the maximum amplitude echo is achieved on the instrument screen. Adjust the gain to bring the
crack echo to 80% full screen height (FSH) (See FIGURE 51-10-07-991-003-A, View B).
(b) Slide the search unit to the left and right of this position, following the direction of the crack,
until the echo from the crack reduces to 40% FSH (6 dB drop) -- 50% of original value. Mark the
position of the search unit center line (CL) on the surface of the inspection area, at the LH and
RH limits (See FIGURE 51-10-07-991-003-A, View C). The distance (L) between the LH and RH
limit marks is to be recorded as the crack length.
Subtask 51-10-07-971-001-A
Subtask 51-10-07-943-001-A
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HOLE CRACK
ECHO FROM
EDGE OF HOLE
BEAM AXIS
A OPTIMIZE ECHO
SEARCH UNIT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CRACK
ECHO
HOLE
ECHO
CHANGE OVER
B SIGNAL
MOVEMENT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
80%
FSH
SEARCH UNIT
MOVEMENT
FOREWARD
MAXIMUM CRACK
C ECHO AMPLITUDE
SEARCH UNIT
MOVEMENT
SIDEWAYS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L (mm)
MARK
40%
D 6 db DROP
SEARCH UNIT FSH
MOVEMENT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L_NT_511007_1_0010101_01_00

Evaluation Principle 51-10-07-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
L 2
A m)
L1 L2 L1 (m
ASSESSMENT AT
DIFFERENT POINTS (mm) (mm) (mm)
CRACK CRACK
ECHO
80%
FSH
B
OPTIMIZE ECHO
SEARCH UNIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
L
RH LIMIT (mm) RH LIMIT
MARK MARK
C 40%
6 db DROP FSH
LH RH 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEARCH UNIT MOVEMENT
L_NT_511007_1_0030101_01_00

Evaluation Principle 51-10-07-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-07-250-801-A-01
Eddy Current Evaluation of Surface Breaking Cracks
Evaluation of the length of surface breaking cracks detected when using a high-frequency eddy current
(HFEC) inspection.
None
(1) References :
TASK 51-10-08-250-802-A01 - HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Aluminum or Titanium
Alloy Materials (Using Meter Needle Instrument) - Procedure A
FIGURE 51-10-07-991-004-A - Evaluation of Crack Length from a Hole (or Fastener)
FIGURE 51-10-07-991-005-A - Evaluation of Crack Length in Areas not related to a Hole
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-07-251-001-A
(2) See TASK 51-10-08-250-802-A01.
Subtask 51-10-07-252-001-A
NOTE : The use of a shielded probe is recommended to ensure accurate crack length evaluation.
(2) See TASK 51-10-08-250-802-A01.
Subtask 51-10-07-253-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) To evaluate the length of crack indications extending from holes or bores see FIGURE
51-10-07-991-004-A.
(a) Start the probe scan adjacent to the hole (or fastener) and scan away from the hole (or fastener)
across the crack, using 1 mm (0.039 in) parallel scans, to the point where the instrument
indication reduces to normal.
(b) Measure the crack length from the edge of the hole.
NOTE : For the evaluation of crack length, where a crack extends from each side of a hole or
from different points around the circumference of a hole, the length and direction of each
crack must be assessed (See FIGURE 51-10-07-991-004-A).
(2) To evaluate the length of crack indications in areas not related to holes see FIGURE 51-10-07-991-005-
A.
(a) Scan the probe across the crack to locate the point where the maximum instrument response to
the crack is obtained.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(b) From the point of maximum indication, scan across the crack to each side of the maximum
indication, using 1 mm (0.039 in) parallel scans, to the point where the instrument indication
reduces to normal.
Subtask 51-10-07-971-002-A
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
L 2 PROBE
L1 L2 L1 )
(mm
(mm) (mm) (mm)
PARALLEL PROBE SCAN

AT APPROXIMATELY
1 mm (0.039 in) PITCH, ACROSS
THE CRACK, STARTING MARK
ADJACENT TO THE HOLE
OR FASTENER 1 mm
MARK THE PROBE POSITION
(0.039 in)
AT THE POINT WHERE
CRACK LENGTH THE CRACK INDICATION
REDUCES TO NORMAL
L_NT_511007_1_0040101_01_00

Evaluation of Crack Length from a Hole (or 51-10-07-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Fastener) Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MARK
PROBE
POSITION OF
MAXIMUM CRACK
INDICATION
PARALLEL PROBE SCAN

AT APPROXIMATELY
THE CRACK, TO EACH SIDE
OF THE MAXIMUM
CRACK INDICATION
MARK
1 mm MARK THE PROBE POSITION
(0.039 in) AT THE POINT WHERE
CRACK LENGTH THE CRACK INDICATION
REDUCES TO NORMAL
L_NT_511007_1_0050101_01_00

Evaluation of Crack Length in Areas not related 51-10-07-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
to a Hole Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements to inspect for surface breaking cracks in aluminum or
titanium alloy materials, using high-frequency eddy current equipment, having a meter display and in
aluminum alloy and GLARE materials using impedance plane equipment.
NOTE : This general Task does not apply to the inspection of more complex structure areas. These areas are
covered by specific NDT procedures in various Tasks.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-08-250-802-A01 for PROCEDURE A.
B. See TASK 51-10-08-250-803-A01 for PROCEDURE B.
C. See TASK 51-10-08-250-804 for PROCEDURE C.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-08-250-802-A-01
HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Aluminum or Titanium Alloy Materials (Using Meter Needle Instrument)
- Procedure A
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT APPLICABLE TO A380 PYLONS.
Aluminum or titanium alloy aircraft structure for surface breaking cracks.

Fatigue cracks ≥ 2 mm (0.079 in) in length of the top Al-layer (internal/external) starting from (See FIGURE
51-10-08-991-022-A):
- The edges of a fastener hole, at the head or tail end of the fastener and extending radially away from the
fastener hole.
- Extending from underneath doubler areas.
- In the skin and radius, away from fasteners.
- Free edge in covered structure.
- Radii.
(1) Tooling :
106P4 PROBE
2-835-01-9330 CALIBRATION BLOCK
(2) References :
TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01 - Coating Thickness Measurement
TASK 51-10-07-250-801-A01 - Eddy Current Evaluation of Surface Breaking Cracks
TASK 51-10-07-270-801-A01 - Ultrasonic Evaluation of Crack Length
51-61-01-001-A - Eddy Current - High Frequency Instruments
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-005-A - Procedure to Scan Round, Flush Fitting Fastener Heads, using Circle
Template Probe Guide
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-006-A - Typical Procedure to Scan Round, Raised Fastener Heads or Tails, using
the Head, Tail or Washer as a Probe Guide
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-007-A - Typical Procedure to Scan Areas adjacent to Section Changes or
Doublers, using the Section Change to Guide Probe
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-008-A - Typical Procedure to Scan Open Surface Areas away from Fasteners or
Section Changes
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-08-251-002-A
(1) See related specific procedures in various Tasks, for any special aircraft preparation and access
instructions, where applicable.
(3) If the inspection area is painted, the thickness of the paint must be measured (See TASK
51-10-00-250-801-A01).
(a) If the paint thickness in the inspection area is ≥ 350 µm, the inspection cannot be done. The
paint must be stripped or reduced in thickness to ≤ 350 µm (See SRM 51-75-11).
(b) If the paint thickness is ≤ 350 µm, plastic foils corresponding to the paint thickness (± 30 µm),
must be placed on the surface of the calibration block during the adjustment steps of SUBTASK
252-002-A.
NOTE : Variations in paint thickness between the lift-off and zero calibration points, adjacent to
the inspection area, must not be ≥ 50 µm.
Subtask 51-10-08-252-002-A
(1) Use the calibration block from the relevant material (CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-551) for aluminum
see 51-63-01-001-A or CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-835-01-9330) for titanium see 51-63-01-001-A to
calibrate the instrument for lift off and zero in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE : Any aluminum or titanium calibration block may be used provided that they meet the
(2) Connect the PROBE (106P4) see 51-62-01-001-A, TYPE B with the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT
LOCATOR (TYPEUH) see 51-61-01-001-A.
NOTE : Any high frequency eddy current probe or instrument may be used provided that they meet the
(3) Position the probe directly over the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot in the calibration block and adjust the
instrument sensitivity so that the meter needle is at 100% full scale.
NOTE : Some specific procedures of various Tasks may contain different calibration requirements.
Subtask 51-10-08-253-002-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : IF THIS PROCEDURE IS USED WHERE BLENDING HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT ON
ALUMINUM CLAD MATERIALS, THE INFLUENCE OF THE CLADDING AT THE PERIMETER
OF THE BLENDED AREA WILL AFFECT THE METER INDICATIONS.
(1) Place the probe on a calibration point, adjacent to the inspection area and reset lift-off and zero as
necessary.
(2) Carefully scan the surface of the inspection area, using the probe scanning patterns depending on the
configuration (See FIGURE 51-10-08-991-005-A, FIGURE 51-10-08-991-006-A, FIGURE
51-10-08-991-007-A and FIGURE 51-10-08-991-008-A).
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(3) Cracks will be indicated by a sharp meter needle deflection to the right ≥ 20% of full scale.
(4) Measure the length of all detected cracks (where possible) (See TASK 51-10-07-250-801-A01 or TASK
51-10-07-270-801-A01).
Subtask 51-10-08-971-002-A
(1) All sharp meter needle deflections to the right, ≥ 20% of full scale, are to be classified as cracks and
must be recorded in the appropriate documentation.
(2) See specific related Tasks or related Service Bulletin for applicable action.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE FATIGUE CRACKS
POSSIBLE
FATIGUE
CRACKS
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
A
>
− 2 mm
>
− 2 mm (0.079 in)
(0.079 in) >
− 2 mm
(0.079 in)
>
− 2 mm
01 (0.079 in)
A
>
− 0.5 mm
>
−1 mm (0.020 in)
(0.039 in) >
− 2 mm
(0.079 in)
A A
POSSIBLE FATIGUE CRACK
>
− 2 mm
A (0.079 in)
>
− 0.5 mm
(0.020 in)
A
NOTE:
01 EDGE CRACKS CAN OCCUR IN ANY LAYER.
POSSIBLE FATIGUE CRACK.

L_NT_511008_1_0220101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
APPROXIMATE PROBE
POSITION FOR LIFT OFF
AND ZERO CHECK
DRAFTSMAN’S PROBE
CIRCLE TEMPLATE FLUSH HEAD
FASTENER
CIRCLE TEMPLATE
DETECTABLE
CRACK LENGTH
PROBE
POSSIBLE CRACK
POSITION A A
NOTE: THE TEMPLATE HOLE

DIAMETER MUST BE
AT LEAST EQUAL TO
THE DIAMETER OF
A THE FASTENER HEAD
PLUS 2x THE DIAMETER
OF THE PROBE SO
THAT THE EDGE OF
THE PROBE IS AS
CLOSE AS POSSIBLE
A TO THE EDGE OF THE
FASTENER HEAD
SCAN THE PROBE
AROUND THE FASTENER
HEAD USING THE EDGE
OF THE TEMPLATE HOLE
B TO MAINTAIN THE PROBE
POSITION L_NT_511008_1_0050101_01_00

Procedure to Scan Round, Flush Fitting Fastener 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Heads, using Circle Template Probe Guide Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HEXAGON HEAD FASTENER, WITH WASHER
A
SHIELDED PROBE
FASTENER HEAD
DETECTABLE
CRACK
LENGTH
PROBE
POSSIBLE CRACK WASHER

POSITION
POSSIBLE PROBE MOVEMENT
CRACK ROUND WASHER
A
BIHEX HEAD FASTENER
FASTENER HEAD SHIELDED PROBE
DETECTABLE
CRACK
LENGTH
PROBE
POSSIBLE CRACK
POSITION
POSSIBLE PROBE MOVEMENT
CRACK ROUND HEAD
APPROXIMATE PROBE POSITION
FOR LIFT OFF AND ZERO CHECK
B
NOTE: SCANNING ROUND TYPICAL FASTENER HEADS IS

ILLUSTRATED. INSPECTION ROUND TAIL IS SIMILAR
L_NT_511008_1_0060101_01_00
Figure 51-10-08-991-006-A SHEET 01 - Typical Page 6

Procedure to Scan Round, Raised Fastener 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Heads or Tails, using the Head, Tail or Washer Revision n˚: 79
as a Probe Guide
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SECTION
SHIELDED PROBE CHANGE
(DOUBLER)
FASTENER
SKIN POSSIBLE
CRACKS
PROBE
DETECTABLE
CRACK LENGTH
POSSIBLE CRACK
POSITION
A
APPROXIMATE PROBE PROBE MOVEMENT ALONG

POSITION FOR LIFT EDGE OF SECTION CHANGE
OFF AND ZERO CHECK
L_NT_511008_1_0070101_01_00

Procedure to Scan Areas adjacent to Section 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Changes or Doublers, using the Section Change Revision n˚: 79
to Guide Probe
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
APPROXIMATE PROBE
POSITION FOR LIFT OFF
PROBE AND ZERO CHECK
SCAN 2
DIRECTION
PARALLEL SCAN AT
APPROX 1 mm (0.039 in)
PITCH
NOTE: TWO OPPOSING SCANS

(1+2) AT 90° TO EACH
SCAN 1 OTHER MUST BE DONE
DIRECTION TO COVER THE SUSPECT
AREA
L_NT_511008_1_0080101_01_00

Procedure to Scan Open Surface Areas away 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
from Fasteners or Section Changes Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-08-250-803-A-01
HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Aluminum Alloy Materials (Using Impedance Plane Instruments) -
Procedure B
This procedure is applicable if the area of the structure to be inspected is aluminum alloy structure and
corresponds to the structure build up shown in FIGURE 51-10-08-991-009-A.
Fatigue cracks ≥ 2 mm (0.079 in) in length of the top Al-layer (internal/external) starting from (See FIGURE
51-10-08-991-010-A):
fastener hole.
- Extending from underneath doubler areas.
- Free edge in covered structure.
- Radii.
(1) Tooling :
ECAEB1TL6 CABLE
M2 EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST
PABM90C402 PROBE
(2) References :
51-61-02-001-A - Eddy Current - Low Frequency Instruments
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-009-A - Typical Inspection Area and Structure Build-Up
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-011-A - Probe PABM90C402
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-012-A - Instrument Adjustment
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-013-A - Probe Positions and Scanning Movements
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-014-A - Example of Crack Indication
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-08-251-003-A
(1) See the related specific procedures in various Tasks or other related documents, for any special aircraft
preparation and access instructions, where applicable.
(2) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean, smooth and free from flanking paint.
(3) If the inspection area is unpainted, proceed to SUBTASK 252-003-A.
Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(4) If the inspection area is painted, the thickness of the paint must be measured on the inspection area
and zero compensation point (See TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01 and 51-61-04-001-A).
NOTE : Variations in paint thickness between the lift-off and zero calibration points, adjacent to
the inspection area, must not be ≥ 50 µm.
Subtask 51-10-08-252-003-A
NOTE : When this general procedure is specified in other Tasks, follow any special instruction stated in that
instrument adjustment section.
(1) Operate the test equipment in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions.
(2) Connect the PROBE (PABM90C402) (See FIGURE 51-10-08-991-011-A and 51-62-01-001-A, TYPE G)
with the CABLE (ECAEB1TL6) and the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (M2) (See
51-61-02-001-A).
NOTE : Any high frequency eddy current probe, cable or instrument may be used provided that they
meet the requirements of this procedure.
(3) Set the instrument controls as given in TABLE 1:
Nomenclature Value
Frequency 500 kHz
Pre-amplifier 12 dB
Gain XY 33 dB
Axis Spread Y 18 dB
Filter (HF) Static
Filter (LP) 50 Hz
Instrument Settings
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : Alternative instruments may require different settings. The frequency must remain the same but
the other parameters should be determined by analyzing the responses from the calibration
block.
(4) Use the calibration block CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-551) (See 51-63-01-001-A) to calibrate the
instrument for lift off and zero in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(5) Sensitivity Setting
(a) For painted surfaces place a plastic foil corresponding to the measured paint thickness (± 30 µm)
on the surface of the calibration block.
NOTE : For unpainted surfaces the use of the foil is not necessary.
(b) Place the probe on a slot free area and adjust the flying spot to a zero point on the screen, as
shown in FIGURE 51-10-08-991-012-A, Position A.
NOTE : The probe tip must be at right angles ± 10 degrees to the inspection surface.
Page 10
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) Adjust the instrument phase control so that the lift-off signal moves horizontal from the zero
point to left on the display screen when the probe is removed from the surface, as shown in
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-012-A, Position A.
(d) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot in the calibration block and set the instrument
gain XY so that the shape and maximum amplitude of the signal is as shown in FIGURE
51-10-08-991-012-A, Position B.
(6) Sensitivity Confirmation
(a) Move the probe across the 0.5 mm (0.02 in) slot in the calibration block and confirm that the
maximum signal is 50% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot indication in the calibration block.
(7) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot in the calibration block to find the maximum scan
speed. The scan speed is too fast if:
- The signal is less than 90% of the calibration slot signal, or
- The alarm, if set, does not operate.
Subtask 51-10-08-253-003-A
C. Inspection
NOTE : When this general procedure is specified in other Tasks, follow any special instruction stated in that
inspection section.
(1) Place the probe adjacent to the inspection area and reset lift-off and zero compensation as necessary.
(2) Do the inspection using the probe positions and scanning movements as illustrated in FIGURE
51-10-08-991-013-A.
(a) Use a scan pattern that will move the probe across the length of a possible crack.
(b) During the scan, move the probe not faster than the maximum scan speed that was identified
during the calibration.
(c) Do the scan for the specified structural configurations as follows:
1 Large Areas: Use a grid system to do the inspection of large areas. The distance between
the grid lines (increment distance) must be less than the diameter of the probe to get 100%
complete examination of the area.
2 Countersink Fasteners: Use a nonconductive circle template to do the inspection around
countersink fasteners. Use a hole in the template, which is as close as possible to the
countersink fastener head.
3 Universal Head Fasteners: To examine areas around fasteners with universal head, use the
fastener head or the washer as a probe guide.
4 Radius: To examine the radius area of a part, keep the probe as vertical as possible to the
radius surface. If the crack direction is not known, move the probe along (parallel scan) and
across (transverse scan) the radius as shown in FIGURE 51-10-08-991-013-A. Use an
increment distance that is less than the diameter of the probe to get 100% complete
examination of the area.
5 Edges: When you do an inspection near or on the edge of a part, use a nonconductive
straight edge to keep the probe at the same distance from the edge of the part (See
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-013-A).
NOTE : Thickness changes in nonconductive (paint) finishes can cause the balance point to
move horizontal. Rebalance as required.
Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(3) Any indication on the instrument display screen ≥ 20% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot indication in the
calibration block above the zero line must be evaluated as a possible crack (For example see FIGURE
51-10-08-991-014-A).
NOTE : A rapid spot deflection indicates a crack.

(4) Measure the length of all indications evaluated as cracks using a 1 mm (0.039 in) scan pattern (See
FIGURE 51-10-08-991-013-A).
NOTE : Mark the probe position at the point where the crack indication reduces to normal.
Subtask 51-10-08-971-003-A
(1) All indications, which have been evaluated as cracks and are ≥ 20% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot
indication shall be classified as cracks and must be recorded in the appropriate documentation.
- Drawings showing the location and direction of crack(s)
- Maximum crack indication in % of screen display height and length of cracks
- Give only the maximum crack indication in % of display screen height for indications on edges of
covered structure (See FIGURE 51-10-08-991-013-A, Detail A).
(3) See the related procedures or the related Service Bulletins for reporting action.
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
B
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
>
− 5 mm 04
(0.197 in)
ST OR TI−ALLOY 03
AL−ALLOY
AL−ALLOY
AL−ALLOY
AL−ALLOY
ST OR TI−ALLOY
>
− 5 mm 02
(0.197 in)
A
A A B B
NOTE:
01 SURFACES WHICH ARE RECESSED MAY BE INSPECTED PROVIDED THE PROBE USED IS R>− 5 mm
SMALL ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN GOOD CONTACT WITH THE SURFACE BEING INSPECTED. (0.197 in)
02 INSPECTION IN THIS AREA WILL REQUIRE THE USE OF A RIGHT ANGLE / CRANKED PROBE
WITH MAXIMUM TIP LENGTH SLIGHTLY SMALLER THAN THE HEIGHT OF THE STRINGER.
03
>
SURFACE CONDITION: UNTREATED OR PAINTED 350 m. 01
04 ANY TYPE OF FASTENER MAY BE FITTED.
AL−ALLOY SHEET THICKNESS >

− 1.4 mm (0.055 in). A
INSPECTION AREA:
− AROUND AND BETWEEN FASTENERS.
− AT THE EDGES OF DOUBLERS AND RADIUS AREAS.
L_NT_511008_1_0090101_01_00

Inspection Area and Structure Build-Up 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE
FATIGUE
CRACKS
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
A
>
− 2 mm
>
− 2 mm (0.079 in)
(0.079 in) >
− 2 mm
(0.079 in)
>
− 2 mm
01 (0.079 in)
A
>
− 0.5 mm
>
−1 mm (0.020 in)
(0.039 in) >
− 2 mm
(0.079 in)
A A
>
− 2 mm
A (0.079 in)
>
− 0.5 mm
(0.020 in)
A
NOTE:

L_NT_511008_1_0100101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10 mm 25 mm
(0.394 in) (0.984 in)
12 mm LEMO
(0.472 in)
5 mm
(0.197 in)
1.9 mm
(0.075 in)
30
45 mm
30 mm (1.772 in)
(1.181 in)
PROBE PABM90C402
TYPE: SHIELDED, ACTIVE AREA (ZONE OF INTERACTION) = 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
FREQUENCY RANGE: 500KHz−1MHz
NOTE:
IF ALTERNATIVE PROBE IS USED THE PROBE TIP DIA. MUST NOT >
− 2 mm (0.079 in). L_NT_511008_1_0110101_01_00

PABM90C402 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
POSITION A PROBE
POSITION B
LIFT OFF
+>
− 10°
−
90° PROBE MOVEMENT
ACROSS THE SLOTS
AL CALIBRATION
BLOCK
A
1 mm (0.039 in)
SLOT
0.5 mm (0.020 in) SLOT
A 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SLOT
POSITION A INDICATION POSITION B
100% SH
LIFT OFF ZERO POINT ZERO LINE ZERO POINT

SCREEN INDICATION SCREEN INDICATION FROM THE
FOR LIFT OFF SH: SCREEN HEIGHT 1mm (0.039 in) DEEP SLOT
L_NT_511008_1_0120101_01_00

Instrument Adjustment 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
DIAMETER
POSSIBLE COVERED
STRUCTURE (DOUBLER)
PENCIL PROBE
01
10 mm
PROBE
(0.394 in)
GUIDE
POSITION OF MAXIMUM
AL
PROBE SCAN AT APPROXIMATELY CRACK INDICATION
THE CRACK, TO EACH SIDE OF AL
THE MAXIMUM CRACK INDICATION AL
PROBE
MARK GUIDE
CRACK
A
PROBE MOVEMENT
IN EDGE AREA
CRACK LENGTH MARK THE PROBE POSITION
1 mm AT THE POINT WHERE PROBE SCAN PATH
(0.039 in) THE CRACK INDICATION
REDUCES TO NORMAL
(ZERO POINT)
EVALUATION OF
CRACK LENGTH
RIVETS / FASTENERS.
ZERO COMPENSATION POINT.
NOTE:
PROBE SCAN PATH AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE AROUND 01 AREAS WHERE THE PROBE SCAN IS BLOCKED BY
RIVETS / FASTENERS. RIVET HEADS/SECOND LAYER ARE NOT TO BE INSPECTED.
USING A DRAFTSMANS CIRCLE TEMPLATE FOR SCANNING

PROBE SCAN PATH. AROUND THE FASTENERS TO MAINTAIN PROBE POSITION.
MOVEMENT OF PROBE CLOSE TO THE EDGE AND / OR USING THE WASHER OF THE FASTENER HEAD FOR SCANNING
EDGE OF POSSIBLE COVERED STRUCTURE. AROUND THE FASTENERS TO MAINTAIN PROBE POSITION.
L_NT_511008_1_0130101_01_00

Positions and Scanning Movements 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FATIGUE CRACK
SIGNAL
EDGE
SIGNAL
THRESHOLD
LINE 01
NOTE:
01 SET THE THRESHOLD LINE AT
20% OF THE VERTICAL HEIGHT
OF THE SIGNAL THAT OCCURS
FROM THE 1 mm (0.039 in)
SLOT IN THE CALIBRATION
BLOCK.
LIFT OFF ZERO POINT ZERO LINE

L_NT_511008_1_0140101_01_00

of Crack Indication 51-10-08-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the general requirements for the visual inspection of composite components.
B. Inspection to identify and classify structural damage and cosmetic irregularities (see NOTE).
NOTE : Structural Damage:

This means visible damage that may have associated underlying structural damage. In this case, more
detailed inspection is necessary to determine the extent of the damage and to assess acceptance or
repair actions. All damage of this type must be reported.
Cosmetic Irregularities:
This means surface conditions that do no affect the integrity of the component and require no further
action.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-09-220-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-09-220-801-A-01
General Procedure for Detailed Visual Inspection for Carbon Fibre Structures
NOTE : This procedure may be used by personnel, who are not qualified in NDT. It is recommended that the
personnel should be properly trained and experienced for the purpose of Tap Test inspection on
aircraft airframes or components according to regulations and/or requirements applicable to the
operator.
This procedure provides the general requirements to inspect the accessible surfaces of carbon fibre composite
structures.
Visible damage that may affect the structural integrity of the part (See FIGURE 51-10-09-991-001-A).
(1) References :
FIGURE 51-10-09-991-001-A - Typical Appearance of Conditions requiring further Investigations
FIGURE 51-10-09-991-002-A - Typical Appearance of Cosmetic Irregularities (No Action Required)
FIGURE 51-10-09-991-003-A - Inspection Flow Chart
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-09-221-001-A
(1) Gain access to the inspection area.
NOTE : Remove the fairings, access panels etc., if necessary.

(2) Make sure that the inspection area is thoroughly clean, remove any loose or flaking paint.
Subtask 51-10-09-222-001-A
B. Inspection
(1) Use adequate lighting and inspect the suspect area with a Magnifying Glass, up to x5 magnification for
visible indications.
(2) Classify the indications into Type 1 or Type 2, in accordance with FIGURE 51-10-09-991-001-A and
FIGURE 51-10-09-991-002-A.
NOTE : It may be necessary to use a mirror or an endoscope to inspect areas that are not directly
accessible.
Subtask 51-10-09-971-001-A
(1) See the Flow Chart in FIGURE 51-10-09-991-003-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TYPE DESCRIPTION DEFINITION
1 ABRASION A DAMAGED AREA OF ANY SIZE WHICH CAUSES

A CHANGE IN CROSS−SECTIONAL AREA
BECAUSE OF SCUFFING, RUBBING, SCRAPING OR
OTHER SURFACE EROSION. IT IS USUALLY
ROUGH AND IRREGULAR.
1 GOUGE A DAMAGED AREA OF ANY SIZE WHICH RESULTS

IN A CROSS−SECTIONAL AREA CHANGE. IT IS
USUALLY CAUSED BY CONTACT WITH A
RELATIVELY SHARP OBJECT WHICH PRODUCES A
CONTINUOUS, SHARP OR SMOOTH CHANNEL−
LIKE GROOVE IN THE MATERIAL.
1 NICK A LOCAL REMOVAL OF MATERIAL DUE TO A

KNOCK ETC.. AT THE EDGE OF A MEMBER
OR SKIN.
1 SCRATCH / SCORE A LINE OF DAMAGE, OF ANY DEPTH AND LENGTH

IN THE MATERIAL, WHICH CAUSES A CROSS−
SECTIONAL AREA CHANGE. IT IS USUALLY
CAUSED BY A SHARP OBJECT.
1 FRAYING BROKEN OR LOOSE FIBRES PRODUCED ON

MACHINED OR CUT EDGES.
L_NT_511009_1_0010101_01_00

Appearance of Conditions requiring further 51-10-09-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Investigations Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1 CORE DEPRESSION IN HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES, A DEFORMITY OR

DEPRESSION OF THE CORE IN THE DIRECTION OF
THICKNESS. MAY BE CAUSED BY IMPACT
DAMAGE OR PRESSURE.
1 CORE LATERAL CRUSHING A DEFORMATION OF THE CORE CELLS

PERPENDICULAR TO THEIR SIDES.
MAY BE CAUSED BY IMPACT DAMAGE OR
PRESSURE.
1 BULGING A RAISING OF THE SURFACE ABOVE THE

HORIZONTAL LEVEL. MAY BE CAUSED BY THICK
PAINT OR A REPAIR OR MANY INDICATE
A DEBONDING BETWEEN THE LAMINATE AND THE
UNDERLYING STRUCTURE OR, DELAMINATION
BETWEEN THE PLIES OF THE LAMINATE.
A A A
1 DENT IN MONOLITHIC STRUCTURE, A DAMAGED AREA
WHICH IS PUSHED IN RELATIVE TO ITS USUAL
CONTOUR.
MAY BE CAUSED BY IMPACT DAMAGE OR
PRESSURE.
L_NT_511009_1_0010102_01_00

Appearance of Conditions requiring further 51-10-09-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Investigations Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2 WRINKLES A CONDITION IN WHICH ONE OR MORE LAYERS

FORM A DEPRESSED OR RAISED CREASE WHICH
IS PERMANENT.
2 CORNER FOLD A SPECIAL CASE OF NEGATIVE WRINKLE THAT

APPEARS IN THE ANGLE OF THE CHAMFER,
USUALLY CAUSING A THIN AND REGULAR PAINT
CRACK.
2 STEP A CONDITION PRODUCED BY DIFFERENCES IN THE

THICKNESS OF PART CAUSED BY DIFFERENCES
IN PRESSURE DURING MANUFACTURE.
2 RESIN RIDGE A SHARP RESIN BUILD−UP ON THE SURFACE OF

A PART.
L_NT_511009_1_0020101_01_00

Appearance of Cosmetic Irregularities (No Action 51-10-09-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Required) Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2 RESIN RICH AREA AN AREA WHERE THERE IS AN EXCESS OF RESIN,

NORMALLY PRODUCED ON THE RADII, STEPS AND
CHAMFERED EDGE OF THE CORE.
2 RESIN STARVED AREA A LACK OF RESIN LOCATED IN THE JOINTS OF

THE FIBRES WHICH BECOMES APPARENT WHEN
SEVERAL RESIN STARVED POINTS COMBINE
TOGETHER TO FORM A VISIBLE AREA.
2 TELEGRAPHING PRESSING OF THE LAYERS OF THE SKIN ONTO THE

A CORE CELLS, PRODUCING A WRINKLED
APPEARANCE ON THE OUTER SURFACE WHICH
HAPPENS WHEN THE FABRIC ADAPTS TO THE SHAPE
OF THE CORE CELLS, FORMING WAVES.
A A A
L_NT_511009_1_0020102_01_00

Appearance of Cosmetic Irregularities (No Action 51-10-09-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Required) Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
VISUAL INDICATION
YES
IDENTIFY
TYPE 1 TYPE 2
STRUCTURAL DAMAGE COSMETIC IRREGULARITY
INSPECT BY NDT
SEE TASK 51−10−06−270−801 NO FURTHER ACTION.
SEE TASK 51−10−03−280−801
NDT RECORD AND REPORT

INDICATION OF NO
EXTENT OF VISUAL
STRUCTURAL INDICATIONS.
DAMAGE?
YES
RECORD AND REPORT

EXTENT OF VISUAL
AND NDT INDICATIONS.
L_NT_511009_1_0030101_01_01

Inspection Flow Chart 51-10-09-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements to detect the presence of water in honeycomb sandwich
structures fabricated with nonmetallic honeycomb cores and skins.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-10-260-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-10-260-801-A-01
X-RAY Inspection to detect Water in Honeycomb Sandwich Parts
Any nonmetallic honeycomb sandwich structure e.g. Carbon Fiber Skins with Nomex or Glass Fiber core.
Water in the honeycomb cells.
(1) Tooling :
KB160-4 X-RAY EQUIPMENT WITH BERYLIUM WINDOW
(2) References :
51-20-00-006-A - X-Ray Procedure
FIGURE 51-10-10-991-001-A - Typical Examples of X-Ray Set Up
FIGURE 51-10-10-991-002-A - Example of Radiograph Image where the Beam of Radiation is
perpendicular to the Honeycomb Cell Orientation
FIGURE 51-10-10-991-003-A - Example of Radiograph Image where the Beam of Radiation is not
perpendicular to the Honeycomb Cell Orientation
FIGURE 51-10-10-991-004-A - Example of Radiographic Image of a Score Splice
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-10-261-001-A
(1) Position the control surface so that the top skin is horizontal or remove the honeycomb panel as
necessary (See FIGURE 51-10-10-991-001-A).
Subtask 51-10-10-262-001-A
B. Inspection
(1) Position the X-RAY EQUIPMENT WITH BERYLIUM WINDOW (KB160-4) perpendicular to the
surface of the honeycomb panel central to the area to be inspected. See FIGURE 51-10-10-991-001-A
for typical examples of x-ray tube and film positioning.
NOTE : Any comparable X-Ray instrument may be used provided that it is capable of meeting the
(2) Attach the x-ray film (Class 2, Type D7) on to the honeycomb panel on the side opposite the X-Ray
tube.
NOTE : Using a minimum source-to-film distance (SFD) of 300 cm (118 in), approximately 180 cm
(70.9 in) length of film can be covered with each exposure.
(3) Radiographic shots shall be in keeping with the parameters shown in SUBTASK 263-001-A, Table 1.
(4) Repeat LIST STRUCTURE, LIST STRUCTURE and LIST STRUCTURE for all areas requiring
inspection.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-10-263-001-A
C. Exposure Data
(1) For Exposure Data see TABLE 1
X-RAY SETTINGS X-RAY FILM DENSITY

POSITION KV MAS SFD mm (in) TYPE Size cm (in)
ALL 25 1200 300 Class 2, As required for 1.5 - 2.5
(118.0) Type D7 area coverage
X-Ray Parameters for Inspection Area
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : The mAs qouted is for a minimum SFD of 300 cm (118.0 in). Longer SFD may be used to
inspect a larger area in one shot. In this case the mAs value must be adjusted in accordance
with the inverse square law (See 51-20-00-006-A).
Subtask 51-10-10-971-001-A
(1) Water filled honeycomb cells will show as white or light grey areas on the radiograph, conforming to
the shape of the honeycomb cells. See the examples given in FIGURE 51-10-10-991-002-A and FIGURE
51-10-10-991-003-A.
NOTE : White indications may also be caused by core splices and should not be confused with water
indications. See the example given in FIGURE 51-10-10-991-004-A.
(2) Record the position and size of any water filled honeycomb cell areas.
Subtask 51-10-10-943-001-A
(1) Remove all test equipment.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR INSPECTION ON AIRCRAFT
WING
FLAP
X−RAY FILM
MIN SFD 3000 mm (118 in)
TRACK
A A
NOTE:
FLAP ILLUSTRATED, AILERON−
ELEVATOR, SIMILAR PROCEDURE
MIN SFD 3000 mm (118 in)
X−RAY FILM
TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR INSPECTION

OF PART REMOVED FROM AIRCRAFT
L_NT_511010_1_0010101_01_00

Examples of X-Ray Set Up 51-10-10-PB2 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
WATER
X−RAY FILM
90° WATER
A A MIN SFD = 3000 mm (118 in)

L_NT_511010_1_0020101_01_00

of Radiograph Image where the Beam of 51-10-10-PB2 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Radiation is perpendicular to the Honeycomb Revision n˚: 79
Cell Orientation
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
WATER
A A
INSERT
INSERT
X−RAY FILM
INSERT
WATER
A A
MIN SFD = 3000 mm (118 in) L_NT_511010_1_0030101_01_00

of Radiograph Image where the Beam of 51-10-10-PB2 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Radiation is not perpendicular to the Honeycomb Revision n˚: 79
Cell Orientation
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SPLICE
INSERT
L_NT_511010_1_0040101_01_00

of Radiographic Image of a Score Splice 51-10-10-PB2 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of covered layers for cracks, at
specified multi-layered joints with aluminum and titanium countersink rivets installed, using a sliding Eddy
Current probe method.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-11-250-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-11-250-801-A-01
Inspection for Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Al-Alloy Structures
This procedure is applicable if the area to be inspected is in accordance with that shown in FIGURE
51-10-11-991-001-A.
(1) Crack Orientation
- Fatigue cracks ≥ 6 mm (0.24 in) length in the covered skin layer of structure with aluminum rivets,
starting at rivet holes and extending in the direction of the rivet rows (See FIGURE
51-10-11-991-002-A).
- Fatigue cracks ≥ 4.5 mm (0.177 in) length in the covered skin layer of structure with titanium
rivets, starting at rivet holes and extending in the direction of the rivet rows (See FIGURE
51-10-11-991-002-A).
NOTE : With this general procedure fatigue cracks, in the covered skin layers as illustrated in FIGURE
51-10-11-991-002-A and propagating through the entire skin thickness, can be detected.
(1) Tooling :
9218430 CABLE
99D51107295000 CALIBRATION BLOCK
B1 EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST
SPO1958 PROBE
(2) References :
TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01 - Rotating Probe Testing - General - PROCEDURE A
TASK 51-10-13-270-801-A01 - Inspection for Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Structures
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-001-A - Structure Build-Up of a Specified Multi-Layered Joint
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-003-A - Probe SPO1958
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-004-A - Calibration Block PN 99D51107295000
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-005-A - Instrument Calibration
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-006-A - Effects of Scan Path Mis-alignment
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-007-A - Adjustment of the Signal in the Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-008-A - Signals from Rivets of different Types and Diameters
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-009-A - Signals from Rivets of same Type and Diameter
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-010-A - Typical Scatter Indication from Crack Free Area (Zero Scatter Band)
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-011-A - Compensation and Signal Adjustment Indications from a Cracked Area
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-012-A - Crack Length Measurement
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-11-251-001-A
(1) Identify the inspection area. See the related specific NTM inspection Task or Service Bulletin, where
necessary.
(3) Check the inspection area for any visible damage or discontinuities.
Subtask 51-10-11-252-001-A
(2) Connect the PROBE (SPO1958) (See FIGURE 51-10-11-991-003-A) with the CABLE (9218430) and
the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (B1) (See 51-61-02-001-A).
NOTE : Any low frequency eddy current probe, cable or instrument may be used provided that they
meet the requirements of this procedure, but preference is to be given to the above stated
probe.
(3) Set the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (B1) as follows:
- Frequency : 2 kHz
- Filter (LP) : 20 Hz
- Pre-amplifier : 12 dB
- Band Range : MF
- Axis spread Y/X : 0/0 dB
- Gain Y/X : 30 dB
the other parameters should be determined by analyzing the responses from the calibration
block.
(4) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99D51107295000) (See FIGURE 51-10-11-991-004-A).
(a) Place the probe between the rivets in Position 1 on the calibration block, in a slot free area, using
a guide strip to center the probe over the rivet heads as shown in FIGURE 51-10-11-991-005-A.
1 Adjust the flying spot to zero point on the instrument screen as shown in FIGURE
51-10-11-991-005-A, Detail A.
(b) Slide the probe over the slot free rivet and adjust the signal on the instrument screen as shown in
FIGURE 51-10-11-991-005-A, Detail A on the zero line.
NOTE : Adjust the zero point in vertical axis so that the signal from the slot free rivet is
positioned on the zero line.
(c) Slide the probe over the 5 mm (0.20 in) double sided slot in Position 2, and adjust the
instrument gain Y so that the shape and amplitude of the signal is as shown in FIGURE
51-10-11-991-005-A, Detail B.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(d) Slide the probe over the 5 mm (0.20 in) single sided slot in Position 3, to confirm the shape and
amplitude of the signal, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-11-991-005-A, Detail C.
NOTE : Do not change the instrument gain Y after adjustment and confirmation. Do not scan too
fast over the rivet heads, as this will reduce the sensitivity. Use the calibration block to
develop a satisfactory scanning speed.
Subtask 51-10-11-253-001-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE PROBE IS TO BE ALIGNED WITH THE CENTER OF THE
RIVET ROW.
(1) Position the guide strip adjacent to a rivet row in the inspection area, using a similar procedure to that
used on the calibration block so as to permit the probe to slide across the center of each rivet head.
NOTE : For the effects of mis-alignment see FIGURE 51-10-11-991-006-A.

(2) Place the probe on the inspection area and slide the probe back and forth over a rivet head and observe
the instrument screen.
(3) If necessary, adjust the signal on the instrument screen as shown in FIGURE 51-10-11-991-007-A.
NOTE : Due to different riveting the signals will vary. Adjust the zero point, so that the signal from the
rivet (horizontal axis) is positioned on the zero line.
(4) Scan the inspection area by sliding the probe along the rivet row center line.
(5) Observe the instrument screen for signals that differ from that of the calibration block slot free rivets.
Look for an easily identified vertical and horizontal separation from that of the slot free rivet signal.
- Rivets whose signals are different from the calibration block, and do not resemble a crack signal,
must be examined visually. Look for a change in rivet size or type. Check for steel rivets with a
magnet. For the effects of different rivet types and sizes, see FIGURE 51-10-11-991-008-A.
- Regions with steel rivets cannot be tested with this procedure. These regions must be recorded.
- A further instrument adjustment is necessary when, due to the close pitch of rivets of different type
and diameter, the requirements in accordance with FIGURE 51-10-11-991-005-A, Detail A cannot
be accomplished.
- In areas with no discontinuities, but with Al-alloy rivets of the same diameter, horizontal signal
variations may be observed. In this case no further adjustment is necessary (See FIGURE
51-10-11-991-009-A).
(6) Typical scatter indications are shown in FIGURE 51-10-11-991-010-A.
(7) If a zero compensation has been made over a cracked area, an indication will extend below the zero line
out of the scatterband, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-11-991-011-A. In this case a new compensation
point must be selected.
(8) A possible crack will be indicated by a vertical signal on the instrument screen ≥ 1 scale divisions above
the zero line.
(9) Determine the length of all indicated cracks (See FIGURE 51-10-11-991-012-A).
(10) Record all indications.
Subtask 51-10-11-971-001-A
(1) Indications with vertical spot deflections equal to or less than 1 scale divisions from the zero line can be
disregarded.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(2) Indications with vertical spot deflections ≥ 1 scale divisions from the zero line are to be considered as
cracks and must be recorded.
(3) All regions which are considered to be uninspectable with this eddy current procedure and a scatterband
> ± 1 SD from zero line (Steel rivets) are to be recorded on the Test Record Sheets and must be
inspected with the ultrasonic inspection procedure (See TASK 51-10-13-270-801-A01).
NOTE : If it is not possible to do an ultrasonic inspection (Inspection area not accessible) do a rototest
inspection (See TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01).
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
01
02
03
INSPECTION FROM
THE OUTSIDE
B A
C D COVERED LAYER TO
BE INSPECTED
INSPECTION AREA 03 03
PROBE SLIDING DIRECTION A A

SHEET A − THICKNESS: MIN − 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
MAX − 3 mm (0.118 in)
NOTE: SHEET A MAY CONSIST OF ONE OR TWO LAYERS, THE TOTAL THICKNESS SHOULD NOT
BE GREATHER THAN THAT GIVEN ABOVE, BUT THE THINNER LAYER MUST NOT BE
LESS THAN 0.6 mm (0.024 in) THICKNESS
SHEET B − THICKNESS: MIN − 1.6 mm (0.062 in)
MAX − 4 mm (0.157 in)
SHEET C − AL−ALLOY OR TITANIUM SHEET/STIFFENER: ANY NUMBER AND THICKNESS
SHEET A AND B MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY, WITH CONDUCTIVITY RANGE 16−26 MS / m
RIVET MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY, TITANIUM, TITANIUM HI−LOK
RIVET SHANK DIAMETER D: 4 mm (0.157 in) − 5.6 mm (0.22 in)
RIVET PITCH 01 16 mm (0.63 in) − 32 mm (1.26 in)
02 > 16 mm (0.63 in)
−
03 > 8 mm (0.32 in)
−
NOTE: THERE MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 4 RIVETS OF THE SAME TYPE AND

DIAMETER IN SUCCESSION L_NT_511011_1_0010101_01_00

Structure Build-Up of a Specified Multi-Layered 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Joint Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
RIVET ROW
A
A
TOP SKIN
FATIGUE CRACKS
COVERED SKIN LAYER
X X
X X A A
X = FATIGUE CRACKS >
− 6 mm (0.24 in) FOR STRUCTURE WITH AL−RIVETS
− 4.5 mm (0.177 in) FOR STRUCTURE WITH TI−RIVETS
A
EXPECTED DIRECTION OF CRACKS
L_NT_511011_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
15 mm MICRODOT CONNECTORS
(0.59 in)
INDEX MARK
42 mm
(1.65 in)
25.4 mm
(0.99 in)
INDEX MARK
COIL LOCATION
TYPE: REFLECTION WITH SEPARATE TRANSMIT

AND RECEIVE COILS
LOW FREQUENCY RANGE: 100 Hz − 40 KHz
L_NT_511011_1_0030101_01_00

SPO1958 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
240 mm
32 mm
A (9.45 in)
(1.26 in)
9 x 20 mm 30 mm
(9 x 0.78 in) (1.18 in) 02
B B
100 mm
(3.94 in)
2 x 24 mm 01
10 mm
(2 x 0.94 in)
(0.39 in)
A
03 03 2
A A
5 mm 5 mm
(0.197 in) 5 mm (0.197 in)
3
(0.197 in)
B B
ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL / REMARKS
1 RIVET, CSK 30 LN9199 4.8 mm (0.189 in)
2 SHEET 1 3.1364T351 2.4 mm (0.094 in)
3 SHEET 1 3.1364T351 2 mm (0.079 in)
mm in mm in mm in
DIMENSION 0.5 − 30 0.02 − 1.181 30 − 120 1.181 − 4.724 120 − 400 4.724 − 15.75
TOLERANCE ± 0.2 ± 0.008 ± 0.3 ± 0.012 ± 0.5 ± 0.02
NOTE: KEEP THE SLOTS FREE OF PAINT AND SEALANT
01 SURFACE PROTECTION: MATERIAL NO. 13−002,16−001,16−018

02 APPLY THIN COAT OF SEALANT PR1431 (MATERIAL NO. 09−005)
03 SLOT WIDTH: 0.15 ± 0.03 mm (0.006 ± 0.001 in)
L_NT_511011_1_0040101_01_00

Calibration Block PN 99D51107295000 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
GUIDE STRIP
PROBE INDEX MARK
PROBE
PROBE PROBE PROBE A A

A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3
SLOT FREE RIVET

SH POSITION 1 HOLE AREA SH POSITION 2 4 SD ± 0.5 SD
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
0% ZERO DATUM 0%
ZERO LINE ZERO
LINE
6 SD ± 0.5 SD
ZERO
POINT
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° ZERO POINT 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° POSITION
INDICATION FROM SLOT FREE POSITION INDICATION FROM DOUBLESIDED
A RIVET HOLE AND ZERO POINT B SLOT OF 5 mm ACHIEVED BY
ALLOWABLE SCATTERBAND SH POSITION 3 PROBE SCANNING
+ 0.5 SD FROM ZERO LINE AT
THE CALIBRATION BLOCK 100%
75%
>
− 2 SD
50%
25%
0%
ZERO LINE
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° ZERO POINT

INDICATION FROM SINGLESIDED POSITION
C SLOT OF 5 mm ACHIEVED BY
PROBE SCANNING L_NT_511011_1_0050101_01_00

Instrument Calibration 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE SCAN 2 mm (0.078 in)

OFF CENTER LINE
PROBE SCAN 4 mm (0.157 in)
SH OFF CENTER LINE
100%
75%
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
ZERO POINT
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° POSITION
PROBE SCAN
ALONG CENTER LINE
RIVET CL PROBE SCAN ALONG CENTER LINE
SCAN PATH
RIVET CL PROBE SCAN 2 mm (0.078 in) OFF CENTER LINE
SCAN PATH
RIVET CL PROBE SCAN 4 mm (0.157 in) OFF CENTER LINE
SCAN PATH
NOTE: PROBE SCAN PATH MUST BE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE

TO THE CENTER LINE OF THE RIVETS
L_NT_511011_1_0060101_01_00
Figure 51-10-11-991-006-A SHEET 01 - Effects Page 10

of Scan Path Mis-alignment 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SH
100%
75%
50% 1SD
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
6SD ± 0.5SD
ZERO POINT
SCATTERBAND POSITION
TOLERANCE 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
± 1SD FROM
ZERO LINE
SH
100%
75%
50% 1SD
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
6SD ± 0.5SD
SCATTERBAND ZERO POINT
TOLERANCE 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° POSITION
± 1SD FROM
ZERO LINE
L_NT_511011_1_0070101_01_00

Adjustment of the Signal in the Inspection Area 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SIGNAL FROM STEEL RIVET

SH
100%
75%
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
SIGNAL FROM ZERO LINE
AL−RIVET
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
SIGNAL FROM TITANIUM−RIVET ZERO POINT

POSITION
SIGNALS FROM DIFFERENT RIVET TYPES WITH

A SAME DIAMETER (CRACKFREE)
RIVET SIZE RIVET SIZE

4.8 mm (0.189 in) 4 mm (0.157 in)
SH
100%
75%
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
ZERO POINT
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
POSITION
RIVET SIZE
5.6 mm (0.22 in)
SIGNALS FROM SAME RIVET TYPES WITH

B DIFFERENT DIAMETER (CRACKFREE)
NOTE: STEEL RIVETS CANNOT BE INSPECTED

WITH THIS SLIDING PROBE METHOD
L_NT_511011_1_0080101_01_00
Figure 51-10-11-991-008-A SHEET 01 - Signals Page 12

from Rivets of different Types and Diameters 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HORIZONTAL
SIGNAL
VARIATIONS
SH
100%
75%
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
ZERO POINT
POSITION
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
PROBE
AL−ALLOY RIVETS OF SAME

TYPE AND DIAMETER
NOTE: IF YOU GET SIGNALS FROM AL−ALLOY RIVETS OF SAME

TYPE AND DIAMETER WITH DIFFERENT HEIGHT, BUT
WITH SAME SHAPE AS THAT FROM CRACK FREE RIVETS
NO FURTHER ADJUSTMENT IS NECESSARY
L_NT_511011_1_0090101_01_00
Figure 51-10-11-991-009-A SHEET 01 - Signals Page 13

from Rivets of same Type and Diameter 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SH
100%
75%
50%
1 SD
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
SCATTERBAND ZERO POINT

TOLERANCE 0° 90° 180° 270° 360° POSITION
± 1 SD FROM
ZERO LINE
L_NT_511011_1_0100101_01_00

Scatter Indication from Crack Free Area (Zero 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Scatter Band) Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
COMPENSATION
AND SIGNAL
SH ADJUSTMENT
100% OVER A CRACKED
RIVET HOLE AREA
75% IN POSITION 1
50%
25%
0% ZERO DATUM
ZERO LINE
ZERO POINT
POSITION
SCATTERBAND
TOLERANCE 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
± 1 SD FROM
ZERO LINE
CRACK FREE RIVET HOLE INDICATION
IN PROBE POSITION 2
DOUBLE SIDED
CRACK
PROBE
PROBE PROBE
POSITION 1 POSITION 2
L_NT_511011_1_0110101_01_00

Compensation and Signal Adjustment Indications 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
from a Cracked Area Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSPECTION
DIRECTION INDEX MARK
PROBE ON PROBE BODY SH
A B C 100%
75%
B
50%
25%
C
X 0% ZERO DATUM
A
OUTER SKIN ZERO LINE
LENGTH X
X = HALF BORE DIAMETER

CRACK LENGTH = LENGHT X − HALF BORE ZERO POINT
DIAMETER X 90° 180° 270° 360° POSITION
0°
DETERMINATION OF SINGLE SIDED

A CRACK LENGTH
INSPECTION
DIRECTION INDEX MARK
PROBE ON PROBE BODY SH
A B C 100%
B
75%
50%
25%
C
Y 0% ZERO DATUM
A
OUTER SKIN ZERO LINE
LENGTH Y
Y = BORE DIAMETER
CRACK LENGTH = LENGHT Y − BORE DIAMETER ZERO POINT
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° POSITION
DETERMINATION OF DOUBLE SIDED

B CRACK LENGTH
L_NT_511011_1_0120101_01_00

Length Measurement 51-10-11-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT APPLICABLE FOR ALUMINUM LITHIUM AND GLARE.
A. This general procedure provides the basic requirements for detecting areas of potential heat damage using
eddy current conductivity measurements of aluminum alloys.
B. This general procedure is to be used with associated specific NTM Tasks or Service Bulletins which identify
the area(s) of inspection.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-12-250-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-12-250-801-A-01
Procedure for the Detection of Heat Damage using Eddy Current Conductivity Measurement on Aluminum Alloys
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE IS NOT APPLICABLE FOR ALUMINUM LITHIUM AND GLARE.
Any aluminum alloy panel in which a comparison of the conductivity measurements is required in accordance
with a specific NTM/SRM Task or Service Bulletin.
NOTE : Absolute conductivity measurements cannot be made, and do not have to be made using this
procedure.
NOTE : The conductivity measurement is not accurate where the paint thickness is greater than the maximum
permitted lift-off for the instrument to be used.
Areas that have been subjected to heat, which could be considered as excessive, and therefore likely to be
heat damaged. See the specific instructions provided by AIRBUS.
(1) Tooling :
2-068-01-1363476 PROBE FOR SIGMATEST
D2-068 SIGMATEST
(2) References :
FIGURE 51-10-12-991-001-A - Measurement of Damaged Area
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-12-251-001-A
CAUTION : THE INSPECTOR MUST KNOW THE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION, ORIGINAL HEAT
TREATMENT CONDITION AND THE STRUCTURAL CONFIGURATION OF THE AREA TO BE
INSPECTED.
(1) Heat Damage Evaluation
(a) Carry out a visual inspection of the area where heat damage is suspected. Look for changes in
paint color and material deterioration.
(b) Mark the area where discoloration and/or deterioration of the material is found (See FIGURE
51-10-12-991-001-A).
(2) Make sure that the calibration standards and materials to be inspected are at the same temperature.
(3) Make sure that any paint coating in the inspection area is within the limits of the equipment (See
TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01). Where the paint thickness is outside the limits the conductivity
measurement will not be accurate and the paint must be removed.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(4) Make sure that there are no conditions, in the area to be inspected, which may affect the conductivity
measurement (e.g. : panel edges, fastener countersinks, etc).
NOTE : Surface curvature, edge effect, variations of the material thickness, and other conditions may
affect conductivity readings. Their influences are generally identified and described in the
equipment manufacturer?s operating instructions.
(5) Mark out those zones within the inspection where material thickness changes occur.
NOTE : Changes in structural configuration or materials may be present in the area to be inspected. Any
change in material thickness below 1.2 mm (0.047 in) in clad or unclad areas will cause
conductivity reading changes.
Subtask 51-10-12-252-001-A
(1) Connect the PROBE FOR SIGMATEST (2-068-01-1363476) with the SIGMATEST (D2-068).
NOTE : Any conductivity measurement eddy current probe or instrument may be used provided that
they meet the requirements of this procedure.
(2) Make sure that a frequency of 60 KHz is selected.
(3) Adjust the instrument in accordance with the equipment manufacturer?s instructions.
Subtask 51-10-12-253-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) For inspection see FIGURE 51-10-12-991-001-A.
(2) Measure the conductivity at four reference points in the same panel away from the marked area.
Calculate the average of the measurements.
(3) Measure the conductivity at several points in the in the marked area and identify the reading furthest
from the calculated average in LIST STRUCTURE.
(4) Calculate the difference between the average obtained in LIST STRUCTURE and the measurement
obtained in LIST STRUCTURE.
(5) If the difference is less than 2.5% IACS (1.5 MS/m) the area should be considered not damaged and no
further measurements need be taken.
(6) If the difference is greater than 2.5% IACS (1.5 MS/m) mark the extent of the damage as described in
LIST STRUCTURE and LIST STRUCTURE.
(7) Take a series of measurements in a line from the most affected area to the point where the
measurement is within 2.5% IACS (1.5 MS/m) of the average found in LIST STRUCTURE. Mark that
point.
(8) Repeat this procedure in a number of radial directions.
(9) Connect the markings to define the shape and extent of the heat damaged area.
(10) Examine the surrounding structure and make sure that all damaged material has been detected.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-12-971-001-A
(1) Heat Damage
(a) All areas where the conductivity value differs more than 2.5% IACS (1.5 MS/m) must be
reported as damaged.
- Instrument working frequency
- Conductivity values from the inspected area and reference points
NOTE : A diagram of the inspection area should be used for recording purposes.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EDGE OF DAMAGE AREA
REFERENCE POINTS ON AFFECTED

UNDAMAGED AREAS POINT
L_NT_511012_1_0010101_01_00

Measurement of Damaged Area 51-10-12-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of covered layers in rivetted multi-
layered joints for cracks, using an ultrasonic angled beam search unit.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-13-270-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-13-270-801-A-01
Inspection for Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Structures
This procedure is applicable if the area to be inspected is of similar construction to that shown in FIGURE
51-10-13-991-001-A.
Fatigue cracks ≥ 4.5 mm (0.177 in) length in the multi-layered joint structure, starting at rivet holes in the
covered skin layer and extending in the direction of the rivet row, with propagation through the whole
thickness of the skin (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-002-A).
(1) Tooling :
99A51107299001 REFERENCE BLOCK
MPKM2 CABLE
SMWB70-6 SEARCH UNIT
USL48 ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT
(2) References :
51-41-01-001-A - Ultrasonic - Instruments
SRM 51-75-11
SRM 51-76-11
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-001-A - Structure Build-Up and Inspection Area in a Multi-Layered Joint
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-003-A - Search Unit SMWB70-6
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-004-A - Reference Block PN 99A51107299001
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-005-A - Time Base Calibration
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-006-A - Sensitivity Adjustment and Inspection Familiarization
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-007-A - Additional or Reduced Echoes caused by ’Through Transmission’
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-008-A - Sensitivity Adjustment and Inspection Procedure on Aircraft
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-13-271-001-A
(1) Identify the inspection area. See the specific related NTM Task or Service Bulletin, where necessary.
(3) Check the scan area and adjacent structure for any visible damage or discontinuities.
(4) Make sure that any peeling paint is removed (See SRM 51-75-11).
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(5) Measure the paint thickness in the search unit scan area (See TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01).
NOTE : If the paint thickness in the search unit scan area is > 120 µm, it must be reduced to ≤ 120
µm (See SRM 51-75-11).
(6) Make sure that any irregular sealant bead (additional coverage and/or built-up areas) is removed (See
SRM 51-76-11).
Subtask 51-10-13-272-001-A
(2) Time-base Calibration (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-005-A)
(a) Connect the SEARCH UNIT (SMWB70-6) (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-003-A) and the CABLE
(MPKM2) with the ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (USL48) (See 51-41-01-001-A).
NOTE : Any ultrasonic search unit, cable or instrument may be used provided that they meet the
(b) Select 50 mm (1.969 in) test range.
(c) Use the REFERENCE BLOCK (99A51107299001) (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-004-A) as
illustrated in FIGURE 51-10-13-991-005-A and couple the search unit in Position 1, with the
forward edge of the search unit aligned with the edge of the slot.
(d) Adjust the signal amplitude to 80% FSH.
(e) Adjust the instrument sweep and range controls to position the signal as shown in FIGURE
51-10-13-991-005-A, Detail A.
(f) Couple the search unit in Position 2, with the forward edge of the search unit aligned with the 40
mm (1.57 in) mark.
(g) Adjust the signal amplitude to 80% FSH.
(h) Adjust the instrument sweep and range controls to position the signal at 8 SD, as shown in
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-005-A, Detail B.
(i) If necessary, do the calibration again in accordance with LIST STRUCTURE thru LIST
STRUCTURE.
(j) Do a check calibration with the search unit in Position 3, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-13-991-005-
A, Detail B (signal at 5 SD), with the forward edge of the search unit aligned with the 25 mm
(0.984 in) mark.
NOTE : The time-base is calibrated (in shortened projection distance) so that the position of an
indication can be directly determined as the distance to the forward edge of the search
unit.
(3) Inspection Familiarization (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-006-A)
(a) Use REFERENCE BLOCK (99A51107299001) (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-004-A) as illustrated in
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-006-A, couple the search unit as shown in Detail B and direct the sound
beam axis at rivet hole No. 2.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(b) Optimize the signal from rivet hole No. 2 and adjust the instrument gain to bring the signal to
80% FSH as shown in FIGURE 51-10-13-991-006-A, Detail B, Position 1.
NOTE : Additional signals, with reduced amplitudes caused by ’through transmission’ from very
tight rivets in the reference block, may be observed. Similar signals may be observed
during inspection on the aircraft (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-007-A).
(c) Inspect the area at the front of rivet hole No. 2 with the illustrated search unit scan movements
and observe the indicated signal formation. See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-006-A, Detail B for the
search unit in Position 1, 2, 3 and 4.
NOTE : Slots will be indicated by a change-over signal from the rivet hole to the slot. The rivet
hole signal will fall and the slot signal will rise as the search unit is moved away from the
rivet hole position towards the slot position.
(d) Repeat steps LIST STRUCTURE thru LIST STRUCTURE at rivet holes No. 3, 4, 5 and 6 and
observe the signal formation from the rivet holes and off-center slots, as shown in FIGURE
51-10-13-991-006-A, Detail C, D, E and F.
NOTE : There are no change-over signals at rivet hole No. 5 due to the slot position and at rivet
hole No. 6 because it has no slot.
Subtask 51-10-13-273-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Do the sensitivity adjustment on the aircraft, see FIGURE 51-10-13-991-008-A and as described in
SUBTASK 272-001-A.
(2) Signals from the front of rivet holes to be inspected should be adjusted to 80% FSH.
NOTE : At some rivet holes it is possible that only one small signal, or no signal will be observed, even
with the increased gain.
NOTE : The sensitivity adjustment is correct if the noise level (without damping and reject) does not
exceed 10% of FSH (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-008-A, Detail A).
(3) If the sensitivity at a rivet hole cannot be adjusted as given in LIST STRUCTURE, it should be
adjusted at an adjacent rivet hole in the relevant inspection area.
(4) If the sensitivity adjustment in LIST STRUCTURE is not possible, only then the gain setting may be
adjusted as follows:
(a) Use REFERENCE BLOCK (99A51107299001) (See FIGURE 51-10-13-991-004-A) as illustrated in
FIGURE 51-10-13-991-006-A, couple the search unit in Position 1, as shown in Detail A and
adjust the maximum amplitude signal from the borehole No. 1 to 80% FSH and note the
instrument gain setting.
NOTE : In order to cover all structure differences which could affect the inspection procedure, the
original sensitivity adjustment setting should be used on the aircraft in each inspection
area.
(5) Increase the signal amplitude by an extra 6 dB.
(6) Do the inspection in accordance with FIGURE 51-10-13-991-008-A, from the outside or inside of the
aircraft, using the search unit positioning and scan movements as illustrated, and described in
SUBTASK 272-001-A.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(7) If during the inspection a signal appears between 3 and 6 SD on the instrument screen time-base and is
≥ 40% FSH:
(a) Reduce amplitude by 6 dB.
(b) Slide and swivel the search unit to maximize the signal.
(8) All detected indications ≥ 40% FSH are to be evaluated.
(9) Measure the length of all evaluated indications (See TASK 51-10-07-270-801-A01).
Subtask 51-10-13-971-001-A
(1) All indications which appear on the instrument screen time-base between 3 and 6 SD with a change-
over pattern and ≥ 40% FSH, shall be recorded as cracks.
NOTE : The characteristic change-over pattern will not be seen where there are no rivet hole signals, or
in the special case where a crack starts at the front of the rivet hole.
- Length of crack
- Direction of crack
Subtask 51-10-13-943-001-A
(1) Remove the couplant and clean the inspection area.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
02 01
POSSIBLE RIVET ROW
03
E
F
C B A
04
D POSSIBLE STRINGER OR FRAME
NOTE: THE TYPICAL STRUCTURE SHOWN AS

SEEN FROM OUTSIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT
IT MAY BE SIMILAR WHEN SEEN FROM
THE INSIDE
INSPECTION AREA IN COVERED LAYER
SHEET A: IF PRESENT MAY CONSIST OF ONE OR MORE LAYERS

WITH DIFFERENT MATERIALS AND THICKNESS
SHEET B: THICKNESS: MIN − 1.4 mm (0.053 in) MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY
MAX − 4 mm (0.157 in)
SHEET C: IF PRESENT MAY CONSIST OF ONE OR MORE LAYERS
SHEET D: ANY NUMBER OF LAYERS, OR STRUCTURE, WITH DIFFERENT MATERIALS AND THICKNESS
E SEARCH UNIT SCAN AREA
NOTE: A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF >
− 40 mm (1.57 in)
IS REQUIRED FOR COUPLING AND SEARCH UNIT MOVEMENT
F COVERED AREA UP TO INSPECTION AREA (CENTER OF RIVET ROW)
<
− 20 mm (0.79 in)
01 RIVET SHANK DIAMETER: 4 mm (0.157 in) − 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
DIFFERENT TYPES, MATERIALS, AND PITCHES
02 CONSTANT SEALANT BEAD OR SEALANT SHOULD BE REMOVED
03 THICKNESS OF SURFACE PROTECTION <
− 120 m
04 LAYERS A B C MAY BE BONDED TOGETHER OR JOINED WITH SEALANT
L_NT_511013_1_0010101_01_00

Structure Build-Up and Inspection Area in a 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Multi-Layered Joint Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
UPPER SKIN
A
B
COVERED SKIN LAYER

B
X X X
X X
− 4.5mm (0.177 in)
B B
30°
30°
EXPECTED DIRECTION OF CRACKS A

L_NT_511013_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MICRODOT CONNECTOR
7 mm
(0.275 in)
7 mm
16 mm (0.275 in)
(0.629 in)
SOUND ANGLE IN STEEL : 70°

FREQUENCY: 6 MHz
L_NT_511013_1_0030101_01_00

Unit SMWB70-6 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10 mm 10 mm
(0.39 in) A (0.39 in) 2 mm
2 mm (0.79 in) ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL
(0.79 in) 1 TOP SKIN 1 3.1364T351
BOREHOLE NO.
1 2 COVERED METAL SHEET 1 3.1364T351
1 2 3 4 5 6 3
3 mm 2 mm 3 BOTTOM SKIN 1 3.1364T351
B 5 mm (0.118 in) (0.079 in)
B 40 mm
(1.57 in) 4 RIVET CSK 100 5 NSA 5410−48
01 (0.197 in) 01 4
5 SEALANT AR PR 1422B
NO. 09−002
5 mm 5 mm
(0.197 in) 3 mm (0.197 in)
(0.118 in) 2 mm
(0.079 in) 15 mm 5 100 mm
(0.59 in) (3.94 in)
NOTE:
15 mm
TOLERANCE BOREHOLE DIAMETER ± 0.05 mm (0.001in)
90 mm 20 mm (0.59 in)
(3.54 in) (0.79 in) 2 ITEM 1, 2 : ASSEMBLED WITH SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002)
15 mm
(0.59 in) ITEM 1, 2 : ASSEMBLED WITH SEALANT (MATERIAL NO. 09−002)
10 0.39
15 0.59
20 0.79
25 0.98
30 1.18
35 1.38
40 1.57
45 1.77
50 1.97
5 0.2
mm in
0 0
ITEM 5 : EDGES SEALED WITH MATERIAL NO. 09−002

1.8 mm
(0.071 in)
02 03
SURFACE PROTECTION MATERIAL NO. 013−002, 16−001
AND 16−018 TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 120
KEEP SLOTS FREE OF PAINT AND SEALANT

10 mm
KEEP CALIBRATION SLOT CLEAN AND FREE OF COUPLANT
(0.39 in) A A A
160 mm
FOR SHAPES AND DIMENSIONS OF SLOTS SEE SHEET 2
(6.3 in)
130 mm
(5.12 in)
30 mm 5 x 20 mm BOREHOLE WITH RIVET, DIA 4.8 mm (0.189 in)
(1.181 in) (0.79 in) 01
4 mm BOREHOLE WITHOUT RIVET, DIA 4.8 mm (0.189 in)
(0.157 in) BOREHOLE WITHOUT RIVET, DIA 4.0 mm (0.157in)
KEEP BOREHOLE FREE OF PAINT AND SEALANT
01 SCREW, WASHER, NUT (LOCAL PROCUREMENT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
02 CALIBRATION SLOT, WIDTH 1 mm (0.039 in)
01
03 ENGRAVED NUMBERS DEPTH 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
B B ENGRAVED RANGE LINES DEPTH 0.05 mm (0.001 in)
mm in mm in mm in
DIMENSION 0.5 − 30 0.02 − 1.181 30 − 120 1.181 − 4.724 120 − 400 4.724 − 15.75
TOLERANCE ± 0.2 ± 0.008 ± 0.3 ± 0.012 ± 0.5 ± 0.02
L_NT_511013_1_0040102_01_01

Reference Block PN 99A51107299001 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
** On A/C ALL
SHAPES AND DIMENSIONS OF SLOTS
BOREHOLE
1 2 3 4 5 6
NO.
Reference Block PN 99A51107299001

5 mm 5 mm 3 mm 5 mm
Figure 51-10-13-991-004-A SHEET 01 -

SLOTFORM ADJUSTMENT
(0.197 in) (0.197 in) (0.118 in) (0.197 in) NO SLOT
AND BOREHOLE
DIMENSIONS 3 mm
(0.118 in)
30° 30°
NO RIVET RIVET
DIRECTION
OF SLOT
NO SLOT RIVET ROW RIVET ROW RIVET ROW RIVET ROW NO SLOT
DIRECTION DIRECTION DIRECTION DIRECTION
SLOT WIDTH: 0.15 mm (0.006 in)
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-10-13-PB4
L_NT_511013_1_0040101_01_00
Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A B
40 mm (SPD)
SEARCH UNIT ADJUSTMENT RANGE
(1.57 in)
0.197
0.393
1.18
1.38
1.57
1.77
1.97
0.79
0.98
0.59
in
0
mm
30
35
40
45
50
20
25
10
15
5
0
CHECK 3
SLOT POSITION
1 2
SEARCH UNIT ADJUSTMENT POSITIONS

NOTE: MOVE THE SEARCH UNIT TO THE 0 AND 40 POSITIONS
UNTIL THE SCREEN INDICATIONS IN DETAIL A AND B
ARE OBTAINED. THEN NO FURTHER ADJUSTMENT IS NEEDED
80% 2 80%
1
FSH 3 FSH
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD
0 mm 50 mm SPD 0 mm 25 mm 40 mm 50 mm SPD
(1.97 in) (0.98 in) (1.97 in)
(1.57 in)
A B
TIME BASE CALIBRATION FOR SHEET THICKNESS RANGE: 1.5 TO 2.5 mm (0.059 TO 0.098 in)
SPD = SHORTENED PROJECTION DISTANCE
SD = SCALE DIVISION (s)
FSH = FULL SCREEN HEIGHT L_NT_511013_1_0050101_01_01
Figure 51-10-13-991-005-A SHEET 01 - Time Page 10

Base Calibration 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
BOREHOLE NUMBERS
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
A B C D E F
01
02
30° 30°
5 0.197
10 0.393
15 0.59
20 0.79
25 0.98
30 1.18
35 1.38
40 1.57
45 1.77
50 1.97
mm in
0 0
02
A 100% FSH
BE 80
60
40
1 20
20 mm
(0.79 in) POSITION
0
A HOLE NO. 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 SD
POSITION 1 − BORE ECHO (SIGNAL)
BE: BORE SIGNAL (ECHO) NOTE:

SE: SLOT SIGNAL (ECHO) FOR DETAIL B THRU F
FSH : FULL SCREEN HEIGHT SEE SHEET 2
SD: SCREEN DISTANCE 01 : SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT
02 : SCANNING MOVEMENT
A A
L_NT_511013_1_0060101_01_01

Sensitivity Adjustment and Inspection 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Familiarization Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
100% 100% 100% 100%
CHANCE−OVER
BE 80 80 80 80
BE SE SE
60 60 60 60
SE
40 40 40 40
1 2 3 4 20 20 20 20
POSITION
0 0 0 0
B HOLE NO. 2 0 2 4
POSITION 1
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 2
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 3
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 4
6 8 10 SD
100% 100% 100% 100%

CHANCE−OVER
BE 80 80 80 80
BE SE SE
4 60 60 60 60
3 SE
2 40 40 40 40
1 20 20 20 20
POSITION
0 0 0 0
C HOLE NO. 3 0 2 4
POSITION 1
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 2
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 3
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 4
6 8 10 SD
100% 100% 100%

CHANCE−OVER
BE 80 80 80 80
BE SE BE SE
60 60 SE 60 60
4 40 40 40 40
5 1 2 3 20 20 20 20
POSITION
0 0 0 0
D HOLE NO. 4 0 2 4
POSITION 1
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 2
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 3
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 4
6 8 10 SD
100% 100% 100%

NO CHANCE−OVER
BE 80 80 80 80
SE
60 60 SE 60 SE 60
40 40 40 40
1 2 3 4 20 20 20 20
POSITION
0 0 0 0
E HOLE NO. 5 0 2 4
POSITION 1
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 2
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 3
6 8 10 SD 0 2 4
POSITION 4
6 8 10 SD
100% 100% 100%
BE 80 80 80 80
BE
60 60 60 60
40 40 40 40
1 2 3 4 20 20 20 20
POSITION
0 0 0 0
F HOLE NO. 6 0 2 4 6 8 10 SD 0 2 4 6 8 10 SD 0 2 4 6 8 10 SD 0 2 4 6 8 10 SD
POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4
L_NT_511013_1_0060102_01_00

Sensitivity Adjustment and Inspection 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Familiarization Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
RIVET SEARCH UNIT
A A
E B
D
C
E
C B
D
A A
C D
E C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
ADDITIONAL ECHOES CAUSED BY REDUCTION IN ECHO AMPLITUDES CAUSED
"THROUGH TRANSMISSION" BY "THROUGH TRANSMISSION"
L_NT_511013_1_0070101_01_00

Additional or Reduced Echoes caused by 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
’Through Transmission’ Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
VIEW FROM OUTSIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT
SWIVEL SCAN TO DETECT
RANDOM ANGLE CRACKS
RIVET ROW
TO BE INSPECTED
30°
30°
A 01
VIEW FROM INSIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT
A NOTE: INSPECTION CAN BE MADE

01 FROM OUTSIDE OR INSIDE
OF THE AIRCRAFT
SWIVEL SCAN TO DETECT

RANDOM ANGLE CRACKS
RIVET ROW
TO BE INSPECTED
20 mm
(0.79 in) 80%
FSH
MAX
NOISE LEVEL
WITHOUT INFLUENCE
OF DAMPING AND REJECT
SEARCH UNIT IN POSITION 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BOREHOLE SIGNAL FROM POSITION 1 02 10 % FSH
A 01 SEARCH UNIT SCAN MOVEMENT WITH SWIVELLING
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT 02 NOISE LEVEL EVALUATION RANGE

L_NT_511013_1_0080101_01_00

Sensitivity Adjustment and Inspection Procedure 51-10-13-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
on Aircraft Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the general requirements for the inspection of aircraft structure made of non-porous
materials, using a liquid penetrant method.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-14-230-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-14-230-801-A-01
Inspection of Aircraft Structure made of Non-Porous Materials
WARNING : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER MATERIALS.
OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL REGULATIONS. MAKE
SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA. DO NOT BREATHE THE
FUMES. DO NOT SMOKE. DO NOT USE THESE MATERIALS NEAR A FLAME, SPARKS OR SOURCES
OF HEAT. USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES. IF YOU GET ONE OF THESE
MATERIALS ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH A FLOW OF CLEAN WATER.
IF YOU GET ONE OF THESE MATERIALS IN YOUR MOUTH, GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID. IN
GENERAL, THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS, FLAMMABLE AND SKIN IRRITANTS.
CAUTION : DO NOT USE PENETRANT INSPECTION METHOD ON COMPOSITE MATERIALS.
- Aircraft structure made of non-porous materials.

- Liquid penetrant inspections should not be used on areas where unwanted penetration of the liquid is
possible (Rubber, seals, fasteners, joints etc.).
Cracks ≥ 6 mm (0.24 in) length which are open to the surface.
(1) References :
51-80-00 - LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING - GENERAL
SRM 51-75-11
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-14-231-001-A
(1) TABLE 1 shows the equipment characteristics used in the development of this procedure.
DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION
Penetrant System (Fluorescent) TYPE 1, Method C, Level 3 (See QPL-25135 and
51-80-00)
UV Lamp See EN ISO 3059
Light Intensity Measuring Equipment See EN ISO 3059
UV-Light Intensity Measuring Equipment See EN ISO 3059
Equipment Characteristics
c
TABLE 1
(2) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is accessible. Fittings, components, attaching parts,
should be removed as necessary (See the applicable AMM Task).
(3) Make sure that any paint coating is removed from the area to be inspected (See SRM 51-75-11).
NOTE : Abrasive methods of removing surface protection should not be used.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(4) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean, smooth and dry (See ASTM E 1417).
(5) Check the inspection area for any visible damage or discontinuities.
(6) Measure the radiation intensity from the UV lamp at a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in) over the
inspection area.
(7) The measured radiation intensity at 300 mm (11.81 in) over the inspection area for the UV lamp
(SeeTABLE 1) must not be less than 1500 µWcm-2.
(8) Measure the white light level at a distance of 300 mm (11.81 in) over the inspection area with the UV
lamp switched on.
(9) If the total measured white light level around the area to be inspected is more than 20 LUX (See
TABLE 1) the area must be darkened to decrease the light level.
NOTE : If the background white light level cannot be decreased to the above specified values the
inspection cannot be performed.
Subtask 51-10-14-232-001-A
B. Inspection
(1) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean.
(2) Apply the penetrant to the inspection area, using a brush or spray as applicable to the area to be
inspected.
NOTE : The recommended temperature for applying penetrant is between 4 ˚C (39 ˚F) and 49 ˚C
(120 ˚F).
(3) Allow the penetrant to remain (dwell) for at least thirty minutes before removing.
NOTE : The inspection surface should be kept wet during the dwell period by applying more penetrant
as necessary.
(4) Remove excess of the penetrant, using a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION : DO NOT SPRAY THE SOLVENT DIRECTLY ONTO THE INSPECTION SURFACE, AS THIS
MAY REDUCE THE SENSITIVITY OF THE INSPECTION BY WASHING OUT PENETRANT
FROM A DISCONTINUITY.
(5) Finally wipe the surface of the inspection area with a clean lint-free cloth or tissue moistened with
appropriate solvent.
(6) Allow the solvent to evaporate until the inspection surface is dry.
(7) View the inspection area, using the UV lamp, and check that all excess penetrant has been removed.
(8) Spray the non-aqueous developer onto the inspection area in a thin, uniform coating.
NOTE : If the developer coating is too thick and/or uneven, this can reduce the sensitivity of any
indications.
(9) Do an initial inspection using the UV lamp, while the developer is still moist, to follow the development
of any indications.
(10) Allow the developer to dry out on the surface for a minimum time of fifteen minutes.
(11) Do the final inspection.
(12) All indications must be evaluated.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-14-971-001-A
(1) Classify all indications which form a continuous line as cracks.
(2) All relevant indications which have been classified as cracks must be recorded.
- Crack position
- Crack length
- Crack direction
Subtask 51-10-14-943-001-A
D. Final NDT Requirements
(1) Clean the area, to remove all traces of penetrant and developer.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PARTICLES OF CLEANING AGENT

INSPECTION SURFACE
CONTAMINATION
DISCONTINUITY DISCONTINUITY
1. SURFACE AND DISCONTINUITY 2. APPLY CLEANING AGENT

CONTAMINATED
PENETRANT
ENTERS
3. INSPECTION AREA IS DRY AND 4. APPLY PENETRANT

CLEAN (DEGREASED)
EXCESS CLOTH MOISTENED DEVELOPER DRAWS PENETRANT

PENETRANT WITH CLEANING AGENT FROM DISCONTINUITY
DEVELOPER
PENETRANT PENETRANT
REMAINS IN SEEPS OUT OFF
5. REMOVE EXCESS PENETRANT 6. APPLY DEVELOPER

WITH MOIST CLOTH
L_NT_511014_1_0010101_01_00

Inspection Procedure 51-10-14-PB8 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of covered layers in riveted multi-layered
joints for shallow cracks using an ultrasonic angled beam search unit.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-15-270-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-15-270-801-A-01
Inspection for Shallow Cracks in Multi-Layered Joint Structures
This procedure is applicable if the area to be inspected is of similar construction to that shown in FIGURE
51-10-15-991-001-A.
Shallow fatigue cracks with the following characteristics (See FIGURE 51-10-15-991-002-A):
(1) For Area A which starts at rivet/fastener holes in the covered skin layer
- in rivet/fastener row direction ± 45 degrees
- having a detectable length ≥ 6 mm (0.24 in) with a propagation depth of ≥ 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
(2) For Area A which starts between rivet/fastener holes in the covered skin layer
- in the rivet/fastener row direction ± 45 degrees
(3) For Area B, with rivet row in the search unit scan area which starts at rivet/fastener holes in the
covered skin layer
(4) For Area B, with rivet row in the search unit scan area which starts between rivet/fastener holes in the
covered skin layer
(1) Tooling :
99A53307292001 REFERENCE BLOCK
MPKM2 CABLE
SMWB70-6 SEARCH UNIT
USN52 ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT
(2) References :
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-15-991-001-A - Structure Build-Up and Inspection Area in a Multi-Layered Joint
FIGURE 51-10-15-991-003-A - Search Unit SMWB70-6
FIGURE 51-10-15-991-004-A - Reference Block PN99A53307292001
FIGURE 51-10-15-991-007-A - Additional or Reduced Echoes caused by ’Through Transmission’
FIGURE 51-10-15-991-008-A - Inspection Procedure
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-15-271-001-A
(1) Identify the inspection area. See the related NTM Task or Service Bulletin, where necessary.
(3) Check the scan area and adjacent structure for any visible damage or discontinuities.
(4) Make sure that any peeling paint is removed (See SRM 51-75-11).
(5) Measure the paint thickness in the search unit scan area (See TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01 and
FIGURE 51-10-15-991-001-A).
NOTE : If the paint thickness in the search unit scan area is > 120 µm, it must be reduced to ≤ 120
µm (See SRM 51-75-11).
Subtask 51-10-15-272-001-A
CAUTION : IT IS RECOMMENDED TO USE ONLY THE FOLLOWING SEARCH UNIT.
(2) Connect the SEARCH UNIT (SMWB70-6) (See FIGURE 51-10-15-991-003-A) with the CABLE
(MPKM2) and the ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (USN52).
NOTE : Any ultrasonic cable or instrument may be used provided that they meet the requirements of
this procedure.
(3) Time-base Calibration (See FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A)
(a) Select 50 mm (1.969 in) test range.
(b) Using the REFERENCE BLOCK (99A53307292001) (See FIGURE 51-10-15-991-004-A) as
illustrated, couple the search unit in Position E, with the forward edge of the search unit aligned
as close as possible to the edge of the skin, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail E.
NOTE : Reference block 99A53307292000 can also be used, if available.

(c) Adjust the search unit position to obtain maximum amplitude signals from slots 1 and 2.
(d) Adjust the instrument sweep and range controls to position the signals as shown in FIGURE
51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail E.
(e) Couple the search unit in Position A, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail A, and
adjust the maximum amplitude signal from hole No. 8 to 80% FSH, and note the instrument gain
setting (See SUBTASK 273-001-A).
(f) Couple the search unit as shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail B and direct the sound
beam axis at hole No. 5.
(g) Optimize the signal from rivet hole No. 5 and, if necessary, adjust the instrument gain to bring
the signal to 80 % FSH, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail B, Position 1.
NOTE : Additional signals, with reduced amplitudes caused by ’through transmission’ from very
tight rivets in the reference block may be observed. Similar signals may be observed
during inspection on the aircraft (See FIGURE 51-10-15-991-007-A).
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(h) Move the search unit towards the slot as shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail B and
observe the fall of the hole signal and the rise of the slot signal (change-over).
(i) Repeat steps LIST STRUCTURE and LIST STRUCTURE at holes 3 and 4, and observe the
signal pattern from the off-center slots, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A, Detail C and
D.
NOTE : The signal pattern shown in FIGURE 51-10-15-991-006-A are also valid for holes 2, 6, 7
and 9.
Subtask 51-10-15-273-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Do the inspection in Area A and B using the search unit positioning and scan movements, with the
forward edge of the search unit as close as possible to the edge of the skin, as shown in FIGURE
51-10-15-991-008-A.
(2) Signals from the inspection boreholes should be set to 80 % FSH.
NOTE : At individual boreholes it is possible that only a small single signal, or no signal, will be observed
despite increased gain. In this case the gain setting may be increased a further 6 dB from that
noted in SUBTASK 272-001-A.
(3) Increase the signal amplitude by an extra 6 dB.
(4) Inspect the boreholes and each rivet pitch for possible crack indications.
(5) If signals appear, between 4 and 6 SD on the instrument screen time base and are ≥ 40 % FSH, slide
and swivel the search unit to maximize the signals.
(6) All detected indications ≥ 40 % FSH are to be evaluated as cracks.
(a) Cracks starting from a borehole will be indicated by a change over signal from the borehole of the
crack. The borehole signal will fall and the crack will rise as the search unit moves away from the
borehole position, towards the crack position.
NOTE : No change over signal will be seen, where there is no borehole signal or the crack is
starting at the front surface of the borehole.
(b) Cracks starting between the boreholes will be indicated by a signal with no change over pattern.
(7) Measure the length of all indications evaluated as cracks (See TASK 51-10-07-270-801-A01).
(8) Indications less than 2 mm (0.078 in) length are to be ignored.
Subtask 51-10-15-971-001-A
(1) All evaluated indications which appear on the instrument screen time base between 4 and 6 SD with
and without a change-over pattern and ≥ 40 % FSH, shall be classified as cracks and recorded.
(2) Indications less than 2 mm (0.078 in) length are to be ignored.
NOTE : The characteristic change-over pattern will not be seen where there are no borehole signals, the
crack is starting at the front surface of the borehole, or from between the boreholes.
- Position of crack
- Length of crack
- Direction of crack
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-15-971-002-A
E. Acceptance Criteria
(1) Remove the couplant and clean the inspection area.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE RIVET ROW POSITION 01

IN THIS AREA WITH PITCH THE
SAME AS AT 01
02
03
E F
AREA B
06
C B A
D
AREA A 04
05
INSPECTION AREA
IN COVERED LAYER
NOTE: THE TYPICAL STRUCTURE SHOWN AS SEEN FROM OUTSIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT
IT MAY BE SIMILAR WHEN SEEN FROM THE INSIDE
SHEET A: IF PRESENT MAY CONSIST OF ONE OR MORE LAYERS
SHEET B: THICKNESS: MIN − 1.4 mm (0.053 in) MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY
MAX − 4 mm (0.157 in)
SHEET C: IF PRESENT MAY CONSIST OF ONE OR MORE LAYERS
SHEET D: ANY NUMBER OF LAYERS, OR STRUCTURE, WITH DIFFERENT MATERIALS AND THICKNESS
E SEARCH UNIT SCAN AREA − A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF >
− 40 mm (1.57 in)
IS REQUIRED FOR COUPLING AND SEARCH UNIT MOVEMENT
F COVERED AREA UP TO INSPECTION AREA (CENTER OF RIVET ROW) − < 20 mm (0.79 in)
01 RIVET SHANK DIAMETER: 4 mm (0.157 in) − 5.6 mm (0.220 in)
DIFFERENT TYPES, MATERIALS, AND PITCHES
02 CONSTANT SEALANT BEAD
03 < 120 m
THICKNESS OF SURFACE PROTECTION −
04 LAYERS A, B, C MAY BE BONDED TOGETHER OR JOINED WITH SEALANT
05 AREA A WITHOUT RIVETS IN THE SEARCH UNIT SCAN AREA
06 AREA B WITH RIVETS IN THE SEARCH UNIT SCAN AREA
L_NT_511015_1_0010101_01_00

Structure Build-Up and Inspection Area in a 51-10-15-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Multi-Layered Joint Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
UPPER SKIN
NOT TO SCALE
A
B
COVERED SKIN LAYER

A POSSIBLE FATIGUE CRACKS
01
>
− 6 mm
01 (0.24 in) 01
>
− 6 mm >
− 6 mm
(0.24 in) (0.24 in)
PROPAGATION DEPTH >

− 0.8 mm (0.03 in)
A A
45°
45°
EXPECTED DIRECTION
OF CRACKS STARTING
IN THE INTERFACE
01 AREA A: >
− 6 mm (0.236 in) DETECTABLE LENGTH
>
B
AREA B: − 10 mm (0.394 in) DETECTABLE LENGTH
L_NT_511015_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7 mm
(0.275 in)
MICRODOT CONNECTOR
16 mm
(0.629 in)
7 mm
(0.275 in)
SOUND ANGLE IN STEEL : 70°

FREQUENCY: 6MHz
L_NT_511015_1_0030101_01_00

Unit SMWB70-6 51-10-15-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1
PILOT HOLES
9.5 mm 40 mm
DIA 1.5 mm
(0.37 in) (1.57 in) 10 mm
(0.59 in)
(0.39 in)
9.5 mm 7
B
C A F (0.37 in) F B
98 mm
30° B (3.86 in) 8
C 20° 2
A G G
6
H H 5 4
C C 20° A C 44 mm
4 x 24 mm (1.73 in)
30° A A J J 176 mm (0.94 in) 6
(6.93 in)
20°
20° 64 mm
B 8
A 122 mm (2.52 in)
C (4.8 in)
9.5 mm 50 mm 10 mm 7
(1.97 in) (0.39 in)
E (0.37 in)
9.5 mm
PILOT HOLES (0.37 in)
DIA 1.5 mm
40 mm
(0.59 in) 3
(1.57 in)
SLOT LENGTH: D
A A = 3 mm (0.12 in) A A
B = 5 mm (0.2 in)
C = 7 mm (0.28 in) 1.6 mm
(0.063 in)
A RIVET HOLE
1.6 mm
(0.063 in)
1.5 mm B B
(0.59 in)
1.5 mm
RIVET HOLE (0.59 in) A
A RIVET HOLE 11 mm 0.6 mm

3 mm (0.433 in) (0.024 in)
8 x 22 mm
1.5 mm (0.12 in) (0.866 in)
(0.59 in) 221 mm 0.6 mm
1.5 mm D (8.7 in) (0.024 in)
RIVET HOLE (0.59 in) A
232 mm
EXAMPLE OF SLOT (9.13 in)
IN UPPER SKIN
SLOTS: TRIANGULAR SHAPED
NOTE: FOR NOTES AND TABLES SEE SHEET 2 C C WIDTH 0.15 mm ± 0.05 mm (0.006 in ± 0.002 in)
E FOR SECTION F−F, G−G, H−H AND J−J SEE SHEET 2 DEPTH 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
L_NT_511015_1_0040101_01_00

Reference Block PN99A53307292001 51-10-15-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
F F
23 mm
10 mm (0.91 in)
(0.39 in)
G G
SLOTS: WIDTH 0.5 mm ± 0.2 mm (0.020 in ± 0.008 in)
DEPTH 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
H H
10 mm NOTE: REFERENCE STANDARD 99A53307292000 CAN

(0.39 in) 15 mm ALSO BE USED IF AVAILABLE
(0.59 in)
TOLERANCE: BOREHOLE DIAMETER 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
J J ITEM 1, 2, 3, 4 BOTH DOUBLERS BONDED WITH
ADHESIVE AW106 (MATERIAL NO. 08−001)
KEEP BONDING AREAS FREE OF PAINT
ITEM 2, 3, 4, 5 ASSEMBLED WITH SEALANT
MATERIAL NO. 09−002
ITEM NOMENCLATURE QTY MATERIAL ITEM 7 EDGES SEALED WITH MATERIAL NO. 09−002
1 TOP SKIN 1 3.1364T361
SURFACE PROTECTION: MATERIAL NO. 13−002,
2 TOP SKIN DOUBLER 1 3.1364T361 16−001 AND 16−018 TO A MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF 100 m
3 BOTTOM SKIN 1 3.1364T361 KEEP SLOTS FREE OF PAINT AND SEALANT
4 BOTTOM SKIN DOUBLER 1 3.1364T361
5 STRINGER 1 DAN21 AK28x22x1.6
6 RIVET CSK 100° 20 NSA5410−48 mm in mm in mm in
7 RIVET CSK 100° 8 NSA5410−48 (MODIFIED LENGTH) DIMENSION 0.5 − 30 0.021 − 1.181 30 − 120 1.181 − 4.724 120 − 400 4.724 − 15.75
8 SEALANT AR PR1422B, MATERIAL NO. 09−002 TOLERANCE ± 0.2 ± 0.008 ± 0.3 ± 0.012 ± 0.5 ± 0.02
L_NT_511015_1_0040102_01_01

Reference Block PN99A53307292001 51-10-15-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
D C B A E
POSITION 1 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
80
BE BE: BORE SIGNAL (ECHO)
60
40 SE: SLOT SIGNAL (ECHO)
BE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 SD: SCREEN DISTANCE
50.0
A HOLE NO. 8 POSITION 1 − BORE SIGNAL
POSITION 1, 2, 3
SLOT
SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
80 SE 80 80
BE
SE
60 60 60
F BE SE SE 40
BE
40 40
20 20 20
50.0 50.0 50.0

26 mm
B HOLE NO. 5 POSITION 1 − BORE SIGNAL POSITION 2 − CHANGE OVER SIGNAL POSITION 3 − SLOT SIGNAL
(1.024 in) SLOT 2
POSITION 1, 2, 3
9 10 SLOT
SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SLOT 1
SE
80 80 80
BE SE
60 60 60
19 mm BE SE SE 40 BE 40 40
(0.748 in)
20 20 20
POSITION 1
50.0 50.0 50.0
C HOLE NO. 4 POSITION 1 − BORE SIGNAL POSITION 2 − CHANGE OVER SIGNAL POSITION 3 − SLOT SIGNAL
F F F E
POSITION 1, 2, 3
SLOT 1−2 SLOT
SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SE
80 80 80 80
BE SE
60 60 60 60
40 BE SE SE 40 BE 40 40
20 20 20 20
50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0

POSITION 1 − BOTH SLOT SIGNALS D HOLE NO. 3 POSITION 1 − BORE SIGNAL POSITION 2 − CHANGE OVER SIGNAL POSITION 3 − SLOT SIGNAL
L_NT_511015_1_0060101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
RIVET SEARCH UNIT
A A
E B
D
C
E
C B
D
A A
B
80 80
D 60 60
C C
E 40 40
20 20
50.0 50.0
EXAMPLE EXAMPLE
ADDITIONAL ECHOES CAUSED BY REDUCTION IN ECHO AMPLITUDES CAUSED
"THROUGH TRANSMISSION" BY "THROUGH TRANSMISSION"
L_NT_511015_1_0070101_01_00

Additional or Reduced Echoes caused by 51-10-15-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
’Through Transmission’ Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
RESTRICTED
AREA
(AREA B)
01
RESTRICTED AREA ANGLED SCAN TO

(AREA B) DETECT RANDOM
ANGLE CRACK
01 INSPECT ACROSS ALL RIVET PITCHES

TO DETECT POSSIBLE CRACKS NOT
STARTING AT THE RIVET HOLES
L_NT_511015_1_0080101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of specific Al-Alloy riveted structure for
sub-surface cracks, using an Eddy Current method.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-16-250-801-A01 for the inspection of sub-surface cracks with a remaining material thickness
to the inspection surface of:
- ≤ 0.4 mm (0.016 in) sheet/plate Al-alloy structure with a thickness of ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) and ≤ 1.4 mm
(0.055 in)
- ≤ 0.8 mm (0.031 in) in sheet/plate Al-alloy structure with a thickness of ≥ 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
B. See TASK 51-10-16-250-802-A01 for the inspection of sub-surface cracks with a remaining material thickness
to the inspection surface of ≤ 1.5 mm (0.059 in) in sheet/plate Al-alloy structure with a minimum thickness
of 3 mm (0.118 in)
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-16-250-801-A-01
Inspection for Sub-Surface Cracks in Al-Alloy Structure - Procedure A
This procedure is applicable if the area of sheet/plate structure to be inspected has a minimum thickness of 1
mm (0.039 in) and is in accordance with that illustrated in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-002-A.
Fatigue cracks with the following characteristics (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-003-A):
(1) For sheet/plate structure having a thickness ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) and ≤ 1.4 mm (0.055 in.)
(a) Starting at rivet/fastener holes

- having a detectable length ≥ 3 mm (0.118 in) with a remaining material thickness to the
inspection surface of 0.4 mm (0.016 in) and extending from under the rivet/fastener head
(b) Starting between rivet/fastener holes
inspection surface of 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
(2) For sheet/plate structure having a thickness ≥ 1.4 mm (0.055 in)
(a) Starting at rivet/fastener holes

inspection surface of 0.8 mm (0.031 in) and extending from under the rivet/fastener head
(b) Starting between rivet/fastener holes
inspection surface of 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
(1) Tooling :
2-832-01-2520 PROBE
2-832-01-9902 CABLE
2-832-02-2455 PROBE
99A53307274000 CALIBRATION BLOCK
SD2-832 EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT DEFECTOSCOPE
(2) References :
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-16-991-002-A - Inspection Area and Structure Build-Up
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
FIGURE 51-10-16-991-004-A - Probe 2-832-02-2455 and 2-832-01-2520
FIGURE 51-10-16-991-005-A - Calibration Block PN 99A53307274000
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-16-251-001-A
(1) Identify the inspection area, see the related NTM Task or Service Bulletin, where necessary.
and the zero compensation point (See TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01 and 51-61-04-001-A).
(a) If the paint thickness on the inspection area is greater than 500 µm the inspection cannot be
done. The paint must be stripped or reduced in thickness to less than 500 µm (See SRM
51-75-11).
NOTE : Variations in paint thickness between the inspection area and zero compensation point
adjacent to the inspection area must not be greater than 50 µm.
Subtask 51-10-16-252-002-A
(1) Operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions.
(2) Connect the PROBE (2-832-02-2455) (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-004-A) with the CABLE
(2-832-01-9902) and the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT DEFECTOSCOPE (SD2-832) (See
51-61-02-001-A).
NOTE : In areas where the access is limited use the PROBE (2-832-01-2520) (See FIGURE
51-10-16-991-004-A)
probes.
(3) Set the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT DEFECTOSCOPE (SD2-832) controls as follows:
- Frequency : 10 kHz
- Sensitivity X/Y : 26 dB
- Sensitivity Y : 12 dB
- Low Pass Filter : 0 (knob position)
- IP : 0 (knob position)
- Attenuator Ui : 1 (knob position)
(4) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A53307274000) (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-005-A) and calibrate
the equipment for lift-off and zero, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-006-A.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
NOTE : For unpainted surfaces the foils are not used.

(b) Place the probe on a slot free area and adjust the flying spot to a zero point on the instrument
screen, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-006-A, Position A.
(c) Adjust the lift-off signal on the instrument screen to the horizontal position.
(d) Move the probe across the 1.2 mm (0.047 in) reference slot in the calibration block and adjust
the instrument X/Y sensitivity so that the shape and maximum amplitude of the signal is as
shown in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-006-A, Position B.
(a) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot in the calibration block and confirm that the
maximum signal is greater than 20 % screen height.
Subtask 51-10-16-253-003-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : IF DURING THE INSPECTION THE PROBES HAVE TO BE CHANGED, CALIBRATE THE
INSTRUMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SUBTASK ’INSTRUMENT ADJUSTMENT’.
(1) Place the probe adjacent to the inspection area and compensate the flying spot to the zero point on the
instrument screen.
51-10-16-991-007-A.
NOTE : The probe tip must be at right angles ± 15 degrees to the inspection surface.
(3) Any indication on the instrument screen ≥ 10 % screen height above the zero line must be evaluated
for a possible crack.
NOTE : If the probe is scanned too close to a rivet/fastener head or sheet edge the indication will be
similar to a crack indication.
(4) Measure the length of all indications evaluated as cracks using a 1 mm (0.039 in) scan path.
Subtask 51-10-16-971-001-A
(1) All indications evaluated as cracks ≥ 10 % above the zero line on the instrument screen must be
recorded.
- Position and direction of cracks
- Length of cracks
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
B
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
A
C
B
B
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
A A 01
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
B B
INSPECTION AREA: AROUND AND BETWEEN RIVET / FASTENERS IN EACH ROW
NOTE: INSPECTION ONLY FROM THE SURFACE OF THE AFFECTED SHEET

SHEET A AND B, THICKNESS: MINIMUM 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
SHEET A AND B, MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY, WITH CONDUCTIVITY RANGE 16 − 32 MS / m
SHEET C, AL−ALLOY OR TITANIUM SHEET / STIFFENER: ANY NUMBER AND THICKNESS
RIVET MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY, TITANIUM, MONEL, STEEL, (ALL TYPES)
01 THIS DISTANCE MUST BE > 20 mm (0.79 in) FOR THE RIGID PROBE
AND > 35 mm (1.38 in) FOR THE FLEXIBLE PROBE
L_NT_511016_1_0020101_01_01

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE
SUB−SURFACE CRACKS 02 03
A
B
01
C
D
3 mm 3 mm
(0.188 in) (0.188 in) 0.8 mm
A 0.4 mm
(0.016 in) (0.032 in)
B 3 mm MATERIAL
3 mm MATERIAL
(0.188 in) (0.188 in) REMAINING
REMAINING
C
D
POSSIBLE
SUB−SURFACE CRACKS 02 03
POSSIBLE SUB−SURFACE CRACKS POSSIBLE SUB−SURFACE CRACKS
A A B B
SKIN THICKNESS 1 mm TO <1.4 mm SKIN THICKNESS 1.4 mm
( 0.039 in TO <0.055 in) ( 0.055 in)
POSSIBLE SUB−SURFACE CRACKS POSSIBLE SUB−SURFACE CRACKS
NOTE: 3 mm 0.4 mm 3 mm
(0.188 in) 0.8 mm
01 A TWO SHEET STRUCTURE IS (0.016 in) (0.188 in) (0.032 in)
SHOWN BUT THERE CAN BE ONE OR MATERIAL MATERIAL
MORE SHEETS (ANY THICKNESS) 3 mm REMAINING 3 mm REMAINING
IN BETWEEN. (0.188 in) (0.188 in)
02 THE CRACKS START AT THE INTERFACE
BETWEEN THE SHEETS AND CAN PROPAGATE
C C D D
TO THE SURFACE. SKIN THICKNESS 1 mm TO <1.4 mm SKIN THICKNESS 1.4 mm
( 0.039 in TO <0.055 in) ( 0.055 in)
03 CRACKS CAN DEVIATE ±45° FROM THE
RIVET ROW DIRECTION.
L_NT_511016_1_0030101_01_01

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
30 mm
16 mm (1.181 in)
(0.63 in) 12.5 mm
(0.49 in)
5 mm
(0.197 in)
A
11 mm 30°
63 mm
(0.433 in) 12 mm (2.48 in)
(0.472 in)
PROBE 2−832−02−2455
TYPE: ABSOLUTE, SHIELDED

FREQUENCY RANGE: 2 KHz − 40 KHz
12 mm
5 mm (0.472 in)
(0.197 in)
A
01
90° 62 mm
(2.441 in)
22 mm
(0.866 in)
193 mm
(7.598 in)
PROBE 2−832−01−2520
4 FIELD +
TYPE: ABSOLUTE, SHIELDED, FLEXIBLE 5 MEASURING +
2 MEASURING −
1 FIELD −
PROBE CONNECTOR: TYPE R60B305CA222 (LEMOSA)
CABLE CONNECTOR: TYPE F60B305C045 (LEMOSA)
A
01 IT IS POSSIBLE TO BEND THE PROBE TO
90° WITH A RADIUS OF 50 mm (1.969 in)
L_NT_511016_1_0040101_01_00

2-832-02-2455 and 2-832-01-2520 51-10-16-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
60 mm
(2.362 in)
R 25 mm ± 0.05 mm
(0.984 in ± 0.002 in)
B B
(1 mm ± 0.05 mm)
(0.039 in
01
± 0.002 in)
PN
5 mm
(0.197 in) 1.8 mm
A 100 mm 5 mm (0.071 in)
(3.937 in) (0.197 in)
25 mm
(0.984 in) A A
(1.2 mm ± 0.05 mm)

(0.047 in ± 0.002 in)
75 mm
B B (2.953 in)
SLOT WIDTH: 0.15 mm ± 0.03 mm

(0.006 in ± 0.001 in)
01 SCREW: DIN84 M4 x 8 OR LOCAL

PROCUREMENT
MATERIAL: 3.1364T351
0.5 − 30 mm 30 − 120 mm
DIMENSIONS
(0.02 − 1.181 in) (1.181 − 4.724 in)
± 0.2 mm ± 0.3 mm
ACRYL 5.1411 TOLERANCE (± 0.008 in) (± 0.012 in)
10 x 10 x 100 mm
(0.394 x 0.394 x 3.937 in)
L_NT_511016_1_0050101_01_00

Calibration Block PN 99A53307274000 51-10-16-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
POSITION B
LIFT OFF
PROBE
POSITION A
PROBE MOVEMENT
ACROSS THE SLOTS
NOTE: DO THE SAME CALIBRATION

PROCEDURE WHEN USING THE
FLEXIBLE PROBE
1.2 mm (0.047 in)

SLOT
1 mm (0.0394 in)
SLOT
SH POSITION A SH POSITION B 60%

100% 100% SH
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25% ZERO
0% ZERO DATUM 0% DATUM
ZERO LINE ZERO
LINE
ZERO POINT ZERO POINT
POSITION POSITION
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
LIFT OFF

FOR LIFT OFF 1.2 mm (0.047 in) DEEP SLOT
SH: SCREEN HEIGHT
L_NT_511016_1_0060101_01_01

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
02
A
2 mm
(0.079 in)
10 mm
(0.394 in)
01
30° 30°
POSSIBLE COVERED STRUCTURE
(FRAME CLIP, STRINGER, DOUBLER)
A 03
RIVETS / FASTENERS
ZERO COMPENSATION POINT
PROBE SCAN AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE AROUND RIVETS / FASTENERS
PROBE SCAN BETWEEN RIVETS / FASTENERS
MOVEMENT OF PROBE CLOSE TO THE EDGE OF POSSIBLE

COVERED STRUCTURE
01 AREAS WHERE THE PROBE SCAN IS BLOCKED BY

RIVET HEADS / COVERED STRUCTURE ARE NOT TO
BE INSPECTED
02 IF THE PROBE IS SCANNED TOO CLOSE TO A

RIVET / FASTENER HEAD OR SHEET EDGES, THE
INDICATION WILL BE SIMILAR TO A CRACK INDICATION
03 IF THE RIVET FASTENER IS TOO CLOSE TO THE SHEET

EDGE, MOVE THE PROBE AS SHOWN IN DETAIL A
L_NT_511016_1_0070101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-16-250-802-A-01
Inspection for Sub-Surface Cracks in Al-Alloy Structure - PROCEDURE B
This procedure is applicable if the area of sheet/plate structure to be inspected has a minimum thickness of 3
mm (0.118 in) and is in accordance with that illustrated in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-008-A.
Fatigue cracks with the following characteristics (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-009-A):
(1) Starting at rivet/fastener holes
- in rivet/fastener row direction ± 45 degrees
- having a detectable length ≥ 4 mm (0.157 in) at a depth of ≤ 1.5 mm (0.059 in) and extending
from under the rivet/fastener head
NOTE : Fatigue cracks with the same characteristics and open to the surface are also possible.
(2) Starting between rivet/fastener holes
- having a detectable length ≥ 4 mm (0.157 in) at a depth of ≤ 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
NOTE : Fatigue cracks with the same characteristics and open to the surface are also possible.
(1) Tooling :
B1 EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST
EK2HF CABLE
PKA27H1359 PROBE
(2) References :
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-16-991-008-A - Inspection Area and Structure Build-Up
FIGURE 51-10-16-991-010-A - Probe PKA27H1359
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-16-251-002-A
(1) Identify the inspection area, see the related NTM Task or Service Bulletin, where necessary.
Page 10
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
and zero compensation point (See TASK 51-10-00-250-801-A01 and 51-61-04-001-A).
(5) If the paint thickness on the inspection area is greater than 500 µm the inspection cannot be done. The
paint must be stripped or reduced in thickness to less than 500 µm (See SRM 51-75-11).
NOTE : Variations in paint thickness between the inspection area and zero compensation point adjacent
to the inspection area must not be greater than 50 µm.
Subtask 51-10-16-252-003-A
(1) Operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions.
(2) Connect the PROBE (PKA27H1359) (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-010-A) with the CABLE (EK2HF)
and the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (B1) (See 51-61-02-001-A).
probe.
(3) Set the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (B1) controls as follows:
- Frequency : 5 kHz
- Filter Sensitivity : LP 20 Hz
- Preamplifier : 12 dB
- Band Range : MF
- Gain Y (X) : 52 dB/40 dB
- Axis Spread Y : 12 dB
(4) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A51107300000) (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-011-A) and calibrate
the equipment for lift-off and zero, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-012-A.

(c) Adjust the lift-off signal on the instrument screen to the horizontal position.
(d) Move the probe across the 3.6 mm (0.142 in) reference slot in the calibration block and adjust
the instrument X/Y sensitivity so that the shape and maximum amplitude of the signal is as
shown in FIGURE 51-10-16-991-012-A, Position B.
maximum signal is greater than 20 % screen height.
Subtask 51-10-16-253-004-A
C. Inspection
(1) Place the probe adjacent to the inspection area and compensate the flying spot to the zero point on the
instrument screen.
Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-10-16-991-013-A.
NOTE : The probe tip must be at right angles ± 15 degrees to the inspection surface and the probe
must be moved slowly.
(3) Any indication on the instrument screen ≥ 20 % screen height above the zero line must be evaluated
for a possible crack.
NOTE : If the probe is scanned too close to a rivet/fastener head or sheet edge the indication will be
similar to a crack indication (See FIGURE 51-10-16-991-013-A).
(4) Measure the length of all indications evaluated as cracks using a 1 mm (0.039 in) scan path.
NOTE : Mark the probe position at the point where the crack indication reduce to normal.
Subtask 51-10-16-971-002-A
(1) All indications evaluated as cracks ≥ 20 % above the zero line on the instrument screen must be
recorded.
- Position and direction of cracks
- Length of cracks
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
B
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
A
C
B
B
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
A A 01
>
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
B B
INSPECTION AREA: AROUND AND BETWEEN RIVET / FASTENERS IN EACH ROW
NOTE: INSPECTION ONLY FROM THE SURFACE OF THE AFFECTED SHEET

SHEET A AND B, THICKNESS: MINIMUM 3 mm (0.118 in)
SHEET A AND B, MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY, WITH CONDUCTIVITY RANGE 16 − 32 MS / m
SHEET C, AL−ALLOY OR TITANIUM SHEET / STIFFENER: ANY NUMBER AND THICKNESS
RIVET MATERIAL: AL−ALLOY, TITANIUM, MONEL, STEEL, (ALL TYPES)
01 THIS DISTANCE MUST BE > 20 mm (0.79 in) FOR THE RIGID PROBE
AND > 35 mm (1.38 in) FOR THE FLEXIBLE PROBE
L_NT_511016_1_0080101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
02 03
POSSIBLE
SUB−SURFACE CRACKS A
01
POSSIBLE
SUB−SURFACE CRACKS
02 03
>
− 4 mm
(0.157 in)
>
− 4 mm <
− 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
(0.157 in)
MATERIAL REMAINING
01 A TWO SHEET STRUCTURE IS

SHOWN BUT THERE CAN BE ONE OR
POSSIBLE SUB−SURFACE CRACKS MORE SHEETS (ANY THICKNESS)
IN BETWEEN
A A
02 THE CRACKS START AT THE INTERFACE
BETWEEN THE SHEETS AND CAN
POSSIBLE SUB−SURFACE CRACKS PROPAGATE TO THE SURFACE
03 CRACKS CAN DEVIATE ± 45° FROM THE

RIVET ROW DIRECTION
> − 1.5 mm (0.059 in)

<
− 4 mm MATERIAL REMAINING
(0.157 in)
>
− 4 mm
(0.157 in)
B B
L_NT_511016_1_0090101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4 PIN SOCKET
PROBE PKA−27H1359 12 mm FROM FISCHER
(0.472 in)
TYPE: ABSOLUTE, SHIELDED
4 mm
(0.157 in)
30 mm 76.5 mm
(1.181 in) (3.012 in)
16 mm 20 mm
(0.63 in) (0.787 in)
30°
6 mm
(0.236 in) 11 mm
(0.433 in)
L_NT_511016_1_0100101_01_00

PKA27H1359 51-10-16-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
60 mm
(2.362 in)
R 25 mm ± 0.05 mm
(0.984 in ± 0.002 in)
B B
(3.3 mm ± 0.05 mm)

01 (0.13 in
± 0.002 in)
PN
5 mm
5 mm
(0.197 in)
A 100 mm (0.197 in)
(3.937 in) 5 mm
25 mm (0.197 in) A A
(0.984 in)
75 mm (3.6 mm ± 0.05 mm)

(2.953 in) (0.142 in ± 0.002 in)
B B
SLOT WIDTH: 0.15 mm ± 0.03 mm

(0.006 in ± 0.001 in)
01 SCREW: DIN84 M4 x 8 OR LOCAL

PROCUREMENT
MATERIAL: 3.1364T351
0.5 − 30 mm 30 − 120 mm
DIMENSIONS
(0.02 − 1.181 in) (1.181 − 4.724 in)
± 0.2 mm ± 0.3 mm
ACRYL 5.1411 TOLERANCE (± 0.008 in) (± 0.012 in)
10 x 10 x 100 mm
(0.394 x 0.394 x 3.937 in)
L_NT_511016_1_0110101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
POSITION B
LIFT OFF
PROBE
POSITION A
PROBE MOVEMENT
ACROSS THE SLOTS
3.6 mm (0.142 in)

SLOT
3.3 mm (0.13 in)
SLOT
SH POSITION A SH POSITION B 60%

100% 100% SH
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25% ZERO
0% ZERO DATUM 0% DATUM
ZERO LINE ZERO
LINE
ZERO POINT ZERO POINT
POSITION POSITION
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
LIFT OFF

FOR LIFT OFF 3.6 mm (0.142 in) DEEP SLOT
SH: SCREEN HEIGHT
L_NT_511016_1_0120101_01_01

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
02
A
2 mm
(0.079 in)
10 mm
(0.394 in)
01
30° 30°
POSSIBLE COVERED STRUCTURE
(FRAME CLIP, STRINGER, DOUBLER)
A 03
RIVETS / FASTENERS
ZERO COMPENSATION POINT
PROBE SCAN AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE AROUND RIVETS / FASTENERS
PROBE SCAN BETWEEN RIVETS / FASTENERS
MOVEMENT OF PROBE CLOSE TO THE EDGE OF POSSIBLE

COVERED STRUCTURE
01 AREAS WHERE THE PROBE SCAN IS BLOCKED BY

RIVET HEADS / COVERED STRUCTURE ARE NOT TO
BE INSPECTED
02 IF THE PROBE IS SCANNED TOO CLOSE TO A

RIVET / FASTENER HEAD OR SHEET EDGES, THE
INDICATION WILL BE SIMILAR TO A CRACK INDICATION
03 IF THE RIVET FASTENER IS TOO CLOSE TO THE SHEET

EDGE, MOVE THE PROBE AS SHOWN IN DETAIL A
L_NT_511016_1_0130101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This process specification defines the requirements for electrical conductivity testing of heat treatable
aluminum alloy materials with the exception of aluminum-lithium alloys and is to be used with the associated
specific SRM Tasks.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-17-250-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-17-250-801-A-01
Procedure for Assessment Heat Treatment using Eddy Current Conductivity Measurement on Aluminum Alloys
Any aluminum alloy panel (with the exception of aluminum-lithium) and/or parts manufactured from such
materials, in which a measurement of the conductivity is required in accordance with a specific SRM Chapter
which will identify the area(s) of inspection.
The conductivity testing of castings is not normally carried out, due to practical problems associated with
porosity, surface finish etc. Conductivity testing of tubes is normally limited by the minimum acceptable
curvature as described below.
For true (absolute) conductivity measurements the material shall be unclad and have a minimum thickness ≥
1.5 mm (0.059 in).
Sheet material up to 1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick, whether coated (clad) or bare may be conductivity tested but
the reading will be ’apparent’ conductivity not absolute conductivity.
(1) Specific characteristics
The surface area to be tested shall be at least one and a half times that of the probe diameter. For true
(absolute) conductivity measurements the material shall be unclad and have a minimum thickness ≥
1.5 mm (0.059 in).
The minimum radius curvature for concave surfaces shall be 500 mm (19.69 in) and for convex
surfaces, 125 mm (4.92 in)
The effect of lift-off shall be minimized by ensuring that the probe is in direct contact with the surface
to be tested.
With exception to equipment of known lift-off characteristics and approved for such applications, under
no circumstances shall measurements be taken on surfaces with protective coatings thicker than 0.075
mm (0.003 in). Measurements taken on painted or other protective coatings up to 0.075 mm (0.003 in)
thick shall only be used for comparison and not taken as true (absolute) values.
Incorrect heat treatment condition.
(1) Tooling :
2-068-01-1363476 PROBE FOR SIGMATEST
D2-068 SIGMATEST
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-17-251-001-A
CAUTION : THE INSPECTOR MUST KNOW THE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION, ORIGINAL HEAT
TREATMENT CONDITION AND THE STRUCTURAL CONFIGURATION OF THE AREA TO BE
INSPECTED.
(1) Make sure that the calibration blocks, the probe and materials to be inspected are at the same
temperature to within ± 3˚C (37.4˚F).
(2) Make sure all surfaces to be tested are clean and free from paint, oxide, grease, oil etc.
(3) Make sure that there are no conditions, in the area to be inspected, which may affect the conductivity
measurement (e.g.: panel edges, fastener countersinks, etc.).
NOTE : Surface curvature, edge effect, variations of the material thickness, and other conditions may
affect conductivity readings. Their influences are generally identified and described in the
equipment manufacturer’s operating instructions.
(4) Mark out those zones within the inspection where material thickness changes occur.
NOTE : Changes in structural configuration or materials may be present in the area to be inspected. Any
change in material thickness below 1.2 mm (0.047 in) in clad or unclad areas will cause
conductivity reading changes.
Subtask 51-10-17-252-001-A
CAUTION : IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT CONDUCTIVITY METERS, PROBES AND THE CALIBRATION

BLOCKS ARE CALIBRATED AS AN INSTRUMENT ’PACKAGE’. ANY CIRCUMSTANCES
NECESSITATING A CHANGE OF PROBE WILL THEREFORE ALSO NECESSITATE THE
AFFECTED INSTRUMENT BEING RECERTIFIED.
(1) Connect the PROBE FOR SIGMATEST (2-068-01-1363476) with the SIGMATEST (D2-068).
NOTE : Any conductivity eddy current probe or instrument may be used provided that they meet the
(2) Use high and low calibration blocks traceable to a national standard.
NOTE : The conductivity range of the calibration blocks must be within the range of the instrument and
cover the range of conductivity to be measured preferably in the range of 25% to 50% IACS
(14.5 to 29 MS/m).
(3) Select a frequency of 60 KHz.
(4) Calibrate the instrument in accordance with the manufacturers instructions using calibration blocks,
traceable to a national standard.
(5) The equipment may be calibrated in % IACS (International Annealed Copper Standard) or MS/m
(Mega Siemens per meter) (See TABLE 1 and TABLE 2).
% IACS (MS/m) % IACS (MS/m) % IACS (MS/m) % IACS (MS/m)

25 (14.5) 31.5 (18.3) 38 (22.0) 44.5 (25.8)
25.5 (14.8) 32 (18.6) 38.5 (22.3) 45 (26.1)
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
% IACS (MS/m) % IACS (MS/m) % IACS (MS/m) % IACS (MS/m)

26 (15.1) 32.5 (18.9) 39 (22.6) 45.5 (26.4)
26.5 (15.4) 33 (19.1) 39.5 (22.9) 46 (26.7)
27 (15.7) 33.5 (19.4) 40 (23.2) 46.5 (27.0)
27.5 (16.0) 34 (19.7) 40.5 (23.5) 47 (27.3)
28 (16.2) 34.5 (20.0) 41 (23.8) 47.5 (27.6)
28.5 (16.5) 35 (20.3) 41.5 (24.1) 48 (27.8)
29 (16.8) 35.5 (20.6) 42 (24.4) 48.5 (28.1)
29.5 (17.1) 36 (20.9) 42.5 (24.7) 49 (28.4)
30 (17.4) 36.5 (21.2) 43 (24.9) 49.5 (28.7)
30.5 (17.7) 37 (21.5) 43.5 (25.2) 50 (29.0)
31 (18.0) 37.5 (21.8) 44 (25.5)
Conversion of Conductivity Values - % IACS (MS/m)
c
TABLE 1
MS/m (% IACS) MS/m (% IACS) MS/m (% IACS) MS/m (% IACS)

14 (24.1) 18 (31.0) 22 (37.9) 26 (44.8)
14.5 (25.0) 18.5 (31.9) 22.5 (38.8) 26.5 (45.7)
15 (25.8) 19 (32.7) 23 (39.6) 27 (46.5)
15.5 (26.7) 19.5 (33.6) 23.5 (40.5) 27.5 (47.4)
16 (27.6) 20 (34.5) 24 (41.4) 28 (48.3)
16.5 (28.5) 20.5 (35.3) 24.5 (42.2) 28.5 (49.1)
17 (29.3) 21 (36.2) 25 (43.1) 29 (50.0)
17.5 (30.2) 21.5 (37.0) 25.5 (44.0)
Conversion of Conductivity Values - MS/m (% IACS)
c
TABLE 2
Subtask 51-10-17-253-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) The following requirements for testing conditions shall be satisfied:
(a) Measurements shall be made a minimum of 1000 mm (39.37 in) away from magnetic materials
and where possible, the measuring equipment and material to be tested shall be placed on a non-
metallic surface.
(b) Measurements shall be made a minimum of 1000 mm (39.37 in) away from operating electrical
equipment.
(c) The probe shall not be placed in such a position that holes and edges affect the readings, a
minimum clearance of 6 mm (0.24 in) is recommended. However, this is not mandatory and is
dependent on the construction of the probe
(2) Calibrate the instrument in accordance with SUBTASK 252-001-A.
(3) Take several measurements over the length/surface area of the material or part under test, at
extremities and sections of different thickness.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(4) Record all measurements.
(5) Identify all areas where the measurements differ by more than 2.5% IACS (1.5 MS/m).
(6) Record the temperature during the test.
Subtask 51-10-17-971-001-A
(1) Report all results from SUBTASK 253-001-A.
(2) Report the instrument operating frequency.
NOTE : A diagram of the inspection area should be used for recording purposes.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the general requirements for the inspection of flat bottom holes in aluminum alloy
materials.
NOTE : This procedure is only applicable in combination with TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-18-250-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-18-250-801-A-01
Rotating Probe Testing of Flat Bottom Holes in Aluminum Alloys Materials
Areas in aluminum alloy materials (conductivity range 16 to 28 MS/m) (See FIGURE 51-10-18-991-001-A).
The conditions for access to an inspection area are given in TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01.
(1) Condition A
Where a borehole has been oversized before a repair and the rotating probe cannot pass through the
whole of the borehole.
(2) Condition B
Where a structual part, close to the rear side, prevents a full inspection through the borehole using a
standard rotating probe.
(1) Crack Characteristics
Cracks starting in the wall at the bottom of flat bottom holes and extending in a radial (crack length)
and axial (crack depth) direction (See FIGURE 51-10-18-991-002-A).
(2) Detectable Crack Length
Cracks with a length ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) and a depth ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) and open to the surface of
the borehole wall will be satisfactorily detected.
(1) References :
TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01 - Rotating Probe Testing - General - PROCEDURE A
51-62-04-001-A - Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for Flat Bottom Hole Inspection
FIGURE 51-10-18-991-001-A - Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-18-991-003-A - Crack Depth Measurement
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-18-251-001-A
(1) For preparation of inspection see TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01.
Subtask 51-10-18-252-001-A
(1) Use the equipment described in TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01 and in addition the probes described in
LIST STRUCTURE.
(2) Use rotating probes, with a coil diameter 1 mm (0.039 in), for the inspection of flat bottom holes with
bore diameters ranging from 3.5 mm (0.138 in) to 25 mm (0.984 in) as specified in 51-62-04-001-A.
(3) For instrument adjustment see TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01.
Subtask 51-10-18-253-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) For the inspection see TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(2) Determination of the Depth of an Indicated Crack in Condition A
(a) Slowly insert the rotating probe into the bore as shown in FIGURE 51-10-18-991-003-A, Detail A.
(b) When it reaches the bottom of the hole, mark the depth on the probe shaft with a pencil, as
shown in FIGURE 51-10-18-991-003-A, Detail B.
(c) Slowly remove the rotating probe from the bore until the crack signal on the instrument screen
reduces to ≤ 25% SH above the zero datum as shown in FIGURE 51-10-18-991-003-A, Detail C.
(d) Mark the crack start point on the probe shaft with a pencil, as shown in FIGURE
51-10-18-991-003-A, Detail C.
(e) Measure the distance between the two pencil marks as shown in FIGURE 51-10-18-991-003-A,
Detail D. The correct crack depth is the distance between the pencil marks plus 0.6 mm (0.024
in).
(3) Determination of the depth of an indicated crack in Condition B
(a) See TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01.
Subtask 51-10-18-971-002-A
(1) For acceptance criteria see TASK 51-10-01-250-801-A01
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TYPICAL STRUCTURE: MATERIAL ALUMINUM ALLOY

(NOT TO SCALE)
CONDITION A 01 CONDITION B
02
MAXIMUM DISTANCE <

− 6 mm (0.236 in)
STRUCTURE PART PREVENTS FULL
INSPECTION OF BOREHOLE WITH
STANDARD ROTATING PROBE
AREA TO BE INSPECTED
01 WHERE BOREHOLE DAMAGE IS REMOVED BEFORE AN INSERT

REPAIR IS CARRIED OUT
NOTE: INSPECTION CARRIED OUT BEFORE AN INSERT IS INSTALLED
02 BOTH SHEETS CAN BE COMPOSED OF ONE OR MORE LAYERS.

EACH LAYER THAT IS TO BE INSPECTED MUST HAVE A
THICKNESS >
− 1 mm (0.039 in)
NOTE: FOR THE CONDITIONS OF ACCESSIBILITY TO AN INSPECTION AREA
SEE TASK 51−01−02−250−801
L_NT_511018_1_0010101_01_00

Inspection Area 51-10-18-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE
CRACKS:
LENGTH >
− 1 mm (0.039 in)
DEPTH >− 1 mm
(0.039 in)
DEPTH >− 1 mm
(0.039 in)
< STRUCTURE PART
− 6 mm
(0.236 in)
DEPTH
CRACK SIZE PROPAGATION
LENGTH
NOTE: STRUCTURE SHOWN NOT TO SCALE
L_NT_511018_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM

100%
75%
50%
THRESHOLD FOR CRACK
25% DETERMINATION
0% ZERO DATUM
CRACK CRACK LENGTH

CRACK DEPTH
0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
A
DEPTH OF THE FLAT
BOTTOM HOLE
SECOND PENCIL MARK
DEPTH OF CRACK INDICATION DEPTH 01
FINISH POINT
FIRST PENCIL MARK
01 THE CORRECT CRACK DEPTH

PENCIL IS THE DISTANCE BETWEEN
CRACK C THE PENCIL MARKS
PLUS 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
CRACK DEPTH
B
SH ABOVE ZERO DATUM
100%
C 75%
50%
THRESHOLD FOR CRACK
25% DETERMINATION
0% ZERO DATUM
PENCIL
CRACK 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°
CRACK DEPTH
INDICATION FROM DETAIL C
D
L_NT_511018_1_0030101_01_00

Depth Measurement 51-10-18-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for tap test inspections with the WOODPECKER WP632
of monolithic and honeycomb sandwich construction composite components to detect delaminations in FRP
skin and disbondings between skin and honeycomb in a depth of maximum 2 mm (0.079 in) as well as
honeycomb damages parallel to the test surface up to a depth of maximum 25 mm + 5 mm (0.98 in + 0.197
in) in case of thin skin thickness 0.1 mm - 0.8 mm +0.2 mm (0.0039 in - 0.0315 in + 0.079 in).
Minimum detectable size dimension: 625 mm2 (0.968 in2) for a minimum strip width of 20 mm (0.79 in) or a
minimum diameter of 28 mm (1.10 in).
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-19-280-801-A-01
Inspection of FRP Composite Components Honeycomb Sandwich Parts with the WOODPECKER WP632
CAUTION : FOR SANDWICH PARTS WITH SKIN THICKNESS ABOVE 2 MM (0.079 IN) AN ULTRASONIC
INSPECTION IS TO BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH , TO DETECT DELAMINATION OF
THE SKIN THIS ULTRASONIC PROCEDURE CANNOT BE USED TO DETECT DISBONDING
BETWEEN THE SKIN AND THE CORE.
A. This procedure is applicable if the area to be inspected is of similar construction as shown in FIGURE
51-10-19-991-001-A.
For the different damage type see FIGURE 51-10-19-991-002-A.
(1) Type A
Delaminations parallel to the test surface with an minimum extent of ≥ 625 mm (0.968 in) by a
minimum strip width of 20 mm (0.79 in) or a minimum diameter of 28 mm (1.10 in) between plies of
composite skin with a maximum monolithic laminate thickness of 2 mm (0.079 in).
(2) Type B
Disbondings parallel to the test surface with an extent of ≥ 625 mm (0.968 in) by a minimum strip
width of 20 mm (0.79 in) or a minimum diameter of 28 mm (1.10 in) between laminated skin and
honeycomb core or another structure component with a maximum monolithic skin thickness of 2 mm
(0.079 in).
(3) Type C
Honeycomb core damages parallel to the test surface with an extent of ≥ 625 mm (0.968 in) by a
minimum strip width of 20 mm (0.79 in) or a minimum diameter of 28 mm (0.11 in) and in a
maximum of 25 mm + 5 mm (0.98 in + 0.063 in) depth depending of skin laminate thickness; skin
laminate thickness is 0.1 mm - 0.8 mm + 0.2 mm (0.004 in - 0.032 in + 008 in).
(4) Type D
Delamination/disbondings may occur due to local impact damage (stone impact, dropped tools,
lightning strike, localized ground equipment impact, etc.). In these cases, the inspection is only required
following visible indications of damage on the surface of the part. For maximum depth and minimum
size data TASK SUPPORTING DATA thru TASK SUPPORTING DATA.
(1) Tooling :
99A55407291000 FUNCTION TEST BLOCK
WP632 WOODPECKER
WP632AM WOODPECKER
(2) References :
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-001-A - Typical Structure Build-Up and Inspection Area in FRP Composite
Components
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-003-A - Function Test Block PN 99A55407291000
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-004-A - WOODPECKER Function Test
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-005-A - Example for Adjustment (Memory Setting) Sequence
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-006-A - Inspection Procedure Examples
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-007-A - Measurement of Damaged Area
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-19-281-001-A
(1) Make sure that the surface of inspection area is clean and smooth.
(2) Check the inspection area for visible damage or discontinuities.
(3) Operate the WOODPECKER (WP632) in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction.
NOTE : As alternative instrument the WOODPECKER (WP632AM) can also be used .

(4) Function Test and Control Settings (See FIGURE 51-10-19-991-004-A)
(a) Set the WOODPECKER (WP632) controls as follows:
- Disbond/Insert switch : Disbond
- Operation Dial (Measurement) : Average 2 mode
- Operation Dial (Tapping speed) : 8 Hz
(b) Using the FUNCTION TEST BLOCK (99A55407291000) (See FIGURE 51-10-19-991-003-A)
position the WOODPECKER (WP632) so that the hammer is in the middle of the 3 mm (0.118
in) thick adjustment area (do not use the 3.5 mm (0.138 in) test area), as illustrated in FIGURE
51-10-19-991-004-A.
(c) Press the MEMORY switch and check that the GREEN ready light comes on, release the
MEMORY switch and check that the GREEN ready light and GREEN DATA lights are on.
(d) Pull the WOODPECKER (WP632) very slowly backwards across the FUNCTION TEST BLOCK
(99A55407291000) from the thick section to the thin section, as illustrated in FIGURE
51-10-19-991-004-A.
(5) DATA Lights Indications
(a) The WOODPECKER (WP632) is in a satisfactory condition if the DATA lights come on
YELLOW, then RED 1 and RED 2 in sequence along the standard as the thickness decreases.
NOTE : If these DATA light indications do not appear, check the equipment control settings in
accordance with LIST STRUCTURE and repeat the adjustment sequence.
(6) Control Settings (for inspection)
- Disbond/Insert switch : Disbond
- Operation Dial (Measurement) : Average 2 mode
- Operation Dial (Tapping speed) : 16 Hz (position F) different from the function test
Subtask 51-10-19-282-001-A
CAUTION : IN THE INSPECTION AREA THE SIZE OF THE NOMEX HONYCOMB CORE CELLS AND THE
FRP SKIN THICKNESS MAY CHANGE. IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT AN EQUIPMENT
ADJUSTMENT BE CARRIED OUT AGAIN IN EACH INSPECTION AREA WHERE CHANGES
OF CONFIGURATION AND/OR GEOMETRY OCCUR.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(1) Equipment Adjustment (See FIGURE 51-10-19-991-005-A)
(a) Select three reference points near the inspection area.
NOTE : The selected points must be in areas with the same structural elements and thickness.
(b) Do the WOODPECKER adjustment (memory setting) sequence three times, in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
(c) Use each of the selected points as an adjustment point and a check point in turn, as illustrated
FIGURE 51-10-19-991-005-A.
NOTE : Using three different adjustment point will prevent an adjustment (memory setting) and
final reference value point being found on a small damaged area.
(d) Check the DATA lights during each adjustment sequence. If all check points give a GREEN light
then the first adjustment (memory setting) point can be accepted as being on an undamaged
area and be used as the reference value point.
(e) Effects on the inspection result will be caused by laminate thickness changes within the inspection
area if it is different to the adjustment area.
1 If the adjustment area thickness is more than 0.3 mm (0.012 in) as the inspection area it
will cause a high false alarm rate because desired variations of the laminate thickness are
displayed as defects.
2 If the adjustment area thickness is less than the inspection area it will cause a reduced
probability of detection. Only defects which have a laminate thickness less than the
adjustment area will be displayed.
Subtask 51-10-19-283-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Check the tapping speed adjustment: 16 Hz (average 2/position F).
(2) Position the WOODPECKER on the area to be inspected and move it slowly in parallel paths across
the surface of the inspection area, as illustrated in FIGURE 51-10-19-991-006-A.
(3) Evaluate the DATA light indication in the tested areas as shown in TABLE 1 (FIGURE
51-10-19-991-007-A).
INDICATION IN TESTED AREA EVALUATION

GREEN DAMAGE FREE
YELLOW DAMAGE FREE
YELLOW FOLLOWED
BY RED 1 OR DISBONDED/DELAMINATED
RED 1 RED 2
DATA Light Indication
c
TABLE 1
(a) Moving from a damage free area to a disbonded/delaminated area will be indicated by a
YELLOW light, followed by a RED light.
(b) When the hammer head is directly over a disbonded/delaminated area, this will be indicated by
one, or both, RED lights.
(4) When disbonding/delamination is indicated, the full area must be determined and measured, including
that which extends outside the defined inspection area, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-19-991-007-A.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-19-971-001-A
(1) Areas with a GREEN light or a YELLOW light indication only, are to be classified as damage free.
(2) Areas greater than 10 mm (0.39 in) diameter with a YELLOW light indication followed by RED light
indication are to be classified as disbonded/delaminated and must be recorded.
(3) All data about areas which are classified as disbonded/delaminated have to be recorded as follows:
- Size of findings
- Position of findings
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL

NOTE: THE MENTIONED DEPTHS OF CASE A THRU C ARE ONLY VALID FOR FINDINGS WHICH
2 2
CASE C ARE PARALLEL TO THE TEST SURFACE > − 625 mm (0.969 in ) BY A STRIP WIDTH OF
CASE A CASE B MINIMUM 20 mm (0.787 in) OR A MINIMUM DIAMETER OF 28 mm (1.102 in).
8 mm 5 mm
02
(0.315 in) (0.197 in) TEST SURFACE CASE A: FRP−COMPOSITE STRUCTURES AS SANDWICH−HONEYCOMB CONFIGURATION
4 mm SKIN LAMINATE THICKNESS X <
− 0.8 mm + 0.2 mm (0.031 in + 0.008 in)
01 X X SANDWICH−HONEYCOMB DAMAGE DEPTH Y < − 25 mm + 5 mm (0.984 in + 0.197 in)
(0.157 in)
X CASE B: FRP−COMPOSITE STRUCTURES AS SANDWICH CONFIGURATION
SKIN LAMINATE THICKNESS X <
− 2 mm (0.079 in)
CASE C: FRP−COMPOSITE STRUCTURES AS MONOLITHIC CONFIGURATION

MAXIMAL PAINT SKIN LAMINATE THICKNESS X <
− 2 mm (0.079 in)
THICKNESS 120 m
01 CLEARANCE ZONE FROM EDGE
Y
02 CLEARANCE ZONE FROM FASTENERS
HONEYCOMB 03 MAXIMUM VALUATION DEPTH FOR HONEYCOMB SANDWICH AREAS

04 AREA WITH SPLICE OR CORE FILLER
(DEBONDINGS TO BE INSPECTED SEPARATELY)
SUPPORT
I. MONOLITHIC LAMINATED MATERIAL:
− GLAS−FIBER−REINFORCED PLASTIC
− CARBON−FIBER−REINFORCED PLASTIC
− ARAMID−FIBER−REINFORCED PLASTIC
II. PRECONDITION FOR INSPECTION WITH WP632

− HONEYCOMB SHOULD BE CONSTANT IN CORE WIDTH AND MATERIAL
03 04 − PAINT THICKNESS 120 m
OPPOSITE SKIN − PARALLEL COMPONENT GEOMETRY WITHIN THE VALUATION AREA / DEPTH
OF TEST AREA − CLEARANCE ZONE AROUND FASTENERS MINIMUM 5 mm (0.197 in) (NOT TO BE INSPECTED)
− CLEARANCE ZONE FROM EDGE MINIMUM 4 mm (0.157 in) AND 8 mm (0.315 in)
(NOT TO BE INSPECTED)
− EXACT KNOWLEDGE ABOUT STRUCTURE BUILD UP
− AREAS WITH SPLICE OR CORE FILLER SHOULD BE INSPECTED SEPERATELY
X = LAMINATE THICKNESS III. HONEYCOMB MATERIAL DATA SEE TABLE BELOW

Y = DAMAGE DEPTH
FRP LAYERS 3
CORE WIDTH kg / m CORE HEIGHT MATERIAL
3.2 − 6.4 mm
CORE FILLER / SPLICE 24 − 64 ALL POLYAMID PAPER / PHENOLIC RESIN / HARDENED
(0.126 − 0.252 in)
3.2 − 6.4 mm
50 − 144 ALL POLYAMID PAPER / PHENOLIC RESIN / HARDENED
(0.126 − 0.252 in)
L_NT_511019_1_0010101_01_01

Structure Build-Up and Inspection Area in FRP 51-10-19-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Composite Components Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TEST SURFACE
TYPE B TYPE D TYPE A
TYPE A
TYPE C TYPE A TYPE B TYPE B

02
01
HONEYCOMB
METALLIC
SUPPORT
OPPOSITE SKIN
OF TEST AREA
NOTE:
01 MAXIMUM DEPTH 25 mm (0.984 in) + 5 mm (0.197 in)
02 LIMITED FROM 0.1 mm (0.004 in) TO 0.8 mm (0.31 in) + 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
WELL BONDED AREA
EXTENTION OF FINDINGS:
2 2
MINIMUM 625 mm (0.969 in ) BY A MINIMUM STRIP WIDTH OF 20 mm (0.787 in) OR A
MINIMUM DIAMETER OF 28 mm (1.102 in).
L_NT_511019_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6.5 mm
(0.256 in)
A A
SUPPORT BLOCK
(USE ANY SUITABLE
ADHESIVE TO ATTACH)
6 x 20 mm (6 x 0.79 in)
120 mm (4.72 in)
2.5 mm
01
(0.098 in)
B
3.5 mm 3 mm 2.5 mm 2 mm 1.5 mm 1 mm
(0.138 in) (0.118 in) (0.098 in) (0.079 in) (0.059 in) (0.039 in)
65 mm
(2.56 in)
45 mm
02
(1.77 in)
A A
B
ADJUSTMENT AREA 10 mm B B
IN CENTER OF STEP (0.39 in)
NOTE: MATERIAL: ACRYLGLASS

0.5 − 30 mm 30 − 120 mm
01 NUMBERS TO BE ENGRAVED DIMENSIONS
(0.02 − 1.181 in) (1.181 − 4.724 in)
02 DO NOT USE THIS AREA ± 0.2 mm ± 0.3 mm
TOLERANCE (± 0.008 in) (± 0.012 in)
FOR FUNCTION TEST
L_NT_511019_1_0030101_01_00

Function Test Block PN 99A55407291000 51-10-19-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PULL ’WOODPECKER’ SLOWLY

BACKWARDS ALONG THE FUNCTION
TEST BLOCK A
HAMMER
01 A
01
02
03
1 mm 1.5 mm 2 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm 3.5 mm

(0.039 in) (0.059 in) (0.079 in) (0.098 in) (0.118 in) (0.138 in) STEP THICKNESS
A A
CONDITION OF DATA LIGHTS

TESTED AREA DEBOND
R + R + BUZZER
1 2 INSERT
RED 2 (R ) + BUZZER
DEBOND / DELAM 2 READY
RED 1 (R ) + BUZZER
1
YELLOW (Y)
DAMAGE FREE GREEN (G) DATA
B
BATTERY
01 ADJUSTMENT AREA (FUNCTION TEST ONLY)
MEMORY SWITCH
02 AREA FOR FUNCTION TEST
03 DO NOT USE THIS AREA FOR FUNCTION TEST
L_NT_511019_1_0040101_01_00

WOODPECKER Function Test 51-10-19-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1
2
3
3 01
2
1 02
01
02
HONEYCOMB SANDWICH STRUCTURE
MONOLITHIC STRUCTURE
INSPECTION AREA
ADJUSTMENT (MEMORY SETTING) POINT

CHECK POINT
01 EACH POINT TO BE USED AS AN ADJUSTMENT
(MEMORY SETTING) POINT AND A CHECK POINT
02 ADJUSTMENT AND CHECK POINT
MAXIMUM 100 mm (3.94 in) APART
L_NT_511019_1_0050101_01_00

for Adjustment (Memory Setting) Sequence 51-10-19-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EXAMPLES FOR INSPECTION AREA COMPONENT EDGE SPLICE / CORE FILLER

SECTION THROUGH CHANGE OF 8 mm
STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION (0.31 in)
AND / OR SURFACE CONDITIONS LAMINATE STEPS EDGES
8 mm
(0.31 in)
CLEARANCE ZONE EDGE
01
5 mm
(0.2 in)
8 mm
(0.31 in)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE IN
A CONSTANT HONEYCOMB
SANDWICH TEST AREA
40 mm
(1.57 in)
INSPECTION PROCEDURE IN 8 mm
A CONSTANT MONOLITHIC (0.31 in)
TEST AREA
8 mm
(0.31 in)
8 mm
(0.31 in)
COMPONENT EDGE
EXAMPLE OF
TEST STRIP
CLEARANCE ZONE EDGE 01 FOR INSPECTION OF TEST STRIPS WITH A WIDTH LESS THAN 40 mm (1.57 in)
USE THE WP632 AT RIGHT ANGLES TO THE STRIP LENGTH AS SHOWN.
LEAD THE WP632 AS SHOWN BY A TEST PATH WIDTH OF 10 mm (0.39 in).
CLEARANCE ZONE INSPECTION AREA EXCLUDING AREAS WHERE STRUCTURE MAY
AROUND FASTENER INFLUENCE FINDINGS
INSPECTION AREA APPROXIMATE 6 mm (0.24 in) OVERLAP AT EDGE OF
TEST PATH WIDTH INSPECTION AREA
10 mm (0.39 in)
E. G. HOISTING POINT TEST PATH
FASTENER / RIVET / BOLT
L_NT_511019_1_0060101_01_01

Inspection Procedure Examples 51-10-19-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
DEFINED
DAMAGE AREA
INSPECTION AREA
MEASUREMENT
USING A ZIG−ZAG PATH
DATA LIGHT INDICATIONS
(TRANSITION)
EDGE AREA
YELLOW
DAMAGE AREA
RED
DAMAGE FREE AREA

GREEN
DATA LIGHTS:
GREEN
DAMAGE AREA
YELLOW
TRANSITION AREA RED
TEST PATH
DAMAGE BOUNDERY
L_NT_511019_1_0070101_01_01

Measurement of Damaged Area 51-10-19-PB5 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of surface breaking cracks in non plated
ferromagnetic steel alloy materials.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-20-250-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-20-250-801-A-01
HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Non Plated Ferromagnetic Steel Alloy Materials (Impedance Plane
Display)
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE IS ONLY TO BE USED ON NON-PLATED FERROMAGNETIC

MATERIALS.
This procedure is applicable if the area of structure to be inspected is non plated ferromagnetic steel alloy
structure and correspond to the structure build up as shown in FIGURE 51-10-20-991-001-A.
Fatigue cracks ≥ 3 mm (0.118 in) in length and ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) in depth starting from (See FIGURE
51-10-20-991-002-A):
fastener hole.
- Extending from underneath doubler plates.
- Free edge and covered structure.
- Radii.
(1) Tooling :
EK2HF CABLE
PKA33H121-02-1 PROBE
(2) References :
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-20-991-003-A - Probe PKA33H121-02-1
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-20-251-001-A
NOTE : Variations in paint thickness between the inspection area and the zero compensation
points adjacent to the inspection area ≥ 50 µm are not permissible.
Subtask 51-10-20-252-001-A
NOTE : When this general procedure is specified in other Tasks, follow any special instruction stated in the
instrument adjustment subtask.
(2) Connect the PROBE (PKA33H121-02-1) (See FIGURE 51-10-20-991-003-A) with the CABLE (EK2HF)
and the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (M2) (See 51-61-02-001-A).
meet the requirements of this procedure
(3) Set the instrument controls as follows:
- Gain XY : 10 dB/20 dB
- Filter (HF) : 0 Hz
- Filter (BP) : 0 Hz
the other parameters should be determined by analysing the responses from the calibration
block.
(4) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-501) (See 51-63-01-001-A) and calibrate the equipment for lift-
(a) For painted surfaces place a plastic foil corresponding to the measured paint thickness (≥ 30 µm)
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
NOTE : The probe tip must be at right angles ± ≤ 10 degrees to the inspection surface.
(d) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot in the calibration block and adjust the
instrument X/Y sensitivity so that the shape and maximum amplitude of the signal is as shown in
FIGURE 51-10-20-991-004-A, Position B.
maximum signal is ≥ 50% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot indication of the calibration block.
(7) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot of the calibration block to find the maximum scan
Subtask 51-10-20-253-001-A
C. Inspection
51-10-20-991-005-A.
during the calibration (See SUBTASK 252-001-A).
1 Large Areas
Use a grid system to do the inspection of large areas. The distance between the grid lines
(increment distance) must be less than the diameter of the probe to get 100% complete
2 Countersink Fasteners
Use a nonconductive circle template to do the inspection around countersink fasteners. Use
a hole in the template which is as close as possible to the countersunk edge.
3 Universal Head Fasteners
To examine areas around fasteners with universal head, use the fastener head or the washer
as a probe guide.
4 Radius
To examine the radius area of a part, keep the probe as vertical as possible to the radius
surface. If the crack direction is not known, move the probe along (parallel scan) and
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
5 Edges
When you do an inspection near or on the edge of a part, use a nonconductive straight
edge to keep the probe at the same distance from the edge of the part (See FIGURE
51-10-20-991-005-A).
NOTE : Steel parts can have areas that will have changes in the permeability. The
permeability changes will cause the balance point to move and cause the lift-off line
to have a different phase.
calibration standard above the zero line must be evaluated for a possible crack (For example see
FIGURE 51-10-20-991-006-A).

(4) The conditions specified below can cause signals that look the same as crack signals:
(a) Magnetic fields within the inspection area can cause indication that give a response like a crack.
By comparing this response to the response from the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot of the calibration
block, it will be seen that the indication caused by the magnetic field will be a much slower
response and over a greater scanning distance.
FIGURE 51-10-20-991-005-A).
(6) Mark the probe position at the point where the crack indication reduce to normal.
Subtask 51-10-20-971-001-A
(1) All indications which have been evaluated as cracks and are ≥ 25% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot
- Maximum crack indication in % of display screen height and length of cracks
- - Give only the maximum crack indication in % of display screen height for indications on edges of
covered structure (See FIGURE 51-10-20-991-005-A, Detail A)
(3) See the related Tasks or the related Service Bulletins for reporting action.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
B
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
>
− 5 mm 04
(0.197 in)
Al 03
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Al
>
− 5 mm 02
(0.197 in)
A
A A B B
NOTE:
01 SURFACES WHICH ARE RECESSED MAY BE INSPECTED PROVIDED THE PROBE USED IS R>− 5 mm
SMALL ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN GOOD CONTACT WITH THE SURFACE BEING INSPECTED. (0.197 in)
02 INSPECTION IN THIS AREA WILL REQUIRE THE USE OF A RIGHT ANGLE / CRANKED PROBE
03 SURFACE CONDITION: UNTREATED OR PAINTED < 350 m. 01
Fe SHEET THICKNESS >

− 1.5 mm (0.059 in). A
INSPECTION AREA:
L_NT_511020_1_0010101_01_01

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE
FATIGUE
CRACKS
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
>
− 3 mm >
− 3 mm
(0.118 in) (0.118 in)
>
− 3 mm >
01 (0.118 in) − 3 mm
(0.118 in)
>
−1 mm
>
−1.5 mm (0.039 in)
(0.059 in) >
− 3 mm
(0.118 in)
A A

B
>
− 3 mm
(0.118 in)
B
>
−1 mm
B B (0.039 in)
NOTE:

L_NT_511020_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4 PIN
14 mm 50 mm SOCKET
(0.55 in) (1.97 in) FROM
12.5 mm FISHER
(0.492 in)
10 mm
(0.39 in)
3.5 mm
(0.138 in)
30
75 mm
13.5mm (2.95 in)
(0.531 in.)
PROBE PKA33H121−02−1
TYPE: ABSOLUTE, SHIELDED ACTIVE AREA (ZONE OF INTERACTION) 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
FREQUENCY RANGE: 30KHz−300KHz
NOTE:
IF ALTERNATIVE PROBE IS USED THE PROBE TIP DIA. MUST NOT >
− 3.5 mm (0.138 in). L_NT_511020_1_0030101_01_00

PKA33H121-02-1 51-10-20-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
POSITION A PROBE
POSITION B
LIFT OFF
+>
− 10
−
90 PROBE MOVEMENT
ACROSS THE SLOTS
Fe CALIBRATION
STANDARD
A
NOTE: 1 mm (0.039 in)

01 THE PHASE ANGLE RANGE FROM SLOT
THE 1mm (0.39in.) SLOT SIGNAL 0.5 mm (0.020 in) SLOT
CAN VARY DEPENDING ON
THE WIDTH OF THE SLOT. A 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SLOT
01
60% SH
100% SH

FOR LIFT OFF SH: SCREEN HEIGHT 1mm (0.039in.) DEEP SLOT
L_NT_511020_1_0040101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
DIAMETER
POSSIBLE COVERED
STRUCTURE (DOUBLER)
PENCIL PROBE
01
10 mm
(0.394 in) PROBE
GUIDE
02
POSITION OF MAXIMUM
PROBE SCAN AT APPROXIMATELY CRACK INDICATION Fe
THE CRACK, TO EACH SIDE OF Fe
THE MAXIMUM CRACK INDICATION
Al
MARK 03 PROBE
GUIDE
CRACK
A
PROBE MOVEMENT
IN EDGE AREA
CRACK LENGTH
1 mm PROBE SCAN PATH
(0.039 in)
EVALUATION OF
CRACK LENGTH
RIVETS / FASTENERS.
NOTE:
ZERO COMPENSATION POINT. 01 AREAS WHERE THE PROBE SCAN IS BLOCKED BY
RIVET HEADS/SECOND LAYER ARE NOT TO BE INSPECTED.
02 SECOND LAYER SHOWN, OUTER Fe SKIN ALSO POSSIBLE.
PROBE SCAN PATH AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE AROUND 03 MARK THE PROBE POSITION AT THE POINT WHERE THE
RIVETS / FASTENERS. CRACK INDICATION REDUCES TO NORMAL.

OF EDGE POSSIBLE COVERED STRUCTURE. AROUND THE FASTENERS TO MAINTAIN PROBE POSITION.
L_NT_511020_1_0050101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
02 FATIGUE CRACK
SIGNAL
EDGE
SIGNAL
THRESHOLD NOTE:
LINE 01 01 SET THE THRESHOLD LINE AT
25% THE VERTICAL HEIGHT
BLOCK.
02 PHASE ANGLE CHANGES CAN
OCCUR IN THE RANGE
SHOWN. THE PHASE ANGLE
OF THE RANGE SHOWN. THE
PHASE ANGLE OF THE
FATIGUE CRACK SIGNAL CAN
CHANGE AS THE WIDTH OF
LIFT OFF ZERO POINT ZERO LINE THE CRACK CHANGES.
L_NT_511020_1_0060101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for the inspection of surface breaking cracks in cadmium
plated ferromagnetic steel alloy materials.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-21-250-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-21-250-801-A-01
HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Cadmium Plated Ferromagnetic Steel Alloy Materials (Impedance Plane
Display)
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE IS ONLY TO BE USED ON CADMIUM PLATED FERROMAGNETIC

MATERIALS.
This procedure is applicable if the area of structure to be inspected is cadmium plated ferromagnetic steel
alloy structure and correspond to the structure build up as shown in FIGURE 51-10-21-991-001-A.
Fatigue cracks ≥ 5 mm (0.197 in) in length and ≥ 1 mm (0.039 in) in depth starting from (See FIGURE
51-10-21-991-002-A):
fastener hole.
- Extending from underneath doubler plates.
- Free edge and covered structure.
- Radii.
(1) Tooling :
EK2HF CABLE
PKA33H121-02-1 PROBE
(2) References :
TASK 51-10-20-250-801-A01 - HFEC Inspection for Surface Breaking Cracks in Non Plated
Ferromagnetic Steel Alloy Materials (Impedance Plane Display)
SRM 51-75-11
FIGURE 51-10-21-991-003-A - Probe PKA33H121-02-1
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-21-251-001-A
NOTE : Variations in paint thickness between the inspection area and the zero compensation
points adjacent to the inspection area ≥ 50 µm are not permissible.
Subtask 51-10-21-252-001-A
(2) Connect the PROBE (PKA33H121-02-1) (See FIGURE 51-10-21-991-003-A) with the CABLE (EK2HF)
and the EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (M2) (See 51-61-02-001-A).
meet the requirements of this procedure
(3) Set the instrument controls as follows:
- Gain XY : 20 dB/30 dB
- Filter (HF) : 0 Hz
- Filter (BP) : 0 Hz
the other parameters should be determined by analysing the responses from the calibration
block.
(4) Use the CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-501) (See 51-63-01-001-A) and calibrate the equipment for lift-
(a) For painted surfaces place a plastic foil corresponding to the measured paint thickness (≥ 30 µm)
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
NOTE : The probe tip must be at right angles ± ≥ 10 degrees to the inspection surface.
(d) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot in the calibration block and adjust the
instrument X/Y sensitivity so that the shape and maximum amplitude of the signal is as shown in
FIGURE 51-10-21-991-004-A, Position B.
maximum signal is ≥ 50% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot indication of the calibration block.
(7) Move the probe across the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot of the calibration block to find the maximum scan
Subtask 51-10-21-253-001-A
C. Inspection
51-10-21-991-005-A.
during the calibration (See SUBTASK 252-001-A).
1 Large Areas
Use a grid system to do the inspection of large areas. The distance between the grid lines
(increment distance) must be less than the diameter of the probe to get 100% complete
2 Countersink Fasteners
Use a nonconductive circle template to do the inspection around countersink fasteners. Use
a hole in the template which is so close as possible to the countersunk edge.
3 Universal Head Fasteners
To examine areas around fasteners with universal head, use the fastener head or the washer
as a probe guide.
4 Radius
To examine the radius area of a part, keep the probe as vertical as possible to the radius
surface. If the crack direction is not known, move the probe along (parallel scan) and
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
5 Edges
When you do an inspection near or on the edge of a part, use a nonconductive straight
edge to keep the probe at the same distance from the edge of the part (See FIGURE
51-10-21-991-005-A).
NOTE : Steel parts can have areas that will have changes in the permeability. The
permeability changes will cause the balance point to move and cause the lift-off line
to have a different phase.
NOTE : Steel parts can have areas that will have changes in permeability. The permeability
changes will give the same results as thickness changes of cadmium. Balance the
instrument and adjust the phase as necessary.
calibration standard above the zero line must be evaluated for a possible crack (For example see
FIGURE 51-10-21-991-006-A).

(4) The conditions specified below can cause signals that look the same as crack signals:
(a) Magnetic fields within the inspection area can cause indication that give a response like a crack.
By comparing this response to the response from the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot of the calibration
block, it will be seen that the indication caused by the magnetic field will be a much slower
response and over a greater scanning distance.
(b) Scratches in the cadmium plating.
NOTE : It may be necessary to remove the cadmium plating and repeat the inspection in the
blended area. False indication can occur at the edge of the cadmium plating.
(c) If the cadmium plating is blended out, repeat the inspection in accordance with TASK
51-10-20-250-801-A01.
FIGURE 51-10-21-991-005-A).
(6) Mark the probe position at the point where the crack indication reduce to normal.
Subtask 51-10-21-971-001-A
(1) All indications which have been evaluated as cracks and are ≥ 25% of the 1 mm (0.039 in) slot
- Maximum crack indication in % of display screen height and length of cracks
- - Give only the maximum crack indication in % of display screen height for indications on edges of
covered structure (See FIGURE 51-10-21-991-005-A, Detail A)
(3) See the related Tasks or the related Service Bulletins for reporting action.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
B
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
>
− 5 mm 04
(0.197 in)
Al 03
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Al
>
− 5 mm 02
(0.197 in)
A
A A B B
NOTE:
01 SURFACES WHICH ARE RECESSED MAY BE INSPECTED PROVIDED THE PROBE USED IS
SMALL ENOUGH TO MAINTAIN GOOD CONTACT WITH THE SURFACE BEING INSPECTED. R>− 5 mm
02 INSPECTION IN THIS AREA WILL REQUIRE THE USE OF A RIGHT ANGLE / CRANKED PROBE (0.197 in)
> >
03 SURFACE CONDITION: PAINTED 350 m, CADMIUM FINISHES 20 m.
>
ALL CADMIUM FINISHES WILL BE 20 m ON AIRBUS PRODUCTS.
− 01
Fe SHEET THICKNESS >

− 1.5 mm (0.059 in). A
INSPECTION AREA:
L_NT_511021_1_0010101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSSIBLE
FATIGUE
CRACKS
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
>
− 5 mm >
− 5 mm
(0.197 in) (0.197 in)
>
− 5 mm >
01 (0.197 in) − 5 mm
(0.197 in)
>
−1 mm
>
−1.5 mm (0.039 in)
(0.059 in) >
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
A A

B
>
− 5 mm
(0.197 in)
B
>
−1 mm
B B (0.039 in)
NOTE:

L_NT_511021_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4 PIN
14 mm 50 mm SOCKET
(0.55 in) (1.97 in) FROM
12.5 mm FISHER
(0.492 in)
10 mm
(0.39 in)
3.5 mm
(0.138 in)
30
75 mm
13.5mm (2.95 in)
(0.531 in)
PROBE PKA33H121−02−1
TYPE: ABSOLUTE, SHIELDED ACTIVE AREA (ZONE OF INTERACTION) 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
FREQUENCY RANGE: 30KHz−300KHz
L_NT_511021_1_0030101_01_00

PKA33H121-02-1 51-10-21-PB6 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
POSITION A PROBE
POSITION B
LIFT OFF
+>
− 10
−
90 PROBE MOVEMENT
ACROSS THE SLOTS
Fe CALIBRATION
STANDARD
A
NOTE: 1 mm (0.039 in)

01 THE PHASE ANGLE RANGE FROM SLOT
THE 1mm (0.39 in) SLOT SIGNAL 0.5 mm (0.020 in) SLOT
CAN VARY DEPENDING ON
THE WIDTH OF THE SLOT. A 0.2 mm (0.008 in) SLOT
01
50% SH
100% SH

FOR LIFT OFF SH: SCREEN HEIGHT 1mm (0.039 in) DEEP SLOT
L_NT_511021_1_0040101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PROBE
DIAMETER
POSSIBLE COVERED
STRUCTURE (DOUBLER)
PENCIL PROBE
01
10 mm
(0.394 in) PROBE
GUIDE
02
POSITION OF MAXIMUM
PROBE SCAN AT APPROXIMATELY CRACK INDICATION Fe
THE CRACK, TO EACH SIDE OF Fe
THE MAXIMUM CRACK INDICATION
Al
MARK 03 PROBE
GUIDE
CRACK
A
PROBE MOVEMENT
IN EDGE AREA
CRACK LENGTH
1 mm PROBE SCAN PATH
(0.039 in)
EVALUATION OF
CRACK LENGTH
RIVETS / FASTENERS.
NOTE:
ZERO COMPENSATION POINT. 01 AREAS WHERE THE PROBE SCAN IS BLOCKED BY
RIVET HEADS/SECOND LAYER ARE NOT TO BE INSPECTED.
02 SECOND LAYER SHOWN, OUTER Fe SKIN ALSO POSSIBLE.
PROBE SCAN PATH AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE AROUND 03 MARK THE PROBE POSITION AT THE POINT WHERE THE
RIVETS / FASTENERS. CRACK INDICATION REDUCES TO NORMAL.

OF EDGE POSSIBLE COVERED STRUCTURE. AROUND THE FASTENERS TO MAINTAIN PROBE POSITION.
L_NT_511021_1_0050101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FATIGUE CRACK
SIGNAL
EDGE
SIGNAL
02
NOTE:
THRESHOLD 01 SET THE THRESHOLD LINE AT
LINE 01 50% THE VERTICAL HEIGHT
BLOCK.
02 PHASE ANGLE CHANGES CAN
OCCUR IN THE RANGE
SHOWN. THE PHASE ANGLE
OF THE RANGE SHOWN. THE
PHASE ANGLE OF THE
FATIGUE CRACK SIGNAL CAN
CHANGE AS THE WIDTH OF
LIFT OFF ZERO POINT ZERO LINE THE CRACK CHANGES.
L_NT_511021_1_0060101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure provides the standard requirements for ultrasonic inspection of parallel honeycomb sandwich
structure with bonded CFRP or GFRP cover layers.
B. The procedure aims at the detection of disbonding, delamination, fluid ingress and crunched and cracked
honeycomb in sandwich structures.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-24-270-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-24-270-801-A-01
General Procedure for Ultrasonic Inspection of Honeycomb Structures with Parallel FRP Surfaces
(1) The different Inspection Areas
- Parallel sandwich structures if the area to be inspected is in accordance with that shown in FIGURE
51-10-24-991-001-A.
- Typical honeycomb sandwich structures are to be inspected as shown in FIGURE 51-10-24-991-002-
A.
(2) Areas which are not Testable
None parallel or curved areas of a sandwich structure are not testable. Sandwich areas with
interruptions, as shown in FIGURE 51-10-24-991-003-A are also not testable.
(1) Different Damage Types
- Type A
Delamination between the plies of the outer composite skin, parallel to the inspection surface, area
≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x 0.984 in) (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-004-A).
- Type B
Disbonds between the outer skin and the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x
0.984 in) (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-004-A).
- Type C
Cracked honeycomb core parallel to the inspection surface, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x
0.984 in) (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-004-A).
- Type D
Crushed honeycomb core in the parallel area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x 0.984 in) (See FIGURE
51-10-24-991-004-A).
- Type E
Disbonds between the inner skin and the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 x 0.984
in) (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-004-A).
- Type F
Fluid ingress into the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 x 0.984 in) (See FIGURE
51-10-24-991-004-A).
(1) Tooling :
EPOCH4PLUS ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT
K1SM SEARCH UNIT
MBBGCFRPHC200 REFERENCE BLOCK
PKLL2 CABLE
(2) References :
TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 - Inspection of CFRP and GFRP Composite Components - Honeycomb
TASK 51-10-10-260-801-A01 - X-RAY Inspection to detect Water in Honeycomb Sandwich Parts
TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01 - Inspection of FRP Composite Components Honeycomb Sandwich Parts
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
with the WOODPECKER WP632
TASK 51-10-25-290-801-A01 - General Procedure for Thermography Inspection to detect Trapped
Water in Honeycomb Structures mounted Vertically for Ambient Temperatures > 35˚ C (95˚ F) -
Procedure A
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-001-A - Structure Build-Up of the Specified Honeycomb Sandwich Structure
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-002-A - Typical Honeycomb Sandwich Structure to be Inspected
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-003-A - Typical Areas in Sandwich where UT Inspection is not Possible
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-005-A - Search Unit K1SM without Rubber Membrane
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-006-A - Reference Block MBBGCFRPHC200
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-007-A - Alternative Block SWREF1
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-008-A - Instrument Adjustment on Reference Block MBBGCFRPHC200
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-009-A - Example for Sensitivity Calibration at a Structure with Different
Honeycomb Core Elements
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-010-A - Example for Sensitivity Calibration in a Reinforcement Area (For
Example Z-profile)
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-011-A - Example for Defect Size Assessment and Documentation
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-012-A - Example for Screen Indication close to the Filler Material between the
Honeycomb Cores
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-013-A - Example for Screen Indication close to an Area with Insert (For Example
Hoisting Point)
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-015-A - Search Unit Movement in Inspection Area with Different Thickness of
Outer and Inner Layer
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-016-A - Example of Fluid Indication in Honeycomb Sandwich Component in
Vertical Position
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-24-271-001-A
CAUTION : IT IS NOT ALLOWED TO USE CALIBRATION BLOCK SET PN 99D51407291000.
(1) The equipment used in the development of this procedure was as shown in TABLE 1
Item Equipment
1 ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (EPOCH4PLUS),
see <1>
2 SEARCH UNIT (K1SM) without delay shoe and
without rubber membrane (See FIGURE
51-10-24-991-005-A)
3 CABLE (PKLL2)
4 REFERENCE BLOCK (MBBGCFRPHC200)(See
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-006-A and <2>)
5 Couplant, ZGF, water soluble
6 Foil (Transparent), Resistance to tearing and
moisture, for documentation purposes
Equipment and Materials
TABLE 1
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
<1> NOTE : Square pulse excitation equipment is preferred. Equipment with spike pulse excitation
could lead to reduced inspection sensitivity.
<2> NOTE : It is also possible to use the SWREF1 (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-007-A) as an alternative
block which is an equivalent part of a 42 mm (1.654 in) thick section of a not damaged
c
rudder as defined and supplied by AIRBUS.
NOTE : Any comparable ultrasonic instrument may be used, provided that it satisfies the requirements of
this procedure and is capable of resolving the first back-wall echo on the reference block.
(2) Identify the area to be inspected. See the related NTM Task, the Service Bulletin, the Technical
Disposition or the relevant working instruction.
(3) Make sure that the surface of the inspection area is clean and smooth, remove any loose or flaking
paint.
(4) Check the inspection areas for any damage or discontinuities, (e.g. impact damage).
(5) Any damage must be recorded on a test record sheet.
Subtask 51-10-24-272-001-A
(1) Operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) Time-Base Calibration for 40 mm (1.57 in) thick sandwich:
(a) Basic Instrument Setting:
1 Valid for instruments operated with spike or square pulse, see TABLE 2
Nomenclature Values
Range 70 mm (2.76 in)
Reject 0%
Rectifying full wave
Sound velocity 2300 m/s
Damping 20 Ohm
Pulser energy maximum
Gate mode peak
Gate start 25 mm (0.984 in)
Gate width 25 mm (0.984 in)
Threshold 40% FSH (Full Screen Height)
Instrument Parameters
c
TABLE 2
2 Valid for instruments operated with a square pulse, see TABLE 3 (e.g. ULTRASONIC
EQUIPMENT (EPOCH4PLUS))
Nomenclature Values
Gain 59 dB
Frequency 420 KHz
High pass filter 800 KHz
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Nomenclature Values
Low pass filter 1200 KHz
c
TABLE 3
3 Valid for instruments operated with a spike pulse, see
Nomenclature Values
Gain 73 dB
Frequency 0.5 - 4 MHz
High pass filter 300 - 500 KHz
Low pass filter 1200 KHz - 4 MHz
c
TABLE 4
(b) Couple the SEARCH UNIT (K1SM) on the REFERENCE BLOCK (MBBGCFRPHC200), in an
area without a defect, of the NOMEX 2 (AREA III) honeycomb core.
(c) Adjust the amplitude of the back wall echo to 80% FSH.
(d) Position the search unit to 42 mm (1.654 in) on the screen timebase, by adjusting the sound
velocity, as shown in Position A (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-008-A).
NOTE : Due to the test method the measured values of the thickness is only an approximation
and does not display the accurate thickness (time of flight).
(e) Do the sensitivity adjustment near the inspection area on the honeycomb sandwich structure to
be inspected (See SUBTASK 273-001-A, Paragraph (1))
Subtask 51-10-24-273-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Sensitivity Adjustment for the Inspection Areas in Zones with Parallel Configuration of Inner and Outer
Skin
(a) Sensitivity Adjustment (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-009-A)
1 Select the calibration area intended for sensitivity adjustment in defect free area within the
same sandwich structure close to the area to be inspected (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-009-
A).
CAUTION : THE COUPLING FLUID NEEDS 3 MINUTES PENETRATION TIME. ELECTRONIC

DAC/TCG SHOULD NOT BE USED.
2 Position the search unit with sufficient coupling on the outer skin within the calibration
area and increase or decrease the gain until the back wall echo from the inner skin will
appear at 80% FSH.
3 Select two more positions in the calibration area with a minimum distance of 125 mm (4.92
in) and record the back wall echo FSH values. The FSH values of the three selected points
may not differ more than 3 dB. Otherwise select another calibration area.
4 Take the three amplification values and build the arithmetic average. This average value
represents the amplification to use for the inspection.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
CAUTION : NOT HAVING A DIFFERENCE > -- 6 DB BETWEEN THE REFERENCE BLOCK
AND THE SELECTED CALIBRATION AREA, WILL PREVENT AN EQUIPMENT
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT ON AN DAMAGED AREA.
5 For the 40 mm (1.57 in) honeycomb sandwich the difference of the amplification
compared with the reference standard should not be greater than -- 6 dB, if the attenuation
is more than -- 6 dB, record the area in the test record sheet and select another calibration
area.
6 In case of doubt, if possible compare the selected area with the same area on the other side
of the structure to be inspected for validation.
(2) Sensitivity Adjustment for Inspection Areas with Reinforcement at the Inner or Outer Layers
(a) Sensitivity Adjustment (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-010-A)
1 Select the calibration area intended for sensitivity adjustment in a defect free area within
the same sandwich structure over the reinforcement area, close to the area to be inspected
(See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-010-A).
2 Increase the adjustment from the instrument calibration in zones with parallel configuration
by an extra +10 dB to compensate the attenuation of the reinforcement area.
3 Position the search unit with sufficient coupling on the outer skin within the calibration
area and increase or decrease the gain until the back wall echo from the inner skin will
appear at 80% FSH.
CAUTION : THE COUPLING FLUID NEEDS 3 MINUTES PENETRATION TIME.
4 Select two more positions in the calibration area with a minimum distance of 125 mm (4.92
in) and record the back wall echo FSH values. The FSH values of the three selected points
must not differ more than 3 dB. Otherwise select another calibration area.
5 Take the three amplification values and build the arithmetic average. This average value
represents the amplification to use for the inspection.
6 In case of doubt, if possible compare the selected area with the same area on the other side
of the structure to be inspected for validation.
(3) Inspection Procedure for Inspection Areas in Zones with Parallel Configuration and in Reinforcement
Areas (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-002-A)
CAUTION : IN THE INSPECTION AREA THE SIZE OF THE HONEYCOMB CORE CELLS AND THE
FRP SKIN THICKNESS MAY CHANGE. IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT AN EQUIPMENT AND
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT IS REPEATED IN EACH INSPECTION AREA WHERE
CHANGES OF CONFIGURATION AND/OR GEOMETRY OCCUR.
(a) Identify the area to be inspected and identify the configuration of the geometry to be inspected.
(b) Record the areas where the inspection is not possible (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-003-A).
1 Visual damaged areas within the inspection area.
2 Already repaired areas or areas with discrepancies of the original structure configuration.
CAUTION : THE COUPLING FLUID NEEDS 3 MINUTES PENETRATION TIME.
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) Apply coupling fluid on the inspection area.
(d) Position the search unit on the surface of the inspection area and do the scanning movements in
parallel lines with a 10 mm (0.394 in) spacing.
NOTE : The test lines are to be selected in such a way that always areas with the same thickness
of inner and outer layer are be tested (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-015-A).
(e) All indications where the back wall echo from the inner skin laminate drops below 40% FSH (-- 6
dB), must be recorded. The border between the indication and the defect free area is where the
echo from the indication decreases to 40% FSH (decreases by -- 6 dB / Half- Amplitude).
(f) All indications where the time of flight of the back wall echo from the inner skin laminate reduces
significantly compared to the nominal thickness, must be recorded. The border between the
indication and the defect free area is where the echo from the back wall decreases to 40% FSH
(decreases by -- 6 dB / Half- Amplitude) and an intermediate echo increases.
(g) Mark the positions of the search unit where the back wall echo is decreasing by -- 6 dB with a
soft, non-permanent pen (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-011-A, FIGURE 51-10-24-991-012-A and
FIGURE 51-10-24-991-013-A).
(h) If between different honeycomb core elements with the same nominal thickness an attenuation of
more than -- 6 dB is detected, note this in a test record sheet.
(i) Areas with filler material have to be confirmed with tap test procedure (See TASK
51-10-03-280-801-A01 or TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01).
NOTE : The border between the honeycomb core elements will be detected by a significant
decreasing or by a significant increasing of the ultrasound signal, caused by the filler
material between the honeycomb core elements.
NOTE : The filler material around for example hoisting points or fasteners will be detected by a
significant decreasing or by a significant increasing of the ultrasound signal.
NOTE : The filler material around the fasteners cannot always be detected due to the washer,
which may cover the filler material.
(4) Signal Interpretation
(a) Damage Type A
Delamination between the plies of the outer composite skin, parallel to the inspection surface,
area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x 0.984 in), will be indicated by a complete disappearance of
the back wall echo. Do the confirmation with the tap test procedure (SeeTASK
51-10-03-280-801-A01 or TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01).
(b) Damage Type B
Disbonds between the outer skin and the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x
0.984 in), will be indicated by a complete disappearance of the back wall echo. Do the
confirmation with the tap test procedure (SeeTASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 or TASK
51-10-19-280-801-A01).
(c) Damage Type C
Cracked honeycomb core parallel to the inspection surface, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x
0.984 in), will be indicated by significant time of flight reduction (thickness change). Do the
51-10-19-280-801-A01).
(d) Damage Type D
Significant crushed honeycomb core in the parallel area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x 0.984 in),
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
will be indicated by a back wall echo reduction of minimum > -- 6 dB. Do the confirmation with
the tap test procedure (SeeTASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 or TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01).
CAUTION : DISBONDS, WHICH ARE > 125 MM (4.92 IN.) IN BOTH DIRECTIONS, LENGTH AND
WIDTH, ARE NOT CLEARLY INTERPRETABLE WITH THIS PROCEDURE. IN THESE
CASES CONTACT AIRBUS.
(e) Damage Type E

Disbonds between the inner skin and the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x
0.984 in), will be indicated by a back wall echo reduction of minimum > --6 dB. Do the
51-10-19-280-801-A01) from inside, in the areas where access through the hand holes in the front
spar is possible.
(f) Damage Type F (Component in horizontal position)
Fluid ingress into the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x 0.984 in), will be
indicated by a complete disappearance of the back wall echo. Do the confirmation with the X-Ray
procedure (See TASK 51-10-10-260-801-A01) or the Thermography procedure (See TASK
51-10-25-290-801-A01
(g) Damage Type F (Component in vertical position)
Fluid ingress into the honeycomb core, area ≥ 25 mm x 25 mm (0.984 in x 0.984 in), will be
indicated by a complete disappearance of the back wall echo, if the honeycomb cells contain just
a small amount of fluid. Do the confirmation with the X-Ray procedure (See TASK
51-10-10-260-801-A01) or the Thermography procedure (See TASK 51-10-25-290-801-A01. In
case of honeycomb cells which are at least 50% filled with fluid the A-scan signal is significantly
increasing along the time base axis (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-016-A). This indication can be
confirmed by tapping against the structure close to the area with indication. Due to the tapping
the water column in the honeycomb in the honeycomb cells will move. The moving water column
will be indicated by a moving A-Scan on the display. In case of honeycomb cells completely filled
with fluid, a back wall echo appears behind the normal thickness of the component,
approximately 1.5 times the time of flight of the nominal thickness.
Subtask 51-10-24-971-001-A
(1) Record all inspection areas:
- With an indication of significant thickness change compared to the nominal thickness (back wall
echo time of flight reduction) have to be recorded as a cracked honeycomb core area,
- which indicates a back wall echo attenuation > -- 6 dB (See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-012-A) have to
be recorded as damaged,
- which have been declared as not testable.
- All areas with indication of significantly increased A-scan signal along the time base axis or a back
wall echo appearing behind the normal thickness of the component (approximately 1.5 times the
time of flight of the nominal thickness), have to be recorded as fluid ingress.
NOTE : Except areas declared as not testable:

- Areas with filler material,
- Areas at core splice and around inserts, where the signal may be fully attenuated due to the
presence of foam adhesive/filler material.
(2) All areas, with findings classified as damaged, delaminated, disbonded, crushed honeycomb core, areas
with fluid ingress or significant back wall echo time of flight reduction (thickness change), have to be
recorded with the data as follows:
- Location of the areas with indications,
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
- Surface area of the indication in mm2 (in2),
NOTE : Use the rectangle calculation principle, maximum vertical width by maximum horizontal length
(See FIGURE 51-10-24-991-011-A).
- Defect depth measured from the inspection surface, if possible,

- Attenuation of the back wall echo in dB,
- Areas which are not testable.
Subtask 51-10-24-943-001-A
(1) Remove all couplant and clean the inspection surface.
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CL
T3
HC
T2
T1
T3
CL
CL: COVER LAYER, MATERIAL CFRP OR GFRP, T3 = THICKNESS OF COVER LAYER,

THICKNESS: MINIMUM = 0.4 mm (0.016 in), MAXIMUM = 2.5 mm (0.098 in).
HC: HONEYCOMB CORE, MATERIAL NOMEX HONEYCOMB WITH THE FOLLOWING CELL
WIDTH (CW) AND STIFFNESS (S):
− CW = 3.2 mm (0.126 in) AND S = 48 kg/m³

− CW = 4.8 mm (0.189 in) AND S = 32 kg/m³
− CW = 6.4 mm (0.252 in) AND S = 24 kg/m³
− CW = 6.4 mm (0.252 in) AND S = 32 kg/m³
− CW = 6.4 mm (0.252 in) AND S = 48 kg/m³
T1: MINIMUM HONEYCOMB HEIGHT = 30 mm (1.181 in).
T2: MAXIMUM HONEYCOMB HEIGHT = 40 mm (1.575 in).
L_NT_511024_1_0010101_01_00

Structure Build-Up of the Specified Honeycomb 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Sandwich Structure Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A B
HONEYCOMB CORE
OUTER SKIN FILLER MATERIAL
FWD
INNER SKIN
METALL BUSHING
D
A
C Z − PROFILE AREA
EXAMPLE OF HOISTING POINT
PARALLEL INSPECTION AREA
OUTER FRP LAYERS

FASTENER
HONEYCOMB CORE HONEYCOMB CORE

INNER
FRP
LAYERS
TAPERED AREA
OUTER FRP LAYERS
B
FRONT SPAR
20 mm
(0.787 in)
GFRP REINFORCEMENT BLOCK
HONEYCOMB CORE 10 mm
FILLER
(0.394 in)
Z − PROFILE C
D EXAMPLE OF
OUTER FRP LAYERS EXAMPLE OF HINGE Z−PROFILE AREA
ATTACHMENT AREA L_NT_511024_1_0020101_01_00

Honeycomb Sandwich Structure to be Inspected 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
GFRP REINFORCEMENT BLOCK
FILLER HONEYCOMB CORE
NT 01 OUTER FRP LAYERS

NT 02
INNER FRP LAYERS NT 05
NT 03 OUTER FRP LAYERS

NT 04
NT
EXAMPLE OF SANDWICH EDGE AREA
NOTE:
NT = NOT TESTABLE
01 AREA WITH INSERTS (FOR EXAMPLE: GFRP − BLOCK OR INSERT FROM OTHER MATERIAL).
02 SPLICE AREA AND AREAS WITH CORE FILLER.
03 AREAS WITH CORE FILLER AT THE OUTER FRP LAYERS (FOR EXAMPLE IN REPAIRED AREA).
04 AREAS WITH LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLATE.
05 AREAS WITH CORE FILLER AT THE INNER FRP LAYERS (FOR EXAMPLE IN REPAIRED AREA).
L_NT_511024_1_0030101_01_00

Areas in Sandwich where UT Inspection is not 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Possible Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSPECTION INSPECTION
SIDE SURFACE
OUTER COVER LAYER TYPE C TYPE E
TYPE F
TYPE A TYPE B TYPE D HORIZONTAL
INNER COVER LAYER
A
TYPE F
VERTICAL
SURFACE
INSPECTION OPPOSITE SKIN OF
INSPECTION AREA
01 01
NOTE:
01 FLUID IS IN CONTACT WITH INSPECTION SURFACE AND THE OPPOSITE SKIN
OF INSPECTION AREA.
L_NT_511024_1_0040101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
30 mm
(1.181 in)
0° COMPRESSION 1 MHZ
59 mm
(2.323 in)
45 mm
(1.772 in)
L_NT_511024_1_0050101_01_00

Unit K1SM without Rubber Membrane 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
B
SIMULATED
DISBONDING AREA III
AREA NOMEX 3 200 mm
(7.874 in)
AREA II
NOMEX 1
A
AREA I
GFRP
1
2
3 400 mm
(15.748 in)
B
40 mm
(1.575 in)
A
CFRP LAYER
FLAT BOTTOM HOLES
APPROX 42 mm
NOTE: (1.654 in)
USE AREA III TO CALIBRATE THE
SEARCH UNIT.
CFRP LAYER
FOR PRODUCTION DATA REFER
TO DWG MBBGCFRPHC200. A A
AREA II HONEYCOMB (X) WITH CFRP LAYER
CFRP LAYER. 20 mm
AREA III HONEYCOMB (Y) WITH (0.787 in)
30 mm 30 mm
CFRP LAYER.
(1.181 in) (1.181 in)
SIMULATED 20 mm 20 mm
DISBONDED (0.787 in) (0.787 in)
AREAS
40 mm
(1.575 in)
85 mm CFRP LAYER
(3.346 in)
165 mm
(6.496 in)
235 mm
(9.252 in)
B B 315 mm
(12.402 in)
L_NT_511024_1_0060101_01_00

Reference Block MBBGCFRPHC200 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
105 mm
(4.134 in)
46 mm
(1.811 in)
105 mm
(4.134 in)
L_NT_511024_1_0070101_01_00

Alternative Block SWREF1 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
AREA III
FRP
FSH
100%
80%
60%
50%
40%
NOTE: 10 SCALE DIVISION ARE EQUAL 20%

TO 70 mm (2.756 in) OF THE
COMPONENT
FSH = FULL SCREEN HEIGHT

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SEARCH UNIT APPLICATION
ON AREA WITHOUT TOP
DISCONTINUITIES 42.1 mm
(1.657 in)
SIMULATED DISBONDINGS A
BETWEEN THE TOP SKIN AREA WITHOUT DISCONTINUITIES
LAYERS AND GLASSBLOCK
(SEE FIGURE 51−10−24−991−006 ). L_NT_511024_1_0080101_01_00

Instrument Adjustment on Reference Block 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
MBBGCFRPHC200 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
H
STA330/ BR4
H
STA300/ BR3
STA270/ BR2
H
H
01
H
01
STA60/BR1 LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
PLATE
FILLER MATERIAL
CAUTION:
IN THE INSPECTION AREA THE SIZE OF THE HONEYCOMB CORE CELLS AND THE
FRP SKIN THICKNESS MAY CHANGE. IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT AN EQUIPMENT AND
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTMENT WILL BE DONE AGAIN IN EACH INSPECTION AREA
WHERE CHANGES OF CONFIGURATION AND/OR GEOMETRY OCCUR.
NOTE:
01 MINIMUM DISTANCE 125 mm (4.921 in) BETWEEN CALIBRATION POINTS.
INSPECTION AREA (EXAMPLE)
SELECTED CALIBRATION AREA
H = DIFFERENT HONEYCOMB CORE ELEMENTS
FASTENER
CALIBRATION POINTS L_NT_511024_1_0090101_01_00

for Sensitivity Calibration at a Structure with 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Different Honeycomb Core Elements Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
H
STA330/ BR4
H
STA300/ BR3
STA270/ BR2
H
01
H
01
STA60/BR1 LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
PLATE
A
Z − PROFILE
FILLER MATERIAL
20 mm
(0.787 in)
NOTE:
01 MINIMUM DISTANCE 125 mm (4.921 in)
BETWEEN CALIBRATION POINTS.
INSPECTION AREA WITH AN EXTRA GAIN

TO COMPENSATE THE ATTENUATION OF
THE Z − PROFILES.
10 mm
SELECTED CALIBRATION AREA (0.394 in)
H = DIFFERENT HONEYCOMB CORE ELEMENTS

Z − PROFILE A
FASTENER
CALIBRATION POINTS
L_NT_511024_1_0100101_01_00

for Sensitivity Calibration in a Reinforcement 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Area (For Example Z-profile) Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10 mm
(0.394 in)
70 mm
(2.756 in)
25 mm
BORDER DEPTH: 25 mm (0.984 in) (0.984 in)
NOTE:
SCAN PATH.
INDICATION AREA.
SYMBOL
MARKING THE AFFECTED
AREA L_NT_511024_1_0110101_01_00

for Defect Size Assessment and Documentation 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FILLER
MATERIAL
H STA330/BR4
STA300/BR3
H STA270/BR2
H
A
H
H
H
SEARCH UNIT SEARCH UNIT
STA60/BR1 POSITION 1 POSITION 3
SEARCH UNIT
POSITION 2
A
SEARCH UNIT POSITION 1 SEARCH UNIT POSITION 2
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
SEARCH UNIT POSITION 3

100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
NOTE:
H = DIFFERENT HONEYCOMB CORE ELEMENTS.
INDICATION AREA.
L_NT_511024_1_0120101_01_00

for Screen Indication close to the Filler Material 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
between the Honeycomb Cores Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
X
FILLER MATERIAL
POSITION 2
AREA WITH
INDICATION
POSITION 1
POSITION 1 POSITION 2
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
FILLER
MATERIAL OUTER SKIN
INNER SKIN HONEYCOMB
NOTE:
X = FOR DIMENSION,
SEE SPECIFIC STRUCTURE DRAWING.
SYMBOLS
MARKS OF ULTRA SOUND
INDICATIONS L_NT_511024_1_0130101_01_00

for Screen Indication close to an Area with Insert 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
(For Example Hoisting Point) Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
NOTE:
A: AREA WITH DIFFERENT THICKNESS OF OUTER LAYER.
B: AREA WITH THICKER INNER LAYER.
THE TEST LINES ARE TO BE SELECTED IN SUCH A WAY THAT ALWAYS AREAS WITH
THE SAME THICKNESS OF THE INNER AND OUTER LAYER ARE TO BE TESTED.
L_NT_511024_1_0150101_01_00

Unit Movement in Inspection Area with Different 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Thickness of Outer and Inner Layer Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
01
POSITION 1 − PARTILY FILLED HONEYCOMB CORE CELLS
100
80
60
40
20
POSITION 1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
DURING TAPPING AGAINST THE STRUCTURE THE UNSTEADY A−SCAN
SIGNAL WILL MOVE ALONG THE TIME BASE AXIS AND IN AMPLITUDE,
DUE THE MOVING FLUID COLUMN INSIDE THE HONEYCOMB CORE CELLS.
FLUID COLUMN OF
PARTLY FILLED
HONEYCOMB
CORE CELLS
POSITION 2 − COMPLETELY FILLED HONEYCOMB CORE CELLS

100
80
POSITION 2
60
40
20
FLUID COLUMN OF
COMPLETELY FILLED
0 HONEYCOMB
0 2 4 6 8 10 CORE CELLS
IF THE HONEYCOMB CORE CELLS ARE COMPLETELY FILLED WITH FLUID,
THE BACK WALL ECHO (BE) FROM THE FLUID COLUMN WILL APPEAR IN
THE A−SCAN (APPROXEMATELY 1.5 TIMES THE TIME OF FLIGHT OF THE
NORMAL THICKNESS OF THE COMPONENT).
NOTE:
01 TO VERIFY THE PARTLY FILLED HONEYCOMB CELLS, TAP WITH THE HAND AGAINST
THE STRUCTURE CLOSE TO THE PROBE POSITION. L_NT_511024_1_0160101_01_00

of Fluid Indication in Honeycomb Sandwich 51-10-24-PB4 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Component in Vertical Position Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure covers the general inspection procedure of limited honeycomb sandwich structures consisting
of CFRP layers and NOMEX honeycomb core for trapped fluid inside the honeycomb core cells.
B. In order to perform this inspection two people are recommended, one NDT inspector and one assistant. The
assistant will scan the inspection areas and the inspector will heat up the structure with an air heater and will
mark out the indications.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-25-290-801-A01, PROCEDURE A for the use in case of ambient temperatures between 10˚
C and 35˚ C (50˚ F and 95˚ F)
B. See TASK 51-10-25-290-802-A01, PROCEDURE B for the use in case of ambient temperatures > 35˚ C
(95˚ F)
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-10-260-801-A01.
B. See TASK 51-10-24-270-801-A01.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-25-290-801-A-01
General Procedure for Thermography Inspection to detect Trapped Water in Honeycomb Structures mounted Vertically
for Ambient Temperatures > 35˚ C (95˚ F) - Procedure A
This procedure provides the general procedure for inspection of honeycomb sandwich structures with CFRP
layers and NOMEX honeycomb core. There is a limitation to thicker top skins and honeycomb identification
(See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-001-A).
This procedure is valid for all undisturbed honeycomb sandwich structures in the following configuration (See
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-001-A):
- CFRP top and bottom layers
- Layer thickness L = 0.4 mm -- 1.0 mm (0.016 in -- 0.039 in) (layer on the side to be inspected)
- NOMEX honeycomb:
Honeycomb height H = 40 mm (1.575 in): NOMEX / 4.8 mm (0.189 in) / 32 kg/m3, NOMEX / 6.4 mm
(0.252 in) / 24 kg/m3
(0.252 in) / 24 kg/m3
- Minimum amount of fluid:
At honeycomb height H = 30 mm (1.18 in) = 6 ml fluid
- Honeycomb cells containing more than 50% of trapped fluid per cell in areas equal to or greater
than 100 mm2 (0.155 in2) in size (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-002-A).
- The filled honeycomb cells must lie next to each other (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-002-A).
- The minimum distance or extent from all edges must be 15 mm (0.591 in) (See FIGURE
51-10-25-991-002-A).
(1) Tooling :
99A55407320000 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/CAMERA
99A55407321000 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/TOOLS
E45 PORTABLE THERMACAM
HOTWINDS AIR HEATER
PILOTVARIOHD SPRAYGUN
(2) References :
TASK 51-10-24-270-801-A01 - General Procedure for Ultrasonic Inspection of Honeycomb Structures
with Parallel FRP Surfaces
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-001-A - Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-003-A - Inspection Method and Scanning Path using an Air Heater
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-004-A - Field of View
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-005-A - Example of Indications, which come from Geometry of the Structure
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-006-A - Typical Indications of Fluid Ingress
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-25-291-001-A
(1) The equipment used in the development of this procedure was as shown in TABLE 1:
Item Equipment
1 PORTABLE THERMACAM (E45) with the following technical features:
- Real time image
- Spectral band 7.5 µm to 13 µm
- Field of view 34˚ x 25˚, Focus f = 0.2 mm (0.0078 in)
- Thermal resolution 0.1˚ C (0.18˚ F) at 30˚ C (86˚ F)
- Temperature range -20˚ C -- 120 ˚C (-4˚ F -- 248˚ F)
- Chart of color palette = GREY (white = hot)
2 Portable Monitor, 8 inch, TFT LCD COLOR MONITOR, System: PAL,
SECAM, NTSC
3 AIR HEATER (HOTWINDS), 3700 W, 550 l/min, 2 mbar, see <1>
5 Connecting Cable, Standard RCA Composite Video, greater than 2000
mm (78.747 in)
6 Digital contact thermometer with a surface probe and a measuring
range of 0˚ C -- 100˚ C (32˚ F -- 212˚ F)
7 As option a Tripod can be used. Tripod connection 0.25 -- 20 inch
8 Transformer 110/220 V, minimum 4000 W, see <2>
TABLE 1
<1> NOTE : In case of ambient temperature >35˚C (95˚F) a SPRAYGUN (PILOTVARIOHD) for
evaporative cooling can be used as an alternative to the air heater
<2> NOTE :
c
This transformer is only necessary if 110 V power is used.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(2) As alternative two AIRBUS Kits with a complete set of necessary equipment are available as shown in
TABLE 2:
Item Equipment
1 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/CAMERA (99A55407320000) which consists of:
- PORTABLE THERMACAM (E45)
- Extra Lens 34˚
- 8 inch LCD/TFT Display
- Extra Li-Ion Battery and Charger
- Videocable
- Transport case
2 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/TOOLS (99A55407321000) which consists of:
- AIR HEATER (HOTWINDS)
- Fluke 51II Thermometer with surface temperature Probe 80PK27
- Tripod
- Mains cable 230V with triple splitter
- Transport case
c
TABLE 2
CAUTION : DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM AIR HEATER TEMPERATURE OF 160˚ C (320˚ F).
(3) Any combination of thermographic equipment and air heater may be used provided that it satisfies the
requirements of this procedure and provides similar resolution as shown in TABLE 3:
Item Equipment
1 Minimum Infrared Camera Requirements:
- Real time image
- Automatic adjustment of level and span (Contrast
and Brightness)
- Thermal resolution < 0.2˚ C (0.36˚ F) near
ambient temperature
- Temperature range 0˚ C -- 100˚ C (32 ˚ F --
212˚ F)
- Chart of color palette = GRAY (white = hot)
- Field of view minimum 24˚ x 18˚, maximum 34˚
x 25˚
- Focus range lower value < 500 mm (19.69 in)
2 Minimum Monitor Requirements:
- Portable
- Black and white
- Output signal camera suitable to input signal
monitor
3 Minimum Air Heater Requirements:
- 400 l/min
- 2 mbar
- Temperature range 150˚ C (302˚ F) up to 160˚
C (320˚ F) maximum
c
TABLE 3
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
WARNING : PUT THE SAFETY DEVICES AND THE WARNING NOTICES IN POSITION BEFORE YOU
START A TASK ON OR NEAR: - THE FLIGHT CONTROLS - THE FLIGHT CONTROL
SURFACES - THE LANDING GEAR AND THE RELATED DOORS - COMPONENTS THAT
MOVE. MOVEMENT OF COMPONENTS CAN KILL OR INJURE PERSONS.
CAUTION : THE INSPECTION MUST BE DONE WITH THE STRUCTURE IN THE VERTICAL POSITION.
DISMOUNTED RUDDERS ARE TO BE SET UP IN A VERTICAL POSITION BEFORE THE
INSPECTION.
CAUTION : THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE MUST BE KEPT TO WITHIN THE RANGE OF 10˚ C -- 35˚
C (50˚ F -- 95˚ F). IT IS RECOMMENDED TO DO THE INSPECTION INSIDE A HANGAR.
THERE MUST BE NO HOT OR COLD AIRFLOWS OR STRONG SOURCES OF HEAT AROUND
THE INSPECTION AREA.
(4) This inspection is to be done from the outside during heat up phase of the structure.
(5) The inspection must be done away from any type of hot or cold source and in ambient temperature
within a range of 10˚ C -- 35˚ C (50˚ F -- 95˚ F).
(6) Make sure that the surface of the structure is clean and smooth.
(7) Check the inspection areas for any visible damage, discontinuities, signs of repairs or any condition
which could affect the inspection.
(8) Check and record the ambient temperature.
Subtask 51-10-25-292-001-A
CAUTION : IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT NOT TO TOUCH THE INSPECTION AREA DURING THE
CALIBRATION, INSPECTION OR MARKING PROCESSES.
(1) Operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

(2) Connect the monitor with the infrared camera.
(3) Switch on the camera and wait, until a real time image appears on the display.
(4) Select the camera menu and set the following basic data:
(a) Select the setup ’automatic adjust’.
NOTE : The PORTABLE THERMACAM (E45) has an automatic contrast and brightness
calibration. If this feature is missing in your thermo camera, the contrast and brightness
calibration must be done manually for each inspection area.
(b) Select the temperature range ’-20˚ C -- 120˚ C (-4˚ F -- 248˚ F)’
(c) Select emissivity ’E = 1’
(d) Select chart or color palette ’GRAY (white = hot)’
(5) Align the camera, as perpendicular as possible, to the part of the area to be inspected so that:
(a) The infrared camera is between 800 mm (31.5 in.) and 1000 mm (39.37 in.) from the surface of
the object to be inspected (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-003-A).
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(b) Only the area to be inspected is in the field of view, so no other items like floor, walls, etc. shall
be visible on the monitor (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-004-A).
NOTE : If possible a tripod can be used.

(6) Adjust the focus with the help of an edge, a rivet, a fastener etc.
(7) If hot spots of external heat sources appear, do the following:
(a) Remove or switch off the external heat sources. If not possible:
1 Cover the direction from which the source radiates with an opaque screen. If not possible:
a Change the angle infrared camera/surface. The variance from the perpendicular must
not be greater than 15˚.
(8) Heat up the area in the field of view to 40˚ C (104˚ F) with the air heater (See FIGURE
51-10-25-991-004-A).
(9) To avoid overheating while monitoring with a incorrectly calibrated infrared camera:
(a) Measure the surface with a contact thermometer in the center of the field of view.
(b) The measured temperature must not be greater than the temperature measured by the infrared
camera.
(c) Should the infrared camera show temperatures above readings with the contact thermometer,
check the setting of the emission rate ’E’ in the camera. The emission rate must be ’E = 1’.
(d) Do the LIST STRUCTURE, LIST STRUCTURE ,LIST STRUCTURE, LIST STRUCTURE and
LIST STRUCTURE for all colors of paint you can find on the inspection area.
Subtask 51-10-25-293-001-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : DO NOT TOUCH THE INSPECTION AREA DURING THE CALIBRATION, INSPECTION OR
MARKING PROCESS.
NOTE : Two people are necessary to perform this procedure, one inspector and one assistant. The assistant
will scan the inspection area and the inspector will heat up the structure with an air heater and will
mark out the indications with the help of the monitor.
NOTE : The inspector must be familiar with the layout of the structure before performing this inspection.
(1) Calibrate the infrared camera in accordance with SUBTASK 292-001-A.
(2) Do the inspection as follows (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-003-A and FIGURE 51-10-25-991-004-A).
(a) Position the infrared camera in accordance with SUBTASK 292-001-A, Paragraph C. (5) thru C.
(7).
(b) Mark the field of view with a soft pencil as shown in FIGURE 51-10-25-991-003-A.
CAUTION : PAY ATTENTION TO A UNIFORM HEATING-UP BY OBSERVATION OF THE SCREEN

(NEARLY THE SAME GRAY VALUE) AND PAY ATTENTION TO THE MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE, WHICH CAN BE DETERMINED WITH THE HELP OF THE CAMERA
INDICATION. DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM AIR HEATER TEMPERATURE OF
160˚ C (320˚ F).
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) Heat up the field of view according to the scanning movement shown in FIGURE
51-10-25-991-003-A and FIGURE 51-10-25-991-004-A.
(d) Make sure that the temperature of 55˚ C (131˚ F) is not exceeded.
(e) Interrupt the heating process in short intervals and observe the monitor. Trapped fluid inside the
honeycomb cells will be indicated by darker indications. See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-005-A and
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-006-A to distinguish between different thermographic indications.
(f) Mark out all areas of indications (dark areas) on the surface of the inspection object identified as
trapped fluid. For marking use the portable monitor near the inspection area.
(g) Do a verification of all areas identified as filled with fluid by either Ultrasonic (See TASK
51-10-24-270-801-A01) or X-Ray (See TASK 51-10-10-260-801-A01).
Subtask 51-10-25-971-001-A
(1) All dark indications which cannot be identified as geometric changes such as core splice filler, layer
overlapping, metal or core filler insert, surface irregularities must be considered as water indications.
(2) Record all indications, which cannot be identified as geometric changes in the Record Sheets.
Subtask 51-10-25-943-001-A
(1) Remove all markings from the surface.
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EDGE
IDENTIFICATION A
OF HONEYCOMB
LAYER
OVERLAPPING
NOMEX
HONEYCOMB
CORE
METALL AND/OR
COREFILLER
INSERT
WRENCH CORE
SIZE SPLICE
CFRP CFRP
LAYER LAYER
L L
A
H
A A
NOTE:
L = LAYER THICKNESS NOMEX WEIGHT WRENCH SIZE
H = HONEYCOMB HEIGHT MATERIAL kg/m³ mm (in)

L_NT_511025_1_0010101_01_00

Inspection Area 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A MIN 15 mm
(0.591 in)
CFRP
LAYER
01
CFRP
LAYER
02
HONEYCOMB
CELL
HONEYCOMB
A CELL
A A
U
P
NOTE:
DUE TO THE CAPILLARITY AND THE FORCE OF GRAVITY THE FLUIDITY SHAPES IN THE
AIRFRAMES, SHOWN ON SECTION OF A−A, RESEULT.
01 MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM ALL EDGES = 15 mm (0.591 in).
AND/OR
02 MINIMUM EXTEND FROM ALL EDGES = 15 mm (0.591 in).
FLUID
L_NT_511025_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
RUDDER
MARKING
150 mm
(5.906 in)
FIELD OF
CAMERA VIEW
AIR HEATER
MONITOR SCANNING
MOVEMENT
OF AIR HEATER
800 mm (31.496 in) UP TO

INFRARED 1000 mm (39.370 in)
CAMERA
L_NT_511025_1_0030101_01_00

Inspection Method and Scanning Path using an 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Air Heater Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FIELD OF VIEW
NOT ACCEPTABLE
INFRARED CAMERA
FIELD OF VIEW
ACCEPTABLE
INFRARED CAMERA
L_NT_511025_1_0040101_01_00
Figure 51-10-25-991-004-A SHEET 01 - Field of Page 10

View 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION CORE
PLATE SPLICE
(WITH
FILLER)
BRACKET
LAYER
OVERLAPPING
BRACKET
EDGE
BRACKET
EDGE
METAL INSERT
(WITHOUT CORE FILLER)
HOISTING POINT
(WITH CORE FILLER)
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER
LAYER
OVERLAPPING CORE SPLICE
(WITH FILLER)
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER L_NT_511025_1_0050101_01_00

of Indications, which come from Geometry of the 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Structure Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EDGE
FLUID INDICATION
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER
EDGE
FLUID INDICATOINS
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER
FLUID INDICATOINS
L_NT_511025_1_0060101_01_00

Indications of Fluid Ingress 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-25-290-802-A-01
General Procedure for Thermography Inspection to detect Trapped Water in Honeycomb Structures mounted Vertically
for Ambient Temperatures between 10˚ C and 35˚ C (50˚ F and 95˚ F) - Procedure B
This procedure provides the general procedure for inspection of honeycomb sandwich structures with CFRP
layers and NOMEX honeycomb core. There is a limitation to thicker top skins and honeycomb identification
(See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-007-A).
This procedure is valid for all undisturbed honeycomb sandwich structures in the following configuration (See
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-007-A):
- CFRP top and bottom layers
- Layer thickness L = 0.4 mm -- 1.0 mm (0.016 in -- 0.039 in) (layer on the side to be inspected)
- NOMEX honeycomb:
(0.252 in) / 24 kg/m3
(0.252 in) / 24 kg/m3
- Minimum amount of fluid:
- Honeycomb cells containing more than 50% of trapped fluid per cell in areas equal to or greater
than 100 mm2 (0.155 in2) in size (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-008-A).
- The filled honeycomb cells must lie next to each other (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-008-A).
- The minimum distance or extent from all edges must be 15 mm (0.591 in) (See FIGURE
51-10-25-991-008-A).
(1) Tooling :
99A55407320000 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/CAMERA
99A55407321000 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/TOOLS
E45 PORTABLE THERMACAM
HOTWINDS AIR HEATER
PILOTVARIOHD SPRAYGUN
(2) References :
TASK 51-10-24-270-801-A01 - General Procedure for Ultrasonic Inspection of Honeycomb Structures
with Parallel FRP Surfaces
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-009-A - Inspection Method and Scanning Path using a Spraygun for Cooling
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-010-A - Field of View
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-011-A - Watercoating
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-012-A - Example of Indications, which come from Geometry of the Structure
Page 13
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-013-A - Typical Indications of Fluid Ingress
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-25-291-003-A
Item Equipment
1 PORTABLE THERMACAM (E45) with the following technical features:
- Real time image
- Spectral band 7.5 µm to 13 µm
- Field of view 34˚ x 25˚, Focus f = 0.2 mm (0.0078 in)
- Thermal resolution 0.1˚ C (0.18˚ F) at 30˚ C (86˚ F)
- Temperature range -20˚ C -- 120 ˚C (-4˚ F -- 248˚ F)
- Chart of color palette = GREY (white = hot)
2 Portable Monitor, 8 inch, TFT LCD COLOR MONITOR, System: PAL,
SECAM, NTSC
3 SPRAYGUN (PILOTVARIOHD) with GAVITY-FEED CUP, nozzle size
0.8 mm (0.031 in)
4 Connecting Cable, Standard RCA Composite Video, greater than 2000
mm (78.747 in)
5 Digital contact thermometer with a surface probe and a measuring
range of 0˚ C -- 100˚ C (32˚ F -- 212˚ F)
6 As option a Tripod can be used. Tripod connection 0.25 -- 20 inch
7 Transformer 110/220 V, minimum 4000 W, see <1>
TABLE 1
<1> NOTE :
c
This transformer is only necessary if 110 V power is used.
(2) As alternative two AIRBUS Kits with a complete set of necessary equipment are available as shown in
TABLE 2:
Item Equipment
1 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/CAMERA (99A55407320000) which consists of:
- PORTABLE THERMACAM (E45)
- Extra Lens 34˚
- 8 inch LCD/TFT Display
- Extra Li-Ion Battery and Charger
- Videocable
- Transport case
2 AIRBUS KIT THERMOGRAPHY RUDDER/TOOLS (99A55407321000) which consists of:
- AIR HEATER (HOTWINDS)
- Fluke 51II Thermometer with surface temperature Probe 80PK27
- Tripod
- Mains cable 230V with triple splitter
- Transport case
c
TABLE 2
Page 14
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(3) Any combination of thermographic equipment and air heater/spraygun may be used provided that it
satisfies the requirements of this procedure and provides similar resolution as shown in TABLE 3:
Item Equipment
1 Minimum Infrared Camera Requirements:
- Real time image
- Automatic adjustment of level and span
(Contrast and Brightness)
- Thermal resolution < 0.2˚ C (0.36˚ F) near
ambient temperature
- Temperature range 0˚ C -- 100˚ C (32˚ F --
212˚ F)
- Chart of color palette = GRAY (white = hot)
- Field of view minimum 24˚ x 18˚, maximum
34˚ x 25˚
- Focus range lower value < 500 mm (19.69 in)
2 Minimum Monitor Requirements:
- Portable
- Black and white
- Output signal camera suitable to input signal
monitor
3 Minimum Spraygun Requirements:
- Allowable operating pressure 8 bar
- Nozzle size 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
- Spraygun must be suitable for the use of
water (stainless)
c
TABLE 3
CAUTION : THE INSPECTION MUST BE DONE WITH THE STRUCTURE IN THE VERTICAL POSITION.
DISMOUNTED RUDDERS ARE TO BE SET UP IN A VERTICAL POSITION BEFORE THE
INSPECTION.
CAUTION : THIS PROCEDURE CAN BE USED AT AMBIENT TEMPERATURES OF > 35˚ C (95˚ F).
THE COMPONENT MUST BE IN THE THERMAL BALANCE WITH THE ENVIRONMENT
(4) This inspection is to be done from the outside during the cooling phase of the structure.
(5) The inspection must be done away from any type of hot or cold source and in ambient temperature
within a range of > 35˚ C (95˚ F).
(6) Make sure that the surface of the structure is clean and smooth.
(7) Check the inspection areas for any visible damage, discontinuities, signs of repairs or any condition
which could affect the inspection.
(8) Check and record the ambient temperature.
(9) Check and record the surface temperature of the structure with a surface thermometer.
Page 15
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Subtask 51-10-25-292-002-A
CAUTION : IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT NOT TO TOUCH THE INSPECTION AREA DURING THE
CALIBRATION, INSPECTION OR MARKING PROCESSES.

(2) Connect the monitor with the infrared camera.
(3) Switch on the camera and wait, until a real time image appears on the display.
(4) Select the camera menu and set the following basic data:
(a) Select the setup ’automatic adjust’.
NOTE : The PORTABLE THERMACAM (E45) has an automatic contrast and brightness
calibration. If this feature is missing in your thermo camera, the contrast and brightness
calibration must be done manually for each inspection area.
(b) Select the temperature range ’-20˚ C -- 120˚ C (-4˚ F -- 248˚ F)’
(c) Select emissivity ’E = 1’
(d) Select chart or color palette ’GRAY (black = hot)’
(5) Align the camera, as perpendicular as possible, to the part of the area to be inspected so that:
(a) The infrared camera is between 800 mm (31.5 in.) and 1000 mm (39.37 in.) from the surface of
the object to be inspected (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-009-A).
(b) Only the area to be inspected is in the field of view, so no other items like floor, walls, etc. shall
be visible on the monitor (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-010-A).
NOTE : If possible a tripod can be used.

(6) Adjust the focus with the help of an edge, a rivet, a fastener etc.
(7) Connect the SPRAYGUN (PILOTVARIOHD) with clean compressed air with a pressure of 5 bar (73
psi).
(8) Fill the gavity-feed cup with clean, normal tap water.
(9) Adjust the nozzle profile of the airbrush so finely, until an acceptable water coating according to
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-011-A is obtained (See the spraygun operating manual).
(10) If hot spots of external heat sources appear, do the following:
(a) Remove or switch off the external heat sources. If not possible:
1 Cover the direction from which the source radiates with an opaque screen. If not possible:
a Change the angle infrared camera/surface. The variance from the perpendicular must
not be greater than 15 degree.
Subtask 51-10-25-293-002-A
C. Inspection
CAUTION : DO NOT TOUCH THE INSPECTION AREA DURING THE CALIBRATION, INSPECTION OR
MARKING PROCESS.
Page 16
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
NOTE : Two people are necessary to perform this procedure, one inspector and one assistant. The assistant
will scan the inspection area and the inspector will cool down the structure with an spraygun and will
mark out the indications with the help of the monitor.
NOTE : The inspector must be familiar with the layout of the structure before performing this inspection.
(1) Calibrate the infrared camera and the spraygun in accordance with SUBTASK 292-002-A.
(2) Do the inspection as follows (See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-009-A and FIGURE 51-10-25-991-010-A)
(a) To avoid disturbances by water flow down, do the inspection sequence by choosing the lowest
inspection area first and then proceed to the upper areas.
(b) Position the infrared camera in accordance with SUBTASK 292-002-A, Paragraph C. (5) thru C.
(10).
(c) Mark the field of view with a soft pencil as shown in FIGURE 51-10-25-991-009-A.
CAUTION : THE SURFACE TEMPERATURE OF THE STRUCTURE MUST BE GRETAER THAN 35˚
C (95˚ F).
(d) Spray the field of view with a thin coating of water according to the scanning movement shown
in FIGURE 51-10-25-991-009-A and FIGURE 51-10-25-991-010-A.
(e) Interrupt the spray process in short intervals and observe the monitor. Trapped fluid inside the
honeycomb cells will be indicated by darker indications. See FIGURE 51-10-25-991-012-A and
FIGURE 51-10-25-991-013-A to distinguish between different thermographic indications.
(f) Mark out all areas of indications (dark areas) on the surface of the inspection object identified as
trapped fluid. For marking use the portable monitor near the inspection area.
(g) Do a verification of all areas identified as filled with fluid by either Ultrasonic (See TASK
51-10-24-270-801-A01) or X-Ray (See TASK 51-10-10-260-801-A01).
Subtask 51-10-25-971-002-A
(1) All dark indications which cannot be identified as geometric changes such as core splice filler, layer
overlapping, metal or core filler insert, surface irregularities must be considered as water indications.
(2) Record all indications, which cannot be identified as geometric changes in the Record Sheets.
Subtask 51-10-25-943-002-A
(1) Remove all markings from the surface.
Page 17
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EDGE
IDENTIFICATION A
OF HONEYCOMB
LAYER
OVERLAPPING
NOMEX
HONEYCOMB
CORE
METALL AND/OR
COREFILLER
INSERT
WRENCH CORE
SIZE SPLICE
CFRP CFRP
LAYER LAYER
L L
A
H
A A
NOTE:

L_NT_511025_1_0070101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A MIN 15 mm
(0.591 in)
CFRP
LAYER
01
CFRP
LAYER
02
HONEYCOMB
CELL
HONEYCOMB
A CELL
A A
U
P
NOTE:
DUE TO THE CAPILLARITY AND THE FORCE OF GRAVITY THE FLUIDITY SHAPES IN THE
AIRFRAMES, SHOWN ON SECTION OF A−A, RESEULT.
01 MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM ALL EDGES = 15 mm (0.591 in).
AND/OR
02 MINIMUM EXTEND FROM ALL EDGES = 15 mm (0.591 in).
FLUID
L_NT_511025_1_0080101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
250 mm
(9.843 in)
AIRBRUSH RUDDER
MARKING
CLEAN
COMPRESSED AIR FIELD OF
5 BAR CAMERA VIEW
MONITOR SCANNING
MOVEMENT
OF AIR HEATER
800 mm (31.496 in) UP TO

INFRARED 1000 mm (39.370 in)
CAMERA
L_NT_511025_1_0090101_01_00

Inspection Method and Scanning Path using a 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Spraygun for Cooling Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FIELD OF VIEW
NOT ACCEPTABLE
INFRARED CAMERA
FIELD OF VIEW
ACCEPTABLE
INFRARED CAMERA
L_NT_511025_1_0100101_01_00
Figure 51-10-25-991-010-A SHEET 01 - Field of Page 21

View 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
WATERCOATING UNACCEPTABLE
DIMENSIONS OF DROPS ARE TOO LARGE
WATERCOATING ACCEPTABLE
L_NT_511025_1_0110101_01_00

Watercoating 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
LIGHTNING
PROTECTION CORE
PLATE SPLICE
(WITH
FILLER)
BRACKET
LAYER
OVERLAPPING
BRACKET
EDGE
BRACKET
EDGE
METAL INSERT
(WITHOUT CORE FILLER)
HOISTING POINT
(WITH CORE FILLER)
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER
LAYER
OVERLAPPING CORE SPLICE
(WITH FILLER)
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER L_NT_511025_1_0120101_01_00

of Indications, which come from Geometry of the 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EDGE
FLUID INDICATION
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER
EDGE
FLUID INDICATOINS
METAL INSERT
WITH CORE FILLER
FLUID INDICATOINS
L_NT_511025_1_0130101_01_00

Indications of Fluid Ingress 51-10-25-PB10 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure covers the ELCH inspection with the ELCH MBBBT100 of honeycomb sandwich structures
with CFRP layers and NOMEX honeycomb core. Using vacuum to load the inspection area and measuring the
resulting deformation allows detecting disbonding and other flaws weakening the stiffness. The System is
especially able to detect rear side disbonding.
Nevertheless there is a limitation to thicker top skin, where the top skin stiffness itself shadows a possible
flaw behind.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-26-220-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-24-270-801-A01.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-26-220-801-A-01
Inspection of Honeycomb Structures (Mostly with Parallel Skins of Limited Thickness) with the ELCH
This procedure provides the general requirements for inspection of honeycomb sandwich structures with CFRP
layers and NOMEX honeycomb core. There is a limitation to thicker top skins and honeycomb identification,
where the top skin stiffness itself shadows a possible flaw behind (See FIGURE 51-10-26-991-001-A).
This procedure is valid for all undisturbed honeycomb sandwich structures in the following configuration:
- CFRP top and bottom layers, parallel design
Layer thickness L = 0.4 mm -- 1.0 mm (0.016 in -- 0.039 in) (layer on the side to be inspected)
- NOMEX honeycomb:
NOMEX / 6.4 mm (0.252 in) / 24 kg/m3, Honeycomb height H = 30 -- 40 mm (1.18 in -- 1.575 in)
NOMEX / 6.4 mm (0.252 in) / 34 kg/m3, Honeycomb height H = 30 -- 40 mm (1.18 in -- 1.575 in)
NOMEX / 4.8 mm (0.189 in) / 32 kg/m3, Honeycomb height H = 40 mm (1.575 in)
- Detectable defect size:
Edge defect: R = 90 mm (3.543 in), test grid 50 x 50 mm (1.969 in), in consideration of the edge effect
according to FIGURE 51-10-26-991-006-A, Detail A
Defect at metal or core filler insert: X = 90 mm (3.543 in), test grid 50 x 50 mm (1.969 in), in
consideration of FIGURE 51-10-26-991-006-A, Detail B
Defect in undisturbed sandwich areas: D = 110 mm (4.331 in), test grid 50 x 50 mm (1.969 in),
according to FIGURE 51-10-26-991-006-A, Detail C
- Assessment criteria:
YV (yellow value) 0.25 mm (0.010 in)
RV (red value) 0.35 mm (0.014 in)
Disbond between CFRP layers and honeycomb core (See FIGURE 51-10-26-991-002-A).
Tearing of honeycomb core (See FIGURE 51-10-26-991-002-A).


(2) Tooling :
MBBBT100 ELASTICITY LAMINATE CHECKER ELCH
(3) References :
TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 - Inspection of CFRP and GFRP Composite Components - Honeycomb
TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01 - Inspection of FRP Composite Components Honeycomb Sandwich Parts
with the WOODPECKER WP632
FIGURE 51-10-26-991-001-A - Inspection Area and Validation
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
FIGURE 51-10-26-991-003-A - ELCH MBBBT100 Version 2
FIGURE 51-10-26-991-005-A - Preparation of the Inspection Area
FIGURE 51-10-26-991-006-A - Determination of the Extent of Disbonded Areas Inside the Structure
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-26-221-001-A
WARNING : BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE MATERIAL NO. 04-012 PURE MINERAL VASELINE OR
PETRO-LATUM. OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
CAUTION : DO NOT USE AN ALTERNATIVE INSTRUMENT.
Item Equipment
1 ELASTICITY LAMINATE CHECKER ELCH
(MBBBT100) (See FIGURE 51-10-26-991-003-A)
2 CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A55407322000) (See
FIGURE 51-10-26-991-004-A) and see <1>
3 Material No. Pure Mineral Vaseline or Petro-
Latum(Material No: 04-012 - basic)
TABLE 1
<1> NOTE :
c
This calibration block is part of the ELCH tool set.
(2) Check the configuration of the honeycomb sandwich structure.

(3) Make sure that the inspection area is clean.
(4) Visually inspect the inspection area for damage such as dents, cracks and damaged paint.
(5) Mark any findings on the component and record them on a record sheet.
(6) Make sure that an air supply is available for the ELASTICITY LAMINATE CHECKER ELCH
(MBBBT100) Version 2 (See the operating instructions).
(7) Mark the test grid on the inspection area with distances according to specific procedures (See FIGURE
51-10-26-991-005-A).
Subtask 51-10-26-224-001-A
(1) There are two possible ways to calibrate the ELCH test system for an inspection.
(a) Calibration with CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A55407322000) (Method 1)
1 Operate the ELASTICITY LAMINATE CHECKER ELCH (MBBBT100) in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Place the ELASTICITY LAMINATE CHECKER ELCH (MBBBT100) with the measuring
tip on the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A55407322000) at the check point of the top side
(0.0 mm -- side, see FIGURE 51-10-26-991-004-A).
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
3 Adjust the required vacuum to -0.7 bar (-0.07 mPa).
4 Press the zero button to adjust the measuring gauge to zero.
5 Place the ELASTICITY LAMINATE CHECKER ELCH (MBBBT100) with the measuring
tip on the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A55407322000) at the check point of the top side
(0.3 mm (0.012 in) -- side, see FIGURE 51-10-26-991-004-A).
6 The measuring gauge must have an indication of 0.3 mm (0.012 in) ± 0.02 mm (0.0008
in).
7 Now the system is ready for the inspection.
(b) Calibration on a Component to be Inspected (Method 2)
1 Operate the instrument in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Select and mark a calibration point on the inspection area.
CAUTION : CHECK THE HONEYCOMB THICKNESS AND CORE BLOCK TYPE AT THE
CALIBRATION POINT. CALIBRATE THE INSTRUMENT FOR EACH
THICKNESS/CORE BLOCK TYPE SEPARATE.
3 Place the instrument with the measuring tip on the calibration point.
4 Adjust the required vacuum to -0.7 bar (-0.07 mPa).
5 Press the zero button to adjust the measuring gauge to zero.
6 Crosscheck the zero point at three different points having a distance of 200 mm (7.874 in)
from the calibration point.
7 Take a new calibration point, if the deviation of the three measuring points is greater than
± 0.06 mm (0.002 in) and repeat LIST STRUCTURE thru LIST STRUCTURE.
8 Record the calibration point on the record sheet (See the Specific Task).
Subtask 51-10-26-222-001-A
C. Inspection
(1) Place the instrument with the measuring tip on a scan path keeping the correct pitch (See FIGURE
51-10-26-991-005-A).
(2) Monitor pressure gauge and measuring gauge. Always keep the vacuum at -0.7 bar (-0.07 mPa).
(3) Reasons for negative indications on measuring gauge:
(a) Higher stiffness caused by honeycomb joints, greater areas with core filler. Ignore these
indications.
(b) Dents, inspect around these areas up to a distance of 200 mm (7.874 in) using a 30 mm (1.181
in) square grid search pattern.
(c) Negative indications on the measuring gauge not caused by reasons mentioned in LIST
STRUCTURE and LIST STRUCTURE indicate a false calibration on a disbonding area. Repeat
the calibration method 1 on the calibration block if you had done the calibration according to
SUBTASK 224-001-A, Paragraph B.(1)(a). Repeat the calibration at another point if you had
done the calibration Method 2 according to SUBTASK 224-001-A, Paragraph B.(1)(b).
(4) In case if an area was already found damaged by visual inspection, tap test etc.:
(a) Do the inspection around these areas up to a distance of 200 mm (7.874 in) using a 30 mm
(1.181 in) square grid search pattern.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(b) Use Material No. Pure Mineral Vaseline or Petro-Latum(Material No: 04-012 - basic) on rough
surface when the required vacuum of -0.7 bar (-0.07 mPa) will not be obtained.
(5) During the inspection two threshold values are to be noticed.
(a) For an Indication ≥ YV (Yellow Value) on the Measuring Gauge
1 Do a check around this area using a 10 mm (0.394 in) square grid search pattern.
2 If there are only values < YV (Yellow Values) ignore them and continue the inspection.
3 If there are values ≥ RV (Red Values), see LIST STRUCTURE.
(b) For Indication ≥ RV (Red Value) on the Measuring Gauge
1 Do a check around this area using a 10 mm (0.394 in) square grid search pattern.
2 If there are no further values ≥ RV (Red Values) ignore them and continue the inspection,
otherwise do LIST STRUCTURE.
3 Determine the extent of the indicated area according to FIGURE 51-10-26-991-006-A
NOTE : The yellow value (YV) is a warning. In this case a detailed examination of the
neighboring area is necessary to check if the measuring pin has only hit the
periphery of a flaw.
NOTE : The red value (RV) describes an indication if exceeding the threshold values
according to the acceptance criteria.
Subtask 51-10-26-971-001-A
(1) Three measured indications of ≥ RV (Red Value) within a distance of 10 mm (0.394 in) from each
other are to be classified as a disbonded area and must be recorded.
(2) Crosscheck with tap test or woodpecker (See TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 or TASK 51-10-19-280-801-
A01) to determine whether the indication results from a disbonding of the outer face sheet.
NOTE : Internal disbonding and honeycomb tearing cannot be detected with the tap test/woodpecker
inspection, except for large disbonded areas.
(3) Determination of the Size of Disbonded Areas
(a) For external disbonding (See TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 or TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01).
(b) For internal disbonding and honeycomb tearing (See FIGURE 51-10-26-991-006-A).
(4) Record all determined disbonded areas on the record sheet.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A L
CFRP
LAYER
CFRP NOMEX
LAYER HONEYCOMB
L
CORE
WRENCH
SIZE
IDENTIFICATION
OF HONEYCOMB
A
NOTE:

L_NT_511026_1_0010101_01_00

Inspection Area and Validation 51-10-26-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HONEYCOMB
DISBONDING
INTERNAL
EXAMPLE OF
DAMAGE SIZE
HONEYCOMB
TEARING
DISBONDING
EXTERNAL
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
ACCESSIBLE
SIDE
A
LAYER
CFRP
A A
L_NT_511026_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
THREATED
VACUUM GAUGE PIPE CONNECTION
RELEASE KEY FOR AIR SUPPLY
HANDLE PRESSURE
GAUGE
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
A WITH FILTER
SUCTION
CUP
DISTANCE
MEASURING
SYSTEM
AIR PIPE
INSTRUMENT AND
VACUUM AREA DIAMETER
140 mm (5.511 in.)
MEASURING TIP
GASKET
EFFECTIVE DIAMETER
100 mm (3.937 in.)
A
L_NT_511026_1_0030101_01_00
Figure 51-10-26-991-003-A SHEET 01 - ELCH Page 7

MBBBT100 Version 2 51-10-26-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MATERIAL: MODIFICATION
7175T7351 OR EQUIVALENT ISSUE A: NEW DRAWING
DATE: 20.06.08
CHECKPOINT
ZERO CALIBRATION
TOP SIDE
80 mm CHECKPOINT (0.3 mm (0.012 in.))

(3.149 in.)
12 mm DIA 30 mm
(0.472 in.) (1.181 in.)
DIA 175
(6.889 in.)
180 mm 180 mm
(7.086 in.) (7.086 n.)
CHECK READING = 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)
BOTTOM SIDE
L_NT_511026_1_0040101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSPECTION
AREA
INSPECTION
POINTS
75 mm 01
(2.953 in) Z
75 mm 01
(2.953 in)
A
NOTE:
01 MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM EDGES. L_NT_511026_1_0050101_01_00

Preparation of the Inspection Area 51-10-26-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSPECTION
AREA
EDGE
EDGE 75 mm 01
(2.952 in)
A
R
75 mm
01
(2.952 in)
B
C
METAL AND/OR
COREFILLER INSERT
A
VALID FOR EDGES
NOTE: B
NEGATIVE VALUES INDICATE LIGHT DENT (CONCAVE VALID FOR METALL OR
SURFACE UNEVENESS) IN THE SURFACE. COREFILLER INSERTS
PERIMETER WITH INDICATION OF = YVmm (YELLOW VALVE)
PERIMETER OF REAL DAMAGE WITH ADDITION OF 10 mm (0.394 in.)
CLASSIFIED AS DAMAGE AREA
C
MEASURED AS DAMAGE AREA VALID FOR UNDISTURBED
SANDWICH AREAS
01 AREA NOT INSPECTABLE WITH ELCH MBBBT100.
L_NT_511026_1_0060101_01_00

Determination of the Extent of Disbonded Areas 51-10-26-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Inside the Structure Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure covers the general requirements for a visual inspection of the internal structure of composite
honeycomb sandwich components using an endoscope.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-27-220-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-27-220-801-A-01
Visual Endoscope Inspection for internal Honeycomb Core Sandwich Structures
The internal structure of composite honeycomb sandwich components such as rudder, spoilers, etc. (See
FIGURE 51-10-27-991-001-A).
Clearly visible damage such as cracked core (Type C), crushed core (Type D), inner skin disbond (Type E) or
fluid ingress (Type F) (See FIGURE 51-10-27-991-002-A)
(1) Tooling :
24W LIGHT SOURCE
RM27-140-030-80 MINI RIGID ENDOSCOPE
(2) References :
FIGURE 51-10-27-991-001-A - Example of Inspection
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-27-221-001-A
(1) Used Equipment
(a) MINI RIGID ENDOSCOPE (RM27-140-030-80) (2.7 mm (0.106 in) diameter, length 140 mm
(5.512 in) and angle of view 30˚)).
NOTE : Any comparable visual aid equipment may be used which has the same capabilities and
similar specifications.
NOTE : The maximum endoscope diameter must be smaller than the cell size to be inspected and
chosen according to the bore holes applied in the structure to be inspected. The angle of
view should be between 0˚ and 70˚, the working length of the endoscope should be
minimum the thickness of the structure to be inspected.
(b) LIGHT SOURCE (24W)
(2) Adequate tool (Stylus) to apply pressure to the inner skin, maximum diameter must be smaller than the
cell size to be inspected and chosen according to the bore holes applied in the structure to be inspected.
The tool must have round edges.
(3) If available, camera inclusive adapter for the endoscope for documentation purpose.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(4) Mark any damage on the surface of the component and record.
(5) Make sure that the drilled inspection holes are not blocked.
Subtask 51-10-27-222-001-A
B. Inspection
(2) Set up the endoscope in the bore hole, as illustrated in FIGURE 51-10-27-991-001-A.
NOTE : Make sure that the inspection hole drilling was done.
(3) Use adequate lighting and inspect carefully the suspect area for visible damage indications.
CAUTION : USE A MODERATE PRESSURE (APPROXIMATLY 2 NEWTON (200 G)), IN ORDER NOT TO
DAMAGE THE STRUCTURE.
(4) Press slightly with the endoscope against the honeycomb cell walls and observe if a damage becomes
visible.
CAUTION : USE A MODERATE PRESSURE (APPROXIMATLY 2 NEWTON (200 G)), IN ORDER NOT TO
DAMAGE THE STRUCTURE.
(5) Press with the tool (Stylus) against the inner skin in order to confirm a disbond (GAP) from the
honeycomb core to the inner skin.
Subtask 51-10-27-971-001-A
(1) All evaluated damage indications should be classified and must be recorded as follows:
- Position and size of damage,
- defect type of the indication,
- if possible, take a picture of the damaged area.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FWD
B
OUTER FRP LAYERS

OUTER FRP LAYERS
FASTENER
HONEYCOMB CORE
INNER HONEYCOMB CORE
FRP
LAYERS
A OUTER FRP LAYERS

PARALLEL INSPECTION AREA
TOOL (STYLUS)
TOOL (STYLUS)
TOOL
MOVEMENT
TOOL
MOVEMENT
ENDOSCOPE ENDOSCOPE
OUTER FRP OUTER FRP

LAYER LAYER
C D INNER FRP INNER FRP

LAYER LAYER
C D
B GAP BETWEEN HONEYCOMB WITHOUT DISBONDING
CORE AND INNER SKIN
TYPICAL L_NT_511027_1_0010101_01_00

of Inspection 51-10-27-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSPECTION
SURFACE
TYPE C TYPE D TYPE E TYPE F
01
OPPOSITE SKIN OF
INSPECTION AREA
NOTE:
01 LIMITED FROM 0.1 mm (0.004 in) TO 2.5 mm (0.098 in).
L_NT_511027_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This procedure covers the inspection of sandwich structures with FRP layers and honeycomb core using a
vacuum cup with hand-actuated pump.
The inspection is performed from the outside, using vacuum to inspect an area and confirm if a air leak path
between two adjacent boreholes is present, due to disbonding or cracked core.
The system is able to detect rear side disbonding.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A. See TASK 51-10-28-220-801-A01.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Procedures
** On A/C ALL
Task 51-10-28-220-801-A-01
General Procedure to detect Damage in Honeycomb Core Sandwich Structures by Applying Vacuum
Internal structure of composite honeycomb sandwich components such as rudder, spoilers, etc. (See FIGURE
51-10-28-991-001-A).
Damage such as outer skin disbond (Type B), cracked core (Type C) or inner skin disbond (Type E) (See
FIGURE 51-10-28-991-002-A).

(2) Tooling :
91154CETL3TH VACUUM CUP WITH HAND-ACTUATED PUMP
(3) References :
FIGURE 51-10-28-991-001-A - Example of Inspection
FIGURE 51-10-28-991-003-A - Vacuum Cup with hand-actuated Pump, 91154CETL3TH
FIGURE 51-10-28-991-004-A - Example of Defect Size Assessment
2. Procedure
Subtask 51-10-28-221-001-A
(1) Used Equipment
(a) VACUUM CUP WITH HAND-ACTUATED PUMP (91154CETL3TH) (See FIGURE
51-10-28-991-003-A).
(b) Adhesive tape minimum 80 mm (3.15 in) width (thin foil tape, thickness approximately 0.06 mm
(0.002 in))
NOTE : The tape must be airtight (no fabric tape).
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) Vaseline Material No. Material No. Pure Mineral Vaseline or Petro-Latum(Material No: 04-012 -
basic) , if necessary, to seal the edge from the vacuum cup.
(2) Mark any damage on the surface of the component and record.
(3) Make sure that the drilled inspection holes are not blocked.
(4) Make sure that the surface is smoothed in the inspection area.
NOTE : Paint-offset (different colors) can be reduced by grinding.

(5) Make sure that the surface is cleaned and that adhesive tape is applied without wrinkles in the
inspection area, in order to close any paint cracking.
(6) One single tape should cover the inspection area, in order not to have a leak path due to tape overlap.
(7) If adhesive tape has not been applied before drilling, pierce the tape with a needle in the area of the
boreholes.
Subtask 51-10-28-224-001-A
(1) Do a pre use check.
(a) Place the VACUUM CUP WITH HAND-ACTUATED PUMP (91154CETL3TH) in an area with a
flat surface.
(b) Make sure that the vacuum cup is attached in an area without any leak path to the cup (e.g.
paint crack, rough surface, etc.).
(c) Evacuate the air from the vacuum cup by stroking the plunger. After maximum 15 strokes the
red line indicator of the plunger should be kept hidden within the pump housing. The cup must
be attached perfectly to the surface.
(d) Wait for one minute, if it can be confirmed that the red line indicator is still hidden within the
pump housing and the cup is still attached perfectly to the surface, the vacuum cup may be used.
(e) Use release tab to refill the evacuated space, so that the vacuum cup detaches completely.
Subtask 51-10-28-222-001-A
C. Inspection
(a) Use the cup on relatively smooth, nonporous surfaces, at temperatures from -18˚ C to 49˚ C
(-0˚ F to 120˚ F).
(b) The red line indicator may not perform reliably at elevations above 1524 m (5000 ft).
(c) Regularly make sure the vacuum cup air filter is in place.
(d) Replace the cup if it is damaged.
CAUTION : USE ONLY MODERATE PRESSURE (APPROXIMATELY 2 N (0.45 LBF)) TO APPLY THE CUP
TO THE STRUCTURE, IN ORDER NOT TO DAMAGE THE STRUCTURE.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(2) Place the vacuum cup above the borehole to be inspected, as illustrated in FIGURE 51-10-28-991-001-
A. The borehole should be in the middle of the vacuum cup.
NOTE : Make sure that the boreholes are not blocked.

(3) The cup must be positioned within the area of the adhesive tape.
(4) Evacuate the air from the vacuum cup by stroking the plunger maximum 15 times.
(5) When the cup is attached perfectly, the plunger stops moving and the red line indicator is hidden within
the pump housing.
(6) Wait for approximately 5 seconds.
(7) Confirm that the red line indicator is still hidden within the pump housing. If it can be confirmed, by
pulling at the vacuum cup with approximately 5 N (1 lbf), that the cup is still perfectly attached to the
surface, it has to be recorded as no damage.
(8) If the red line indicator becomes visible, this indicates that air has leaked back into the pad, making
vacuum insufficient. If it can be confirmed, by pulling at the vacuum cup with approximately 5 N (1
lbf), that the cup is detached from the surface, it has to be recorded as damage.
(9) If, after pumping maximum 15 times, the vacuum cup is not completely evacuated and the red line
indicator is still visible, it has to be recorded as damage.
(10) To remove the vacuum cup, use the release tab, which allows air to refill the evacuated space, so that
the vacuum cup detaches completely.
(11) Repeat the inspection (See LIST STRUCTURE thru LIST STRUCTURE) on all boreholes in the area to
be inspected.
(12) Defect Size Assessment (See FIGURE 51-10-28-991-004-A)
(a) In case of damage, further boreholes have to be added in a defined grid.
(b) The boreholes, which are added successively in the area of the defect indication, must be
inspected according to LIST STRUCTURE thru LIST STRUCTURE.
(c) If still damage indication can be confirmed the test grid must be extended.
(d) If no damage indication is confirmed, this borehole marks the border of the damage.
(e) The boreholes that are identified, as the border of damage should be connected with a non-
permanent pen. The dimension, maximum horizontal length and maximum vertical width and the
position must be recorded.
Subtask 51-10-28-971-001-A
(1) The borehole where the red line indicator remains visible, after stroking the plunger maximum 15 times,
have to be recorded as damaged.
(2) All damage indications must be recorded:
- Position of the boreholes where the red line indicator remains visible.
- Dimension of the damage by the maximum horizontal length and maximum vertical width.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A BOREHOLE PATTERN
VACUUM CUP WITH

HAND−ACTUATED PUMP
B
A
FWD
B
BOREHOLE PATTERN
OUTER FRP LAYERS
OUTER FRP LAYERS
FASTENER
A
B
B
TYPICAL
HONEYCOMB CORE
INNER HONEYCOMB CORE
FRP
LAYERS
RED LINE INDICATOR

A OUTER FRP LAYERS IS VISIBLE
PLUNGER MOVEMENT
RED LINE INDICATOR
IS NOT VISIBLE LEAK PATH FROM
OUTER FRP SURROUNDING AIR
PLUNGER MOVEMENT LAYER
OUTER FRP
LAYER
NOTE:
01 APPROXIMATE 15 STROKES OF THE PLUNGER
TO EVACUATE THE CUP AND 1 CELL.
THE RED LINE INDICATOR IS NOT VISIBLE.
THE CUP IS ATTACHED TO THE SURFACE. INNER FRP
02 IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO CREATE A SUFFICIENT VACUUM LAYER
THAT HOLDS THE CUP FOR MORE THAN B B 02
A FEW SECONDS. THE RED LINE INDICATOR
REMAINS ALWAYS VISIBLE AFTER PUMPING. INNER FRP CELL CAN BE EVACUATED, WHEN WITH DISBOND OR CRACKED CORE
LAYER THERE IS NO LEAK PATH
A A 01
WITHOUT DAMAGE
L_NT_511028_1_0010101_01_00

of Inspection 51-10-28-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TYPE B INSPECTION
SURFACE
TYPE C TYPE E
HONEY COMB CORE OPPOSITE SKIN OF

INSPECTION AREA
L_NT_511028_1_0020101_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
T−HANDLE
ACCESSORY MOUNT
VACUUM CUP
76.2 mm (3.0 in) DIA (TL3) PUMP HOUSING
RED LINE INDICATOR
RELEASE TAB PLUNGER
AIR FILTER
L_NT_511028_1_0030101_01_00
Figure 51-10-28-991-003-A SHEET 01 - Vacuum Page 6

Cup with hand-actuated Pump, 91154CETL3TH 51-10-28-PB9 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
BASIC INSPECTION
RESULTS
** On A/C ALL
01
Y1 X
Y2
Y2
of Defect Size Assessment

02
Figure 51-10-28-991-004-A SHEET 01 - Example

Y2
OVERALL DAMAGE SIZE ADD−ON INSPECTION 1

ADD−ON INSPECTION 2
ADD−ON INSPECTION 3
@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-10-28-PB9
NOTE:
01 MAXIMAL HORIZONTAL LENGTH.
02 MAXIMAL VERTICAL WIDTH.
DISBONDING.
RESULTS OF VACUUM LOSS INSPECTION: NO LEAKAGE.

LEAKAGE DETECTED. L_NT_511028_1_0040101_01_00
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Description
A. Information described in this general part is limited to current uses of thermography.
B. Thermographic inspection procedures on aircraft parts can be used to detect certain local changes in
materials that occur in homogenous parts. These may be considered typically (but not exclusively) as voids,
inclusions, disbonds, liquid ingress or contamination, foreign objects and damaged or broken structural
assemblies.
C. Thermographic inspection can be carried out on almost every type of material used on the construction of
aircraft. The means of excitation, the detection method and the inspection parameters are all dependant on
the material to be inspected and the discontinuities to be detected.
NOTE : To perform a thermographic inspection a component must have a heat flow circulating through it.
This can only be achieved when the component is not in a condition of thermal equilibrium.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Principles of the Thermography
A. The principle of thermography involves the detection and mapping of the differences in the surface
temperature by thermal radiation.
B. Thermographic radiations from a body comprise emitted and reflected radiations. The expression emissivity is
that parameter which relates to the radiations emitted by the surface.
C. Objects at temperatures above absolute zero (0 K = -273 ˚C (-523 ˚F)) emit electromagnetic radiation
across the range of the electromagnetic spectrum, with a pronounced maximum emission at a specific
wavelength corresponding to their temperature (See FIGURE 51-10-90-991-001-A).
D. The range of the electromagnetic spectrum most used in NDT thermographic inspections falls between 3 and
30 µm in the infrared band (See FIGURE 51-10-90-991-002-A).
E. Thermal radiation involved in the thermographic inspection can be reflected, transmitted, absorbed and
emitted as with all other forms of electromagnetic radiation e.g. X-Ray, UV-Ray etc.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
9
10
VISIBLE SPECTRAL REGION
8
10
MAX T−2898 m x K
7
10
SOLAR RADIATION
6
10
5800K
m)
5
10
2000K
SPECTRAL EMISSIVE POWER (E = W/m x
2
4
10
1000K
3
10
800K
100
10
1
300K
0.1
100K
0.01
−3 50K
10
−4
10
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 1 2 4 6 10 20 40 60 100
WAVELENGTH ( ) x m
L_NT_511090_1_0010101_01_00

of Spectral Emittance at Various Temperatures 51-10-90-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
VISIBLE
YELLOW
VIOLET
GREEN
BLUE
RED
NDT RANGE
X−RAYS INFRARED
ULTRAVIOLET
MICROWAVE
GAMMA RAYS
THERMAL RADIATION
0.4 0.7
−5 −4 −3 3 4
10 10 10 0.01 0.1 1 3 10 30 100 10 10
WAVELENGTH ( ) x m
L_NT_511090_1_0020101_01_00

Electromagnetic Radiation Spectrum 51-10-90-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Thermal Classification
A. The part to be inspected can be classified in two categories:
(1) Thermally Active
(a) These are objects which generate heat flow during normal operation.
(2) Thermally Passive
(a) These are objects which require an external heat source to establish the flow.
NOTE : An aircraft can behave as a thermal active object, for instance, just after landing, or as a
passive one after the necessary time has elapsed for it to reach equilibrium within the
environment.
B. For thermally active objects the aircraft operational conditions determine the test parameters, the inspection
being reproducible when the operational conditions remain unchanged.
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Thermal Excitation Methods
A. A great variety of methods exist to establish the heat flow in thermally passive objects. The inspection results
greatly depend on the source used and the process followed to achieve the flow.
B. The most common thermal excitation method for passive objects is by heat application. Typical heating
systems are:
- blankets
- ovens
- infrared lamps
- hot air sources
- pulsed flash light, etc.
- modulated radiation
C. However alternatively in some cases cooling methods may be used. Typical cooling systems are:
- aerosols
- cold air jets
- frozen machine
- cryogenic liquid
- evaporation, etc.
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Sensitivity of the Technique
A. The sensitivity of the technique depend on three main factors.
(1) Excitation Parameters
(a) Methods of excitation temperature, times, etc.
- As a general rule these parameters will be related to the characteristics of the component to
be inspected, type of defect and excitation technique.
(2) Material Properties
(a) The material properties including thermal conductivity, specific heat, density, internal
discontinuities all influence the heat propagation through the component being inspected.
(b) A body out of the thermal equilibrium tends to reach the equilibrium by heat propagation.
(c) The presence of local changes in the materials can affect the thermal values of the thermal
characteristics in such a way that the heat flow is no longer uniform, creating temperature
differences which appear on the surface of the component. For example, the change in
temperature will be slower in areas which have a higher specific heat.
(d) Inspection limitations can occur as the result of differences in heat propagation effects within a
body. For example, from two similar local changes in material, located at different positions
within a body (See FIGURE 51-10-90-991-003-A).
- The two identical local changes in material located at different depths will produce different
temperatures on the surface.
- The dimensions of the thermographic indications will be larger and less well defined than the
actual local change. This effect is a function of the depth of the defined than the actual local
change. This effect is a function of the depth of the local change in material and can also
result in similar thermographic indications being achieved from the local changes in material
of different located at different depths.
- The technique is limited by depth.
(3) External characteristics (only applicable for non-contact thermographic methods)
(a) External characteristics such as the surface coating and environmental conditions will influence
the effectiveness of the inspection.
(b) Emissivity Effect
- Emissivity is a property of the surface of the body and depend on the characteristics of that
material. It determines which part of the detected radiation comes from the body and which
comes from the reflection (See FIGURE 51-10-90-991-004-A).
NOTE : To increase inspection sensitivity a high emissivity coating can be applied on the surface.
- The value of the emissivity must be known if you want to determine the real temperature
distribution of the body.
- In general the emissivity of solid bodies varies mainly with the observation angle (See
FIGURE 51-10-90-991-005-A).
(c) Atmospherical Transmission Effect
- The atmosphere consists of a great variety of gasses each one of them having an absorption
and transmission coefficient which depends on the wavelength of the radiated heat, this
affects the radiated heat propagating from the surface of the component, as it has to travel a
certain distance through this atmosphere before it reaches the detector.
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
- The earth atmosphere has a complex transmission coefficient for electromagnetic radiation.
The absorption effects are therefore depended on the distance travelled by the radiation
through the atmosphere.
NOTE : In the infrared range, the most important reducing transmission factor would be an
increase in water content (high humidity).
(d) Reflection Effect
- Special care must also be taken to avoid effects due to the surface reflections which interfere
with the inspection results.
NOTE : Do not carry out the inspection where uncontrolled external thermal radiation sources
exist such as stoves, ovens, air conditioning outlets, powerful incandescent light,
functioning engines, etc.
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A T T
1 2
A
T
0
A
A
NOTE:
d2 d1
TWO SIMILAR LOCAL MATERIAL CHANGES
SITUATED AT DIFFERENT DEPTHS (d1, d2).
(T −T )=(T −T )
1 0 2 0
THE DEEPER THE MATERIAL CHANGES A A
THE LESS WELL DEFINED THE THERMAL
SURFACE INDICATION WILL BE.
L_NT_511090_1_0030101_01_00
Figure 51-10-90-991-003-A SHEET 01 - Effects Page 9

due to Heat Propagation 51-10-90-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
ALUMINUM
PAINTED
EMISSIVITY = 0.9
ANODIZED
EMISSIVITY = 0.5
POLISHED
EMISSIVITY = 0.1
10% 02
90% 01
50% 02
50% 01
90% 02
10% 01
01 RADIATION EMITTED
02 RADIATION REFLECTED
L_NT_511090_1_0040101_01_00

of Surface Condition affecting Emissivity 51-10-90-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
0.9 DIELECTRIC
0.8
0.7
EMISSIVITY
0.6
0.5
0.4
0
0.3
0.2
0.1 METAL
0
OBJECT SURFACE 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
OBSERVATION ANGLE (DEGREES)
L_NT_511090_1_0050101_01_00

Dependency of the Emissivity on the Observation 51-10-90-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Angle Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Thermographic Camera Systems
A. A thermographic system must have specific capabilities to meet the requirements of the applications. The
most important characteristics to be considered when selecting a specific equipment must be the following:
(1) Temperature Range
(a) This is the temperature range in which the system is able to obtain measurements.
NOTE : The majority of the cameras may work in various ranges selected by the user, which
makes them very versatile in this point.
(2) Thermal Resolution
(a) This is the minimum difference in temperature on the studied surface which produces an
appreciable change on the thermographic image. It is a characteristic which basically depends on
the detector and is related to the signal/noise ratio it possesses.
(3) Spatial Resolution
(a) This is the minimum angle between two points in the field of vision, in such a way that they
appear separate in the thermographic image. They depend on the optical and scanning systems
and the visualization unit.
B. Equipment with good thermal resolution must be selected when quantitative measurements of the
temperature are intended, or when its differences throughout the inspection surface are small. On the other
hand, when attention is paid to the qualitative temperature distribution, especially as regards the localization
and recognition of shapes, the most important characteristics would be the spatial resolution.
C. Once acquired, the thermographic image is the same as a normal television image, and can therefore be
recorded on video, digitalized, etc. For nondestructive test applications, it is advantages to digitalize the
image since this permits the increase of the possibilities of the method by means of image digital acquisition,
processing and analyzing systems, filing in computer storage media etc.
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Thermographic Camera
A. For the example of a thermographic camera see FIGURE 51-10-90-991-006-A.
B. A thermographic camera basically consists of three parts:
(1) Sensitive Element
(a) The sensitive element is capable of detecting the radiation in a specific area on the surface under
study. A detector or an infrared radiation transducer transforms the radiation into an electrical
signal (voltage or intensity). The most common detectors used several solid state elements which
are very reliable and have constant performances.
(b) The fundamental characteristics of a detector are:
1 Sensitivity
- It measures the ability to convert the amount of detected radiation into an output
electric signal which is usually expressed, in volts/watt or equivalent unit. Sensitivity of
the infrared sensors increase with the average temperature of the object.
2 Signal-noise Ratio
- Defines the ratio of the reference signal to the background noise. This is the parameter
which determines the detection capacity of a specific device. It does not only depends
on the detector, but also on the operating conditions.
(c) The actual radiation detector, as well as the adjacent elements, are specific thermal emissions
which constitutes one of the main sources of noise. Consequently, it is necessary to minimize
these effects in order to achieve a good detection capacity.
(d) The power of the thermal emission greatly decreases when the temperature diminishes. Thus, the
cooling of the sensitive element (and adjacent areas) constitute an excellent manner of increasing
the signal-noise ratio of the detector; various methods exist for achieving this cooling:
- by cryogenic liquids
- by cycles of expansion-compression of gases
- by Joules-Thompson effect
- by thermoelectric effect, etc.
(e) In general, the detectors used in thermography are not only sensitive to infrared radiation, but
also detected shorter wavelength radiation (visible radiation, ultraviolet, etc.). The consequence
of this fact could be the total masking of the results by radiations that is not of interest in a
particular application. In order to avoid these effects, reaching the sensitive element of the
detector the radiation is made to pass through filters which are opaque in the visible and
ultraviolet regions and transparent in the infrared region.
(2) Optical System
(a) The optical system allows the selection of a specific field of view and the level of radiation which
reaches the detector. The infrared radiation which reaches the detector. The infrared radiation
has the same characteristics as visible light (the only difference is the long wavelength). The
optical systems are similar to those used in photography, except that these are specific for
infrared.
(3) Scanning System
(a) These are bidimensional scanning devices (horizontal and vertical) which progressively transmit
radiation across the field of view, to the detector.
Page 13
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
C. The majority of cameras function just like a television camera and their output is a video signal which is
proportional to the output signal of the detector. Subsequently, this signal passes on to a signal treatment
and visualization system which assigns to each level a grey tone in an scale or false color. In this way, an
image can be obtained on a TV monitor which represent the distribution of temperatures throughout all the
field of view.
Page 14
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FIELD VIEWED BY
LINE THE DETECTOR
FRAME
SCANNING
SYSTEM
VERTICAL
SCAN (FRAME)
LENS (FILTERS)
COOLING SYSTEM HORIZONTAL SCAN

(LINE)
DETECTOR
DISPLAY
AMPLIFICATION SIGNAL PROCESSING
L_NT_511090_1_0060101_01_00

of a Thermographic Camera 51-10-90-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
8. Reference Block
A. A thermographic reference block is a specimen in the same material and configuration as the part to be
inspected that possesses discontinuities similar to those expected to be found.
B. Reference blocks are normally used to establish the inspection/excitation parameters and to check the
reproducibility of the thermographic indications.
C. Inspection procedures may not use a reference block but instead use a predetermined set of inspection
parameters obtained during the procedure qualification.
Page 16
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
9. Testing Procedures
A. Do the following action for a typical inspection:
(1) Prepare the part for inspection by removing loose paint, dirt, etc., and applying a high emisssivity
coating, if necessary.
(2) Heat the inspection area to create heat flow through the part to be inspected.
(3) Observe the thermographic response of the inspection area. This may be visualized by means of a
thermographic camera system using the instructions detailed in the corresponding specific procedure.
Page 17
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10. Thermographic Application
A. The different applications of thermography on aircraft structures could be as follows:
(1) Composite Laminate Parts
(a) The inspection for delamination, disbonding or foreign objects.
(2) Composite Sandwich Parts
(a) The inspection for disbonding and liquid contamination.
(3) Metallic Bonded Parts
(a) The inspection for disbonding and corrosion.
(4) Metallic Sandwich Parts
(a) The inspection for liquid contamination, disbonding and corrosion.
B. The excitation method will depend on the material to be inspected. For example hot air sources work better
for non-coated metallic parts than infrared lamps.
C. The detection of liquid contamination in the composite sandwich parts is a typical application for aircraft
maintenance.
Page 18
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. X-Ray inspection procedures can be used to find discontinuities in aircraft parts. Cracks, corrosion, debris,
loose fittings, liquid contamination, and damaged or broken structural assemblies can be detected using this
procedure.
NOTE : For crack detection, the plane of the crack must be in line with the X-Ray beam ± 15˚. The length
and width of the crack and the material thickness also effect crack detection.
B. Metallic and nonmetallic parts can be examined using X-Ray procedures.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Principle of X-Rays
A. X-Rays are electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength range between 0.001 and 100 nanometers (nm).
B. X-Rays have the following properties:
- They are not affected by magnetic fields.
- They travel in straight lines.
- They pass through solid materials.
- Some of their energy is absorbed by solid materials.
- They cannot be deflected.
- They cannot be deflected.
- They can cause damage to human tissue.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Generation of X-Rays
A. X-Rays are generated by an X-Ray tube (See FIGURE 51-20-00-991-001-A). The X-Ray tubes usually used
for aircraft inspections generate electromagnetic radiations with a wavelength range between approximately
0.01 and 0.05 nm.
B. An X-Ray tube consists of a glass vacuum tube which contains a positive electrode (anode) and a negative
electrode (cathode).
C. The cathode contains a filament, which emits electrons when it is heated to incandescence by an electrical
current of a few milliamperes.
D. A high-potential difference voltage (kV) accelerates the electrons between the cathode and the anode causing
them to react with the target material of the anode to generate heat and X-radiation.
E. The equipment usually used for the inspection of aircraft parts is as follows:
- half-wave AC generators,
- constant potential generators.
F. For most aircraft inspections, x-Ray tubes are used which incorporate a thin aluminum filter to absorb some
of the lower energy X-Rays.
G. For some low-voltage procedures (less than 40 kV), X-Ray tubes with a beryllium window (filter) are used.
This reduces the filtration of the low-energy X-Rays and give a better film contrast.
H. Auxiliary Equipment
(1) Lead Screens (Amplifying Foils)
(a) Thin lead sheets may be used in contact with the X-Ray film. These may be used for two
reasons:
- at Low voltages, to reduce radiation scatter,
- at voltages above 120 kV, to intensify the effective radiation.
(2) Radio-opaque markers (e.g. Lead numbers, letters etc.) to identify parts of the structure.
(3) Image Quality Indicators (IQI)
(a) An IQI is a device which may be used, in some X-Ray examinations, to give an indication of the
quality of the radiograph.
(b) IQI’s may consist of a series of wires of different diameters or a series of steps of different
thicknesses. For typical examples of IOI’s, see FIGURE 51-20-00-991-002-A.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CATHODE FILAMENT ANODE TARGET
FOCAL SPOT
GLASS VACUUM FOCUSSING

TUBE CUP
X−RAYS
L_NT_512000_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-20-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 - X-Ray Page 4

Tube 51-20-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
IMAGE QUALITY INDICATOR AS

PER DIN 54 109 (GERMANY)
AMERICAN ASTM INDICATORS BRITISH BWRA−INDICATOR
FRENCH INDICATORS AS PER

AFNOR A04−304−1958
L_NT_512000_1_0020101_01_00
Figure 51-20-00-991-002-A SHEET 01 - Image Page 5

Quality Indicators 51-20-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Properties of X-Rays
A. The intensity of the X-Rays, that reach the film, is decreased in proportion to the thickness and density of
material they have passed through. This decrease in intensity is caused by absorption and scattering of the
rays.
(1) Absorption
(a) Absorption is proportional to:
- the thickness of the part being X-rayed,
- the density of the material being X-rayed,
- the voltage (kV) used.
(2) Scatter
(a) Scatter is proportional to the density and dimensions of the part being X-Rayed. Scatter is
formed inside the part, on the surface and edges of the part and by near-by objects. Scattered
radiation has a lower penetrating power than primary radiation and can cause a decrease in the
quality of a radiograph image.
B. X-Radiation has energy of different wavelengths which will penetrate through a part to different depths:
(1) Radiation with short wavelengths is called ’hard radiation’.
(2) Radiation with long wavelengths is called ’soft radiation’.
(3) X-Ray Hardness Scale (Specification DIN 6809) (See TABLE 1):
X-Ray Tube Voltage Quality

Very soft Less than 20 kV Low Penetration
Soft 20 kV to 60 kV |
Semi-soft 60 kV to 150 kV |
|
Hard 150 kV to 400 kV
|
Very hard 400 kV to 3000 kV
|
Ultra hard More than 3000 kV |
↓
High Penetration
X-Ray Hardness Scale
c
TABLE 1
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Film Comparison
A. The film to be used is specified in each procedure. TABLE 1 shows the films which are commonly used
(ASTM E-94 Classification)
FILM TYPE GRAIN SIZE SPEED CONTRAST DUPONT KODAK AGFA

ASTM E94
CLASS
CLASS 1 ULTRA FINE VERY SLOW HIGH 35 R -
CLASS 1 ULTRA FINE SLOW HIGH 45 M D2
CLASS 1 VERY FINE SLOW HIGH 55 MX D4
CLASS 1/2 VERY FINE MEDIUM HIGH 65 T D5
CLASS 2 FINE MEDIUM HIGH 70 AX D7
CLASS 2 FINE MEDIUM HIGH 75 CX -
X-Ray Film Classification
c
TABLE 1
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. X-Ray Procedure
WARNING : YOU MUST KNOW AND OBEY THE LOCAL X-RAY SAFETY REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DO AN
X-RAY INSPECTION. THE X-RAY EQUIPMENT MUST BE OPERATED BY APPROVED
PERSONNEL ONLY. YOU MUST PUT A BARRIER IN POSITION TO KEEP PERSONS, THAT ARE
NOT APPROVED OUT OF THE X-RAY AREA. APPROVED PERSONNEL MUST KEEP OUT OF THE
HAZARDOUS AREA WHEN THE X-RAY EQUIPMENT IS IN OPERATION. RADIATION FROM X-
RAY EQUIPMENT CAN CAUSE CANCER.
A. Preparation
(1) Isolate the aircraft. A barrier and warning notices must be used to keep unauthorized personnel away
from the area.
(2) Clean the inspection area and remove all debris.
(3) Identify the radiographs with radio-opaque markers to show the following:
- aircraft number,
- structure reference points (frames, stringers, spars, LH or RH etc.)
- procedure reference number,
- exposure reference number,
- date.
NOTE : The aircraft must be electrically earthed.

B. Inspection Procedure
(1) Details of X-Ray tube and film positions and exposure parameters are given in each specific procedure.
(2) The following factors have been taken into consideration during the development of each specific
procedure:
- material specification,
- thickness of the part,
- structural configuration,
- X-Ray film type,
- radiographic density required
- X-Ray tube voltage and current,
- use of lead screens,
- film processing conditions,
- source-to-film distance (SFD),
- expected discontinuity type.
(3) Exposure diagrams, related to the X-Ray film type and the material specification, are used to assist in
determining the exposure parameters. A typical exposure diagram for aluminum, see FIGURE
51-20-00-991-004-A.
(4) The SFD is specified in each procedure. Sometimes it is not possible, due to access problems, to use
the specified SFD. In this case a new exposure value must be calculated to compensate for the change
in SFD using the formula shown in FIGURE 51-20-00-991-005-A.
(5) To examine an area of complex structure, with large differences in thickness, a procedure may specify
the use of two X-Ray films of different speeds, packed together in the same envelope. Using one
exposure this double film technique provides one radiograph for the thicker areas and a second
radiograph for the thinner areas.
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
50 KV 70 KV 90 KV 110 KV
130 KV
150 KV
MAS
0 10 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm 50 mm 60 mm 70 mm 80 mm
(0.394 in) (0.787 in) (1.811 in) (1.575 in) (1.969 in) (2.362 in) (2.756 in) (3.150 in)
THICKNESS AL
L_NT_512000_1_0040101_01_00

Exposure Diagram for Aluminum (Al) 51-20-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
(SFD 2 )²
x mAs 1 = mAs 2
(SFD 1 )²
WHERE:
SFD 1 = INITIAL SFD
SFD 2 = NEW SFD
mAs 1 = INITIAL mAs VALUE
mAs 2 = NEW mAs VALUE
L_NT_512000_1_0050101_01_00
Figure 51-20-00-991-005-A SHEET 01 - Formula Page 10

for Exposure Value Calculation 51-20-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Processing of X-Ray Films
A. After exposure, the X-Ray films must be processed in accordance with the film manufacturer’s instructions.
Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
8. Viewing and Interpretation of Radiographs
A. Viewing of Radiographs
(1) Use a high-intensity illuminator with an adjustable aperture and adjustable light intensity.
(2) Use a densitometer to check the image density of the radiograph.
(3) The image density, of the part of the structure to be inspected for discontinuities, must be between 2
and 3. Part of the image can be masked, if necessary, to highlight a specific area.
B. Interpretation of Radiographs
(1) To make sure that a correct interpretation is made, it is necessary to know:
- the inspection procedure used,
- the position of the X-Rays tube,
- the angle of incidence of the X-Rays beam,
- the type of material examined,
- the X-Rays film characteristics,
- the structural details of the part,
- the expected discontinuity type and position.
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. X-Ray Equipment Specifications
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic X-Ray Equipment commonly used in AIRBUS NDT Procedures.
(2) Operators may use alternative equipment provided that it meets the requirements of the general
specification, as indicated under each heading.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. X-Ray Equipment
A. Basic Specification
(1) Any X-Ray unit having the following general specification may be used (See TABLE 1 and TABLE 2):
kV Range 20 to 160 kV
mA Range Optional
Focal Spot Size ≤ 3 mm (0.118 in) x 3 mm (0.118 in) (effective)
Filtration Beryllium window
Dimensions Tube Diameter : 120 mm (4.72 in) maximum
Tube Length : 405 mm (15.94 in) maximum
Voltage Characteristic Constant potential
Constant Potential Equipment
c
TABLE 1
kV Range 30 to 160 kV
mA Range Optional
Focal Spot Size ≤ 3 mm (0.118 in) x 3 mm (0.118 in) (effective)
Filtration Beryllium window preferred
Dimensions Not critical
Half Wave Rectified Equipment
c
TABLE 2
B. Typical Equipment
(1) Constant Potential
(a) X-RAY EQUIPMENT WITH BERYLIUM WINDOW (KB160-4)
(b) X-RAY EQUIPMENT (160M2)
(c) X-RAY EQUIPMENT (GFD165)
(d) X-RAY EQUIPMENT (CP560)
(e) X-RAY EQUIPMENT (MCN166)
(2) Half Wave Rectified
(a) X-RAY EQUIPMENT (CMA306)
(b) X-RAY EQUIPMENT (150BE)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. Audible sounds and ultrasonic waves are of the same physical nature; both are acoustic vibrations. Ultrasonic
waves have frequencies greater than 20 Kilohertz (KHz). In most of the tests, the frequency range is from 1
to 25 Megahertz (MHz).
NOTE : There are some applications in the low-frequency range (below 1 MHz) for instance control of
disbonding.
B. Ultrasonic inspection can be carried out on almost every type of material used in the construction of aircraft.
It is an extremely sensitive method of detecting surface and subsurface flaws and has few limitations.
C. From the different basic methods of ultrasonic testing, pulse-echo is the most frequently used and the method
is described in 51-40-00-002-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Principle of Operation
A. For principle of operation see FIGURE 51-40-00-991-001-A)
B. The pulse-echo ultrasonic inspection method operates using the principle of reflected waves. Sound has a
constant velocity in a given substance, therefore a change in the acoustical impedance of the material causes
a change in the sound velocity at that point, producing an echo. The distance of the acoustical impedance
change (flaw) can be determined if the velocity of the sound in the test material and the time taken for the
sound to reach and return from the flaw is known.
C. The ultrasonic flaw detection equipment comprises the following basic elements (See FIGURE
51-40-00-991-001-A):
- cathode ray oscilloscope,
- timing circuit,
- rate generator,
- RF pulser,
- transducer (search unit).
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
R.F.PULSER AMPLIFIER
SEARCH UNIT
RATE GENERATOR
DISCONTINUITY
3
SPECIMEN
TIMING CIRCUIT
1 2 3
CATHODE RAY OSCILLOSCOPE
L_NT_514000_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-40-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 - Basic Page 3

Pulse-Echo System 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. System Function
A. The rate generator, in the ultrasonic equipment, electrically excites the RF pulser causing it to emit electrical
pulses. The transducer (crystal) oscillates on receipt of the pulses and converts them into a short train of
ultrasonic waves, which are transmitted through the material under test. Any change in the acoustical
impedance, caused by a flaw, interface etc., in the material, reflects the sound back in the form of an echo to
the piezoelectric crystal in the search unit. The piezoelectric crystal has two functions:
- to transform the electric energy into mechanical energy (sound)
- to change the mechanical energy of the return signal (echo) back to electrical energy for display and
evaluation.
The search unit functions as a receiver for reflected energy between pulses.
B. There are three basic elements involved in producing the visual display of ultrasonic information. They are
sweep, pips and range markers.
(1) The time base, which is triggered simultaneously with each transmission pulse, causes a spot to move
rapidly across the instrument screen. The motion of this spot, controlled by a sweep generator, is called
sweep and provides a timebase for the analysis of information. The spot sweeps from left to right across
the face of the scope 50 to 5000 times per second, or higher if required for high-speed automated
scanning. The earliest time is represented at the left side of the sweep and time increases towards the
right. The time displayed on the instrument screen can be controlled and ranges, for test purposes,
from 3 microseconds to 4000 microseconds. A sweep delay control enables the sweep to be moved back
and forth, allowing the operator to start the area of main interest at the left-hand side of the
instrument screen.
(2) Sharp vertical spikes, called pips, are produced by voltages applied to the instrument screen. The
voltages are generated by the initial pulse and also by the transducer when struck by return echoes
from reflections within the test piece. These are spaced along the baseline according to their time of
receipt. The first echo received appears as a pip on the left of the screen and later echoes are spaced
towards the right, the distance between them is proportional to the time elapsed between their
respective times of arrival. Sound travels through a material at a constant speed, therefore the spacing
of the pips indicates distance. The relative proportions of spacing to elapsed time can be varied.
(3) The test equipment may have a graduated screen or may have electronic range markers which are
generated within the equipment and are used to provide a time or distance reference along the
instrument screen baseline. The spacing of the range markers can be adjusted to provide convenient
divisions along the sweep, and may be controlled without affecting other adjustments of the instrument.
C. Generation of ultrasonic pulses is accomplished in several ways. In practical testing, the selection of frequency
depends on the sensitivity desired and sound penetration required, e.g. high frequency for sensitivity and low
frequency for penetration. There are several ways of deriving the required frequency at the search unit, by a
short burst of sound waves or by pulses.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Ultrasonic Recordings
A. Reflected ultrasonic energy can be presented (displayed), or recorded, in three ways .
(1) A-Scan Presentation : uses standard cathode ray display equipment and is most commonly used in
nondestructive testing .
(2) B-Scan Presentation : requires special equipment which is not easily used on aircraft . B-Scan
presentation shows a cross-sectional plot of material thickness and internal discontinuities displayed on
an image retention CRT or displayed on LCD screen.
(3) C-Scan Presentation : requires equipment manufactured for specific applications . C-Scan provides a
recorded facsimile flat plane view of the scanned area.
B. A-Scan Presentation
(1) When using the A Scan presentation, the first deflection (left to right), on the instrument screen
baseline, is caused by the signal received from the front surface or interface of the part . The deflection
farthest to the right is caused by the signal received by the back surface or interface . Deflections
between these two indicate discontinuities (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-002-A).
(2) The amplitude of the echoes is related to the amount of receiver gain and to the size, and orientation,
of the cause of the reflection. The amplitude of the deflection can, by comparison with a duplicate or
standard part with a discontinuity of known dimension, be used to estimate the size of the
discontinuity.
NOTE : If a perspex wedge is used in conjunction with a search unit, a signal will be reflected from the
interface between the search unit and the perspex wedge. The signal from the interface will be
the first deflection and will be ahead of the front surface indication. This signal is termed the
Main Bang (MB). The MB deflection on some instruments can be moved out of the viewed
portion of the instrument screen.
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SCREEN CATHODE RAY OSCILLOSCOPE
PIP
PIP
PIP
0 1 2 3 4 5
SEARCH UNIT RANGE MARKERS SWEEP DISCONTINUITY
TEST SPECIMEN
L_NT_514000_1_0020101_01_00

of Instrument Screen Display 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Modes of Vibration
A. There are many wave forms and modes of ultrasonic vibration which can travel through metals. The pulse-
echo technique can be employed in several wave modes (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-004-A):
- Longitudinal wave mode,
- shear (transverse) mode,
- surface beam mode.
(1) Longitudinal (Compression) Wave Mode (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-005-A)
(a) In the longitudinal wave mode, the particles vibrate in the direction of propagation. This is similar
to audible sound waves, which are also compressional in character. Longitudinal waves are
produced when the search unit is positioned so that the angle of entry into the part is at 90
degrees, or normal, to the surface.
(b) When inspecting parts having a back interface not parallel to the front, the longitudinal waves
will be reflected and refracted internally, which could result in ghost signals on the instrument
screen and lead to misinterpretations.
(c) By using a perspex wedge to obtain an incident angle of entry, the longitudinal wave may be used
as a refracted angular beam. The longitudinal wave should not be used with incident angles
greater than 15 degrees to ensure that no interference from shear wave mode occurs.
(d) Longitudinal wave mode can be used to detect laminar orientated discontinuities and for
thickness measurement. Thickness measurements from 0.25 mm (0.010 in) to several centimeters
(inches) can be accomplished.
(2) Shear Wave (Transverse) Mode (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-006-A)
(a) In shear wave mode, particles vibrate transversely to the direction of wave propagation, with a
velocity approximately half that of longitudinal waves. Shear waves are produced when
longitudinal waves are refracted at the front interface. Refraction occur whenever an angle of
entry is established. As a result of the compound wave motion, the shear wave mode has a high
degree of sensitivity.
(b) An advantage of shear wave mode is its versatility, since, by using various angles of perspex
wedges, a variety of beam angles can be produced, which enables defects located within the part
and in opposite extremities to be detected.
(c) The varying nature and orientation of discontinuities possible within metallic materials normally
requires use of shear waves.
(3) Surface Wave Mode (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-007-A)
(a) Surface (Rayleigh) waves are elastic vibrations whose energy is confined to a narrow region just
below the free surface of an extended solid. The surface waves have a velocity of propagation
independent of frequency, dependent only upon the density and elastic modulus of the solid. The
waves travel with little attenuation in the direction of propagation but their energy decreases
rapidly as the waves penetrate below the surface.
(b) The waves are produced by increasing the angle of incidence sufficiently to refract all of the
energy into the surface of the part. The surface wave mode can be useful in detecting
discontinuities open to the accessible surface. The optimum angle for producing surface wave
mode is 64 degrees. The crystal most suitable for surface wave mode is lithium sulphate which
oscillates at a frequency of 2.25 MHz.
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FRONT SURFACE (FS)

SEARCH UNIT
TEST SPECIMEN
LONGITUDINAL WAVE MODE

WAVE DIRECTION
PERSPEX WEDGE
SEARCH UNIT
FRONT SURFACE (FS) TEST SPECIMEN
BACK SURFACE (BS)
TRANSVERSE WAVE MODE

WAVE DIRECTION
PERSPEX WEDGE EFFECTIVE DEPTH VARIES

WITH FREQUENCY
FRONT SURFACE (FS)
SEARCH UNIT
TEST SPECIMEN
WAVE DIRECTION
SURFACE OR RAYLEIGH WAVE MODE
L_NT_514000_1_0040101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-004-A SHEET 01 - Pulse- Page 8

Echo Wave Mode 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSTRUMENT SCREEN INSTRUMENT SCREEN

(MB) MAIN BANG
(FS) FRONT SURFACE
(BS) BACK SURFACE
(MB) (D) DISCONTINUITY (D)
(FS) (BS) (BS)
(MB)
(FS)
SEARCH UNIT FRONT SURFACE (FS)
SPECIMEN
DISCONTINUITY (D)
THICKNESS MEASUREMENT TO FIND DISCONTINUITIES
BACK SURFACE (BS)

L_NT_514000_1_0050101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-005-A SHEET 01 - Straight Page 9

(Longitudinal) Wave Mode Details 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INSTRUMENT SCREEN
SEARCH UNIT
(MB) (BS)
PERSPEX WEDGE
(D)
ADJACENT PART
MAIN
BANG
(MB)
INTERFACE
DISCONTINUITY (D)
BACK SURFACE (BS)

(MB) MAIN BANG
(BS) BACK SURFACE TEST SPECIMEN
(D) DISCONTINUITY
L_NT_514000_1_0060101_01_02
Figure 51-40-00-991-006-A SHEET 01 - Shear Page 10

Wave Mode Details 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
DISCONTINUITY (D)
BACK SURFACE (BS)
MAIN (MB)
BANG
SEARCH UNIT
INSTRUMENT
SCREEN
(MB) (BS)
(MB) MAIN BANG
(D) PERSPEX WEDGE (BS) BACK SURFACE
(D) DISCONTINUITY
L_NT_514000_1_0070101_01_02
Figure 51-40-00-991-007-A SHEET 01 - Surface Page 11

(Rayleigh) Wave Mode Details 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Reflection and Transmission Energy at Interfaces
A. For reflection and transmission energy at interfaces (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-008-A and TABLE 1).
B. Ultrasonic energy incident upon an interface between two media of differing acoustic impedance (Z) may be
partially or totally reflected or transmitted across the interface.
C. The proportion of signal reflected or transmitted can be determined from the acoustic impedances of the two
media:
Z=ζxV
ζ = Material Density
V = Velocity
Material 1 Material 2 Reflection Transmission

Water Aluminum 83.8 % 183.8 %
Steel 93.6 % 193.6 %
Aluminum Air -99.9 % 0.01 %
Steel -99.9 % 0.01 %
Percentage of Signal Reflected or Transmitted
c
TABLE 1
Percentage of signal reaching interface (theoretical values). Negative values show a change of phase.
D. When ultrasonic vibrations are reflected from boundaries of two materials with different acoustic properties,
this can be compared to a beam of light travelling through space and being reflected from a number of
mirrors. The path travelled by the beam of ultrasonic energy is dependent upon the angle at which it
impinges upon the reflecting surface as well as the number and Locations of these surfaces. In cases where
ultrasonic waves strike a surface at an angle to the normal, the reflected angle is equal to the angle of
incidence (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-009-A).
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MEDIA 1 MEDIA 2
Pi
Pt
Pr
FOR ULTRASONIC WAVES AT NORMAL ANGLE TO THE INTERFACE,

THE PERCENTAGE OF SIGNAL REFLECTED OR TRANSMITTED IS:
REFLECTION = Pi / Pr = Z2 − Z1
Z1 + Z2
TRANSMISSION = Pi / Pt = 2Z2
Z1 + Z2
Pi = INCIDENT PRESSURE
Pr = REFLECTED PRESSURE
Pt = TRANSMITTED PRESSURE
L_NT_514000_1_0080101_01_00

Reflected and Transmitted Energy at Interface 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
INCIDENT LONGITUDINAL BEAM (V )
1
SEARCH UNIT SEARCH UNIT

TEST SPECIMEN
PERSPEX WEDGE
INCIDENT BEAM
TOTALLY REFRACTED BEAM (LONGITUDINAL WAVES)
4 (SURFACE WAVE) (V )
4
2
NEW BEAM
3 1ST REFRACTED BEAM RESULT
(LONGITUDINAL WAVES) (V ) OF REFRACTION
2 (SHEAR WAVES)
2ND REFRACTED BEAM REFRACTED BEAM
(SHEAR WAVES) (V ) ANGULAR (LONGITUDINAL WAVES)
3 BACK SURFACE
DETAIL OF WAVE REFRACTION AND MODE CHANGE
REFRACTION ANGLE DATA

90
REFRACTED ANGLE DEGREES (STEEL) (SEE NOTE)
80
LONGITUDINAL
70 2
60
50 NOTE: THE REFRACTION ANGLES ( ) OF

ULTRASONIC BEAMS CAN BE
CALCULATED BY THE USE OF SNELL’S
40 LAW, GIVEN BELOW
SHEAR
3
30 SIN SIN SIN
1 = 2 = 3
V V V
1 2 3
20
10
5
0
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
PERSPEX WEDGE ANGLE DEGREES ( )
1 L_NT_514000_1_0090101_01_01

Ultrasonic Wave Mode Data 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Refraction and Mode Conversion
A. Refraction and mode conversion of the ultrasonic waves, when passing at an angle from one material to
another, is analogous to the refraction of light beams when passing from one medium to another. Reflection
at certain angles from a boundary also results in a mode conversion of ultrasonic waves. The ultrasonic sound
waves are introduced at an angle into the material to be inspected by mounting the crystal on a plastic
wedge. If the acoustic velocities in the test material and the plastic wedge differ, the longitudinal wave
passing through the wedge will be refracted in the test material. At certain angles of entry of the ultrasonic
sound wave into the test material, mode conversion takes place if the acoustic velocities of the wedge and the
test material differ substantially (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-010-A)
B. The wedge angle and resultant refraction angle (θ) can be calculated by applying the formula (Snell’s Law)
shown in FIGURE 51-40-00-991-031-A. The formula can be applied to any combination of materials (See
FIGURE 51-40-00-991-032-A, for acoustic velocities of common materials).
When applying the formula (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-031-A, reference must be made to the table in
FIGURE 51-40-00-991-032-A, Acoustic Velocities of Common Materials and to a table of Trigonometric Sines
of Angles.
C. When inducing an angle beam within a part, more than one mode may be present. For example a longitudinal
beam propagated at an angle of 45˚ will have a shear wave trailing it.
D. In the high-frequency range, the movement of the crystal vibration is in the micron range and could be
considered as an acceleration without motion. To transmit such a small amount of energy from the search
unit into the material, it is necessary to use a fluid couplant between the search unit face and the material
surface. A film of oil, glycerine, or water is generally used as a couplant in contact testing (See FIGURE
51-40-00-991-011-A).
Page 15
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
NORMAL (90°)
i
PERSPEX WEDGE
TEST SPECIMEN
= INCIDENT ANGLE
i
r
= REFRACTED ANGLE
REFRACTION AT AN INTERFACE r
i
LONGITUDINAL WAVES
SHEAR WAVES
TEST SPECIMEN
r
MODE CHANGE, LONGITUDINAL TO SHEAR
LONGITUDINAL
WAVES
CRYSTAL 1
ANGLE OF BEAM IN WEDGE
SURFACE WAVES
TEST SPECIMEN
MODE CHANGE, LONGITUDINAL TO SURFACE
L_NT_514000_1_0100101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-010-A SHEET 01 - Wave Page 16

Mode Conversion 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
WHERE: = ANGLE FROM NORMAL OF INCIDENT BEAM IN WEDGE OR LIQUID

1
= ANGLE FROM NORMAL OF REFRACTED BEAM IN MATERIAL
2
V = SOUND VELOCITY OF INCIDENT VIBRATIONS IN WEDGE OR LIQUID
1
V = SOUND VELOCITY OF VIBRATIONS IN MATERIAL BEING TESTED
2
L_NT_514000_1_0310101_01_00
Figure 51-40-00-991-031-A SHEET 01 - Snell’s Page 17

Law Formula 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
ACOUSTIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
ACOUSTIC
VELOCITIES m/s ACOUSTIC
IMPEDANCE WAVELENGTH DENSITY
6 3
MATERIALS V & V V V (Pa s/mx10 ) (mm AT 5 MHz) (kg / m )
1 2 3 4
METALS
ALUMINUM ALLOY 6350 3100 2900 17.2 1.27 2710

BERYLLIUM 12800 8710 7870 12.8 2.56 1820
BRONZE, PHOSPHOR 3530 2230 2010 31.2 0.71 8860
COPPER 4660 2260 1930 41.8 0.93 8900
LEAD, ANTIMONY 2160 810 740 23.6 0.43 10900
MAGNESIUM (AM35) 5790 3100 2870 10.1 5.79 1740
MOLYBDENUM 6290 3350 3110 63.5 1.26 10090
INCONEL 7820 3020 2790 64.5 1.56 8250
MONEL 6020 2720 1960 53.1 1.20 8830
STEEL 5850 3230 2790 45.6 1.17 7800
TITANIUM 6100 3120 2790 27.7 1.22 4540
NONMETALS
AIR 330 − − 0.0033 0.07 1.0

OIL 1360 − − 1.27 0.28 920
LUCITE 2670 1120 − 3.2 0.53 1180
WATER 1490 − − 1.49 0.30 1000
CARBONFIBER
RESIN 3000 1500 1350 45 0.60 2500

ADHESIVE 3000 1500 1350 33 0.60 1100
GLASSFIBER
KEVLAR
L_NT_514000_1_0320101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-032-A SHEET 01 - Acoustic Page 18

Properties of Standard Materials 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
COUPLANT CRYSTAL
TEST SPECIMEN
L_NT_514000_1_0110101_01_00
Figure 51-40-00-991-011-A SHEET 01 - Use of Page 19

Couplant 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
8. Detection Sensitivity of the Technique
A. This depends on different factors:
- the orientation of planar discontinuities,
- the frequency of the ultrasound,
- the size of the ultrasonic beam etc.
(1) Orientation of Planar Discontinuities
(a) The sensitivity is optimum when the discontinuity is perpendicular to the direction of the
ultrasound beam, and this should determine the orientation of the transducer.
(b) In metallic materials, due to the various orientations of the discontinuities, compression, shear or
surface waves can be used, depending on the shape and configuration of the part.
(c) In composite materials, most of the discontinuities to be detected are delaminations and
disbonding in bonded parts. These discontinuities are always parallel to the surface of the part so
composite materials, and disbonded parts, are usually checked using compression waves.
(2) Ultrasonic Frequency
(a) As a general rule, using low Frequency (< 1 MHz; usually from 100 to 500 KHz), only large
discontinuities can be detected.
(b) Using high frequency (> 1 MHz; usually from 1 to 25 MHz), the resolution is better and smaller
discontinuities can be detected.
(3) The Size of the Ultrasonic Beam
(a) The narrower the ultrasound beam, the better the resolution.
(b) To reduce the diameter of the beam, focussed probes are sometimes used to concentrate the
acoustic waves.
Page 20
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
9. Reference Blocks (Calibration Blocks)
A. Reference Blocks
(1) The reason for producing an ultrasonic reference block is to have a specimen (in the same material),
which simulates the construction of a part to be inspected, and processes discontinuities similar to those
expected to be found in the part.
B. Calibration Blocks
(1) Calibration blocks are normally used for the basic adjustment of ultrasonic instruments and to check
the reproducibility of the measurements.
(2) Calibration blocks 1 and 2, in accordance with DIN EN12223 and DIN EN27953 (See FIGURE
51-40-00-991-012-A) could be used for metallic materials whilst a calibration block similar to that
shown in FIGURE 51-40-00-991-013-A could be used for composite materials.
(3) Calibration blocks may also be used as reference blocks for simple ultrasonic inspections.
Page 21
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
CALIBRATION
BLOCK
CALIBRATION
BLOCK
L_NT_514000_1_0120101_01_00

Calibration Block - Metallic Materials 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
45°
0°
315°
6−PLY PATTERN
30 mm
(1.181 in)
6−PLY
180 mm
(7.087 in)
NOTE: THIS ILLUSTRATION

IS NOT TO SCALE
6−PLY / STEP
30 mm 30 mm
(1.181 in) (1.181 in)
L_NT_514000_1_0130101_01_00

Calibration Block - CFC 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10. Testing Procedures
A. For a typical examination the following procedures should be carried out.
(1) Prepare a calibration reference (See 51-40-00-009-A).
(2) Prepare the part for inspection by removing loose paint, dirt and scale.
(3) Set up the inspection equipment and adjust the controls to obtain a defect pattern on the instrument
screen to match the pattern obtained from the calibration/reference block.
(4) Apply the selected couplant to the inspection area.
(5) Scan the part in accordance with the detailed instructions.
(6) Identify and locate all indications of defects.
(7) Remove the couplant and the equipment from the area on completion of inspection.
(8) Record all defects.
Page 24
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
11. Testing Methods
A. The different applications of ultrasonic inspection on aircraft structures belong to one of these three groups:
(1) Metallic materials
(a) Inspection for cracks, corrosion. Thickness measurement.
(2) Composite materials
(a) Inspection for delaminations/disbonding.
(3) Bonded parts
(a) Inspection for disbonding.
B. Detection of Cracks in Metallic Materials (Typical Applications)
(1) Area where cracking is suspected can be examined using one or more of the wave modes, see FIGURE
51-40-00-991-033-A. The examples, see FIGURE 51-40-00-991-014-A, FIGURE 51-40-00-991-015-A,
FIGURE 51-40-00-991-016-A and FIGURE 51-40-00-991-017-A show edge distance and dimensions
required for various techniques.
(2) Holes, where the only access is a curved surface, may require a longitudinal wave technique to be used.
A typical example of this application is the inspection of curved hinge fittings (See FIGURE
51-40-00-991-018-A). Two methods (I and II) are described for this method of inspection.
(3) Method I requires that the longitudinal wave be incident on the curved surface at a fixed angle, such
that the beam is refracted tangential to the hole. Method II, requires the incident beam to be
perpendicular to the axis of the hole, allowing a lateral movement of the search unit to achieve a
refracted longitudinal wave tangent to the hole.
(4) Method I requires a fixed incident angle for each hole diameter. Method II is more difficult to perform
than Method I, but allows examination of different sized holes using the same apparatus. A special
reference block is necessary to perform both methods. A circular reference block similar to that, see
FIGURE 51-40-00-991-019-A , is recommended.
C. Method I
(1) A perspex shoe must be made to fit the curvature of the test part and to hold the search unit at the
required incident angle (Θ1). The angle of incidence (Θ1) must be carefully calculated, using Snell’s
Law and the condition of tangency (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-019-A). The maximum refracted angle
(Θ) that can be used for beam tangency at the inner diameter surface, using Method I or II, see
FIGURE 51-40-00-991-020-A. If steel is to be inspected at a refracted angle of 0 to 35 degrees from
normal, perspex wedge angles of 15 degrees, or less, should be used to provide a longitudinal test beam.
If the angle of the test beam, in the steel, is required to be in the range 35 to 89 degrees from normal,
a transverse wave mode is most suitable. This requires the use of a perspex wedge angle ranging from
26 to 56 degrees.
(2) By applying trigonometry and the formula shown in FIGURE 51-40-00-991-034-A, the refraction angle
(Θ2) required for the sound beam to be tangent to the circumference of the hole can be found.
(3) For calibration purposes, the search unit is positioned in the perspex shoe at the calculated incident
angle (Θ1). A search unit 9.5 mm (0.374 in) maximum diameter is recommended. The shoe is then
positioned on the reference block as, see FIGURE 51-40-00-991-021-A
(a) An oil couplant is necessary at the interfaces of the search unit/perspex and perspex/part.
(b) When no flaws are detected, an instrument screen display is get similar to that shown inFIGURE
51-40-00-991-021-A, Pattern A.
Page 25
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) The shoe should be moved slowly along the circumference to get a signal of 80 % of full scale
from the simulated flaw (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-021-A, Pattern B).
(d) After calibration, remove the reference block and the test the part, see FIGURE
51-40-00-991-018-A.
D. Method II
(1) A perspex shoe, as detailed in FIGURE 51-40-00-991-019-A, should be fabricated to fit the outer radius
of the test specimen. The shoe should allow lateral movement of the search unit along a plane
perpendicular to the centerline of the shoe (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-022-A).
(2) Lateral movement of the search unit one the perspex shoe changes the angle of incidence (Θ1),
resulting in a change in the angle of refraction (Θ2) at the curved perspex/part interface. Positioning of
the refracted longitudinal beam tangent to the circumference of any size of hole may be achieved by
moving the search unit laterally on the perspex shoe.
(3) Method II requires that one shoe be fabricated to fit the outer radius of the test specimen regardless of
the hole diameter. The required refracted longitudinal beam tangent to the circumference of the hole is
therefore determined empirically rather than theoretically as in Method I.
(4) For calibration purposes, the search unit is placed in the middle of the slot in the perspex shoe (See
FIGURE 51-40-00-991-022-A, Position A ). The shoe and the search unit are placed on the reference
block. The hole diameter and the outer radius of the reference block should match the test specimen.
(a) An oil couplant is necessary at the interface of the search unit to perspex shoe and the perspex
shoe to the test specimen.
(b) When the search unit is normal to the outer radius, an instrument screen display is getting similar
to that shown in FIGURE 51-40-00-991-022-A, Pattern A.
(c) By moving the search unit in the slot of the perspex shoe, a signal should get similar to the
instrument screen display, see FIGURE 51-40-00-991-022-A, Pattern B. If no such signal is get it
may be necessary to move the perspex shoe.
(d) The amplitude of the signal received from the simulated flaw should be adjusted to 80 % full
scale on the instrument screen. The search unit should be locked in the slot of the perspex shoe,
by the shoe locking device.
(e) After calibration, remove the reference block and the test part.
(5) The test specimen may differ from the reference block, by having only a semi-circular surface on which
scanning can be carried out (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-018-A). To check the complete circumference
of the hole, it is therefore necessary to move the search unit and shoe around the entire curved surface
in one direction then turn the shoe and search unit through 180 degrees and scan the hole in the other
direction (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-018-A).
E. Thickness Testing
(1) Testing for thickness is generally required after an area has been reworked to remove scratches, cracks,
corrosion etc. If the reworked area is blended to a smooth surface finish, standard digital ultrasonic
thickness measuring equipment may be used. In cases where the repaired area is narrow, equipment
with a narrow, focussed beam will be required.
F. Bond Testing
(1) No metal-to-metal bonding are to be inspected by Fokker Bond Testing (FBT).
(2) Description of bond testing procedures in secondary structures to be added.
Page 26
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
G. Control of Fiber Resin Composite Materials
(1) Composite materials, unlike metallic materials are in homogeneous and are anisotropic due to their
composition and special care is needed in the ultrasonic examination of these materials. Additionally
these materials heavily absorb ultrasound: either by mechanical absorption (fretting) or by acoustical
absorption (diffraction).
(2) In maintenance we are looking for the following discontinuities:
- Delaminations, which can be defined as separation between two layers.
- Disbonding, which can be defined as separation between two elements (carbon/carbon,
carbon/metallic, carbon/core).
- Impact damage, which may result in a combination of delaminations and rupture of fibers.
(3) The thicknesses of Carbon Fiber Composites (CFC) parts can vary from between 2 to 10 layers, for
thinner parts, and between 80 to 120 Layers for thicker parts. As the delaminations are located between
the layers it is necessary to start checking as near to the surface as possible.
(4) To satisfy this requirement, it is necessary to reduce the dead zone and to use equipment which meets
the following requirements:
- Good time resolution, solved by the use of wideband transducers
- Good spatial resolution, solved by the use of high-frequency and focussed transducers
- Good sensitivity, achieved using high-energy equipment.
(5) The result is a compromise between these requirements:
- High-resolution equipment and transducer
- Frequency range from 5 to 10 MHz.
H. Inspection Method
(1) In maintenance, because the access is frequently only to one face of the part, pulse-echo is the normal
method of inspection.
J. Contact Inspection
(1) To reduce the dead zone at the inspection surface, delay transducers are used (See FIGURE
51-40-00-991-023-A). The thickness of the delay shoe is calculated so as to avoid interference with the
multiples of the back echo.
K. Couplant
(1) On painted parts, water, oil or grease may be used.
(2) On unpainted parts only water-based couplants must be used.
L. Reflection and Transmission Coefficients
(1) In fiber resin composite materials, the reflection and transmission coefficients are of great importance.
(2) TABLE 1 provides a comparison between Carbon Fiber Reinforced Plastic (CFRP) and aluminum.
Material 1 Material 2 Reflection Transmission

Water CFRP 50 % 150 %
CFRP Air -99.98 % 0.02 %
CFRP Adhesive -15.3 % -84.6 %
Adhesive Air -99.98 % 0.02 %
Water Aluminum 84 % 184 %
Aluminum Air -99.98 % 0.01 %
Percentages Signals Reflected or Transmitted for CFRP Compared to Aluminum
c
TABLE 1
Page 27
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
The percentage of the signal reaching the interface (theoretical values). Negative values show a
change of phase.
(3) Comments
(a) If the couplant is water, the reflected entrance echo in CFRP is approximately 40% smaller than
the equivalent echo in aluminum.
(b) For aluminum there is a small difference between echoes reflected at the water/aluminum (84%)
and aluminum/air (99.99%) interfaces. CFRP materials, however, have a large difference between
those two combinations; water/CFRP (50%) and CFRP/air (99.98%). Consequently the operator
must take care, while checking CFRP parts that there is no water, grease, or similar materials on
the back of the part.
(c) At the interface between some media, the phase of the signal changes. This indication may be
more consistent than the amplitude of the signal therefore it is sometimes useful to have the
unrectified signal (HF signal) as indicated, see FIGURE 51-40-00-991-024-A.
M. Examples of Indications
(1) Delaminations
(a) For delaminations within the thickness of the part there are different possibilities (See FIGURE
51-40-00-991-025-A).
(2) Disbonding (See FIGURE 51-40-00-991-027-A, FIGURE 51-40-00-991-028-A, FIGURE
51-40-00-991-029-A and FIGURE 51-40-00-991-030-A).
(a) The different combinations can be summarized in two groups:
- Assembly of different Layers of the same material or different materials (metallic, fiber resin
composite etc.).
- Assembly of layers with honeycomb.
(b) There are many different possibilities and these examples are only an illustration of the approach.
Page 28
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SOUND BEAM NORMAL SEARCH UNIT ROTATED SEARCH UNIT ROTATED

TO BOLT HOLE SLIGHTLY OFF C
L OF BOLT TOWARD EDGE OF BOLT
HOLE (NO CRACKS)
SEARCH UNIT ROTATED SEARCH UNIT ROTATED SEARCH UNIT ROTATED

PAST BOLT HOLE TOWARD EDGE OF BOLT HOLE, PAST BOLT HOLE
(NO CRACK) CRACK IN SKIN CRACK IN SKIN
REFERENCE 9.5 mm DIA HOLE

STANDARD 152.4 mm (0.374 in)
(6.0 in)
MATERIAL 6.4 mm (0.252 in)

THICK ALUMINUM
38.1 mm
(1.5 in)
76.2 mm
(3.0 in)
CALIBRATION SLOT
(SIMULATED CRACK)
76.2 mm 76.2 mm
CRACK ORIENTATION (3.0 in) (3.0 in)
ROTATE SEARCH UNIT LEFT AND

RIGHT WHILE OBSERVING SCOPE SEARCH UNIT AT
PATTERN SHOWN ABOVE 90° TO BOLT HOLE
BASE
NOTE: CHECK SKIN AROUND ALL

POSITION SEARCH UNIT FOUR BOLTS AS SHOWN.
AS SHOWN
L_NT_514000_1_0140101_01_00

Ultrasonic Inspection of Attachment Holes 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SEARCH UNIT
6.4 mm (0.252 in)

TYPICAL
A
6.4 mm MIN
(0.252 in)
B
1.6 mm MIN
3.2 mm MIN (0.063 in)
(0.126 in)
1.6 mm MIN
(0.063 in)
C
4.8 mm MIN
(0.189 in)
L_NT_514000_1_0150101_01_00

of Straight Beam Mode 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSITION 2
POSITION 2 IS USED IF
POSITION 1 IS NOT ACCESSIBLE
POSITION 1
L_NT_514000_1_0160101_01_00

of Angle Beam Mode 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
A
A
A A
B
CRACK
B REAR SIDE
POSITION 1
B B
POSITION 2
19.1 mm MIN B
(0.752 in)
C CRACK
REAR SIDE
C C C
L_NT_514000_1_0170101_01_00

of Surface Beam Mode 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SEARCH UNIT FIXTURE

(METHOD I OR II)
REFRACTED
SOUND BEAM
SCAN
HINGE
SEARCH
UNIT
INSPECTION
AREA
SCAN
INSPECTION AREA SCAN
SEARCH
UNIT
L_NT_514000_1_0180101_01_00
Figure 51-40-00-991-018-A SHEET 01 - Method Page 33

of Inspection of Hinge Fittings 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EQUATION 1: SIN D
= i
2 2r
o
EQUATION 2: SIN V
1 = 1
SIN V
2 2
−1 V
EQUATION 3: = SIN 1 SIN
1 V 2
2
WHERE: r IS THE RADIUS OF CURVATURE OF THE PART

o
D IS THE DIAMETER OF THE HOLE
i
V IS THE LONGITUDINAL WAVE VELOCITY OF
1 SOUND IN THE SHOE MATERIAL
A 6.4 mm V IS THE LONGITUDINAL OR SHEAR WAVE VELOCITY
(0.252 in) 2 OF SOUND IN THE PART WHICH YOU INSPECT
IS THE ANGLE OF INCIDENCE OF THE SOUND

1 BEAM NECESSARY TO GET THE ANGLE WHICH
2
IS THE TANGENCY CONDITION NECESSARY
FOR THE TEST
B B IS THE NECESSARY ANGLE AT WHICH THE SOUND
2 BEAM MUST BE REFRACTED TO BE TANGENT TO
THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF THE HOLE
CALCULATED FROM
EQUATION 3 1
A
PERSPEX SHOE 1
MADE TO FIT
CURVATURE OF
TEST SPECIMEN
6.4 mm r
2 (0.252 in) 2 o
D
i
CONDITION OF TANGENCY
L_NT_514000_1_0190101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-019-A SHEET 01 - Method Page 34

I and II Perspex Shoes and Reference Block 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Details Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
RATIO OF
Di / Do
0.3
USE
USE
LONGITUDINAL
SHEAR WAVE ( 0 3 )
0.2 WAVE ( 0 2 )
0.1
10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
DEGREES
L_NT_514000_1_0200101_01_00

Maximum Applicable Refracted Angle (θ) for 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Beam Tangency at D , Using Method I or II Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1
SEARCH−UNIT
PERSPEX SHOE
1 REFRACTED SOUND BEAM

(LONGITUDINAL WAVE)
REFERENCE
BLOCK 2 CALIBRATION SLOT
(SIMULATED CRACK)
D
i
2
r
o
INDICATION A INDICATION B
01 ´SHOWS MULTIPLE
INITIAL REFLECTION
PULSE
1 1´ 01 1 1´ 2
SECOND REFLECTION CRACK INDICATION
L_NT_514000_1_0210101_01_01

Ultrasonic Test Method I 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PATTERN A PATTERN B
01 ´SHOWS MULTIPLE
MAIN REFLECTION CRACK
BANG INDICATION
01
1 2 2´ 2´´ 3 3´ 4
1´ 1´´
INSTRUMENT SCREEN DISPLAY INSTRUMENT SCREEN DISPLAY
SEARCH−UNIT
(POSITION A)
PERSPEX SHOE
SEARCH−UNIT UNREFRACTED
(POSITION B) 1
SOUND BEAM
3 (LONGITUDINAL WAVE)
2 r
o
CALIBRATION SLOT
(SIMULATED CRACK)
D
4 i
REFRACTED SOUND BEAM

(LONGITUDINAL WAVE)
REFERENCE
BLOCK
L_NT_514000_1_0220101_01_02

Ultrasonic Test Method II 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FRONT ECHO
COUPLANT
FRONT
BACK ECHO
BACK
DEAD ZONE
TRANSDUCER WITH NO DELAY SHOE
DELAY ECHO AND

DELAY
COUPLANT FRONT ECHO
FRONT BACK ECHO
BACK
TRAVEL IN DELAY SHOE
DEAD ZONE
TRANSDUCER WITH DELAY SHOE
L_NT_514000_1_0230101_01_00
Figure 51-40-00-991-023-A SHEET 01 - Use of Page 38

Delay Shoe 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
RECTIFIED SIGNAL
COUPLANT
CFRP
UNRECTIFIED SIGNAL (HF SIGNAL)

AIR
POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
L_NT_514000_1_0240101_01_00

Rectified and Unrectified 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SEARCH UNIT
A B E F
C D G H
PLIES
AREAS WITH NO DISCONTINUITIES AREAS WITH NO DISCONTINUITIES
FS BS
A B E F
AREAS WITH DISCONTINUITIES AREAS WITH DISCONTINUITIES
FS BS
DELAMINATION D G H
C
FS = FRONT SURFACE
BS = BACK SURFACE
L_NT_514000_1_0250101_01_01

of Delamination Indications 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SEARCH UNIT FREQUENCY = 10 MHz, DIA = 10 mm (0.3937 in)
COUPLANT
CFRP: 16 PLY
ADHESIVE
CFRP: LARGE THICKNESS
BONDED PART DEBONDED PART
100% 100%
96%
14%
RECTIFIED SIGNAL RECTIFIED SIGNAL
+100% +100%
−14%
−96%
UNRECTIFIED SIGNAL UNRECTIFIED SIGNAL
NOTE: THIS EXAMPLE ONLY CONSIDERS THE REFLECTION AND

TRANSMISSION COEFFICIENTS. IT DOES NOT CONSIDER
THE ABSORPTION FACTOR.
L_NT_514000_1_0270101_01_00

of Bonded and Disbonded Indications 16-Ply 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
CFRP - Thicker CFRP Section Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
COUPLANT
CFRP: 80 PLY
ADHESIVE
CFRP: LARGE THICKNESS
100% 100%
2.5% 16%
+100% +100%
−2.5%
−16%

L_NT_514000_1_0280101_01_00

CFRP - Thicker CFRP Section Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
COUPLANT
CFRP: 16 PLY
ADHESIVE
ALUMINUM: LARGE THICKNESS
100% 100%
96%
63%
+100% +100%
+63%
−96%

L_NT_514000_1_0290101_01_00

CFRP - Thicker Aluminum Section Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
COUPLANT
CFRP: 80 PLY
ADHESIVE
ALUMINUM: LARGE THICKNESS
100% 100%
10% 16%
+100% +100%
+10%
−16%

L_NT_514000_1_0300101_01_00

CFRP - Thicker Aluminum Section Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FRONT SURFACE (FS)

SEARCH UNIT
TEST SPECIMEN
LONGITUDINAL WAVE MODE

WAVE DIRECTION
PERSPEX WEDGE
SEARCH UNIT
FRONT SURFACE (FS) TEST SPECIMEN
BACK SURFACE (BS)
TRANSVERSE WAVE MODE

WAVE DIRECTION
PERSPEX WEDGE EFFECTIVE DEPTH VARIES

WITH FREQUENCY
FRONT SURFACE (FS)
SEARCH UNIT
TEST SPECIMEN
WAVE DIRECTION
SURFACE OR RAYLEIGH WAVE MODE
L_NT_514000_1_0330101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-033-A SHEET 01 - Pulse- Page 45

Echo Wave Modes 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SIN D
= SEE FIGURE 51−04−00−991−019 , EQUATION 1
2 2r
o
SNELL’S LAW RELATES AND IN THE FOLLOWING WAY:
1 2
SIN V SEE FIGURE 51−04−00−991−019 , EQUATION 2

1 = 1
SIN V
2 2
V IS THE LONGITUDINAL WAVE VELOCITY OF SOUND IN THE PERSPEX MATERIAL AND

1
V IS THE LONGITUDINAL WAVE VELOCITY OF SOUND IN THE TEST SPECIMEN.
2
SIN V (D / 2r )
= 1
1 V o
2
WITH CALCULATED FOR THE PART, A HOLE IS DRILLED IN THE SHOE, AT ANGLE ,
2 1
TO HOLD THE SEARCH UNIT.
L_NT_514000_1_0340101_01_01
Figure 51-40-00-991-034-A SHEET 01 - Formula Page 46

for the Calculation of Refraction Angle 51-40-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Ultrasonic - Instrument Specifications
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic Ultrasonic NDT Equipment commonly used in AIRBUS NDT
Procedures.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Ultrasonic - Instruments
(1) Any Ultrasonic unit having the following general specification as shown in TABLE 1 may be used:
Linear Horizontal and Vertical Deflection

Frequency Range 0.5 to 15 MHz (0.5 to 25 MHz)
Amplification 0 to 80 dB (0 to 100 dB) in 2 dB steps
Mode Pulse echo/through transmission
Display High frequency rectified signal display
Depth Range Variable between 10 mm - 250 mm (0.394 in - 9.84 in), in
steel
Sound Velocity 2000-7000 m/sec, in steel
Delay Range 0 - 200 mm (0 - 7.87 in), in steel
Basic Specification of Ultrasonic Instruments
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : Values in brackets are recommended for new equipment purchase.

B. Typical Instruments
(1) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (USD10)
(2) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (USL48)
(3) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (USK7S)
(4) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (HR7200)
(5) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (SONIC132)
(6) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (SONIC136)
(7) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (SONICQC400)
(8) ULTRASONIC EQUIPMENT (PHENIX80286)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. ULTRASONIC - SEARCH UNIT SPECIFICATION
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic Ultrasonic Search Units commonly used in AIRBUS NDT
Procedures.
(2) Alternative Search Units, from other Suppliers, may be used provided that they comply with the basic
specification and are compatible with the instrument being used.
NOTE : Search Unit Suppliers are not listed. Search Units would normally be purchased from the
appropriate instrument supplier (See 51-41-00-001-A).
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Ultrasonic - Standard Search Units
A. Basic Specification (See TABLE 1)
Nominal Frequency 4-6 MHz

Connector Connector position and type is optional, compatible with the
instrument being used.
Transducer Element Circular, 6 mm (0.236 in) - 8 mm (0.315 in) diameter.
Sensitivity Medium
Resolution High
Damping High
Search Unit Index The beam index is to be marked on the search unit.
Basic Search Unit Specification
c
TABLE 1
B. Basic Search Unit Set
NOTE : The search units listed are a standard set for the use in the majority of UT Procedures. Some
Procedures in the specific NTM Tasks will require the use of special search units or adaptors, this will
be indicated, where necessary, in the specific Tasks.
(1) SEARCH UNIT TYPE A: 0˚ - CONTACT COMPRESSION (See FIGURE 51-42-01-991-001-A)
(2) SEARCH UNIT TYPE B: 45˚ - SHEAR (TRANSVERSE) (See FIGURE 51-42-01-991-001-A)
(3) SEARCH UNIT TYPE C: 60˚ - SHEAR (TRANSVERSE) (See FIGURE 51-42-01-991-001-A)
(4) SEARCH UNIT TYPE D: 70˚ - SHEAR (TRANSVERSE) (See FIGURE 51-42-01-991-001-A)
NOTE : The angles are quoted for Steel.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SEARCH UNIT TYPE A 0° CONTACT COMPRESSION
NOTE:
1. SIDE ENTRY CONNECTOR
2. CONNECTOR TYPE OPTIONAL
15 − 20 mm
(0.591 − 0.787 in)
DIA 10 mm TYPICAL
(0.394 in) MAX 12.5 mm (0.492 in)
SEARCH UNIT TYPE B 45° SHEAR (TRANSVERSE)
NOTE:
1. CONNECTOR POSITION − TOP
12 − 20 mm END OR ANGLED
(0.472 − 0.787 in)
2. CONNECTOR TYPE OPTIONAL
3. SEARCH UNIT NOSE TO INDEX

15 − 25 mm
POINT, LESS THAN
(0.591 − 0.984 in)
13 mm (0.512 in)
8 −12 mm
(0.315 − 0.472 in)
SEARCH UNIT TYPE C 60° SHEAR (TRANSVERSE)
NOTE:
AS FOR TYPE B
12 − 20 mm
(0.472 − 0.787 in)
15 − 25 mm
(0.591 − 0.984 in)
8 − 12 mm
(0.315 − 0.472 in)
SEARCH UNIT TYPE D 70° SHEAR (TRANSVERSE)

NOTE:
AS FOR TYPE B
12 − 20 mm
(0.472 − 0.787 in)
15 − 25 mm
(0.591 − 0.984 in)
8 − 12 mm
(0.315 − 0.472 in)
L_NT_514201_1_0010101_01_00

Ultrasonic Search Unit Set 51-42-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. ULTRASONIC - CALIBRATION/REFERENCE BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic Ultrasonic Calibration/Reference Blocks commonly used in
AIRBUS NDT Procedures.
(2) Operators may use alternative Calibration/Reference Blocks provided that they meet the requirements
of the general specification, as indicated under each heading.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Resonance Frequency Testing - General
A. General
(1) The only Resonance Frequency procedures for A380 aircraft are Tap Test. For detailed application see
TASK 51-10-03-280-801-A01 and TASK 51-10-19-280-801-A01, and in specific NDT procedures of the
relevant NTM Tasks.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. This chapter provides details of the WOODPECKER (WP632) tapping tool, as used in AIRBUS NDT
procedures.
B. This tool is a compact, light weight design, fully portable, with a visual indicator display and audio alarm, and
is battery operated, which makes it ideal for ’IN SERVICE’ use. An optional monitor facility is available.
C. This tool provides non-destructive testing method for detecting disbonds and delaminations by stiffness
comparison.
D. The operation of this tool is not affected by background noise levels.
E. This tool provides reliable testing for disbonding of metallic or composite outer layers, delamination within
monolithic structures and damage within a honeycomb core.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Basic Specification
A. For the Basic Specification of the instrument see TABLE 1.
Length 276 mm (10.87 in)

Width 46 mm (1.81 in)
Height 100 mm (3.94 in)
Weight 470 g ( 1.03 lb.)
Current consumption 1w
Power source 4 x AA size Alkaline batteries
Battery life 10 hours continuous use
Basic Specification
c
TABLE 1
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. The Woodpecker WP632
A. The WOODPECKER (WP632) can be divided into three functional parts, as follows (See also FIGURE
51-50-01-991-001-A and FIGURE 51-50-01-991-007-A):
(1) Handle Part
(a) It contains the battery compartment, with a detachable cover, and the START button on the
lower half. On the upper half are situated the MEMORY switch and a socket for a MONITOR.
(2) Working Part
(a) This is on the lower face of the tool body and comprises the hammer head and two feet, one on
each side of the hammer, which help to stabilize and slide the tool on the test surface. The
operating mechanism, with its associated electronic system and audio warn buzzer are installed
inside the head.
(3) Operation and DATA Lamp Part
(a) This is on the upper face of the tool body and consists
1 The OPERATION dial, which sets the measurement values and tapping speed. The
DEBOND/INSERT selector switch, which set the mode of testing, e.g.: DEBOND to
detect disbonding, and INSERT for detection of insert.
2 The control and indication DATA lights with their associated electronics.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
OPERATION
DIAL
DEBOND / INSERT
SWITCH
OPERATION
READY LIGHT AND DATA
LIGHT PART
DATA LIGHT
HAMMER HEAD
FOOT
BATTERY LIGHT
FOOT
MEMORY SWITCH
BUZZER
WORKING
PART JACK FOR THE
MONITORING
UNIT (WP − 632M)
HANDLE
PART
START BUTTON
JACK FOR THE

MONITORING
UNIT (WP − 632M)
BATTERY COMPARTMENT LID
BATTERY COMPARTMENT
L_NT_515001_1_0010101_01_00

WOODPECKER WP632 51-50-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
ELECTRONIC EVALUATION WITH

INTEGRAL INDICATION DATA LIGHTS
LEVER ARM RETURN SPRING POWER CONTROL
SENSOR
(ACCELEROMETER)
HAMMER
MOVEMENT
HAMMER HAMMER MOUNTING BATTERY PACK
ELECTRO MAGNET OUTER SKIN OF
FOOT TEST STRUCTURE
L_NT_515001_1_0070101_01_00

WOODPECKER WP632 (Schematic) 51-50-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Operating Principle
A. The WOODPECKER uses an electromagnet to drive the tapping hammer and has an electronic speed control.
The hammer rebound rate from the test surface is measured by a sensor (accelerometer) which is linked to a
microcomputer.
B. Excitation of the electromagnet drives the hammer with a defined weight and frequency. Depending upon the
test structures existing rigidity the hammer will have a corresponding rebound rate.
C. Changes in the test surface rigidity/stiffness ratio (elasticity), material properties, or where structural defects
exist, will cause the hammer rebound rate to change.
D. The rebound rate change is measured automatically through the sensor (accelerometer) and electronically
processed so that the degree of change in a structures condition will be indicated visually (DATA lights) and
by audio means (buzzer).
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Operating and Handling
A. To be sure of a reliable and accurate inspection the tool condition should be checked as follows, and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(1) Battery charge condition (Change the batteries when the BATTERY light illuminates).
(2) Setting of measurement values.
(3) Setting of tapping speed.
(4) All moveable switches and dials for correct position and operation.
(5) Hammer head and feet for cleanliness and free from damage or excessive wear.
B. Tool Function and Adjustment
(1) Use the FUNCTION TEST BLOCK (99A55407291000) (See FIGURE 51-50-01-991-005-A) check the
tool function and adjustment as follows:
(a) Set the WOODPECKER (WP632) controls, see TABLE 1.
DEBOND/INSERT switch DISBOND

OPERATION dial (Measurement) Average 2 mode
OPERATION dial (Tapping speed) 8 Hz
Control Settings
c
TABLE 1
(2) Memory Operation

(a) Place the WOODPECKER (WP632) in the middle of the 3 mm (0.12 in) thick step (adjustment
area).
(b) Press the Memory switch and check that the GREEN ready lamp comes ON. Release the
MEMORY switch and check that the GREEN ready and GREEN DATA lights are ON
(c) Pull the WOODPECKER (WP632) slowly backwards across the test standard, from the thick
section to the thin section, and observe the DATA Lights.
NOTE : Do not move the tool into the thickest section 3.5 mm (0.138 in), from the adjustment
area.
(d) The WOODPECKER (WP632) is in a satisfactory condition if the DATA lights come ON
YELLOW, then RED 1 and RED 2 in sequence along the test standard as the thickness
decreases.
(e) If these DATA light indications do not appear, check the control settings and repeat the
adjustment.
(3) Measurement Setting
(a) Depending upon the structure material and/or material configuration select on the OPERATION
dial outer scale the measurement value for hammer taps compared to the memorized reference
value, as follows:
- Average 1 = A single value from each hammer tap rebound velocity
- Average 2 = The average value of two successive hammer taps rebound velocity
- Average 3 = The average value of three successive hammer taps rebound velocity
- Average 4 = The average value of four successive hammer taps rebound velocity
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
NOTE : Use Low Average mode 1 or 2 for uniform surfaces and High Average mode 3 or 4 for
irregular surfaces.
(b) Select on the OPERATION dial inner scale the tap frequency (number of hammer taps per
second) suitable for the inspection, see TABLE 2.
2 Hz 2 taps / sec.
4 Hz 4 taps / sec.
8 Hz 8 taps / sec.
F (Fast - 16 Hz) 16 taps / sec.
Tap Frequency
c
TABLE 2
NOTE : For quick scanning set the tapping speed to F, using Low Average mode 1 or 2. For
increased accuracy (slow scan) set a low tapping speed using a High Average mode.
(4) DATA Lights and Audio Alarm
(a) For the operation of the DATA lights and audio alarm valid for Disbondings and/or
Delaminations see TABLE 3.
GREEN Damage free
YELLOW Damage free
YELLOW followed by RED and/or double RED Damage
RED and double RED Damage
Audio alarm (buzzer) Damage
DATA Lights and Audio Alarm
c
TABLE 3
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6.5 mm
(0.256 in)
A A SUPPORT BLOCK
(USE ANY SUITABLE
ADHESIVE TO ATTACH)
6 x 20 mm (6 x 0.79 in) 2.5 mm

120 mm (4.72 in) (0.098 in)
B
01
3.5 mm 3 mm 2.5 mm 2 mm 1.5 mm 1 mm

(0.138 in) (0.118 in) (0.098 in) (0.079 in) (0.059 in) (0.039 in)
65 mm 45 mm
02 (2.56 in) (1.77 in)
A A
ADJUSTMENT AREA B 10 mm B B
IN CENTER OF STEP (0.39 in)
NOTE: FOR PRODUCTION DETAILS

REFER TO
DRG. 99A55407291000
MATERIAL: ACRYL−GLASS
mm in mm in
01 NUMBER TO BE ENGRAVED
DIMENSIONS 0.5 − 30 0.02 − 1.181 30 − 120 1.181 − 4.724
02 DO NOT USE THIS TOLERANCES ± 0.2 ± 0.008 ± 0.3 ± 0.012
THICKNESS STEP
L_NT_515001_1_0050101_01_00

Function Test Block PN99A55407291000 51-50-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Inspection
A. The WOODPECKER (WP632) can be used to inspect aircraft structures using thin aluminum plate,
laminates, fiber composites, honeycomb and monolithic construction.
B. For the examples of the different damage detections see FIGURE 51-50-01-991-006-A.
Page 10
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MONOLITHIC MATERIAL BONDED MATERIALS/HYBRID JOINTS
BONDED
1 X X 2 STRUCTURE
01 01
SKIN, LAMINATED JOINTS AND MONOLITHIC HONEYCOMB

HONEYCOMB STRUCTURES MATERIAL
Y 3
01
SANDWICH STRUCTURE
NOTE: FOR DAMAGE DEPTH IN THE COMPONENT SKIN REFER TO ITEM 1 (DELAMINATION / DEBOND)
FOR DAMAGE DEPTH BETWEEN THE SKIN AND HONEYCOMB REFER TO ITEM 2 (DEBONDING)
X = MAXIMUM DEPTH OF DAMAGE
Y = SKIN THICKNESS (mm) COMBINED STRUCTURE
01 MINIMUM DAMAGE SIZE > 25 x 25 mm (0.98 x 0.98 in) THAT CAN BE RELIABLE DETECTED
ITEM STRUCTURE TYPE TYPE OF DAMAGE DAMAGE DETECTION MAX DEPTH
1 MONOLITHIC FIBER COMPOSITE DELAMINATION X < 1.8 mm (0.071 in)

CFRP, GFRP, ARAMID
METAL TO METAL DEBONDING X < 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
2
FIBER COMPOSITE DEBONDING X < 1.8 mm (0.071 in)
CFRP, GFRP, ARAMID
METAL TO METAL HONEYCOMB FRACTURE OF HONEYCOMB X < 20 mm (0.79 in)

(HORIZONTAL) Y = 0.1 − 1.2 mm (0.004 − 0.047 in)
3 METAL TO PAPER HONEYCOMB FRACTURE OF HONEYCOMB X < 20 mm (0.79 in)

(HORIZONTAL) Y = 0.1 − 1.2 mm (0.004 − 0.047 in)
CFRP / GFRP / ARAMID TO FRACTURE OF HONEYCOMB X < 30 mm (1.181 in)
PAPER/METAL HONEYCOMB (HORIZONTAL) Y = 0.1 − 1.2 mm (0.004 − 0.047 in)
L_NT_515001_1_0060101_01_00

of Detectability of Monolithic and Sandwich 51-50-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Parts Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. The eddy current nondestructive testing method is capable of detecting or measuring the following in
electrically conductive materials :
- cracks,
- corrosion,
- thickness of non-conductive layers on conductive materials,
- conductivity .
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Basic Principles
A. Generation of Eddy Currents
(1) If conductive materials are placed in an alternating magnetic field, circular currents are generated in the
material, flowing around the field lines. Generally, the currents flow vertically to the field lines in a
circular direction.
(2) If the magnetic field is now excited by a coil, the exciting currents and the currents generated in the
conductive material are antiparallel. They flow in the same plane (vertical to the magnetic field Lines),
but with the opposite direction of rotation.
(3) The induced currents produce a further magnetic field . As the induced currents are flowing in an
opposite direction to the exciting currents, the magnetic field produced by the induced currents is also
opposite to the existing magnetic field. This will weaken the exciting magnetic field, causing the coil’s
reactance to decrease.
(4) If permanent eddy currents are to be excited in an electrically conductive material, an alternating
current must be passed through the coil (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-004-A).
B. Depth of Penetration of Eddy Currents
(1) The depth of penetration of eddy currents decreases with increasing exciter frequency (f) ; see FIGURE
51-60-00-991-005-A. Changes in permeability (µ) and conductivity (o) also affect the depth of
penetration . Ferromagnetic materials have a large range of permeability (100 to 1000). The
permeability of non-ferromagnetic materials is a constant (1).
(2) For practical purposes, there are two types of eddy current equipment. The type used depends on the
depth of penetration required.
(a) Type 1: High Frequency (HF). It has frequencies higher than 10 kHz, and is used to inspect for
surface discontinuities.
(b) Type 2: Low Frequency (LF). It has frequencies lower than 10 kHz, and is used to inspect sub-
surface discontinuities.
(3) The electrical conductivity of a material is influenced by the following:
- material specification,
- material heat treatment condition,
- mechanical processing (machining, forming etc.),
- the temperature of the material.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(4) The conductivity values for materials which are commonly used in aircraft construction, see TABLE 1.
Values are given as a function of the material condition. Conductivity values can be converted from
MS/m to % IACS, or vice versa (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-006-A and TABLE 2 and TABLE 3).
TYPE OF PRODUCT MATERIAL CONDITION CONDUCTIVITY % IACS

SPECIFICATION MIN MAX
CLAD SHEET 2024 T3, T4 - -
3.1364 - 29 34
S.07.1009 T42
7075 T6, T62 31 35
3.4374
7475 T761, T762 39 43
3.4377
DTD5070 T8, T62 - -
-0.5 mm (0.020 in) 27 36
-0.9 mm (0.035 in) 32 42
-1.6 mm (0.063 in) 35 40
S.07.1010 - -
-1.0 mm (0.039 in) 31 34
-2.0 mm (0.079 in) 29 34
-3.5 mm (0.138 in) 30.5 36
UNCLAD SHEET 2024 - - -
3.1354 T351 30 33
BS.L97
2618A - - -
CM003 T851, T651 35 40
S.07.1103
7075 - - -
3.4364 T651 31 35
BS.2L95
7075 T7351 38 41
3.4364
7050 T73651 41 45
3.4144
7010 T73651 41 45
3.4394
BAR AND 2024 - - -
EXTRUSIONS 3.1354 T4, T3511 29 34
S.07.1003
DTD 5014A 29 33
2014 T6 36 41
BS.3L.65
7075 T6511 31 35
3.4364
7075 T73511 38 41
3.4364
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
TYPE OF PRODUCT MATERIAL CONDITION CONDUCTIVITY % IACS

SPECIFICATION MIN MAX
TUBING 2024 T3, T42 29 34
3.1354
6061 T4, T42 36 43
3.3214
6061 T6, T62 39 47
3.3214
FORGED MATERIAL 2014 T6, T611 36 40
3.1254 - -
S.07.1001 - -
S.07.1002 37 41
7075 T73 38 44
3.4364
7175 T7352 38 41
7050 T736 41 45
3.4144 T73652
Conductivity Values
c
TABLE 1
% IACS MS/m % IACS MS/m % IACS MS/m % IACS MS/m

1 0.58 26 15.1 51 29.6 76 44.1
2 1.16 27 15.7 52 30.2 77 44.7
3 1.74 28 16.2 53 30.7 78 45.2
4 2.32 29 16.8 54 31.5 79 45.8
5 2.90 30 17.4 55 31.9 80 46.4
6 3.48 31 18.0 56 32.5 81 47.0
7 4.06 32 18.6 57 33.1 82 47.6
8 4.64 33 19.1 58 33.6 83 48.1
9 5.22 34 19.7 59 34.2 84 48.7
10 5.80 35 20.3 60 34.8 85 49.3
11 6.38 36 20.9 61 35.4 86 49.9
12 6.96 37 21.5 62 36.0 87 50.5
13 7.54 38 22.0 63 36.5 88 51.0
14 8.12 39 22.6 64 37.1 89 51.6
15 8.70 40 23.2 65 37.7 90 52.2
16 9.28 41 23.8 66 38.3 91 52.8
17 9.86 42 24.4 67 38.9 92 53.4
18 10.4 43 24.9 68 39.4 93 53.9
19 11.0 44 25.5 69 40.0 94 54.5
20 11.6 45 26.1 70 40.6 95 55.1
21 12.2 46 26.7 71 41.2 96 55.7
22 12.8 47 27.3 72 41.8 97 56.3
23 13.3 48 27.8 73 42.3 98 56.8
24 13.9 49 28.4 74 42.9 99 57.4
25 14.5 50 29.0 75 43.5 100 58.0
Conversion of Conductivity Values (% IACS in MS/m)
c
TABLE 2
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
MS/m & IACS MS/m & IACS MS/m & IACS MS/m & IACS
1 1.72 15 28.5 30 51.7 44 75.8
2 3.45 16 27.6 31 53.4 45 77.6
3 5.17 17 29.3 32 55.2 46 79.3
4 6.90 18 31.0 33 56.9 47 81.0
5 8.62 19 32.7 34 58.6 48 82.7
6 10.3 20 34.5 35 60.3 49 84.5
7 12.1 21 36.2 36 62.1 50 86.2
8 13.8 22 37.9 37 63.8 51 87.9
9 15.5 23 39.6 38 65.5 52 89.6
10 17.2 24 41.4 39 67.2 53 91.4
11 18.9 25 43.1 40 68.9 54 93.1
12 20.7 26 44.8 41 70.7 55 94.8
13 22.4 27 46.5 42 72.4 56 96.5
14 24.1 28 48.3 43 74.1 57 98.3
29 50.0 58 100.0
Conversion of Conductivity Values (MS/m in % IACS)
c
TABLE 3
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
COIL
PRIMARY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD
SECONDARY FIELD CAUSED BY EDDY CURRENT

IN TEST SPECIMEN
THE SECONDARY FIELD OPPOSES THE PRIMARY
FIELD
EDDY CURRENT
PATHS
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE
MATERIAL
L_NT_516000_1_0040101_01_00
Figure 51-60-00-991-004-A SHEET 01 - Eddy Page 6

Current Generation 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
GRAPHITE
100 4
3
TITANIUM
50 2
STAINLESS STEEL
1
EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF PENETRATION (MILLIMETERS)
20 ZIRCONIUM 0.8
0.6
TUNGSTEN URANIUM
EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF PENETRATION (INCHES)

10 0.4
LEAD 0.3
MAGNESIUM
5 0.2
ALUMINUM ALLOY
0.1
2 GOLD 0.08
0.06
1 0.04
COPPER 0.03
0.5 0.02
PURE ALUMINUM
0.01
0.2 CAST STEEL 0.008
INGOT IRON 0.006
0.1 0.004
0.003
0.05 HIGH ALLOY STEEL 0.002
0.001
0.02 0.0008
0.0006
0.01 0.0004
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10000
FREQUENCY (KHz)
EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF PENETRATION

THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF PENETRATION
IS THE POINT IN THE MATERIAL WHERE THE
EDDY CURRENT STRENGTH HAS DECREASED
TO 37% OF THE STRENGTH AT THE SURFACE
CONDUCTIVITY OF USUAL MATERIALS IN % IACS

THE FORMULA TO CALCULATE IT IS:
SILVER 105 ZINC 29
= 50 x f MILLIMETERS COPPER 100 BRASS(Cu−Zn) 30% Zn 28
GOLD 75 LEADED BRASS 12 − 25
= STANDARD DEPTH ALUMINUM 65 MAGNESIUM BRONZE 24
OF PENETRATION BRASS(Cu−Zn) 5% Zn 55 BERYLLIUM COPPER 24
/ m) = 172.41
= RESISTIVITY ( CAST ALUMINUM ALLOYS 25 − 40 PLATINUM 17
% IACS MAGNESIUM 39 LEAD 8.5
f = FREQUENCY (Hz) BRASS(Cu−Zn) 15% Zn 37 ZIRCONIUM 3.8
MOLYBDENUM 33 URANIUM 2.8
= PERMEABILITY TUNGSTEN 32 TITANIUM 2.3
L_NT_516000_1_0050101_01_00
Figure 51-60-00-991-005-A SHEET 01 - Effective Page 7

Depth of Penetration and Conductivity of 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Common Materials Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
Cu = 58 MS / m = 100% IACS
IACS = International Annealed Copper Standard
100 58
(% IACS) (MS / m) 50 29
55
49
90
48 28
50
47
27
80 46
45 (% IACS) (MS / m)
45 26
44
70 40 25
43
42
24
60 35 41
40
23
39
30
50 38 22
37
25 21
36
40
35
20
20 34
30 33 19
15 32
31 18
20 30
10 17
29
28
10 16
5 27
26 15
0 0 25 14.5
L_NT_516000_1_0060101_01_00

Conductivity Conversion Diagram 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Production of Eddy Currents for Practical Applications
A. When coil wound around a ferrite core is subjected to an alternating current, an electromagnetic alternating
field is produced. When this coil system is placed in contact with (or near to) the surface of an electrically
conductive material, eddy currents are produced within that material.
B. At any position within the central area of the material (away from edges and discontinuities) the distribution
of eddy currents is constant (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-007-A, Position 1).
C. At, or near to, an edge or over a discontinuity (e.g. a crack), the eddy current distribution is disturbed (See
FIGURE 51-60-00-991-007-A, Position 2).
D. An additional measuring coil can be wound around the ferrite core of the exciter coil. This is used to give
information about the eddy current reaction within the material.
E. These principles of eddy current production provide the basis for all inspections using this method.
Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
POSITION 1 SHOWS THE PROBE IN AN

AREA WITHOUT DISCONTINUITIES AND
AWAY FROM EDGES. THE DISTRIBUTION
OF EDDY CURRENTS IS CONSTANT.
POSITION 1 POSITION 2 SHOWS THE PROBE IN TWO

DIFFERENT LOCATIONS:
− IN AN AREA WITH A DISCONTINUITY, AND
ALTERNATING ALTERNATING − IN AN AREA NEAR TO AN EDGE.
CURRENT MAGNETIC FIELD THE DISTRIBUTION OF EDDY CURRENTS
IS DISTURBED.
POSITION 2
DRIVER COIL
V V
EDDY CURRENTS
EDGE EFFECT
MEASURING
COIL
DISCONTINUITY ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE

e.g. CRACK MATERIAL
L_NT_516000_1_0070101_01_00
Figure 51-60-00-991-007-A SHEET 01 - The Page 10

Effect of Discontinuities and Edges on the 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Distribution of Eddy Currents Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Eddy Current Equipment
A. All eddy current systems have common features which are derived from physics. It is therefore possible to
divide an eddy current system into basic units of equipment:
(1) A generator drives a coil system (probe). The coil system measures the discontinuity and gives a signal.
An evaluation unit makes an analysis of the signal. The result is shown on a display unit (See FIGURE
51-60-00-991-008-A).
B. The coil system (probe), together with the generator forms a vibration system, the properties of which are
influenced by the environment of the coil system. The influences consist of changes of conductivity and
permeability at locations adjacent to the probe system. Cracks and reduced or increased component
thicknesses, for example, are local conductivity changes. This will determine the impedance behavior of the
coil system and affect the phase relationships between voltage and current and their amplitude ratios.
C. For most inspections, it is sufficient for the evaluation unit to display only the amplitude of the measuring
system (See 51-60-00-003-A, Figure 51-06-00-007). For these inspections equipment can be used which has a
meter display for measuring the amplitude of the eddy current signals.
D. It is often not sufficient to measure only the amplitude. For some inspections the evaluation unit must also
assess the phase changes of the eddy current signals (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-009-A). For these inspections
equipment with a visual display (cathode ray tube) is used for the representation of phase and amplitude
(impedance plane representation).
E. The use of impedance plane methods requires a knowledge of the following parameters which influence the
eddy current field:
- conductivity,
- frequency,
- the distance between the coil and the test part,
- permeability,
- geometry,
- edge effect.
Each parameter has a different direction of indication on the impedance plane. The influence of conductivity,
permeability, frequency, coil radius and distance effect on the impedance plane, see FIGURE
51-60-00-991-010-A. Typical eddy current equipment (for measuring amplitude and phase changes) has
components, see FIGURE 51-60-00-991-011-A.
Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EVALUATION DISPLAY
GENERATOR
UNIT UNIT
PROBE
TEST PART
L_NT_516000_1_0080101_01_00

Current Measuring System 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EVALUATION UNIT SUPPLIES

AMPLITUDE
PHASE
EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT

WITH METER DISPLAY WITH VISUAL DISPLAY (CRT)
(AMPLITUDE REPRESENTATION) (IMPEDANCE PLANE REPRESENTATION)
L_NT_516000_1_0090101_01_00

Current Equipment with Amplitude/Impedance 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Plane Representation Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
1.0
cmR =
1.73
0.9
s=
2.90
0.3810
0.8 CALCULATED VALUES
L
Lo MEASURED VALUES
4.98
R2 = CONSTANT
INDUCTANCE
0.7 0.1905
8.56
0.0952
0.6
18.0
0.0476
29.0
0.5
0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20
RESISTANCE R
Lo
R = COIL RADIUS
S = LIFT OFF
= RADIAN FREQUENCY
R = PERMEABILITY
S
= CONDUCTIVITY
L = INDUCTANCE
L_NT_516000_1_0100101_01_00
Figure 51-60-00-991-010-A SHEET 01 - The Page 14

Influence of Conductivity, Permeability 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Frequency, Coil Radius and Distance Effect on Revision n˚: 79
the Impedance Plane
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
X X
COMPENSATION FILTER FOR
DISPLAY AND
OSCILLATOR AND SIGNAL ROTATING
EVALUATION
ROTATION SYSTEMS
Y Y
CONSTANT RECEIVER, AMPLIFIER DEMODULATOR FOR

CURRENT WITH IMPEDANCE AMPLITUDE AND
TRANSMITTER MATCHING PHASE SEPARATION
EDDY CURRENT PROBE
TEST PART
L_NT_516000_1_0110101_01_00
Figure 51-60-00-991-011-A SHEET 01 - Block Page 15

Diagram of an Eddy Current System 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Eddy Current Probes
A. To inspect a component, a probe adapted to the inspection task is required. In principle there are two types
of probe:
(1) An Absolute Probe System
(a) In its simplest form this has a ferrite core around which a coil is wound. This acts as an exciter
and a measuring winding. It is also possible to have a separate exciter coil (field coil) and receiver
coil (measuring coil) in this system. This probe system is used for corrosion measurement,
conductivity measurement, layer thickness measurement and surface crack inspections.
(2) A Differential Probe System
(a) In its simplest form this consists of two ferrite cores which are surrounded by a common field
winding. Each core has a separate counterwound measuring coil. When this arrangement of coils
is used to inspect an area which is uniformly good or has a discontinuity which extends under
both coils, the resulting measuring signal is zero. If a discontinuity occurs under only one coil, the
two coils are out of balance with each other and a measuring signal is generated.
(3) Both of the above probe systems can be made into multi-coil systems with various field and measuring
coils. This depends on the set-up and type of wiring. For example, a four-pole coil with a centrally
located transmitter coil and four receiver coils located around the transmitter coil can be used to
inspect riveted joints. Examples of different types of probe coil windings, see FIGURE
51-60-00-991-013-A and FIGURE 51-60-00-991-014-A.
(4) Special probes can be used to inspect the bores of holes. These are usually differential coil probes which
are rotated by a motor at a constant speed to scan the bore of the hole. Hand-rotated absolute probes
can be used as an alternative.
(5) Special probes may be necessary for some inspections to counteract the effects caused by changes in
the profile or the edges of the inspection area. The probe can have the same shape as the inspection
area or a special probe holder can be used to hold the probe in a controlled position.
(6) Probe guides can be used if it is necessary to maintain a constant scanning path during the inspection.
For example, a draftman’s template can be used to scan around rivet heads or a non-conductive
straight edge can be used to scan in a straight line.
Page 16
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
ABSOLUTE PROBES
1 COIL SYSTEM
THE TRANSMITTER IS
ALSO THE RECEIVER
MEASURING COIL
AND
2 COIL SYSTEM
THIS HAS A TRANSMITTER
AND A RECEIVER
MEASURING COIL
DIFFERENTIAL PROBE
THE TWO CORES HAVE THE SAME

FIELD WINDING. EACH CORE HAS
A COUNTERWOUND MEASURING COIL.
THESE ARE CONNECTED IN SERIES.
MEASURING COIL
L_NT_516000_1_0130101_01_00

Examples of Coil Windings for Eddy Current 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Probes Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FOUR−POLE PROBE
MEASURING COIL
A TEST PART
ROTARY PROBE
MEASURING COIL
ROTARY HEAD
A
L_NT_516000_1_0140101_01_00

Examples of Coil Windings for Special 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Differential Probes Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Calibration Block
A. Before using the eddy current method to inspect a part for its condition or for discontinuities, the condition
or discontinuities which are sought must be defined. As for any other measuring method, the eddy current
method requires a reference as a block. All deviations from this block, within a specified tolerance, will then
be considered as unacceptable.
B. For different inspections, different calibration blocks and adjusting blocks are required for this measurement
comparison. These calibration blocks can also be used for functional checking of the test equipment.
C. As a general rule, the simulated discontinuity in a block must be as representative of a real discontinuity as is
possible. When testing for cracks, for example, a saw cut will have a different effect on eddy current
distribution than a natural fatigue crack. For practical purposes, however, it is often not possible to produce a
calibration block with natural discontinuities. Therefore, the choice of calibration block is very important for
the assessment of the discontinuity. Different types of blocks are given below:
(1) Calibration Block for the Inspection of Surface-Breaking Cracks
(a) A calibration block with eroded surface slots of different depths can be used. The material
specification of the block must be similar to the material specification of the part to be inspected.
The widths of the eroded slots are 0.2 mm (0.008 in), the depths of the slots are 0.2 mm (0.008
in), 0.5 mm (0.020 in) and 1 mm (0.039 in). An example of a calibration block to calibrate for
surface crack inspections is shown in FIGURE 51-60-00-991-015-A.
(2) Calibration Block for the Inspection of Holes
(a) A calibration block for the inspection of holes must be made from the similar material as the part
to be inspected. It must have the same thickness as the part.
(b) For each hole to be inspected, there must be two holes of the same diameter and quality in the
block. One hole must have no discontinuities, the other must have a continuous eroded slot. The
width of the slot must be a maximum of 0.2 mm (0.008 in). The depth of the slot must be
approximately 0.5 mm (0.020 in). An example of a block for the inspection of holes is shown in
FIGURE 51-60-00-991-016-A.
(3) Calibration Block to Inspect for and Evaluate Corrosion
(a) A calibration block to inspect for and evaluate corrosion must be made of the same material as
the part to be inspected and must have the same thickness.
(b) The calibration block should have areas of reduced thickness, e.g. 5%, 10%, 15% and 20% of the
nominal material thickness. These depend on the depth of material reduction to be measured. An
example of a block to inspect for and evaluate corrosion is shown in FIGURE 51-60-00-991-017-
A.
(4) Calibration Block for Coating Thickness Measurement
(a) A calibration block for coating thickness measurement must be made from the same material as
the basic unpainted material of the inspection area. Two or more foils with similar material
properties to the coating to be measured must be supplied with the block. These foils should have
different thicknesses which are within the measurement range. This is to permit the calibration of
the equipment.
(5) Calibration Block for Conductivity Measurement
(a) Basic calibration blocks to measure conductivity are usually supplied with the equipment. For
special applications it may be necessary to produce special blocks. These must be within the
required measurement range.
Page 19
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(6) Calibration Block for Special Applications
(a) For some special inspections, a calibration/reference block must be made which represents the
part to be inspected. This type of block must be made from the same materials and to the same
construction blocks as the part to be inspected. The block must contain representative
discontinuities in the areas where discontinuities are likely to occur in the real structure.
Page 20
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SLOT A B C
mm in mm in mm in ELECTRO EROSION SLOTS
DEPTH 0.2 0.008 0.5 0.02 1 0.039
WIDTH 0.2 0.008 0.2 0.008 0.2 0.008
C
TOLERANCES: DAN 11304 B
7 mm A
(0.276 in)
80 mm
(3.15 in)
35 mm
(1.378 in)
L_NT_516000_1_0150101_01_00

of a Calibration Block to Calibrate for Surface 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Crack Inspections Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HOLE WITH NO SLOT
SLOT
X
HOLE WITH A
SPARK EROSION SLOT
NOTE:
THE WIDTH OF THE SLOT MUST BE A MAXIMUM OF 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
THE DEPTH OF THE SLOT MUST BE APPROXIMATELY 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
THE DIAMETER OF THE ROTATING PROBE MUST BE 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

SMALLER THAN THE DIAMETER OF THE HOLE TO BE INSPECTED.
THE MATERIAL OF THE CALIBRATION BLOCK MUST BE SIMILAR TO

THE MATERIAL OF THE TEST PART.
THE THICKNESS (D) OF THE CALIBRATION BLOCK MUST BE THE SAME

AS THE THICKNESS OF THE TEST PART.
THE DIAMETER (X) OF THE HOLES MUST BE THE SAME AS THE

DIAMETER OF THE HOLES IN THE TEST PART.
L_NT_516000_1_0160101_01_01

of a Calibration Block for the Inspection of Holes 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
REDUCTION
FROM D
5% 10% 15% 20%
A A
REDUCED SKIN THICKNESS

20 mm
(0.79 in)
5% 10% 15% 20%
A A
150 mm
(5.906 in)
20 mm
(0.79 in)
50 mm 3 x 50 mm
(1.969 in) (3 x 1.969 in)
250 mm
(9.843 in)
NOTE: BOTH AXES OF THE REBATES MUST BE GREATER THAN THE PROBE DIAMETER.
L_NT_516000_1_0170101_01_00

of a Calibration Block to Inspect for and 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Evaluate Corrosion Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Applications of Eddy Current Equipment
A. The Eddy current equipment consists of:
- a suitable eddy current test instrument,
- an eddy current probe applicable to the inspection task,
- a calibration/reference block applicable to the inspection task.
The examples which follow show typical applications of eddy current equipment for in-service aircraft
inspections.
B. Inspection for Surface Cracks (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-018-A)
(1) The following test system is most suited to inspected for surface breaking cracks.
(a) Test Instrument
1 High-frequency eddy current equipment (HF-EC), with meter display (amplitude only).
(b) Eddy Current Probe
1 An absolute probe, the selection of which is dependent on the material to be tested (Fe,
NFe etc.). Shielded probes may be used for some special applications. They are used to
compensate for the effect from adjacent materials with different specification (rivets, bolts
etc.).
(c) Calibration Block
1 For Calibration Block, see 51-60-00-006-A, Figure 51-60-00-015, with similar material
specification to the inspection area.
C. Inspection for Cracks in Concealed Areas
(1) The equipment which follows may be used to inspect for cracks which are below the surface and cracks
which are in deeper structural areas.
(a) Test Instrument
1 Low-frequency eddy current equipment (LF-EC), with greater depth of penetration and
impedance plane presentation (Screen display).
1 Differential or absolute probe applicable to the inspection task.
1 Reference block applicable to the component structure to be tested. It must have slots of
the area of expected cracks. The slots must represent the length and direction of possible
cracks. The slots must have a maximum width of 0.2 mm (0.008 in).
(2) FIGURE 51-60-00-991-019-A shows a typical inspection for cracks in deep structure. This example is
the second layer of a fuselage skin joint.
D. Inspection for Cracks in Holes (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-020-A)
(1) To inspect holes for cracks which break through the surface of the bore, the following equipment is
preferred.
(a) Test Instrument
1 HF-EC equipment with screen display, designed for dynamic eddy current testing and using
a synchronous rotary probe driver.
Page 24
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
1 Special differential coil rotating probe. The probe diameter is 0.1 mm (0.004 in) less than
the diameter of the hole to be inspected.
1 For Calibration Block for the inspection of holes, see 51-60-00-006-A, Figure 51-60-00-016.
(2) Holes can be inspected with this procedure only if the fasteners (bolts, rivets, pins etc.) are removed.
FIGURE 51-60-00-991-020-A shows an example of an inspection of holes using a dynamic rotating
probe test system.
(3) The countersink area of fastener holes can also be inspected using this procedure. This is done using a
suitably contoured rotating probe.
(4) The inspection of holes and countersink areas can also be done using HF-EC equipment with hand-
rotated absolute probes.
(5) These inspections can be done in single or multiple-layer structures.
E. Corrosion Inspection and Evaluation (See FIGURE 51-60-00-991-021-A)
(1) The following equipment may be used to inspect for and evaluate corrosion on the inner surface of
sheet materials.
(a) Test Instrument
1 LF-EC equipment with greater depth of penetration and impedance plane presentation
(Screen display).
1 Special absolute probe adapted to the inspection task.
1 For Calibration Block to inspect for and evaluate corrosion, see 51-60-00-006-A, Figure
51-60-00-017. The material specification and nominal thickness must be similar to the
structure to be inspected.
(2) FIGURE 51-60-00-991-021-A shows the basic principle of corrosion inspection.
Page 25
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
HIGH FREQUENCY EDDY CURRENT

TEST INSTRUMENT WITH METER
PRESENTATION (AMPLITUDE)
CALIBRATION BLOCK
CRACKS
ABSOLUTE
PROBE
DRAFTMAN’S
CIRCLE TEMPLATES
L_NT_516000_1_0180101_01_01

of an Inspection for Surface Cracks 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6 SCALE DIVISIONS
WITHOUT CRACK
SINGLE − SIDED SAWCUT A

6 mm (0.236 in) WITH CRACK
LOW FREQUENCY EDDY

CURRENT TEST INSTRUMENT
WITH SCREEN DISPLAY
(PHASE AND AMPLITUDE)
REFERENCE BLOCK PROBE GUIDE
PROBE A
CENTER MARK
EXTERNAL
SKIN DIFFERENTIAL PROBE
(FOUR−POLE PROBE)
PROBE
GUIDE
RIVET
ROW 1
INTERNAL
SKIN
INSPECTION
DIRECTION
RIVET
ROW 1
SIMULATED CRACKS
(SAWCUTS) FATIGUE
CRACKS
STRINGER EXTERNAL SKIN

PROBE GUIDE
AREA TO BE INSPECTED RIVET ROW 1

L_NT_516000_1_0190101_01_01
Figure 51-60-00-991-019-A SHEET 01 - An Page 27

Example of an Inspection for Cracks in Deep 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
100% 100%
75% 75%
50% 50%
25% 25%
0% 0%
0° 90° 180° 270° 360° 0° 90° 180° 270° 360°

INDICATION FROM INDICATION FROM A
A HOLE WITH A CRACK A HOLE WITH NO CRACK
HOLE WITH
NO SLOT
ROTARY PROBE
SLOT
HIGH FREQUENCY
A
EDDY CURRENT
INSTRUMENT WITH
SYNCHRONOUS
SCREEN DISPLAY
MOTOR UNIT TO
ROTATE THE PROBE CALIBRATION
BLOCK
CRACK
L_NT_516000_1_0200101_01_01

Example of an Inspection for Cracks in Holes 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
AN INDICATION FROM AN AREA AN INDICATION FROM AN AREA

WITH CORROSION WITH NO CORROSION
A
INSPECTION AREA
LOW FREQUENCY EDDY CURRENT CORROSION

TEST INSTRUMENT WITH SCREEN
DISPLAY (PHASE AND AMPLITUDE) DOUBLER
OUTER SKIN
A A
CALIBRATION BLOCK
A A
L_NT_516000_1_0210101_01_01

Example of an Inspection for Corrosion 51-60-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Instrument Specifications
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic Eddy Current NDT Equipment commonly used in AIRBUS NDT
Procedures.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - High Frequency Instruments
(1) Any Meter Display High Frequency Eddy Current unit having the general specification as shown in
TABLE 1 may be used:
Frequency Range 200 KHz to 6 MHz, preferred

Lift Off Compensation Required
Zero Adjustment Required
Continuous Auto Zero Balance Not Required
Remote Control/Display Optional
Basic Specification of HFEC Instruments
c
TABLE 1
(2) With the equipment calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and using the
Calibration Block illustrated in 51-63-01-001-A the following response must be attained:
- 100% meter needle deflection from the 0.2 mm (0.008 in) slot, when using a matching Standard
High Frequency Probe.
(1) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT LOCATOR (TYPEUH)
(2) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT LOCATOR (TYPEUHB)
(3) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT DEFECTOMETER (H2-835)
(4) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT DEFECTOMETER (H2-836)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Low Frequency Instruments
(1) Any Low Frequency Eddy Current unit having the general specification as shown in TABLE 1 may be
used:
Impedance Plane Display Necessary
Frequency Range Variable, must have min. 100Hz
Lift Off Compensation Must have manual capability
Zero Adjustment Must have manual capability
Zero Compensation Manual or Electronic
Phase Angle Adjustable 0 - 360˚
Filter Options Low Pass and High Pass
X-Y Gain Variable
Y Gain Variable Independant of X-Y
Probe Capability Absolute, Differential, Bridge, Reflectance
Variable Alarm Threshold Preferred
Basic Specification of LFEC Instruments
c
TABLE 1
(1) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT (AV100)
(2) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT (AV100L)
(3) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (B1)
(4) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT ELOTEST (B2)
(5) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT DEFECTOSCOPE (SD2-832)
(6) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT (NDT19E)
(7) EDDY CURRENT EQUIPMENT (NDT19EII)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Rotating Probe Instruments
(1) Any Rotating Probe Eddy Current unit having the general specification as shown in TABLE 1 may be
used:
Frequency Range 100 KHz to 600 KHz (preferred)
Gain 10 to 60 dB (in 1 dB steps)
Phase Rotation 0 - 360˚
Filter High Pass
Modes Impedance Plane Display with X-Y, Y-T display
modes
Probe Rotation Speed 2000 RPM minimum
General Specification of Rotating Probe Instruments
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : Equipment with lower rotating speed may be used provided that it meets the requirements of
the specific or general procedure.
(2) With the equipment calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and using the
Aluminum Alloy Calibration Blocks illustrated in 51-63-04-001-A, 51-63-05-001-A or 51-63-06-001-A
and an appropriate diameter rotating probe, the following response must be attained:
- A clear 100% Full Screen Height signal, above the Zero Datum, from a 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) corner
slot, with a signal to noise ratio equal to or, better than, 2 to 1.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Coating Thickness Measurement Instruments
(1) Any Eddy Current Coating Thickness measuring equipment, designed to measure non-conductive layers
on conductive nonmagnetic substrates (For instance, paint over aluminum alloys, titanium etc.), may be
used:
- Measurement range required : 0 to 1000 µm
NOTE : Some equipment can also measure nonconductive coatings over ferrous substrates although its
use for coatings below 25 mm (0.984 in) is not recommended and magnetic equipment should
be used.
- Measurement range required : 0 to 1000 µm
NOTE : Some equipment can also measure thickness of nickel coating over magnetic and nonmagnetic
substrates.
(2) Any foil set, made from non-conductive plastic may be used in junction with an eddy current type
instrument and any foil set, made from nonmagnetic material may be used in junction with a magnetic
type instrument.
- Indicated thickness range required: 10 to 300 µm
NOTE : For thicknesses greater than 300 µm, several layers of foil can be used.
(1) COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT (MINITEST2100) with print-out facility,
using universal probe PROBE (FN2) (Ferrous/nonferrous materials)
- Range: 0 - 2000 µm
NOTE : Any instrument in the MINITEST range (eg: COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
EQUIPMENT (MINITEST3000), COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT
(MINITEST4100) etc.) may be used provided that it satisfies the requirements of the relevant
inspection procedure.
(2) DUALSCOPE (MP40), using Probe PROBE (ETA3-3)
- Range: 0 - 1200 µm
NOTE : The DUALSCOPE (MP40) can be used for measuring paint thickness on ferrous metals (e.g.
steel, iron) in the magnetic induction mode, using the probe PROBE (EGA1-3-150)which has a
range of 0 - 2000 µm.
(3) COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT ISOSCOPE (MPO) with integral probe
- Range: 0 - 1500 µm
(4) COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT POSITECTOR (TYPE3000) with integral
probe
- Range: 0 - 1500 µm
C. Typical Plastic Foil Set
(1) PLASTIC FOIL SET (MIN7), this set consists of 7 sheets of foil, 10 - 300 µm in thickness and a size of
30 mm x 50 mm (1.18 in x 1.97 in)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Probe Specification
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic Eddy Current Probes commonly used in AIRBUS NDT
Procedures.
(2) Alternative Probes, from other Suppliers, may be used provided that they comply with the basic
specification and are compatible with the instrument being used.
NOTE : Probe Suppliers are not listed. Probes would normally be purchased from the appropriate
instrument supplier (See 51-61-00-001-A).
NOTE : Low Frequency Eddy Current Probes are not included in this Chapter as they cannot be
generally classified but are specifically related to an individual inspection task.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Standard High Frequency Probes
Nominal Operating Frequency Material dependent

Connector Type As required for instrument compatibility
Probe Handle Geometry and Dimensions are open
Identification Probe bodies are to be marked to include the following information:-
Nominal Frequency- Unshielded or Shielded- Material compatibility e.g.
NFe
Sensitivity All probes, in combination with the HFEC instrument used, must have
sufficient sensitivity to detect the 0.2 mm (0.008 in) slot in the
Calibration Block (See 51-63-01-001-A) with a 100% full meter/screen
indication and a signal to noise ratio of greater than 26dB - i.e. noise
less than 5% indicated.
Basic Probe Specification
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : Specific sensitivity requirements, for a particular inspection task, will be indicated in the related NTM
Task, where necessary.
NOTE : Surface inspection probes must not be over sensitive to pressure on the tip.
NOTE : Surface inspection probes with rounded tips are preferred.

B. Basic Probe Set
NOTE : The probes listed are a standard set for the use in the majority of HFEC Procedures. Some Procedures
in the specific NTM Tasks will require the use of special probes or probe adaptors, this will be
indicated, where necessary, in the specific Tasks.
(1) PROBE TYPE A : STRAIGHT - UNSHIELDED (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail A)
(2) PROBE TYPE B : STRAIGHT - SHIELDED (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail B)
(3) PROBE TYPE C : 45˚ ANGLE TIP - SHIELDED (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail C)
(4) PROBE TYPE D : KNIFE - UNSHIELDED (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail D)
(5) PROBE TYPE E : 90˚ ANGLE TIP - SHIELDED (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail E)
(6) PROBE TYPE F : BOLT HOLE PROBE - MANUAL (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail F)
(7) PROBE TYPE G : PENCIL 90˚/30˚ - SHIELDED (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A, Detail G)
(8) PROBE TYPE H : 15˚ CRANK PROBE WITH 90˚ ANGLE TIP (See FIGURE 51-62-01-991-001-A,
Detail H)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
STRAIGHT − UNSHIELDED
15 − 20 mm
(0.591 − 0.787 in)
PROBE TIP DIA − 4.5 mm (0.177 in) PREFERRED

(DIMENSION NOT CRITICAL)
STRAIGHT − SHIELDED
25 − 35mm
(0.984 − 1.378 in)
PROBE TIP DIA − 3.5 mm (0.138 in) TYPICAL

(UP TO MAX 4.0 mm (0.157 in))
45° ANGLED TIP SHIELDED
15 − 25 mm
(0.591 − 0.984 in)
C 13 − 17 mm
(0.512 − 0.669 in)
PROBE TIP DIA − 3.5 mm (0.138 in)TYPICAL

(UP TO MAX 4.0 mm (0.157 in))
L_NT_516201_1_0010101_01_00

High Frequency Eddy Current Probe Set 51-62-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
KNIFE − UNSHIELDED
MAX 4 mm
(0.157 in)
90° ANGLED TIP SHIELDED
6 − 25 mm
E (0.236 − 0.984 in)
50 − 300 mm
(0.197 − 11.81 in)
PROBE TIP DIA − 3.5 mm (0.138 in)TYPICAL
HOLE PROBE MANUAL (EXPANDABLE)
DIA AS REQUIRED
F
L_NT_516201_1_0010102_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PENCIL 90/30° SHIELDED
9 − 13 mm
(0.354 − 0.512 in)
2.5 mm DIA
(0.098 in)
30 − 80 mm
(1.181 − 3.149 in)
30°
FREQUENCY : RANGE 2 KHZ

PROBE CONFIGURATION : ABSOLUTE
TEST MATERIAL : CONDUCTIVITY RANGE 4.5 − 56 MS/m
APPLICATION : DETECTION OF DISCONTINUITIES OPEN
TO SURFACE ON CONDUCTIVITY MATERIALS
CHARACTERISTICS : SMALL COIL SIZE
: HIGHT FLAW RESOLUTION
: SMALL EDGE EFFECT
15° CRANK PROBE WITH 90° ANGLE TIP
114 − 203 mm
(4.488 − 7.992 in)
28 − 117 mm 86 mm
(1.102 − 4.606 in) (3.386 in)
2.34 − 4.45 mm 9.5 mm DIA

(0.092 − 0.175 in) (0.374 in)
6 − 25 mm
(0.236 − 0.984 in)
L_NT_516201_1_0010103_01_00

Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for Parallel Bore Hole Inspection
(1) The basic configuration, shape and dimensions of the probes are shown in FIGURE 51-62-02-991-001-A.
Working Frequency of Probe 300-500 KHz

Probe Revolution Speed 2000-3000 RPM
Probe Diameter The nominal probe diameter for a particular inspection task will
be specified in each related Specific Procedure
Concentric Running Running eccentricity must not exceed 0.06 mm (0.002 in)
Sensitivity Using the CALIBRATION BLOCK SET (99D57004000000) (See
51-63-03-001-A) and an appropriate diameter rotating probe, the
following must be attained:
A clear 100% Full Screen Height signal, above the Zero Datum,
from a 0.15 mm (0.006 in) corner slot, with a signal to noise
ratio equal to, or better than, 2 to 1.
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : Specific sensitivity requirements, for a particular inspection task, will be indicated in the related
Tasks in the NTM, where necessary.
CAUTION : WHEN USING EXPANDABLE/SPREADABLE PROBES ENSURE, THAT THE DEMAND FOR
THE SENSITIVITY FULLFILLS THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SPECIFICATION. PAY
SPECIAL ATTENTION TO THE SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO OF 2 TO 1.
(2) Different Probe Types (See TABLE 2)
Probe Type Fixed or expandable/spreadable Rotating Probes with a coil

diameter of 1 mm (0.039 in)
Rotor Type The type of Rotor drive to be used, ROTOR UNIT -
STANDARD (SR1MF) or ROTOR UNIT - MINI (MR3MF) will
be specified in each related NTM Task, depending on the access
requirements
Probe Types
c
TABLE 2
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
L ROTOR HEAD CONNECTOR

DIA A S = 5 mm MAX
(0.197 in)
5 mm MIN COIL (DIA 1 mm (0.039 in))

(0.197 in)
S = DISTANCE BETWEEN THE COIL AND THE END OF THE SHAFT

A = NOMINAL PROBE DIAMETER (TOLERANCE: + 0.00 / − 0.05 mm (+ 0.00 / − 0.002 in))
L = NOMINAL PROBE LENGTH:
FOR DIAMETER ’A’ FROM 3.5 TO 7 mm (0.138 TO 0.276 in)
L = 30 − 40 mm (1.181 − 1.575 in)
FOR DIAMETER ’A’ FROM 7 TO 25 mm (0.276 TO 0.984 in)
L = 45 − 55 mm (1.772 − 2.165 in)
NOTE: CONNECTOR PLUG CONTACTS MUST BE GOLD PLATED

THIS SPECIFICATION IS VALID FOR STANDARD PROBE DIAMETERS
FROM 3.5 TO 20 mm (0.138 TO 0.787 in)
L_NT_516202_1_0010101_01_00

Configuration and Dimensions of Rotating 51-62-02-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Probes for Parallel Bore Inspection Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for the Inspection of Countersinks
(1) The basic configuration, shape and dimensions of the probes are shown in FIGURE 51-62-03-991-001-A.
Working Frequency of 300-500 KHz

Probe
Probe Diameter The nominal probe diameter for a particular inspection task will be
specified in each related Specific Procedure
Sensitivity Using Aluminum Alloy Reference Block containing countersunk holes,
and an appropriate diameter rotating probe, the following response must
be attained:
A clear 100% Full Screen Height signal, above the Zero Datum, from a
0.2 mm (0.008 in) slot in the countersink, with a signal to noise ratio
equal to, or better than, 2 to 1
Rotor Type The type of Rotor drive to be used, ROTOR UNIT - STANDARD
(SR1MF) or ROTOR UNIT - MINI (MR3MF) will be specified in each
related NTM Task, depending on the access requirements
c
TABLE 1
NOTE : Specific sensitivity requirements, for a particular inspection task, will be indicated in the related
NTM Task.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
DIA WORKING RANGE

(mm)
DIA 12 mm
COIL (0.472 in)
A 99° + 30´ 4.8 − 8.0
30 mm
(1.181 in) ROTOR HEAD
CONNECTOR
COUNTERSINK COUNTERSINK
ROTATING DIAMETER IN A IN
PROBE−TYPE mm in mm in
1 4.8 − 8 0.189 − 0.315 20 0.787
2 7.5 − 9.5 0.295 − 0.374 20 0.787
3 9 − 11.1 0.354 − 0.437 25 0.984
4 11 − 12.7 0.433 − 0.5 28 1.102
5 12.5 − 14.3 0.492 − 0.563 30 1.181
L: NOMINAL PROBE LENGTH: 45 TO 55 mm (1.772 TO 2.165 in)
NOTE: CONNECTOR PLUG CONTACTS MUST BE GOLD PLATED

THIS SPECIFICATION IS VALID FOR PROBES USED TO
INSPECT COUNTERSINKS FROM 4.8 TO 14.3 mm (0.189 TO 2.165 in)
DIAMETER, WITH 100° COUNTERSINKS.
L_NT_516203_1_0010101_01_00

Probes for Countersink Inspection Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Standard Rotating Probes for Flat Bottom Hole Inspection
(1) A. The basic configuration, shape and dimensions of the probes are shown in FIGURE
51-62-04-991-001-A.
Working Frequency of Probe 300-500 KHz
Probe Type Fixed or expandable/spreadable rotating probes with a coil
diameter of 1 mm (0.039 in)
Probe Diameter The nominal probe diameter for a particular inspection task will
be specified in each Specific Procedure. The probe diameter must
be approximately 0.1 mm (0.004 in) less than the diameter of the
hole to be inspected.
Probe Sensitivity When an adjustment in accordance to the Rotating Probe
Inspection of flat bottom holes (See TASK 51-10-18-250-801-
A01), the signal from a 1 mm (0.039 in) x 45˚ slot must have a
height of ≥ 75% of FSH
Adjustment Specific sensitivity requirements, for a particular inspection task,
will be indicated in the specific procedures, where necessary
Rotor Type The type of Rotor drive to be used, ROTOR UNIT - STANDARD
(SR1MF) or ROTOR UNIT - MINI (MR3MF) will be specified in
each related Task, depending on the access requirements
c
TABLE 1
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
ROTOR HEAD
CONNECTOR
5 mm MIN
(0.197 in)
COIL
DIA A
A A
L
ANGLE OF COIL: 30 − 45°
COIL DIAMETER 1 mm
(0.039 in)
S = 0.6 − 0.8 mm
(0.024 − 0.031 in)
A A
S = DISTANCE BETWEEN THE COIL AND THE END OF THE SHAFT

A = NOMINAL PROBE DIAMETER (TOLERANCE: 0 / − 0.05 mm (− 0.0019 in))
L= NOMINAL PROBE LENGTH: FOR DIAMETER ’A’ FROM 3.5 TO 7 mm (0.138 TO 0.276 in)
L = 30 − 40 mm (1.181 − 1.575 in)
FOR DIAMETER ’A’ FROM 7.1 TO 25 mm (0.28 TO 0.984 in)
L = 45 − 55 mm (1.772 − 2.165 in)
NOTE: CONNECTOR PLUG CONTACTS MUST BE GOLD PLATED.

THIS SPECIFICATION IS VALID FOR STANDARD PROBE DIAMETERS
FROM 3.5 TO 25 mm (0.138 TO 0.984 in).
L_NT_516204_1_0010101_01_00

Probes for Flat Bottom Hole Inspection Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Eddy Current - Calibration/Reference Block Specifications
A. General
(1) This chapter provides details of Basic Eddy Current Calibration/Reference Block commonly used in
AIRBUS NDT Procedures.
(2) Operators may use alternative Calibration/Reference Blocks provided that they meet the requirements
of the general specification, as indicated under each heading.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Calibration Block
(1) Any calibration block, for use in surface crack detection, as given in SUB-DESCRIPTION and which
have dimensions similar to those shown in FIGURE 51-63-01-991-001-A and material specifications as
follows, may be used:
MATERIAL OF CALIBRATION BLOCK CONDUCTIVITY RANGE

Aluminum Alloy (NFe)<1> 15.0 - 25.0 MS/m
Titanium Alloy (Ti)<1> 0.5 - 0.7 MS/m
Stainless Steel (Austenitic) 1.3 - 1.4 MS/m
Steel (various) <2>
Material Specifications
TABLE 1
<1> Without any coating (e.g. cladding on Al-alloy)
<2> Depending on the material characteristics
c
B. Typical Calibration Blocks

(1) CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-501) (Steel)
(2) CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-164-551) (Aluminum)
(3) CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-835-01-9301) (Austenitic Stainless Steel)
(4) CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-835-01-9330) (Titanium)
(5) CALIBRATION BLOCK (29A028) (Steel)
(6) CALIBRATION BLOCK (29A029) (Aluminum - AlCuMg1))
(7) CALIBRATION BLOCK (29A032) (Titanium)
(8) CALIBRATION BLOCK (29A047) (Aluminum - 7075Al)
(9) CALIBRATION BLOCK (29A049) (Austenitic Stainless Steel)
(10) CALIBRATION BLOCK (29A120) (Magnesium)
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SLOT A B C ELECTRO−EROSION−SLOTS
DEPTH 0.2 mm 0.5 mm 1 mm

(0.008 in) (0.020 in) (0.039 in)
C
WIDTH 0.05 mm − 0.25 mm
(0.002 in) − (0.01 in)
B
TOLERANCE OF SLOTS: ±0.03 mm (0.001 in)

A
>
− 5 mm
>
− 2 mm (0.197 in)
(0.079 in)
>
− 10 mm
(0.394 in)
>
− 10 mm >
− 5 mm
(0.394 in) (0.197 in)
L_NT_516301_1_0010101_01_00

Calibration Block 51-63-01-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Calibration Block Set PN 99D57004000000
A. For the calibration block set PN 99D57004000000 see FIGURE 51-63-03-991-001-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SPECIMEN 1
PN99D57004000040
190.5 mm
171.45 mm (7.52 in)
133.35 mm (6.75 in)
(5.25 in)
95.25 mm
57.15 mm (3.75 in) 10 mm
(2.25 in) (0.394 in)
19.05 mm
(0.75 in)
19 18 16
20 17
133.35 mm REAM TO SIZES IN
11 12 13 14 15 TABLE BELOW
(5.25 in)
6 HOLES
152.4 mm A A DIA 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
(5.99 in) 95.25 mm 10 9 8 7
(3.75 in) 6
76.2 mm
57.15 mm (3 in) HOLE DIA
(2.25 in) NO. mm in
1 2 3 4 5
1 6.35 1/4
38 mm 2 6.75 17 / 64
19.05 mm (1.5 in) 10 mm 3 7.14 9 / 32
(0.75 in) 152 mm (0.394 in)
(5.98 in) 4 7.54 19 / 64
2 mm
5 7.94 5 / 16
(0.079 in)
6 8.33 21 / 64
7 8.73 11 / 32
8 9.13 23 / 64
9 9.53 3/8
12.7 mm 2 mm
(0.5 in) (0.079 in) 10 9.92 25 / 64
11 10.32 13 / 32
45° x 0.5 mm
(0.02 in) 12 10.72 27 / 64
13 11.11 7 / 16
LIMITS ON SLOT DIMENSIONS: 14 11.51 29 / 64
DIMENSION 15 11.91 15 / 32
0.5 ± 0.05 mm (0.02 ± 0.002 in) 16 12.3 31 / 64
0.15 ± 0.05 mm (0.006 ± 0.002 in)
17 12.7 1/2
WIDTH
45° x 0.15 mm 0.15 ± 0.03 mm (0.006 ± 0.001in) 18 13.1 33 / 64
(0.006 in)
MATERIAL: BS.L97 19 13.49 17 / 32
A A (US EQUIVALENT QQA250/4) 20 13.89 35 / 64
TYPICAL FOR ALL HOLES
L_NT_516303_1_0010101_01_02

Calibration Block Set PN 99D57004000000 51-63-03-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
SPECIMEN 1
PN99D57004000042
ALL DETAILS SECTIONS AND HOLE POSTIONS
ARE AS SHOWN ON SPECIMEN 1 REAM TO SIZES IN TABLE BELOW
( SEE SHEET 1 )
19 18 16
20 17
11 12 13 14 15
10 9 8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5
HOLE DIA HOLE DIA

NO. mm in NO. mm in
1 14.29 9 / 16 11 18.26 23 / 32
2 14.68 37 / 64 12 18.65 47 / 64
3 15.08 19 / 32 13 19.05 3/4
4 15.48 39 / 64 14 19.45 49 / 64
5 15.88 5/8 15 19.84 25 / 32
6 16.27 41 / 64 16 20.24 51 / 64
7 16.67 21 / 32 17 22.23 7/8
8 17.07 43 / 64 18 22.62 57 / 64
9 17.46 11 / 16 19 23.02 29 / 32
10 17.86 45 / 64 20 23.42 59 / 64
L_NT_516303_1_0010102_01_00

Calibration Block Set PN 99D57004000000 51-63-03-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Calibration Block PN 99A53003001000
A. For the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A53003001000) see FIGURE 51-63-04-991-001-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
TYPICAL SECTION AT LEVEL OF EACH LINE OF HOLES
POINTS DIMENSION DIAMETER

HOLES
2 1 SLOT: 1 mm (0.039 in) x 45°
mm in mm in SLOT DEPTH: 0.5 mm (0.019 in)
A1 32 1.26 12.7 0.5 SLOT: 0.2 mm (0.008 in) x 45°
POINT A
0.2 x 0.2
A2 49.5 1.949 11.9 0.468
TITANUM
1x1
A1
0.5
A3 66.5 2.618 11.5 0.453
A2 3 x 20 mm
DIA 12.7 1 (0.787 in)
A4 83 3.268 11.1 0.437 5 mm
3 (0.197 in) 13 mm
DIA 11.9 2 (0.512 in)
A5 99 3.899 10.3 0.405
98 mm
DIA 11.5 3 (3.858 in)
A6 114 4.488 9.9 0.389
DIA 11.1 4
A7 129 5.079 9.5 0.374
MARKING:
DIA 10.3 5
A8 143.5 5.65 8.7 0.342
DIA 9.9 6 STAMP DIMENSIONS
A9 157 6.181 8.3 0.327 1 0.2 x 0.2 / 0.5 / 1 x 1 AS SHOWN
DIA 9.5 7
275 mm A10 170 6.693 7.9 0.311 STAMP MATERIAL:
(10.826 in) DIA 8.7 8 2
’TITANIUM’ FOR 99A53003001100
A11 182.5 7.185 7.1 0.279 MATERIAL SPEC.: TA6V (OR TI6A14V OR AMS4911)
DIA 8.3 9
’ALUMINUM’ FOR 99A53003001101
DIA 7.9 10 A12 194.5 7.657 6.7 0.264 MATERIAL SPEC.: 2024T3 (AU4G1)
DIA 7.1 11 A13 206 8.11 6.4 0.252 ’STEEL’ FOR 99A53003001102
MATERIAL SPEC.: 35NCD16 (OR AISI4130)
DIA 6.7 12
A14 217 8.543 5.7 0.224
DIA 6.4 13 STAMP DIAMETERS FACING
3 EACH SET OF BORES
DIA 5.7 14 A15 227.5 8.957 5.2 0.205
DIA 5.2 15 NOTE: WIDTH OF ALL SLOTS:
A16 237.5 9.35 4.8 0.189 0.15 ± 0.03 mm (0.006 ± 0.001 in)
DIA 4.8 16
DIA 4 17 A17 247 9.724 4 0.157
TOLERANCES:
DIA 3.6 18
A18 256 10.079 3.6 0.142 SLOT DEPTH: ± 0.05 mm (± 0.002 in)
BOREHOLES : DIA 3−6 : + 0.12 mm (+ 0.0047 in)
DIA 6−10 : + 0.15 mm (+ 0.0059 in)
DIA 10−18 : + 0.18 mm (+ 0.007 in)
L_NT_516304_1_0010101_01_00

Calibration Block PN 99A53003001100, PN 51-63-04-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
99A53003001101 and PN 99A53003001102 Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Calibration Block PN 99A53003001001
A. For the CALIBRATION BLOCK (99A53003001001) see FIGURE 51-63-05-991-001-A and FIGURE
51-63-05-991-002-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
140 mm
(5.512 in)
112 mm
(4.409 in)
88 mm
1 (3.465 in)
60 mm
(2.362 in)
10 mm
27 mm (0.394 in)
ALUMINUM (1.063 in)
A
DIA 9.5
2
B
DIA 9.9
100°
K
SLOT: 0.5 mm (0.02 in) SLOT: 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
C
DIA 10.3
SLOT: 1 x 1 mm (0.04 x 0.04 in)
D
DIA 11.1
E
DIA 11.5
236 mm
(9.291 in) POINTS DIMENSION DIAMETER K MARKING:
HOLES
F
DIA 11.9 mm in mm in mm in STAMP MATERIAL:
A 218 8.582 9.5 0.374 2.8 0.11 1
’ALUMINUM’ FOR 99A53003001103
G MATERIAL SPEC.: 2024T3 (AU4G1)
DIA 12.7
B 197 7.756 9.9 0.39 3 0.118
’TITANIUM’ FOR 99A53003001104
MATERIAL SPEC.: TA6V (OR TI6A14V OR AMS4911)
H C 174 6.85 10.3 0.406 3.2 0.126
DIA 13.5
’STEEL’ FOR 99A53003001105
J MATERIAL SPEC.: 15CDV6 (OR AISI4130)
D 152 5.984 11.1 0.437 3.2 0.126
H J
DIA 14 STAMP DIAMETERS FACING
E 128 5.039 11.5 0.453 3.2 0.126 EACH SET OF BORES
2
F 103 4.055 11.9 0.469 3.5 0.139

POINT NOTE: WIDTH OF ALL SLOTS:
0.15 ± 0.03 mm (0.006 ± 0.001 in)
G 77 3.031 12.7 0.5 3.5 0.139
TOLERANCES:
H 50 1.969 13.5 0.531 4 0.157
SLOT DEPTH: ± 0.05 mm (± 0.002 in)
J 21 0.827 14 0.551 4 0.157 DIA 10−18 : + 0.18 mm (+ 0.007 in)
L_NT_516305_1_0010101_01_00

@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
120 mm
(4.72 in)
97 mm
(3.819 in)
77 mm
(3.031 in)
1 53 mm
(2.087 in)
10 mm
25 mm (0.394 in)
ALUMINUM (0.984 in)
A
DIA 3.6
B 2
DIA 4
C
DIA 4.4 N 100°
D
DIA 4.8 SLOT: 0.5 mm (0.02 in) SLOT DEPTH: 0.5 mm (0.02 in)
POINTS DIMENSION DIAMETER N
E HOLES
DIA 5.2 SLOT: 1 x 1 mm (0.04 x 0.04 in)
mm in mm in mm in
F
DIA 5.7
A 208 8.187 3.6 0.142 2 0.079
G
DIA 6.35
220 mm B 196 7.717 4 0.157 2 0.079 MARKING:
(8.661 in) H
DIA 6.7
C 182.5 7.185 4.4 0.173 2 0.079
STAMP MATERIAL:
J 1
DIA 7.1 D 168 6.614 4.8 0.187 2 0.079 ’ALUMINUM’ FOR 99A53003001106
MATERIAL SPEC.: 2024T3 (AU4G1)
K
DIA 7.9 E 153 6.024 5.2 0.205 2 0.079 ’TITANIUM’ FOR 99A53003001107
MATERIAL SPEC.: TA6V (OR TI6A14V OR AMS4911)
L F 137 5.394 5.7 0.224 2 0.079
DIA 8.3 ’STEEL’ FOR 99A53003001108
M MATERIAL SPEC.: 15CDV6 (OR AISI4130)
M G 119.5 4.705 6.35 0.25 2.5 0.098
L DIA 8.7
STAMP DIAMETERS FACING
H 102 4.016 6.7 0.264 2.5 0.098 2 EACH SET OF BORES
POINT J 82.5 3.248 7.1 0.28 2.5 0.098 NOTE: WIDTH OF ALL SLOTS:
0.15 ± 0.03 mm (0.006 ± 0.001 in)
K 63.5 2.5 7.9 0.311 2.5 0.098
TOLERANCES:
L 41.5 1.634 8.3 0.327 2.7 0.106
SLOT DEPTH: ± 0.05 mm (± 0.002 in)
M 18.5 0.728 8.7 0.343 2.7 0.106 DIA 6−10 : + 0.15 mm (+ 0.0059 in)
L_NT_516305_1_0020101_01_01

@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Split Conical Calibration Block
A. For the SPLIT CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-887-01-9313S), SPLIT CONICAL CALIBRATION
BLOCK (2-887-01-9314S), SPLIT CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-887-01-9315S) and SPLIT
CONICAL CALIBRATION BLOCK (2-887-01-9316S) see FIGURE 51-63-06-991-001-A.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PN 2−887−01−9313S, TYPE SCCS3−7 PN 2−887−01−9314S, TYPE SCCS7−14
S3−7
CC
AL
S
36 mm DIA 36 mm DIA
(1.42 in) (1.42 in)
SPLIT SPLIT
8 mm DIA
(0.31 in) 15.2 mm DIA
32 mm 45 mm (0.6 in)
(1.26 in) (1.77 in)
2.8 mm DIA 6.8 mm DIA
(0.11 in) (0.27 in)
PN 2−887−01−9316S, TYPE SCCS21−28
PN 2−887−01−9315S, TYPE SCCS14−21
50 mm DIA 30 mm DIA
1 4− 21 (1.18 in)
CS (1.97 in)
AL
SC
36 mm DIA 22.7 mm DIA

(1.42 in) (0.89 in) SPLIT
SPLIT
45 mm
45 mm (1.77 in)
(1.77 in) 20.8 mm DIA
13.8 mm DIA (0.82 in)
(0.54 in)
NOTE:
WIDTH OF SPLIT : < 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
MATERIAL : 2024T351
L_NT_516306_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-63-06-991-001-A SHEET 01 - Split Page 2

Conical Calibration Block 51-63-06-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. Magnetic particle inspection procedures can only be done on ferromagnetic materials (cobalt, iron, nickel and
some steel alloys). While, in aircraft maintenance, these procedures are used mainly to detect surface
discontinuities, they may also be used to detect discontinuities which exist below the surface of a component.
The sensitivity does, however, decrease quickly with the increasing depth of discontinuities below the surface.
B. Magnetic particle inspection procedures can involve portable and mobile equipment, which permit procedures
to be done without removing components from their locations on the aircraft, or stationary, bench-type
equipment such as can be found in workshops.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Related Documents
A. ASTME 1444, Standard Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination
B. AMS 2641, Magnetic Particle Vehicle Petroleum Base
C. AMS 3044E, Magnetic Particles, Fluorescent, Wet Method, Dry Powder
D. AMS 3045, Magnetic Particles, Fluorescent, Wet Method, Oil Vehicle, Ready-to-use
E. AMS 3046, Magnetic Particles, Fluorescent, Wet Method, Oil Vehicle, Aerosol Packaged
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Basic Principles of Magnetic Particle Inspections
A. When a ferromagnetic component is magnetized, lines of flux are established in that component. If a
discontinuity exists in the component and that discontinuity cuts across the path of the lines of flux, the flux
is diverted and new, local poles can be set up on the surface of the component. This is known as flux leakage
(See FIGURE 51-70-00-991-001-A).
B. If fine particles of magnetic material are applied to the surface of the magnetized component, these particles
will be attracted to any flux leakages and will gather at the site of the new poles.
C. Maximum sensitivity is achieved when discontinuities lie at right angles to the direction of magnetic flux but
sensitivity is not seriously reduced with discontinuities orientated at angles up to 45˚ from the optimum
direction. Beyond 45˚ sensitivity diminishes quickly and discontinuities which lie parallel to the direction of
flux will not, cause flux leakages of sufficient strength to be detected (See FIGURE 51-70-00-991-001-A).
NOTE : Because flux leakages can be caused by discontinuities and also by changes of geometry, indications
can be relevant (cracks, laps, nonmetallic inclusions, pipe porosity, seams etc.) or non-relevant (edges,
holes, recesses, thread roots etc.) to the condition of the component. Relevant indications must be
recorded before the component is demagnetized and cleaned upon completion of the inspection.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MAGNETIC FLUX LEAKAGE

MAGNETIC PARTICLES
ATTRACTED TO FLUX SURFACE
LEAKAGE DISCONTINUITY
S N
N S
MAGNETIC FLUX LEAKAGE

MAGNETIC PARTICLES
ATTRACTED TO FLUX NEAR SURFACE
LEAKAGE DISCONTINUITY
S N
N S
NO FLUX LEAKAGE − NO INDICATION
N S N S
DISCONTINUITY PARALLEL WITH FLUX LINES
L_NT_517000_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-70-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 - Flux Page 4

Leakage Relative to Discontinuity 51-70-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Definitions
A. Longitudinal Magnetization (Magnetic Flow)
(1) The component is placed into a magnetic field so that the field couples with the component and lines of
flux flow from one pole to the other, through the component.
(2) If the magnetic flow is mainly parallel to the long axis of the component, it is said to be longitudinally
magnetized.
B. Circular Magnetization (Current Flow)
(1) An electrical current, passing through a conductor, creates a magnetic field in and around the
conductor at an angle 90˚ to the direction of current flow.
(2) When a component is magnetized, directly or indirectly in this way, it is said to be circularly
magnetized.
NOTE : Because the magnetic circuit is completed within the component there are no apparent poles
with this method (except where discontinuities or extreme changes of geometry occur).
C. Magnetic Flux Density (B)
(1) If the magnetic flux is cut at right angles to its direction of flow, the number of lines of flux, for a given
unit area, is referred to as the magnetic flux density.
D. Magnetizing Force (H)
(1) The force, from an existing magnetic field, or from a field created by an electrical current, which is
required to establish a certain flux density within a magnetic circuit.
E. Permeability (µ)
(1) The ratio of flux density (B) to magnetizing field strength (H), designated by the Greek symbol ”mu”
(µ) and indicates the ease with which a material may be magnetized :
B
-- = µ
H
F. Hysteresis Loop
(1) If, for a given ferromagnetic material, a graph is plotted of the changes in flux density (B) against
variations in magnetic field strength (H), a curve (loop) will be formed. This loop will be characteristic
of the material and will be of a different shape for other ferromagnetic materials (See FIGURE
51-70-00-991-002-A).
(2) After the initial curve the loop shows the lag (hysteresis) between the flux density and the changing
magnetizing force.
G. Tangential Magnetic Field
(1) It corresponds to the existing magnetic field just on component surface. It is generally measured in
direction tangentially to the circulating path.
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
MAGNETIC FLUX a
DENSITY +B
c 0 f
−H MAGNETIZING MAGNETIZING +H
FORCE FORCE
d
MAGNETIC FLUX −B
DENSITY
NOTE:
0 = ZERO POINT, START OF INITIAL CURVE, MATERIAL UNMAGNETIZED
a = SATURATION POINT, END OF INITIAL CURVE. ANY FURTHER INCREASE
IN MAGNETIZING FORCE (H) DOES NOT RESULT IN INCREASE
IN FLUX DENSITY (B).
b = RESIDUAL MAGNETISM (REMANENCE) AFTER REMOVAL OF
MAGNETIZING FORCE. AMOUNT OF REMANENCE INDICATES
MATERIALS RETENTIVITY.
c = COERCIVE FORCE, MAGNETIZING FORCE NECESSARY TO BE
APPLIED IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION, IN ORDER TO REDUCE
REMANENCE TO ZERO.
POINTS d, e AND f DEPICT SIMILAR CHARACTERISTICS FOR THE ALTERNATING

MAGNETIZING FORCE. THE LAG (HYSTERESIS) BETWEEN APPLIED MAGNETIZING
FORCE AND FLUX DENSITY CAN BE SEEN THROUGHOUT THE COMPLETED LOOP
a, b, c, d, e, f, a.
L_NT_517000_1_0020101_01_00

Hysteresis Loop a Ferromagnetic Material 51-70-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Surface Preparation
A. The surface preparation of the part to be inspected must be smooth, clean, dry and free of oil and scale,
machining marks, or other contaminants or conditions which might interfere with the efficiency of the
inspection.
NOTE : Pre-cleaning can be carried out using solvent at room temperature, or immersion in the vapour
degreaser equipment.
B. Coated Parts
(1) Thin non-ferromagnetic coatings, which do not exceed 50 µm in thickness and ferromagnetic coatings
not exceeding 30 µm in thickness, which do not interfere with the inspection may be left on in-service
components during inspection unless otherwise specified.
(2) When such coatings are non-conductive (e.g. cadmium, chromium), they must be removed where
electrical contact is to be made.
(3) The removal of any coating, if required should be in accordance with the relevant specific procedure.
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Recommended Magnetization Values
A. General Recommendation for Continuous Method
(1) The intensity of the tangential magnetization field must in the range of 6400 and 12800 A/m, peak
values (Unless otherwise stated).
(2) The magnetization field measurement depends on the kind of magnetic field meter and on the
magnetization current wave form. Therefore depending of the current type, correcting factors must be
used to determine the exact H peak value (See the relevant AIRBUS documentation).
(3) In case of thyristors electrical circuit, the correction factor is not linear to the current intensity,
therefore a tangential magnetic field measurer giving automatically the correct peak value is
recommended.
B. General Recommendation for Residual Method
(1) This method consists of magnetizing the component to a given value. When the magnetizing force is
removed then remains a residual magnetic field.
(2) The residual method is not as sensitive as the continuous method, but it can be useful in case of
material with high retentivity, because of geometric constraints where the continuous method gives rise
to saturation.
(3) This method is applicable only when required by a specific NTM procedure.
C. Parameter Settings
(1) General recommendations on parameter settings for magnetic inspection for different techniques is
detailed in ASTME 1444.
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Indicator Media (Magnetic Particles)
A. General
(1) The magnetic particles are presented in a dry powder or wet suspension form and are a mixture of
various sized particles having high permeability and very low retentivity, and match the requirements of
AMS 2641, AMS 3045 and AMS 3046, as applicable.
CAUTION : IN AERONAUTICS, ONLY FLUORESCENT MAGNETIC PARTICLES ARE RECOMMENDED

BECAUSE OF THEIR SUPERIOR SENSITIVITY.
(2) Fluorescent powders, which fluoresce brilliantly (yellow/green or orange) when excited by ultra-violet
radiations (called ’Black Light’) and are viewed in subdued lighting conditions.
B. The magnetic particles sizes must be in accordance with AMS 3044E.
C. The indicator media could be dry or in wet suspension. In aeronautics the wet suspension method is preferred
of it suitability for the detection of very fine surface discontinuities like fatigue cracks.
(1) Wet Suspensions
(a) Fine magnetic particles are suspended in a suitable liquid such as kerosene or an acceptable
alternative.
(b) Suspensions may be applied from portable sprays (aerosal or manual) or in the case of bench-type
equipment, by low pressure flooding, ladling or dipping of the component into the suspension
baths.
D. The indicator media shall meet the requirements listed in ASTME 1444.
E. Application of the Indicator Media
(1) Continuous Method
(a) The indicator medium must be applied before and during magnetization but the application must
cease just before the magnetization is terminated. Time may be necessary for indications to
develop and become visible before moving or inspecting the component under test.
(2) Residual Magnetization Method
(a) The magnetic particles are applied to the test part immediately after magnetizing has been
stopped.
Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
8. Demagnetization
A. General
(1) A part which has been under a magnetic field influence, retains a magnetic field with an intensity
depending on the kind of material and the magnetization field strength used.
(2) Demagnetization must be done before, between and after magnetic particle inspection.
(3) Post cleaning must be done after demagnetization of component under test.
B. Demagnetization Processes
(1) Demagnetization methods commonly used in aircraft maintenance procedures involve methods which
systematically reverse and reduce the magnetizing field (H) until flux density B is at an acceptable low
Level (See FIGURE 51-70-00-991-003-A).
C. Residual Magnetization Field
(1) Demagnetization Check
(a) The measurement of the remanet magnetic field must be done with a magnetic field meter.
(b) The acceptable residual magnetic field intensities are as follows :
- before and between each magnetic testing operation < 500 A/m
- Last operation generally < 240 A/m and < 60 A/m for parts which are mounted near
instrumentation.
Page 10
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
FLUX DENSITY B
MAGNETIZING
−H FORCE + H
Br
TIME t L_NT_517000_1_0030101_01_00

Demagnetization with Reducing/Reversing H 51-70-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
9. Auxiliary Equipment
A. Field Indicators
(1) Whilst they do not indicate the actual amount of remanence existing within a component, dial-type
field indicators provide a comparative indication of the remanence before and after demagnetization
procedures are performed.
NOTE : When not being used, dial-type field indicators must be kept away from the influence of
magnetizing or demagnetizing magnetic flux.
(2) Strip-type, BERTHOLD Cross and pie gage field indicators give an indication of the direction of the
magnetic field on the surface of the component.
B. Centrifuge Tube (Settlement Flask)
(1) Indicator suspensions, in bench-type equipment baths, must be tested or particle-to-carrier fluid content
upon initial make-up of suspension and on each day before use. This test is done using the settlement
flask (See FIGURE 51-70-00-991-004-A).
C. Magnetic Field Meter
(1) This instrument is used to measure the tangential field strength on the surface of the component.
D. Test Block
(1) In order to evaluate the performance and sensitivity of equipment and materials used in magnetic
particle testing procedures, it is necessary to use a form of test block (SeeFIGURE 51-70-00-991-007-A,
the recommendations are specified in 51-70-00-010-A ).
E. Black Light
WARNING : DO NOT OPERATE BLACK LIGHT IF THERE ARE FLAMMABLE FUMES IN THE WORK
AREA. DO NOT TOUCH THE HOUSING OR FILTERS OF BLACK LIGHT SOURCES WHEN
THEY ARE IN OPERATION. DO NOT OPERATE BLACK LIGHT SOURCES WITHOUT
FILTERS OR WITH FILTERS THAT HAVE CRACKS OR ARE NOT CORRECTLY IN-STALLED.
DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE LIGHT SOURCE. DO NOT USE PHOTOCHROMATIC OR
PERMANENTLY DARKENED SPECTACLES WHEN YOU USE BLACK LIGHT SOURCES. DO
NOT LET BLACK LIGHT TOUCH YOUR SKIN FOR LONG PERIODS. BEFORE YOU DO THE
INSPECTION WITH BLACK LIGHT, LET YOUR VISION FULLY ADAPT TO THE LIGHTING
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES. YOU MUST USE SPECIAL LIGHT CONDUCTORS WHEN
YOU USE ENDOSCOPES TOGETHER WITH BLACK LIGHT. YOU MUST DO A CHECK OF
THE OUTPUT OF THE BLACK LIGHT SOURCE AT REGULAR INTERVALS. THIS IS TO
MAKE SURE THAT THE OUTPUT DOES NOT BECOME LESS THAN THE APPROVED
LIMIT.
(1) That portion of the ultraviolet light spectrum which lies between 320 to 400 nanometers in wavelength
is called black light.
(2) Black Light equipment requires a minimum of 15 minutes to stabilize.
(3) The minimum acceptable intensity is 1600 µ W/cm2 at the part being examined.
(4) When examinations of internal surfaces must be performed, using black light sources, light intensity
shall be measured at the expected working distance of the equipment.
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
100 ml
50
25
20
15
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1.5
0.5
L_NT_517000_1_0040101_01_00

Centrifuge Tube (Settlement Flask) 51-70-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
19.1 mm
(0.75 in)
** On A/C ALL
1 2
3 DIAMETER D
4
5 HOLE 01 02
6 mm in mm in
7 1 1.8 0.07 1.8 0.07
8 2 1.8 0.07 3.6 0.14
9 3 1.8 0.07 5.3 0.21
10 4 1.8 0.07 7.1 0.28

31.3 mm 127 mm 5 1.8 0.07 8.9 0.35
Transversal Magnetization
(1.23 in) 11 (5 in)
6 1.8 0.07 10.7 0.42
12
7 1.8 0.07 12.4 0.49
KETOS Tool Steel Ring used in case of

8 1.8 0.07 14.2 0.56
Figure 51-70-00-991-007-A SHEET 01 - ANSI

D
9 1.8 0.07 16 0.63
10 1.8 0.07 17.8 0.7
11 1.8 0.07 19.6 0.77
12 1.8 0.07 21.3 0.84
22.2 mm
(0.87 in)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE ± 0.76 mm (0.03 in) OR AS NOTED IN 01 AND 02 .

@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-70-00-PB1
MATERIAL IS ANSI 01 TOOL STEEL FROM ANNEALED ROUND STOCK.
THE RING MAY BE HEAT TREATED AS FOLLOWS:
HEAT TO 1400° TO 1450° F (760° TO 790° C). HOLD AT THIS TEMPERATURE FOR
1 HOUR. COOL AT A MAXIMUM RATE OF 40° F / h (22° C / h) TO BELOW 1000° F (540° C).
FURNACE OR AIR COOL TO ROOM TEMPERATURE. FINISH THE RING TO RMS 25 AND
PROTECT FROM CORROSION.
01 ALL HOLE DIAMETERS ARE ± 0.13 mm (0.005 in) HOLE NUMBERS 8 THRU 12 ARE OPTIONAL.
02 TOLERANCE ON THE ’D’ DISTANCE IS ± 0.13 mm (0.005 in).
L_NT_517000_1_0070101_01_00
Page 14
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10. Performances Checks
A. To maintain accuracy and reproducibility it is necessary to periodically monitor the performance of equipment
and materials used in magnetic particle inspections. See TABLE 1 for the recommended intervals of
performance checks.
B. Checks, they must be conducted in accordance with equipment manufacturer recommendations.
(1) Lighting as black light must be verified with a radiometer to satisfy the 1600 µW/cm2 in the inspection
area at a distance corresponding to the working condition and the visible light will be checked with a
luxmeter to have a maximum of 20 Lux.
(2) System performance shall be verified initially and at regular intervals (See TABLE 1).
(a) Both magnetization directions, Circular and Longitudinal, must be checked to a specific process
including the use of the Ketos Ring (See FIGURE 51-70-00-991-006-A).
(b) Clearly visible, visible and fairly visible holes indications will be recorded and compared to the first
equipment performance check. The results must be the same.
ITEM MAX . TIME BETWEEN

VERIFICATION
Lighting : -
Black light intensity 1 day
Ambient light intensity 1 day
Visible light intensity 1 day
System Performance using the ring specimen of FIGURE 1 day
51-70-00-991-006-A 8 hours, or every shift
Wet particle concentration change
Wet particle contamination 1 week
Equipment calibration check : -
Gaussmeter reading (Teslameter) zero Prior to use
Gaussmeter (Teslameter) accuracy 6 months
Ammeter accuracy 6 months
Timer control 6 months
Quick break 6 months
Dead weight check 6 months
Table of Required Verification Intervals
c
TABLE 1
(c) Timer, Breaker, ammeter verifications will be performed following general recommendations of
periodical checks, conducted by certifying agency.
(d) Electro magnet shall have a lifting force of :
- alternating current yokes : at least 45 Newtons with a 50 mm (1.97 in) to 100 mm (3.94 in)
spacing between legs.
- Direct current yokes : at least 135 Newtons with a 50 mm (1.97 in) to 100 mm (3.94 in)
spacing between legs.
(3) Determination of indicator media concentration will be performed as :
(a) Ink sample should be taken after 30 minutes normal agitation to ensure uniform distribution of
particles throughout the bath.
(b) Pour a sample 100 ml of suspension into the settlement flask (See FIGURE 51-70-00-991-009-
A).
Page 15
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
(c) Allow the tube to stand undisturbed for at least 60 minutes.
(d) Read off the level of settled particles as a percentage volume of the flask contents. Particle level
must be within a given range of 0.1 to 0.3 ml.
(e) When using fluorescent suspensions the test must be done under Black Light and the surface of
the carrier fluid checked for excessive fluorescence. After the particles have settled out, if the
carrier fluid fluoresces fluid must be replaced by a newly made-up suspension and the settlement
test repeated.
(4) Determination of indicator media contamination will be conducted as:
(a) Liquid shall be comparable to the fluorescence of the original solution.
(b) Control in visible Light for striations or bands, different in colour or appearance which may
indicate contamination.
(c) If total volume of contaminants exceeds 30% of the volume of magnetic particles, or if the Liquid
is noticeably fluorescent, the fluid must be replaced.
Page 16
Revision n˚: 79
19.1 mm
(0.75 in)
** On A/C ALL
1 2
3 DIAMETER D
4
5 HOLE 01 02
6 mm in mm in
7 1 1.8 0.07 1.8 0.07
8 2 1.8 0.07 3.6 0.14
9 3 1.8 0.07 5.3 0.21
10 4 1.8 0.07 7.1 0.28

31.3 mm 127 mm 5 1.8 0.07 8.9 0.35
Transversal Magnetization
(1.23 in) 11 (5 in)
6 1.8 0.07 10.7 0.42
12
7 1.8 0.07 12.4 0.49
KETOS Tool Steel Ring used in case of

8 1.8 0.07 14.2 0.56
Figure 51-70-00-991-006-A SHEET 01 - ANSI

D
9 1.8 0.07 16 0.63
10 1.8 0.07 17.8 0.7
11 1.8 0.07 19.6 0.77
12 1.8 0.07 21.3 0.84
22.2 mm
(0.87 in)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE ± 0.76 mm (0.03 in) OR AS NOTED IN 01 AND 02 .

@A318/A319/A320/A321
51-70-00-PB1
MATERIAL IS ANSI 01 TOOL STEEL FROM ANNEALED ROUND STOCK.
THE RING MAY BE HEAT TREATED AS FOLLOWS:
HEAT TO 1400° TO 1450° F (760° TO 790° C). HOLD AT THIS TEMPERATURE FOR
1 HOUR. COOL AT A MAXIMUM RATE OF 40° F / h (22° C / h) TO BELOW 1000° F (540° C).
FURNACE OR AIR COOL TO ROOM TEMPERATURE. FINISH THE RING TO RMS 25 AND
PROTECT FROM CORROSION.
01 ALL HOLE DIAMETERS ARE ± 0.13 mm (0.005 in) HOLE NUMBERS 8 THRU 12 ARE OPTIONAL.
02 TOLERANCE ON THE ’D’ DISTANCE IS ± 0.13 mm (0.005 in).
L_NT_517000_1_0060101_01_00
Page 17
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
100 ml
50
25
20
15
10
8
6
5
4
3
2
1.5
0.5
L_NT_517000_1_0090101_01_00

Centrifuge Tube (Settlement Flask) 51-70-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Magnetic Particle - Equipment Specifications
A. General
(1) Any Magnetic Particle equipment that meets the requirements of the NTM General procedure (See
51-70-00) may be used .
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. Penetrant inspection procedures are relatively simple, yet reliable methods applicable to a part manufactured
from nonporous metallic or nonmetallic materials for the detection of discontinuities which are open to the
surface of a part, such as corrosion, cracks, pits, etc.
CAUTION : DO NOT APPLY PENETRANT INSPECTIONS ON AEROSPACE SYSTEMS OR AEROSPACE

SYSTEM COMPONENTS MADE FROM COMPOSITE MATERIAL, EXCEPT WHEN DIRECTED TO
DO SO BY THE APPROPRIATE ENGINEERING INSTRUCTIONS OR BY WRITTEN AND
APPROVED INSPECTION PROCEDURES.
B. Penetrant procedures can be used on a wide range of nonporous materials (metals, ceramics, plastics and
some rubbers). When inspecting ferromagnetic parts, the magnetic particle inspection methods are generally
preferred.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Related Documents
A. ASTME 1417, Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination
B. AMS2644, Inspection Materials, Penetrant
C. QPL-AMS2644, Qualified Products List of Inspection Materials, Penetrant
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Basic Principles of Penetrant Inspections
A. After thorough preparation of the inspection area, a liquid of high mobility and penetrating power (the
penetrant) is applied to the surface of the part. The penetrant is allowed to remain (dwell) on the surface for
a specified time so that it can, by capillary action, enter open-to-the-surface discontinuity.
B. Following the specified penetrant dwell-time, the excess penetrant is removed from the surface. An approved
remover is used to ensure a clean surface, leaving only the penetrant which has entered any discontinuity.
C. A fine powder (developer) is next applied to the surface and the blotting action of the powder draws the
penetrant from the discontinuity. The penetrant seeps from the discontinuity and spreads through the powder
particles so that the indication of the discontinuity develops to a size which can be seen against the
background of the powder.
D. Relevant indications are recorded before the surface is thoroughly cleaned and, depending upon the
acceptance criteria, further actions may be taken.
E. All the materials intended for a specific penetrant inspection, i.e. penetrant, remover and developer shall
belong to the same penetrant family or system. All supplied by the same manufacturer must be used.
F. The penetrant systems used and the conditions for control and usage must be in accordance with AMS2644
and QPL-AMS2644.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
4. Penetrant Systems
CAUTION : PERSONAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN USING CHEMICAL PRODUCTS
BECAUSE EYES OR SKIN MAY BE IRRITATED.
A. Penetrants
(1) Penetrant Types: Penetrants are classified into two types:
(a) Type I - Fluorescent Dye
CAUTION : DO NOT USE PENETRANT TYPE II ON AIRCRAFT COMPONENTS.
(b) Type II - Visible Dye

(2) Penetrant Methods: Penetrants are also sub-classified by the method of removal as follows:
(a) Method A - Water washable
(b) Method B - Post emulsifiable, lipophilic
(c) Method C - Solvent removable
(d) Method D - Post emulsifiable, hydrophilic
(3) Penetrant Sensitivity Levels: Type I penetrants are sub-classified into sensitivity levels as:
(a) Sensitivity Level 1/2 - Low
(b) Sensitivity Level 1 - Low
(c) Sensitivity Level 2 - Medium
(d) Sensitivity Level 3 - High
(e) Sensitivity Level 4 - Ultra-high
NOTE : Sensitivity level 1/2 is only applicable to certain Type I, Method A penetrant systems.
B. Developers
(1) Developers are in the following forms:
(a) Form a - Dry Powder
(b) Form b - Water Soluble (Wet)
(c) Form c - Water Suspendable (Wet)
(d) Form d - Nonaqueous (Wet)
(e) Form e - Specific application
C. Solvent Removers
(1) In the applicable cases, solvent removers are classified relating to their chemical features as:
(a) Class (1) - Halogenated
(b) Class (2) - Non-Halogenated
(c) Class (3) - Specific application
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
D. Penetrant systems are given in TABLE 1.
TYPE METHOD LEVEL FORM

I <1> A 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 a, c, d
I <2> C 1, 2, 3, 4 a, b, c, d
I <2> D 1, 2, 3, 4 a, b, c, d
Classification of Penetrants
TABLE 1
<1> It is not allowed to use water soluble developer (Form b) with Method A penetrant.
<2> Sensitivity level 1/2 is only applicable to some Type I, Method A penetrant systems.
c
NOTE : Note that Method B does not appear in the table above due to the fact that emulsifier should be
applied by immersion or flowing, so it is a impractical process for in-service inspection.
E. The penetrant selected shall be adequate for each specific inspection. For general use on aircraft in-service
inspections the following penetrants are recommended:
CAUTION : FLOURESCENT PENETRANT MUST NOT BE PERFORMED ON A COMPONENT WHICH HAS

BEEN PREVIOUSLY INSPECTED USING A VISIBLE DYE.
(1) Type I, Method C, Level 2, 3 or 4 (Solvent removable, fluorescent).
Page 5
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
5. Surfaces Preparation
A. The surface of the part to be inspected shall be clean, dry and free of oil, grease, paint, corrosion, chemical
residues or any coating, which could affect the accuracy of the inspection, except anodize coatings which do
not affect the inspection.
B. Use the appropriated cleaning methods for the contaminant type to be removed in such a way that it is not
detrimental to the component itself. Solvent cleaning can be used for oils, greases, wax removal and final
cleaning before penetrant examination.
NOTE : Mechanical and chemical cleaning is not authorized unless recommended in a specific procedure.
C. Before penetrant application the part to be inspected must be perfectly clean and dry and with an external
temperature between 4 - 49˚ C (39.2 - 104˚ F) following manufacturer recommendations.
Page 6
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
6. Penetrant Application
A. Unless otherwise specified, the surface of the component to be inspected shall be completely covered with the
penetrant.
NOTE : Before the application of the penetrant it is recommended to mask holes, lap joints, or adjacent
components in order that the penetrant will not become entrapped and subsequently leach out during
the development stage and mask possible cracks.
NOTE : The penetrant dwell time should be a minimum of 10 minutes unless otherwise specified. The
penetrant must not be allowed to dry on the surface. For extended penetrant times it will be necessary
to maintain the penetrant in a wet state by regular reapplications.
Page 7
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
7. Penetrant Excess Removal
A. After the correct dwell time the excess penetrant must be removed from the surface as follows:
(1) Water Washable (Method A)
(a) Excess penetrant shall be removed by water spray, of 40 psi (275 kPa) maximum pressure at 300
mm (11.81 in) minimum distance from the surface of the part or by manual wiping using a clean,
lint-free water dampened cloth or towel.
NOTE : Water temperature shall be between 10 ˚C (50.0 ˚F) and 38 ˚C (100.4 ˚F).
NOTE : The inspection surface shall never be flushed with water, and the cloth shall not be
saturated with water.
(2) Solvent Removable (Method C) (See FIGURE 51-80-00-991-001-A)
(a) Excess penetrant shall be removed by wiping with a clean, dry and lint-free cloth, followed with a
clean, solvent dampened lint-free cloth.
NOTE : The inspection surface shall never be flushed with solvent, and the cloth shall not be
saturated with solvent.
(3) Post Emulsifiable Hydrophillic (Method D)
(a) Before the emulsifier application the penetrant excess can be removed by water spray application
at a 40 psi (275 kPa) maximum pressure or by wiping with a clean, water dampened lint-free
cloth as indicated in SUB-DESCRIPTION after a dwell time of minimum 10 minutes and not
greater than 90 minutes.
(b) Application of the hydrophillic emulsifier can be by dipping or spray.
(c) The emulsifier application times must be rigidly adhered to in accordance with the penetrant
system supplier recommendations.
(d) Stop the emulsifying process by water spray application.
(e) Apply water spray, with 40 psi (275 kPa) maximum pressure, or use a clean water dampened lint-
free cloth or towel to remove the excess emulsifier from the surface of the part as indicate in
SUB-DESCRIPTION.
B. During the excess removal of emulsifier the appropriated illumination shall be used, as follows:
(1) Penetrant Type I
(a) For outside (daylight) application the black light intensity is equal or higher than 1600 µW/cm2
at the part surface with an ambient illumination of 100 lux maximum. For inside (booth)
application the black light intensity is equal or higher than 1000 µW/cm2 at the part surface with
an ambient illumination of 20 lux maximum.
C. The part shall be cleaned and reprocessed when it is suspected that over removal of the penetrant has
occurred.
D. The area to be inspected shall be dried by blotting with a clean and dry cloth or by evaporation before the
application of dry powder or nonaqueous developers.
NOTE : If an drying oven is used, care must be taken to ensure the temperature and time does not exceed
those recommended by the penetrant system supplier.
Page 8
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
E. The component should be drained of excess of water but not dried before the aqueous soluble or suspendable
developer application (forms b and c).
Page 9
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
PARTICLES OF CLEANING
INSPECTION SURFACE AGENT
CONTAMINATION
1. SURFACE AND DISCONTINUITY 2. APPLY CLEANING AGENT

CONTAMINATED
PENETRANT
ENTERS
3. INSPECTION AREA IS DRY AND 4. APPLY PENETRANT

CLEAN (DEGREASED)
EXCESS CLOTH MOISTENED DEVELOPER

PENETRANT WITH CLEANING AGENT
DEVELOPER DRAWS PENETRANT
FROM DISCONTINUITY
PENETRANT PENETRANT
REMAINS IN SEEPS OUT OF
5. REMOVE EXCESS PENETRANT 4. APPLY DEVELOPER

WITH MOIST CLOTH
L_NT_518000_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-80-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 - Solvent Page 10

- Removable Penetrant Procedure 51-80-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
8. Developer Application
A. Dry Powder Developer
(1) Apply developer following manufacturer recommendations.
B. Aqueous Developer
(1) Apply developer by spray completely covering all the surfaces to be inspected in a uniform manner.
(2) Suspendable developers shall be constantly agitated before and during application to keep particles in
suspension.
(3) Dry the component to be inspected after aqueous developer application.
(4) Minimum and maximum development times will be 10 minutes and 2 hours respectively.
C. Nonaqueous Developer
(1) Apply developer by spraying in an uniform manner whilst achieving a thin coating over the entire
surface to the inspected.
(2) Agitate the developer frequently during the application process.
(3) Minimum and maximum development times will be 10 minutes and 2 hours respectively.
Page 11
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
9. Component Examination
A. Examine the component once the minimum development time has elapsed to avoid loss of resolution, even
examine the surface periodically during the developing time.
B. Components which have not been examined before the maximum development time shall be cleaned and
reprocessed.
C. Components shall be examined under appropriated lighting:
(1) For Fluorescent Dye System (Type I)
WARNING : DO NOT OPERATE BLACK LIGHT IF THERE ARE FLAMMABLE FUMES IN THE
WORK AREA. DO NOT TOUCH THE HOUSING OR FILTERS OF BLACK LIGHT
SOURCES WHEN THEY ARE IN OPERATION. DO NOT OPERATE BLACK LIGHT
SOURCES WITHOUT FILTERS OR WITH FILTERS THAT HAVE CRACKS OR ARE NOT
CORRECTLY IN-STALLED. DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE LIGHT SOURCE. DO
NOT USE PHOTOCHROMATIC OR PERMANENTLY DARKENED SPECTACLES WHEN
YOU USE BLACK LIGHT SOURCES. DO NOT LET BLACK LIGHT TOUCH YOUR SKIN
FOR LONG PERIODS. BEFORE YOU DO THE INSPECTION WITH BLACK LIGHT, LET
YOUR VISION FULLY ADAPT TO THE LIGHTING FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES.
YOU MUST USE SPECIAL LIGHT CONDUCTORS WHEN YOU USE ENDOSCOPES
TOGETHER WITH BLACK LIGHT. YOU MUST DO A CHECK OF THE OUTPUT OF
THE BLACK LIGHT SOURCE AT REGULAR INTERVALS. THIS IS TO MAKE SURE
THAT THE OUTPUT DOES NOT BECOME LESS THAN THE APPROVED LIMIT.
(a) Use a portable black light source (wavelength between 320 and 380 nm) with a minimum
intensity of 1600 µW/cm2 at the surface of the part, and examine the component at a normal
viewing distance about 200 mm (7.87 in) to 300 mm (11.81 in).
Page 12
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
10. Discontinuity Interpretation
A. The type and the approximate size of discontinuities that can be detected by penetrant inspection can be
determined by assessing the size and shape of the indications.
(1) Cracks, seams, laps and lock of fusion show as linear indications.
(2) Surface breaking or pitting corrosion shows as round spots.
(3) A large, concentrated area of penetrant could indicate an area of porosity, a surface cavity or a deep
crack.
B. The size of a discontinuity is relative to the size of the penetrant indication. The larger the indication, the
greater the discontinuity, this is due to the volume of entrapped penetrant.
Page 13
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
11. Final NDT Requirement
A. Clean the area, to remove all traces of penetrant and developer.
Page 14
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. Liquid Penetrant - System Specification
A. General
(1) Any make of Liquid Penetrant System may be used, provided that it meets the requirements of
AMS2644 and QPL-AMS2644. See also the requirements in the NTM General procedure 51-80-00.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
Descriptions
** On A/C ALL
1. General
A. Visual inspection procedures are among the simplest and most economical of all the nondestructive testing
methods.
B. Optical instruments can be used to assist the inspection by magnifying discontinuities that are too small to be
seen by the unaided eye.
C. Other instruments may also be used to inspect areas where the access is difficult.
Page 1
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
2. Visual Procedures
A. When performing visual inspections it is essential to know the types of discontinuity which may develop, and
the areas where these failures might occur.
B. A general check of the inspection area should be made for cleanliness, security of parts and obvious damage.
C. After completion of a general check, a specific procedure should be followed:
- gain access to the inspection area,
- clean the surface of the inspection area whenever possible,
- provide adequate lighting for the inspection,
- carefully examine the specified area,
- record all relevant indications.
NOTE : If the geometry and location of, or access to, the inspection area conceals the part which is to be
inspected, visual aids may be used - mirror, magnifying glass, endoscope etc.
Page 2
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
3. Visual Inspection Aids
A. Magnifying Devices
(1) Hand-held magnifying glasses:
- Low-power magnifiers may be used for large surface areas (x2 - x6 magnification).
- Higher-power magnifiers may be used for more detailed inspections of small, local areas (x8 - x10
magnification).
(2) Microscopes, of various magnifying powers, may be used to inspect local areas on critical parts.
B. Rigid Endoscopes (See FIGURE 51-90-00-991-001-A)
(1) An endoscope is a precision optical instrument which can be used to inspect internal areas and the
inside surfaces of holes, bores and tubes.
(2) A rigid endoscope has a metal tube containing a series of lenses, which provide a view of the inspection
area, and a lighting system which directs light to the inspection area
(3) Rigid endoscopes are available in sizes ranging from approximately 2.0 mm (0.08 in) in diameter and a
few centimeters in length, to approximately 19.0 mm (0.75 in) in diameter and many centimeters (feet)
in length.
(4) Endoscopes can be supplied with optical systems which will provide direct, right angle, rear and fore
oblique directions of view.
(5) Many endoscopes have an adaptor on the eye-piece which allows the image of the inspection area to be
recorded on photographic film, on video, or to be viewed with a Closed Circuit TV system (CCTV).
(6) Endoscopes usually have high image resolution and a depth of field, ranging from a few millimeters
(fractions of an inch) to infinity.
(7) Rigid endoscopes are available with various magnification powers and adjustable focus controls.
C. Flexible Endoscopes (See FIGURE 51-90-00-991-002-A)
(1) Flexible endoscopes are armored plastic tubes which can be manipulated into various curves and angles
thus permitting access to areas which are inaccessible to rigid endoscopes. They are also available in
various diameter/length combinations.
(2) These endoscopes do not have an intermediate lens system within the flexible tube. At each end of the
tube is a lens system connected by two bundles of glass fibers. The outer bundle of fibers transmits
light to the inspection area whilst the inner bundle transmits the image of the inspection area to the
lens in the eyepiece. The lighting is usually provided by an external, variable intensity, cold light source.
At the eyepiece there is a focusing ring which permits adjustment of image clarity.
(3) Flexible endoscopes may have replacement object lenses which provide a change of the angle, or field,
of view. Some endoscopes have a knob, near the eyepiece, which controls a steerable tip (distal end).
This control permits changes of angle of view and allows the distal end to be steered past obstructions.
(4) The image resolution of flexible endoscopes is, generally, lower than that of rigid endoscopes.
(5) Where access is difficult, it may be necessary to use guide tubes to enable the endoscope to be directed
to the inspection area. Details of guide tube requirements would be stated in the specific visual
inspection Task.
(6) Adaptors are also available to enable the image of the inspection area to be recorded on photographic
film, on video, or to be viewed with a CCTV system.
Page 3
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
D. Black Light
WARNING : DO NOT OPERATE BLACK LIGHT IF THERE ARE FLAMMABLE FUMES IN THE WORK
AREA. DO NOT TOUCH THE HOUSING OR FILTERS OF BLACK LIGHT SOURCES WHEN
THEY ARE IN OPERATION. DO NOT OPERATE BLACK LIGHT SOURCES WITHOUT
FILTERS OR WITH FILTERS THAT HAVE CRACKS OR ARE NOT CORRECTLY IN-STALLED.
DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE LIGHT SOURCE. DO NOT USE PHOTOCHROMATIC OR
PERMANENTLY DARKENED SPECTACLES WHEN YOU USE BLACK LIGHT SOURCES. DO
NOT LET BLACK LIGHT TOUCH YOUR SKIN FOR LONG PERIODS. BEFORE YOU DO THE
INSPECTION WITH BLACK LIGHT, LET YOUR VISION FULLY ADAPT TO THE LIGHTING
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES. YOU MUST USE SPECIAL LIGHT CONDUCTORS WHEN
YOU USE ENDOSCOPES TOGETHER WITH BLACK LIGHT. YOU MUST DO A CHECK OF
THE OUTPUT OF THE BLACK LIGHT SOURCE AT REGULAR INTERVALS. THIS IS TO
MAKE SURE THAT THE OUTPUT DOES NOT BECOME LESS THAN THE APPROVED
LIMIT.
WARNING : DO NOT OPERATE A BLACK LIGHT SOURCE IF IT DOES NOT HAVE A FILTER OR THE
FILTER DOES NOT HAVE THE CORRECT FIT OR THE FILTER HAS A CRACK.
ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION THAT IS NOT FILTERED CAN CAUSE INJURY TO YOUR EYES
AND SKIN.
WARNING : PUT ON PROTECTIVE GLOVES BEFORE YOU TOUCH THE HOUSING OR FILTER OF A
BLACK LIGHT SOURCE WHEN IT IS ENERGIZED OR HOT. THESE COMPONENTS BECOME
VERY HOT AND CAN CAUSE BURNS.
(1) That portion of the ultraviolet light spectrum which lies between 320 to 400 nanometers in wavelength
is called black light.
(2) Petroleum-based products and certain other materials fluoresce under black light so it can be used for:
(a) Magnetic particle inspection procedures.
(b) Penetrant inspection procedures.
(c) Visual detection of leaks (fuel and oil).
(d) Visual detection of contaminants (soil, solder flux, lint).
NOTE : Glassfibers absorb ultraviolet light to a significant extent. Special light conductors (fluid
conductors) must be used when endoscopes are used in conjunction with ultraviolet light.
(3) Although black light is not dangerous, certain precautions are necessary when using the high-pressure
mercury lamps which usually provide the black light source.
(a) The filter on these lamps must always be maintained in good condition.
(b) Do not use the lamp if the filter is cracked or missing.
(c) Do not look directly at the Light source.
(d) Avoid prolonged exposure on skin tissue.
(e) Do not wear photo-chromatic spectacles when doing inspections which involve the use of black
light sources.
(4) The output value of black light sources must be checked at regular intervals to ensure that it has not
fallen below the approved limit.
Page 4
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
EYE−PIECE
VIEWING LENS
CABLE TO LIGHT SOURCE

EXAMPLES OF ANGLES OF VIEW
DIRECT
RIGID TUBE CONTAINING

INTERMEDIATE LENS SYSTEM
AND LIGHT GUIDE
WORKING REAR OBLIQUE
LENGTH
(mm)
RIGHT ANGLE
LIGHT EMISSION
OBJECT LENS
DIAMETER (mm) FORE OBLIQUE
L_NT_519000_1_0010101_01_00
Figure 51-90-00-991-001-A SHEET 01 - Rigid Page 5

Endoscope 51-90-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79
@A318/A319/A320/A321
** On A/C ALL
DISTAL END
DISTAL END
CONTROL KNOB
LIGHT SOURCE CABLE
EYEPIECE
LIGHT SOURCE BOX
L_NT_519000_1_0020101_01_00
Figure 51-90-00-991-002-A SHEET 01 - Flexible Page 6

Endoscope 51-90-00-PB1 Revision date: Feb 01/09
Revision n˚: 79

Chapter 51

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 51

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 51

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the nondestructive testing methods mentioned in the document?

What are some of the nondestructive testing methods mentioned in the document?

What are some of the safety precautions mentioned for using black lights?

What are some of the safety precautions mentioned for using black lights?

@A318/A319/A320/A321

NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL

CHAPTER 51 - STANDARDS PRACTICES AND STRUCTURES

51-10-00 COATING THICKNESS MEASUREMENT - GENERAL

51-20-00 X-RAY RADIOGRAPHY - GENERAL

51-21-00 X-RAY EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-40-00 ULTRASONIC TESTING - GENERAL

51-41-00 ULTRASONIC - INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-42-00 ULTRASONIC - SEARCH UNIT SPECIFICATION

51-43-00 ULTRASONIC - CALIBRATION/REFERENCE BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS

51-50-00 RESONANCE FREQUENCY - GENERAL

51-60-00 EDDY CURRENT TESTING - GENERAL

51-61-00 EDDY CURRENT - INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-62-00 EDDY CURRENT - PROBE SPECIFICATION

51-63-00 EDDY CURRENT - CALIBRATION/ REFERENCE BLOCK SPECIFICATIONS

51-70-00 MAGNETIC PARTICLE - GENERAL

51-71-00 MAGNETIC PARTICLE - EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

51-80-00 LIQUID PENETRANT TESTING - GENERAL

51-81-00 LIQUID PENETRANT - SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

51-90-00 VISUAL TESTING - GENERAL

CHAPTER 51 - STANDARDS PRACTICES AND STRUCTURES

CHAPTER 51 R Feb 01/09

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10 R Feb 01/09

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-01 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-02 Nov 01/08

51-10-03 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-04 Nov 01/08

51-10-06 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-07 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-08 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-09 Nov 01/08

51-10-10 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-11 Nov 01/08

51-10-12 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-13 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-15 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-18 Nov 01/08

51-10-19 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-20 Nov 01/08

51-10-21 Nov 01/08

REFERENCE CHG CODE REVISION DATE

51-10-24 N Feb 01/09